



^»^», NMHHH ■ 1IMMIII 










LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 

P — §m*W 1**- 

Shelf .- : JHlS 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



MAR 7 1835 



^ 



^T 6 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1885, by 

E. L. DOHONEY, 
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



DEDICATION. 



To all honest investigators, and independent thinkers; to those 
who have no respect for orthodoxy in Church or State, which is 
not based on Truth and Right; to those who have no regard for 
hoary precedents, and ancient errors ; to all who, without fear of 
sect or party, are willing to accept Truth wherever found; and 
especially to those who in the spirit of the Apostle Paul, are willing 
to "Prove all things; and hold fast that which is good," these 
pages are respectfully and earnestly dedicated by the 

Author. 

Paris, Texas, December 28, 1881. 



PREFACE. 



t FULLY recognize the truth of Solomon's statement that 
"of making many books there is no end; and much 
study is a weariness of the flesh." Yet I have written a 
book without any reference to the labor and expense inci- 
dent to its preparation and publication. Whether the work 
shall be a success or a failure, ha3 not been considered. No 
calculation has been made of achieving literary distinction, 
or of realizing pecuniary profit from the venture. The 
reasons that have controlled me are : — 

1st. A great love of the subject and a strong desire which 
long ago ripened into a fixed purpose to write a book 
on Man. 

2d. The writing of the work necessitated a thorough 
study of the fundamental laws underlying Human Nature ; 
and that satisfactory answers be made to the momentous 
inquiries, Whence came I? What am I? And whither am I 
tending? As a responsible and progressive human being I 
have ever felt the profoundest interest in these great questions, 
and long have felt a desire to make a survey of Human Nature, 
taking the Bible as the beginning corner , and thence running 

(5) 



PREFACE. 



in accordance with God's laws, natural and revealed, to estab- 
lish the field notes of Man's being. And having established 
his premises, to trace his title back link by link to the great 
Sovereign of the universe. I desire, if possible, to deter- 
mine my own status in the universe, and to have a definite 
faith as to my Origin, Nature, and Destiny, so that I may 
arrive at correct conclusions in reference to all the duties of 
life, and the better prepare myself for that progressive 
development in the spirit world to which we are so rapidly 
tending. 

3d. I thought it proper and right to leave the result of 
my investigations, the conclusions arrived at, and the rea- 
sons therefor, in such durable form that my family friends 
and such of my fellow-men as felt disposed, might avail 
themselves of the use thereof. In the preparation of the 
work I have proceeded from the standpoint of the philos- 
opher and aimed to accept truth, and reject error, no matter 
where found. When opinions are given, the facts and argu- 
ments upon which they rest are also given. 

My attention has been given almost exclusively to the 
matter, and not to the manner; to the logic, and not the 
rhetoric of the work ; and the reader need not be informed 
of its many literary defects. The only effort has been to 
make the book systematic and orderly in its several parts ; 
to state its propositions and points clearly ; and, as far as 
possible, impress them on the mind of the reader. My 
experience as a teacher, lawyer, speaker, and writer, has 
taught me that in order to fix propositions and arguments in 



PREFACE. 7 

the minds of hearers and readers, it is necessary to deal 
much in review and repetition. It will accordingly be found 
that the same ideas, and sometimes the same language, is 
repeated in two or more of the chapters, and sometimes even 
in the same chapter. I have sought to be definite, pointed, 
and impressive, at the expense of literary excellence and 
rhetorical finish, because the object of the work is to dis- 
cover and impress truths and not to acquire literary repu- 
tation. In the quest for truth, I have drawn largely on 
other authors, as the copious extracts contained in the book 
will show. Wherever important truths and facts were found 
bearing directly on the subject under consideration, I have 
not hesitated to quote liberally. And although there are 
some positions and opinions stated in the book that are 
peculiarly my own (at least I have not seen them elsewhere), 
yet by far the greater part of the views advanced can be 
found in authors who have preceded me. Among many 
writers consulted, I desire to express especial obligation to 
Alex. Campbell, Wilf ord Hall, Rev. Mr. Baldwin, Dr. J. R. 
Buchanan, Dr. W. C. Hurley, Prof. O. S. Fowler, S. R. 
Wells, A. J. Davis, Robert Dale Owen, Prof. A. Winchell, 
and Drs. A. J. Bellows and R. T. Trail. 

The book is only a brief outline of the great subject of 
which it treats. It does not profess to be elaborate on any 
part of the ground. Covering so wide a field, it could only 
suggest the main objective points of the subject, leaving the 
reader to study the details in other works if he sees fit. I 
now " cast my bread upon the waters," with the hope that 



8 PREFACE. 

sooner or later, some fellow-being, hungry for the great 
truths of Human Nature, will find it and in some sense 
be benefited by even so plain and simple a food as is herein 
prepared. 

And as we pass onward and upward in the glorious path- 
way of duty and progress — if a single fellow-spirit shall 
either in time or eternity express gratification for informa- 
tion or benefit received from reading these pages, I shall feel 
amply repaid for the labor and expense of writing and pub- 
lishing the work. 

E. L. Dohonet. 

Paris, Texas, December, 28, 1884. 



CONTENTS. 



PAET I. 

THE ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT OF MAN. 



CHAPTEE I. 

INTRODUCTION, 

The Origin of Man — Chance — Spontaneous Generation — 
Evolution — Transmutation of Species — Darwin's Theory Com- 
batted — Creation or Development of Distinct Types or Species 
of Men — This View Sustained by the Laws of Nature — Revela- 
tion and History .... 15 

CHAPTER II.. 

THE PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OP THE EARTH. 

Nature of Matter and its Original Condition — Impregnated by 
Spirit — The Universe a Great Sea of Fire-mist — Formation of 
Suns — System and Planets — Our Earth from the Sun; its Grad- 
ual Cooling and the Development of the Mineral, Vegetable, and 
Animal Kingdoms 38 

CHAPTER III. 

THE SEVERAL TYPES OP MAN. 

The Black Races, Brown Races, and White Races — Winchell's 
Table of Races — Each Type or Species Created or Developed 
from the Mineral, Vegetable, and Animal Kingdoms, in accord- 
ance with fixed Laws — No such things as Miracles, as generally 

understood 52 

(9) 



10 CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 

The Conditions under which Noah began to Propagate the 
Adamic Stock anew on the Earth — The Division of the Earth 
among his Sons, Shem, Ham, andjapheth — Leading Outlines of 
the History and principal Characteristics of the Shemites, Ham- 
ites, and Japhethites — All the History-making Nations of Earth 
Descended from Noah's Sons — None of the Inferior Types of 
Men found among Them C8 

CHAPTER V. 

THE PRE-ADAMITES, OR REVELATION AND SCIENTISTS RECONCILED. 

Many Pacts Cited from Winchell and Quatrefages, Showing 
that Men Lived on the Earth Thousands of Years Prior to the 
Advent of Adam — These were the Inferior Types, such as the 
Negroes and Mongolians, whose Creation is Referred to in the 
First Chapter of Genesis, and who were on the Earth Thous- 
ands of Years before Adam. 84 



PAKT II. 

THE NATURE AND POWERS OF MAN. 



CHAPTER I. 

MAN IS THREEFOLD, BODY, SOUL, AND SPIRIT. 

This View sustained by both Science and Revelation — The Body 
at Physical Death returns to Matter in General — The Spirit 
goes to the Spirit World and Takes with it the Soul as its Spirit- 



CONTENTS. 11 

ual Body — The Soul, the Spiritual Body Eef erred to by Paul in 
Corinthians — In the Case of the Righteous it attains to Eternal 
Life, at the First Resurrection at the Second Coming of Christ, 
and in Case of the Wicked Remains in the Spirit World Until the 
Judgment 115 

CHAPTER II. 

THE BODY AND THE TEMPERAMENTS. 

Temperaments based on the Three Divisions of the Body, (1) the 
Framework; (2) Vital Apparatus ; and (3) the Brain and Nerves — 
Dr. W. C. Hurley's System — Fowler and Wells' Division into 
Motive, Vital, and Nervous — The Physical, Vital, and Spiritual 
Suggested as a Better Nomenclature — The Temperaments De- 
nned, and Examples of Distinguished Men Given ..... 135 

CHAPTER III. 

FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 

The Chemical Constituents of the Body; its constant waste, 
and the Necessity of Food to supply Vitality — Nature and 
Classification of Food — Dr. Bellow's Table — Brain Food, Mus- 
cle Food, and Heating Food, Defined and Described — How to 
Restore the unbalanced Temperaments by the Proper Use of 
Food — Distinction between Food and Poison — Quotation from 
Dr. Trail . 147 

CHAPTER IV. 

THE MIND RHRENOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED. 

Mind can only be Considered by its Manifestations and its Instru- 
ment — The Brain its Instrument, and the Organs thereof Repre- 
sent Other Faculties of the Mind — Gallian System as Maintained 
by Fowler and Wells — Division into Groups and Regions by Dr. J. 
R. Buchanan — Brain Considered by Regions, and the Balancing of 
the Regions of Animality, Violence , and Relaxation by those of 
the Intellect — Goodness and Power Shown — Also the Impor- 
tance of the Animal Organs when Properly Controlled . . 171 



12 CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER V. 

THE MIND'S RELATION TO AND CONTROL OF THE BODY. 

Cerebral Physiology — Physiogonomy — Character in Voice, 
Movements, Handwriting, etc. — Mind's Control of Disease — 
Magnetic Treatment and use 185 

CHAPTER VI. 

THE MIND'S CONTROL OVER OTHER MINDS AND BODIES. 

Animal Magnetism — Mesmerism — Mind Reading — Mental 
Telegraphy — Living Apparitions, etc. — Cases Cited . . . 206 

CHAPTER VII. 

SPIRITISM. 

The Power and Influence of Disembodied Spirits over the 
Minds and Bodies of Men — Cases cited from the Bible of the 
different Kinds of Spirits who have Appeared to Man — Many 
Remarkable Cases Cited from History, and Conclusions and De- 
ductions drawn 20G 

CHAPTER VIII. 

man's relation to the spirit world. 

Clairvoyance, Clairaudience — Dreams, Visions, etc. — Experi- 
ence of A. J. Davis and Swedenborg Cited — Spirit World De- 
scribed — Clairvoyant Aid in Removing Disease — Millennium, 
etc 233 



CONTENTS. 13 

PART III. 

MAN'S DUTY AND DESTINY. 



CHAPTER I. 

man's duty to his creator. 

Dependent on God, and subject to the Laws of his Being, 
Physical and Mental — The Punishment for Violated Physical 
Law ends with Physical Death — The Violation of the Laws of 
the Spirit and Soul, are punished both here, and in the 
Spirit World, unless the penalties are remitted — The Gospel 
Plan with the condition of pardon, both to the Sinner and the 
Believer 305 

CHAPTER II. 

man's duty to himself and family. 

His Duty to Himself to Obey the Laws of his Being, Physical and 
Mental — His Duty to his Family — Marriage and Divorce dis- 
cussed — Importance of the Former and proper blending of the 
Temperaments — Importance of properly begetting, bearing, 
and raising Children — Their Support and Education — Educa- 
tion Denned and Explained — Prevailing Systems Criticised. 321 

CHAPTER III. 

man's duty to the state. 

Duties and Rights Reciprocal — All men and Women Equal in 
Natural and Political Rights — Right of Suffrage Discussed — 
Importance of the Ballot, and of Moral Character of Officers — 
Honesty, Competency, and Sobriety — The Principle of Taxation 
Discussed — The Liquor Traffic, The Laws of Labor, Com- 
merce, and Money Considered,Necessity for Public Education. 331 



14 CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER IV. 

THE DESTINY OF MAN. 

The Body returns to Dust, never to be Resurrected — The 
Spirit with the Soul, its Spirit Body, goes to the Spirit 
World, and there remains until the respective Resurrections — 
The Souls of the Righteous attain Eternal Life at the First 
Resurrection at the Second Coming of Christ — The Souls of the 
Wicked are Resurrected at the Judgment and are destroyed in 
the Lake of Fire Called the Second Death, or Hell — Their Spir- 
its left in outer darkness • 343 

CHAPTER V. 

CONCLUSION. 

Soul-Sleeping — Heaven and Hell — The Intermediate State — 
The Second Coming of Christ — The Two Resurrections — Eter- 
nal Punishment — Is the Intermediate State Probationary? — 
Importance of Accepting Christ While in the Flesh — The Great 
Duty of Man 859 



PART L 

THE ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT OF MAN. 



CHAPTER I. 

INTRODUCTION. 

|HE most important subject to which the mind can be 
directed, is Man. More than two thousand years ago, 
a Greek philosopher expressed this idea, in the terse 
language, "Man know thyself." And the same great 
thought has been embodied in verse by the poet, Pope, in 
that grand couplet : — 

" Then know thyself, presume not God to scan 
The proper study for mankind is Man." 

The Origin of Man, may be considered from the stand- 
point of Reason ; but can be clearly solved, only by the aid 
of Revelation. The laws of Nature have been impressed 
upon the earth and its inhabitants for their government. It 
is our duty to study these laws, and conform to them, to the 
extent of our finite ability. Over this wide domain Revela- 
tion has shed but little light. Man must help himself to the 
limit of his own powers; and when his ability ends, God's 
aid begins. Revelation is to Reason what the telescope is 
to the natural eye. It supplies to Man knowledge necessary 
to his well being, which by his natural powers he is unable to 
acquire. 

(15) 



16 MAN. 

In the consideration of the subject of Man, I shall pursue 
the inquiry from the standpoint of Reason, as far as the 
mind's eye can reach ; and shall then appeal to Revelation 
for additional light. Assuming first the attitude of the 
logician I proceed to answer the inquiry, What was the ori- 
gin of Man? To say that he originated himself; or came 
by chance ; or is the product of some superior power, is to 
logically cover the entire ground. If Man originated him- 
self, why is he born utterly helpless and almost unconscious ; 
unable to exist an hour, without the attention and care of 
others? And why does he not, by the same power, with 
which he originated himself, continue the present state of 
existence? We know by observation that many persons 
submit to physical death very unwillingly. If any man was 
ever sufficiently vain and impious to imagine he created him- 
self, the pitiable delusion was forever dispelled in the utter 
helplessness of the dying moment. Nor is the creation of 
Man by himself any more incredible than that foolish idea 
of the Atheist, — that he came by chance. Such a prepos- 
terous proposition, is disputed by the very nature and 
organism of Man. The laws of his being, physical," intel- 
lectual, social, moral, and spiritual, all show perfect order, 
complete system and wise design ; and point to a superior 
Architect of infinite wisdom, power, and goodness. Man 
is, indeed, " a harp of a thousand strings," and all originally 
attuned, in perfect unison with Nature's great laws. Well 
has an inspired writer said, "Man is fearfully and wonder- 
fully made." It has been well said that we might as well 
suppose that a watch of the most skillfully wrought work- 
manship, with its complete system of wheels, cogs, springs, 
and other parts, had been evolved from gross matter and by 
mere chance thrown together in perfect adjustment, and set 
running so as to keep correct time, as to suppose that an 



INTRODUCTION. 1 7 

organized human being, endowed with life, springs into 
existence by chance. Man, with his complete system of 
bones, held together by the ligaments, muscles and tendons ; 
enclosing the great vital machinery of the lungs, heart, 
arteries, and veins, filled with blood supplying life to every 
part of the system; and this supplied by the alimentary 
canal, consisting of the stomach and other organs, by which 
food is masticated, digested, and asssimilated, into life ; and 
all controlled by the wondrous brain and nervous system, 
which extends to every part of the body, and not only con- 
trols the muscles and voluntary action, but also the invol- 
untary vital processes of the heart and lungs, upon which 
life depends every moment of its existence ; this wonderful 
living organism points clearly and conclusively to an All- 
wise Architect and an Omnipotent Creator and Preserver. 
But let us see if the more specific proposition of l ' sponta- 
neous generation," as maintained by the great German phi- 
losopher, Haeckel, is any more probable than the general idea 
of chance. Prof. Haeckel, who stands at the head of the 
atheistic school of philosophy, and Prof. Darwin, the father 
of evolution, both maintain that Man has been evolved from 
the lower animals. That the immediate progenitor of Man, 
is an extinct species, a missing link between man and the 
gorilla ; that the latter was probably from the monkey ; the 
monkey from the next highest order of animal life, and so 
on down to the lowest form of animal existence called by 
Prof. Haeckel the Moner or Moneron. This primordial 
form of animal life, is said by Haeckel to consist of a single, 
simple element of matter, a mere animated mass of albumen, 
without organization or parts. And he insists that this low- 
est form of animal life comes into existence by "spontane- 
ous generation." Prof. Darwin, however, parts companj* 
here, with this younger and more advanced evolutionist, and 

2 



18 MAN. 

surrenders in the last ditch to the creative fiat. Darwin 
holds that " the powers of life were originally breathed by 
the Creator into a few forms or into one." In order that 
it may be seen that I have not misrepresented these distin- 
guished evolutionists I will give quotations from their respect- 
ive works, upon the point at issue. 

In Darwin's Origin of Species, page 420, can be found 
the following extract, viz. : " There is a grandeur in this 
view of life, with its several powers, having been originally 
breathed by the Creator into a few forms, or into one." 
While in HaeckePs history of Creation, volume 1, page 75, 
can be found the following language, viz. : " The funda- 
mental idea, which must necessarily be at the bottom of all 
natural theories of development, is that of a gradual devel- 
opment of all organisms, out of a single or out of a very few 
quite simple, quite imperfect original beings which came 
into existence, not by supernatural creation, but by sponta- 
neous generation, or archigony, out of inorganic matter.' ' 
Upon this issue between Darwin and Haeckel, it appears that 
nature and truth are on Darwin's side. That animal life 
could spring from inorganic matter by spontaneous genera- 
tion is an idea which could only have a lodgment in the mind 
of a German naturalist. 

The argument, already submitted against the general doc- 
trine of chance, applies with equal force to spontaneous 
generation from inorganic matter. Unorganized matter is 
dead, if the term death is used in opposition to organized 
life. We may as well talk of a stone lifting itself from the 
earth and poising in the air; or of a lifeless and decom- 
posing corpse, of its own force, returning from the grave, as 
to say that inorganic matter, can of its own inherent powers, 
spontaneously burst into animal life. The universe and all 
that it contains when resolved back to its primal elements, 



INTRODUCTION. 19 

consists of but two general parts, viz. : Spirit, which is life, 
and matter, which is dead until organized and animated by 
spirit in some of its many forms or modifications acting 
through some one or more of its many mediums. We are 
informed in the very beginning of Revelation that " God 
created the heavens and the earth; " that is matter gener- 
ally. But that the " earth was without form and void; ,, 
that is the matter was unorganized and without life either 
mineral, vegetable, or animal. And it was not until " the 
spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters," that the 
process of organic creation began. Then follows the beau- 
tiful account of the creation of the earth with its mineral, 
vegetable and animal kingdoms, beginning with organized 
matter and proceeding in progressive order, from the lower 
to the higher forms of life until the climax was reached in 
the creation of man. And even when the body of Adam 
was made of refined and organized matter, it had no animal 
life until " God breathed into his nostrils the breath of life," 
when " he became a living soul." That is when a spark of 
God's spirit was imparted to the organized matter of Adam's 
body, it " became a living soul," or in other words, human 
life began. The history of creation, both natural and 
revealed, clearly shows that there is no original life in the 
mineral, vegetable and animal kingdoms of earth outside of 
the spirit of God. That all forms of life existing on earth 
are delegated; originally imparted by God, through the 
operation of His spirit. But while Mr. Darwin frankly 
admits that inorganic matter can have no life, unless it is 
originally imparted by the Creator ; when once he gets his 
primordial forms endued with power from on high, he takes 
his departure on the line of evolution, which he follows into 
the deep dark waters of chance until he is overwhelmed by 
the billows of improbability. He holds that from the primor- 



20 MAN. 

dial form, called the Moneron, all the higher forms of life 
have been developed by evolution. The Moneron, you will 
remember, is simply an animated mass of albumen without 
sex, organization, or parts of any kind, which can only pro- 
pagate itself by self-division. Let us ask Mr. Darwin how 
he spans the wide chasm between the Moneron and the 
organized life of the fish ? How he bridges the great gulf 
between fishes and birds ; or between the latter and animals, 
to say nothing of man? 

We are answered that a passage has been effected over 
these great chasms in animal life, by a mysterious process 
called Transmutation of Species ; and that this transmutation 
has been effected by "Natural Selection" and " The Sur- 
vival of the Fittest." But, Mr. Darwin, please explain how 
this principle of Natural Selection, can inhere in any form of 
animal life, sufficiently to vary the species. He answers it 
is only possible after considerable variation or modification 
of the species, by hereditary descent. I here make the 
reply of Wilford Hall, " There can be no possible variation 
in the descent from the Moneron, his primordial form ; 
because it has neither organization, sex, or parts, and 
only propagates itself by self-division. The only propaga- 
tion possible by this creature, is another individual exactly 
similar, because a part of the same simple body." So the 
law of hereditary descent affords Mr. Darwin no relief; 
and we leave him forever chained to his own base, utterly 
unable by evolution to cross the first chasm in animal 
life. 

Darwin's admission, that no variation of species is 
possible, except by and through the laws of hereditary 
descent is fatal to his theory. Outside of mathematics 
there is no natural law more certain and invariable in its 
cause and effect, than that of hereditary descent. I refer to 



INTRODUCTION. 21 

that principle in nature, by which, under ordinary circum- 
stances and in normal conditions, like always begets like. 
By this, however, I do not mean that every individual is 
exactly like its parent in both kind and degree. The law of 
individual existence and personal identity stands even above 
that of hereditary descent ; and here is the margin for the 
progress and improvement of the human race, and of all the 
animal species. So far as the essential nature of the type 
jr species is concerned, the stock remains the same from 
generation to generation. The difference between individ- 
uals of the same type or species being one of degree and 
capacity, and not of nature. The difference in degree and 
capacity between individuals of the same species, acting 
under different circumstances, and further modified by Mr. 
Darwin's law of Natural Selection, finally culminates in dis- 
tinct varieties of the same type or species ; but never in the 
transmutation or complete change of the species. For 
instance, take the horse species, and by careful breeding and 
rearing, new and improved varieties can be and have been 
produced. But never has a case been reported of the horse 
species being transmutated into that of the cow, or that of 
the monkey, or that of man. Neither history nor geology 
records any such case. This much of evolution we concede 
to be true ; that when the progenitors, male or female, of a 
distinct type or species, have been created that it will propa- 
gate and perpetuate itself by ordinary generation, under 
operation of the sexual laws of its being. That the indi- 
viduals produced will differ so much in degree and capacity 
that modified by time, place, circumstances, and natural 
selection, they will in turn produce new and improved varie- 
ties. This much of Evolution is true, and is a glorious doc- 
trine ; because it not only allows the indefinite improvement 
of vegetables and animals ; but also opens up a grand high- 



22 MAN. 

way for the progressive improvement of Man, to the very 
highest degree of his most superior type. 

In order to fully understand this subject, it will be neces- 
sary, in this connection, to refer very briefly to the classifica- 
tion of the animal kingdom, which has been adopted by such 
naturalists as Linnaeus and Cuvier. They divide it into 
divisions, classes, orders, genera, species, and varieties. 
Beginning with the lowest division, we have (1) radiata, (2) 
molusca, (3) articula, embracing worms and insects, and (4) 
the vertebrata, or such animals as have spinal columns ; and 
which last division is divided into four classes, (1) fishes, 
(2) reptiles, (3) birds, and (4) mamalia; at the head of 
which last class stands the genus homo or human race. Ac- 
cording to this system each genus is divided into species, 
and species into varieties. A species is defined as embrac- 
ing all individuals of the same nature and essential attri- 
butes. All, more or less similar, individuals descending from 
a single ancestral pair. Man, like every other genus, is 
divided into several species ; or to use a better term as sug- 
gested by Prof. Agassiz, the human race is properly divided 
into distinct types; such as the Negro, the Mongolian, and 
the so-called Caucasian, properly the Mediterranean, or as I 
term it, the Noachian race. Now, the point I make against 
Darwin is that while the species or type may be sufficiently 
varied by time, place, circumstance, and natural selection 
to produce new varieties of the same species, it never can 
be so varied as to cross the wide chasm between separate and 
distinct species or types, and thereby change a lower into a 
higher form of life. To illustrate : The feline genus, em- 
braces several species, such as the cat, panther, tiger, and 
lion. The canine genus embraces such species as the dog, 
wolf, fox, and jackal. The equine genus embraces such 
species as the horse, ass, and zebra. Now, take a species, 



INTRODUCTION. -23 

the horse, for instance, and by careful breeding, you can 
produce new and improved varieties. And the same is true 
of the dog or any other type or speices. But you never can 
produce a fox from the dog family, or a zebra from a horse, 
or a lion from a cat, or a white man from the negro type ; 
because there is a gulf wider than that which separated Dives 
from Lazarus, between each separate and distinct type or 
species and every other such type or species. It is true that 
some of these types and species will cross, as the horse and 
ass, producing the mule ; the white man and negro, producing 
the mulatto ; but it has not yet been demonstrated that the 
progeny resulting from the cross is either permanent or 
fertile. And no ordinary generation, natural selection, or 
variation of species, will ever cross one of these gulfs. Hence 
I arrive at the conclusion again, that Darwin's theory of 
transmutation of species, has no foundation in Nature. 
We have now arrived at the general conclusion, that Man did 
not originate himself ; nor come by chance ; nor by spon- 
taneous generation; nor has he been evolved from the 
lower animals. Therefore, it inevitably follows that he is 
the product of some power superior to himself. That power 
I hold to be the Supreme Architect of the Universe, with its 
perfect order and complete and endless system. So far as 
this earth and its systems are concerned, we see the most 
perfect order and progressive development of the Divine plan, 
proceeding from the lower to the higher forms of life, until 
the climax was reached in the creation of Man. No form or 
type of life was evolved from any other form or type ; but 
the original progenitors of each species or type were created 
in accordance with fixed laws, and then the stock propagated 
by ordinary generation. How these several creations of 
distinct types and species were effected through the opera- 
tion of the laws of Nature, will be discussed in another part 



24 • MAN. 

of the work. It implies the agency of a great first cause, 
whose grand effects are seen throughout the Universe. In 
the beautiful language of the psalmist, "The heavens declare 
the glory of God, and the firmament showeth his handi- 
work." So far as they pertain to this earth, the grandest 
and noblest of these effects is Man. 

But the atheist is ready to say that the claim that each 
species was created is begging the question, because an 
assumption of miraculous power, a thing which he maintains 
has no existence, since it conflicts with the laws of Nature. 
In reply, I say that the maker of any system of laws is 
always above the laws themselves with power to suspend or 
repeal them. Whether God has ever suspended or repealed 
any of his laws, need not now be discussed ; that he possesses 
the power to do so is beyond question. But, I am willing to 
admit that God generally, if not universally, acts in accord- 
ance with his laws and not independently of them. And I 
incline to the opinion that the so-called miracles are simply 
exhibitions of divine power, in accordance with laws that 
are above the finite comprehension of man. We can have 
but little comprehension of the infinite wisdom, power and 
goodness of God. 

When we turn to Revelation we find the same progressive 
order in creation that we have already indicated. After 
chaotic matter had been organized, and the dry land made 
to appear, by the moving of God's spirit on the waters, God 
first made the grass to grow, then the herbs, and afterward 
the fruit trees. Then proceeding to the animal kingdom, 
made first the fishes, then the fowls of the air, and after- 
ward the beasts of the field, closing his glorious work with 
the creation of man. 

If the position already taken as to the creation of types 
and species be correct, it follows that each distinct type of 



INTRODUCTION. 25 

man was the subject of a separate creation ; either directly 
or indirectly through operations of the laws of Nature, 
which laws are probably beyond finite comprehension. In 
the progressive order of God's plan of creation, the lowest 
type of man would naturally follow, next after the highest 
type of the lower animals had been reached in the person of 
the gorilla or ourang-outang. Beginning with the lowest 
form of human life the creative plan proceeded in progressive 
order from lower to higher types through the Australian, 
the Papuan, the Negro and the Mongolian, until the highest 
type was reached in the person of Adam. He was created 
the governor of the earth, and the federal head and repre- 
sentative of all the types and families of men ; and was placed 
in an earthly paradise and allowed perpetual access to the 
Tree of Life, upon condition of obedience to the law that 
God imposed on him as a test of his loyalty. 

In support of this position I submit three arguments: 
First, that based on the law of hereditary descent already 
presented against Darwin's theory of evolution. Those who 
maintain that all the types of men are descended from 
Adam, are forced to cross the great chasm lying between the 
several species and types of the animal kingdom upon Dar- 
win's mythical bridge of transmutation of species, or sur- 
render their position. You can no more derive a white man 
from the negro type by the laws of hereditary descent, than 
you can a dog from the jackal, or a cat from the lion. And 
it will not do to appeal to miracles in order to escape this 
dilemma, for when you do that, you admit the creative 
power, wnich is exactly what we claim was exercised in the 
formation of each species or type throughout the animal 
kingdom. 

Our second argument is based on Revelation. A critical 
examination of the Bible history of creation will show two 



26 MAN. 

distinct creations of man ; one recorded in the first and the 
other in the second chapter of Genesis. I hold that the 
creation of the inferior types of men is given in the first 
chapter of Genesis along with the general account of the 
creation of the earth and its vegetable and animal kingdoms. 
While the creation of the Adamic type is reported by a dif- 
ferent author and at a later date as given in the second 
chapter of Genesis. That the first chapter of Genesis and 
the first three verses of the second chapter are by a different 
and much earlier writer, than the remainder of the second 
chapter, is evident from the difference in style of the two 
writers, from the difference in the manner of creation as re- 
ported by each, and especially from the fact that the first 
writer uses the word u God," while the second calls him the 
" Lord God." The later writer was evidently a Hebrew 
and gave an account of the Adamic stock, in order to fur- 
nish the Hebrew genealogy from Adam through Abraham, 
down to the times of Moses, while the earlier writer gave 
the general account of creation, prior to the advent of 
Adam. The author of Genesis was simply compiling and 
placed the two narratives in their natural order and proper 
connection. Let us for a moment compare these two crea- 
tions and the conditions imposed on the created as reported 
by the respective writers. The manner of the first creation 
and the laws given for the government of the created, are 
recorded in the twenty-sixth, twenty-seventh, twenty-eighth 
and twenty-ninth verses of the first chapter of Genesis and 
read as follows, viz. : — 

4 'And God said, Let us make man in our own image, after 
our likeness : and let them have dominion over the fish of 
the sea, and over the fowl of the air, and over the cattle, 
and over all the earth, and over every creeping thing that 
creepeth upon the earth. 



INTRODUCTION. 27 

" So God created man in his own image, in the image of 
God created he him ; male and female created he them. 
And God blessed them, and God said unto them, Be fruitful 
and multiply, and replenish the earth, and subdue it: and 
have dominion over the fish of the sea, and over the fowl of 
the air, and over every living thing that moves upon the 
earth. And God said, Behold, I have given you every herb 
bearing seed, which is upon the face of all the earth, and 
every tree, in the which is the fruit of a tree yielding seed ; 
to you it shall be for meat." 

The manner of the second creation and laws imposed on 
the created are recorded in the seventh, eighth, ninth, 
fifteenth, sixteenth, seventeenth, eighteenth, twenty-first, 
twenty-second, twenty-third, and twenty-fourth verses of the 
second chapter of Genesis, and read as follows, viz. : — 

4 'And the Lord God formed man of the dust of the ground 
and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life ; and man 
became a living soul. And the Lord God planted a garden 
eastward in Eden ; and there he put the man whom he had 
formed. And out of the ground made the Lord God to grow 
every tree that is pleasant to the sight, and good for food ; 
the tree of life also in the midst of the garden, and the tree 
of knowledge of good and evil. And the Lord God took the 
man, and put him into the garden of Eclen to dress it and to 
keep it. And the Lord God commanded the man, saying, 
Of every tree of the garden thou mayest freely eat ; but of 
the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, thou shalt not 
eat of it ; for in the day that thou eatest thereof thou shalt 
surely die. And the Lord God said, It is not good that man 
should be alone ; I will make him a helpmeet for him. And 
the Lord God caused a deep sleep to fall upon Adam, and 
he slept ; and he took one of his ribs and closed up his flesh 
instead thereof. And the rib, which the Lord God had 



28 MAN. 

taken from man, made he a woman, and brought her unto the 
man. And Adam said, this is now bone of my bones, and 
flesh of my flesh ; she shall be called woman, because she 
was taken out of man. Therefore shall a man leave his 
father and mother, and shall cleave unto his wife ; and they 
shall be one flesh." 

The following distinct differences in the two creations are 
at once apparent. The first was a general creation like that 
of the lower animals. The second, a specific creation of 
sufficient importance, for the manner and matter of the work 
to be given. The first was a creation of more than one per- 
son, and of both sexes ; the second of a single male upon 
whom was conferred great powers and special privileges. 
The first was commanded to multiply and replenish the 
earth. To the second no such commandment was given. 
The first received no charge of business or labor ; the second 
was required to dress and keep the garden of Eden. The 
first was given dominion over the lower animals ; the second 
was placed in charge of Paradise. The first was given the 
herbs and fruits of earth for subsistence ; the second was 
given the luscious fruits of Eden, and access to the Tree of 
Life. The first was left to the ordinary laws of sexual 
affinity, as other animals. To the second was finally given 
a female helpmeet, and the sacred institution of marriage. 
The first was left to associate with and have dominion over 
the lower animals. The second was accorded the compan- 
ionship of Jehovah himself as long as he obeyed the laws 
given him as a test of his loyalty. From the foregoing, and 
many other considerations which might be presented, it is 
evident that the creation reported in the first chapter of 
Genesis refers to the inferior types of men, who were, no 
doubt, on the earth long prior to Adam. 

That there were men on the earth, outside of Adam's 



< 



INTRODUCTION. 29 

family is evident by the fear expressed by the murderer, 
Cain, that " every one who findeth me, shall slay me." He 
certainly did not fear his father and mother and he had al- 
ready slain his brother, the only remaining member of the 
family we have any account of then existing. Nobody ever 
heard of a murderer having any fears of posterity. 
Whom then could Cain have so feared, if there were no men 
on earth outside the Adamic family? He was banished to 
the land of Nod, and soon had a wife and family. Where 
could he have found a wife, if there were no women in the 
land of Nod? He soon builded a city and named it for his 
son. How could a city be established without population ? 
There can be but little doubt, that Cain's wife was a Mon- 
golian woman and this city was occupied by Mongolian peo- 
ple. Eden is conceded to have been in Western Asia. The 
land of Nod, to which Cain was banished, is said to have been 
to the east of Eden. The name Nod is said to mean the 
land of wandering ; and no doubt referred to the regions of 
Central Asia, where the Mongol Tartars, had probably been 
leading their nomadic life for thousands of years before. 
The superior civilization of Cain, who was a tiller of the soil 
and an architect able to build a cit}', would naturally attract 
many of his wife's race to his city in quest of more of the 
comforts of life. 

Again we are informed in the sixth chapter of Genesis, that 
the immediate cause of the flood and the destruction of the 
Adamic race was its miscegenation with another type of men 
then on the earth. 

The ' * sons of God ' ' who took wives of the ' ' daughters of 
men," must necessarily refer to the natural sons of God, to 
be found among the inferior types of men already on the 
earth before the advent of the Adamic family. Adam's 
family were called men because the highest type of Man. 



30 MAN. 

The entire Adamic race, except the family of Noah, and all 
the mixed stock, was no doubt destroyed by the flood. The 
historian who records the tremendous events of the flood 
was no doubt a Hebrew ; and in conveying the idea that all 
men and animals not saved in Noah's Ark, were de- 
stroyed, simply meant that all the Adamic race, except 
Noah's family and all the domestic animals, specially pro- 
vided by God to Adam, were destroyed, excepting, of course 
the seed preserved by Noah in his Ark. And as there could 
have been no reason for destroying the inferior types of men, 
on other parts of the earth, who had not mixed with the 
Adamic race, there is no reason to suppose that the flood 
extended beyond that part of the world occupied by the 
Adamic population which would have left the inferior types 
still existing, as we find them in nearly every part of the 
earth, with many evidences of their occupancy for a period, 
extending much farther back into the past than the epoch 
of the Noachian deluge as usually computed by the orthodox 
world. The wonderful preservation of Noah and his family 
we believe to have been for the purpose of keeping on the 
earth a pure specimen of the highest type of man ; in order 
that the world might be populated, as it has been, by a 
great race of progressive and history-making nations. And 
the reason that Noah's family was selected is clearly given. 
" He was perfect in his generation ;" that is not mixed with 
the inferior types and consequently not degenerated and 
" become evil in every imagination of his heart " as the race 
generally is reported to have been. 

We now submit our third argument in favor of the crea- 
tion of the distinct types of men, based on data which the 
most orthodox believer in the unity of the race, can not dis- 
pute. 

Those who hold that all men are descended from Adam 



INTRODUCTION. 31 

through Noah necessarily insist that the flood was universal, 
and destroyed all men on the earth except Noah's family. 
According to this view, all types of men now found on the 
earth descended from the three sons of Noah. Now, if I am 
able to take the tenth chapter of Genesis, and show where 
all the sons and grandsons of Noah settled after their dis- 
persion, and what races and nations sprang from them and 
it should turn out that none of the inferior types of men are 
found among the descendants of Noah, then I have estab- 
lished my proposition from the standpoint of orthodoxy. 

The tenth chapter of Genesis which locates the sons and 
grandsons of Noah and the races and nations which sprang 
from them reads as follows, viz. : 

"Now these are the generations of the sons of Noah; 
Shem, Ham, and Japheth : and unto them were sons born 
after the flood. The sons of Japheth; Gomer, Magog, 
Madai, Javan, Tubal, Meshech and Tiras : and the sons of 
Gomer ; Ashkenas, Riphath and Togarmah : and the sons of 
Javan ; Elishah, Tarshish, Kittim and Dodanim. By these 
were the isles of the Gentiles. divided into their lands, every 
one after his tongue, after their families in their nations. 
The sons of Ham ; Cush, Mizraim, Phut and Canaan. The 
sons of Cush ; Sheba, Havilah, Sabtah, Raamah and Sabtecha. 
The sons of Raamah ; Sheba and Dedan. Cush begat Nim- 
rod : he began to be a mighty one in the earth. He was a 
mighty hunter before the Lord: wherefore it is said " even 
as Nimrod the mighty hunter before the Lord." The begin- 
ning of his kingdom was Babel, Erech, Accad and Calneh 
in the land of Shinar. Out of that land went forth Asshur 
and builded Nineveh and the city Rehoboth, and Calah, and 
Resen between Nineveh and Calah : the same is a great city. 
Mizraim begat Ludim, Anamim, Lehabim and Naphtuhim, 
Pathrusim, Casluhim (out of whom came Philistim) and 



32 MAN. 

Capthorim. Canaan begat Sidon his first born, and Heth, 
the Jebusite, the Amorite, the Girgasite, the Hivite, the 
Arkite, the Sinite, the Arvadite, the Zemarite, the Hama- 
thite : and afterward were the families of the Caanan- 
ites spread abroad. The border of the Caananites was 
from Sidon as thou comest to Gerar unto Gaza ; as thou 
goest unto Sodom and Gomorrah, Admah, Zeboim even unto 
Lasha. These are the sons of Ham after their families, 
after their tongues, in their countries and in their nations. 
Unto Shem also, the father of all the children of Eber, the 
brother of Japheth the elder, even to him were children 
born. The children of Shem ; Elam, Asshur, Arphaxad, Lud 
and Aram. The children of Aram ; Uz, Hul, Gether, and 
Mash. Arphaxad begat Salah, and Salah begat Eber. Unto 
Eber were born two sons : the name of one was Peleg, for in 
his days was the earth divided, and his brother's name was 
Joktan. Joktan begat Almodad, Sheleph, Hazarmaveth, 
Jerah, Hadoram, Uzal and Diklah, Obal, Abimael, Sheba, 
Ophir, Havilah and Jobab ; all these were the sons of Joktan 
and their dwelling was from Mesha, as thou goest unto Sephar, 
amount of the east. These are the sons of Shem, after their 
families, after their tongues, in their lands, after their nations. 
These are the families of the sons of Noah, after their gen- 
erations, in their nations, and by these were the nations di- 
vided in the earth after the flood." 

Here is what purports to be a full account of all " the 
families of the sons of Noah after their generations, in their 
nations." Let us see if any Negroes, Indians, Malays or 
Mongolians can be found among them. And as it used to 
be strenuously insisted that the negro was a Hamite we will 
take up the sons of Ham first and see if any negroes can be 
found among them. From the sixth verse of the foregoing 
chapter we learn that the four sons of Ham were Cush, 



INTRODUCTION. 33 

Mizraim, Phut, and Canaan. All historians, sacred and 
profane, agree that Mizraim was the founder of Egypt. 
And the Egyptians although a dark colored people, were 
nevertheless an intellectual race with regular features and 
the first people to attain excellence in the arts and sciences. 
From Egypt's store-house of learning and wisdom even classic 
Greece drew inspiration and imparted valuable lessons 
to the entire Japhetic world. The Egyptians had none of 
the features of the negro, as is clearly shown by mummies 
of both races, preserved side by side for over four thousand 
years. 

The negro type that far back was exactly as it is now. 

Most accounts agree that Phut settled to the west of Egypt, 
producing the Moors and other dark colored nations, which 
sprang up on the southern shores of the Mediterranean Sea. 
Hannibal, the great Carthaginian general, was a Hamite, 
being either of the same stock as the Moors, or descended 
from the Phoenecians, who were also Hamites. There were 
no negroes in this branch of Ham's family. Cush and his 
sons settled first in Arabia, but were finally driven out by 
the Shemites, when part of the race went to India and part 
to Africa, settling immediately south of Egypt in countries 
known in later times as Nubia and Abyssinia. 

This was a very populous and powerful branch of the 
Hamite family in the early history of Noah's descendants. 
It was Nimrod, one of the sons of Cush, who rebelled against 
the decree of God for the dispersion of the races and re- 
mained at Babylon, establishing a kingdom on Shemitic 
territory, where he tyrannized over the Shemites for a long 
time. At this time, the main bulk of the Cushites were in 
Arabia, but years afterward were expelled by the Shemites 
and went to India and Africa as already stated. There were 
no negroes among the Cushites. But it was on Canaan that 
3 



34 MAN. 

the curse of Noah was said to rest, and from whom it was 
claimed the negroes descended. 

Let us see if any negroes can be found among the Canaan- 
ites. The foregoing chapter gives their habitation as extend- 
ing from Sidon to Gaza. The same country afterward 
given to Abraham and finally occupied by his descendants, 
who under Joshua, conquered and destroyed the Canaanites 
and took their country. If there were any negroes among 
these people neither Abraham, Isaac, Jacob nor Joshua gives 
any account of them. 

The Phoenicians who occupied the shores of the Mediter- 
ranean, adjoining the land of the Canaanites, were a branch 
of the Caananite descendants, the earliest mariners of the 
world and the greatest commercial people of antiquity. 
There were no negroes among them. 

The descendants of Shem settled in Asia. The sons of 
Shem were Elam, the progenitor of the Persians ; Asshur, 
the founder of Assyria ; Arphaxad, the father of the Chal- 
deans and Hebrews ; Lud, from whom came the Lydians ; 
and Aram, the ancestor of the Syrians. All well known 
nations which attained a high degree of civilization in the 
early age of the world. Shem's was the priestly race ; from 
it have sprung all the systems of religion recognizing the one 
true and living God. It has never been charged that any of 
inferior types of men were descended from Shem. 

The Japhetic branch of Noah's fam ly, improperly called 
the Caucasian race, settled in northwest Asia and Europe. 
The races and nations to which it gave birth have been known 
since the dawn of history and were all white men. The sons 
of Japeth were Gomer, the father of the Germanic or Teutonic 
stock, embracing the ancient Scythians and all the branches 
of the German and Scandinavian families ; Magog, said 
by Baldwin to refer to the Russians ; Mesheck, to the Mus- 



INTRODUCTION. 35 

covites ; Madai, the father of the Medes ; Tubal, the father 
of Japhetan Tartars ; Tiras, who is believed to be the pro- 
genitor of the Thracians or Celts. While the four sons of 
Javan settled on the four peninsulas of the Mediterranean 
Sea — Asia Minor, Greece, Italy and Spain, giving rise to 
the Trojans, Grecians, Romans and Spaniards. These were 
the first great nations of the Japhetic stock which became 
prominent in history. It has never been claimed that any 
negroes descended from Japeth. 

I have now noticed the entire Bible account of the disper- 
sion of the descendants of Noah and their settlement upon 
the earth. I have shown where the sons and grandsons of 
Noah settled and what nations sprang from them, And have 
found no negroes, Indians, Malays, or Mongolians among 
them. Some one, however, is ready to ask, What about the 
Chinese? I can only answer that both sacred and profane 
history, as well as the laws of hereditary descent, clearly 
shew that they did not descend from Noah. And I give it as 
my opinion that they are the descendants of Cain by a Mon- 
golian wife. Many of the Mongolian features are common 
both to the Chinese and American Indians. Any close ob- 
server can see the favor and relationship. The superior 
civilization of the Chinese over the other branches of the 
Mongolian type is due, no doubt, to the knowledge imparted 
by Cain, who had learned agriculture and the other civilized 
arts from Adam. While the historic fact that Chinese civ- 
ilization has stood still from the earliest ages is due, no 
doubt, to the constitutional want of progress everywhere 
found in the Mongolian stock. This, of course, is only an 
opinion. 

The view I have presented of the creation and distribution 
of the inferior types of men before the advent of Adam is 
the only one, which will reconcile the discrepancies and con- 



36 MAN. 

flicts between the Bible and Geology. Profane history takes 
up the descendants of Noah, where they are left in the 
tenth chapter of Genesis and beginning with the Chal- 
deans, Assyrians, Egyptians, Phoenicians, Greeks, Romans, 
Celts, Germans, etc., shows that all the great history-mak- 
ing people and none others are from Noah. And that none 
of the inferior types of men can be traced to Noah ; while 
Geology exhibits indisputable evidence of the existence of 
prehistoric man upon almost every part of the earth, thou- 
sands of years prior to the time usually accorded to the ex- 
istence of the Adamic type on the earth. If the advent of 
Adam does not date back more than six thousand or 
seven thousand years, which is generally conceded, geology 
affords overwhelming evidence of the existence of pre- 
Adamites. And the only way to reconcile the Bible and 
geology, is to admit the separate successive creation of the 
several types of man and the existence of the lower types on 
the earth, thousands of years before the advent of Adam. 

The only scripture which appears to dispute this theory is 
the expression of Paul recorded in Acts of the Apostles, seven- 
teenth chapter and twenty-sixth verse, that " all nations were 
made of one blood." The use of the word blood, as given in 
the common version of the Bible, I consider of very doubtful 
import. The true idea is that God made all nations from 
one spirit. Wilson's Emphatic Diaglott, the best trans- 
lation of the New Testament that I have been able to con- 
sult, does not use the word " blood " at all. 

But even if the use of this word " blood " is allowable, it 
does not necessarily contradict the theory of the human 
race which I have presented. It is a fact which can be and has 
been demonstrated that the blood of all the races and types 
of men on the earth is chemically the same — that is, when 
analyzed contains the same constituents ; and therefore it 



INTRODUCTION. 37 

ca'n properly and truly be said that God has created all 
nations of, or with one or the same kind of blood. But if 
this proves anything in behalf of common descent of all 
races from Adam, it proves too much, because the same 
chemical analysis shows that the entire family of Mammalia 
possess exactly the same character of blood that the several 
types of men do. So, if possessing the same blood makes 
all men brethren and descended from a common ancestor, 
viz. : Adam — then we must admit Darwin's plea, acknowl- 
edge our kinship with the animals, and a common descent 
of all types and species from them. The leading idea that 
Paul was inculcating is that God as the Creator is Father 
of all ; and that all men being his creatures are brethren. 



CHAPTER II. 

THE PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH. 

JJEt is agreed by all, except atheists, that God, or the First 
~\ Great Cause, created or developed the universe out of 
existing matter. How matter came into existence is a 
mooted question. Orthodox religionists hold that God 
created matter out of nothing. Many scientists maintain 
that matter is eternal. Wilf ord Hall, in his great work, ' ' The 
Problem of Human Life," condemns the orthodox idea as 
absurd, and yet not willing to admit that anything outside 
of God is eternal — takes the position that God out of His 
own external being has evolved or condensed the material 
universe. 

On page 33 of said work, Mr. Hall uses the following 
language, viz.: "Resolve all matter, for example, first, 
into Prof. Crook's fourth state, or Dr. Lockyear's single 
elementary substance ; then into the grosser incorporeal 
elements of Nature, such as electricity, gravitation, mag- 
netism and other forces; then into the higher phase of 
incorporeal substance, such as constitute the vital and men- 
tal powers of the organic world ; finally, into the substantial 
elements of God's own eternal being, so to speak ; out of 
which, by His infinite power and wisdom, He might have 
condensed the various grades of substance, down to the 
material world itself. This would constitute God himself 
the source from which has been derived universal nature, 
and answer both the scientists and the Westminster Confes- 
sion." 

(38) 



PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH. 39 

The following extract from an able criticism of Elder 
Thomas Munnell, A. M., fully explains the position of 
Mr. Hall:-— 

"He maintains that as all things are * of God/ * Of whom 
are all things/ so all the elements of matter are but conden- 
sations of His ' exterior nature/ and not a product from 
nothing ; that ' physical organisms were condensed and 
framed out of that portion of God's omnipresent substance 
suited to such material existences ; their vital parts out of a 
higher, finer grade of God's substantial nature ; while the 
mental faculties and spirit were but drops out of the higher 
qualities of God's substantial intelligence and spiritual 
essence.- 

"Admitting that the mental faculties and spirit were 
i drops out of God's spiritual essence/ and not ' attenuations' 
of the finer elements of matter, it still leaves the doctrine 
that electricity, magnetism, animal life, and all physical 
organisms are in the nature of c attenuations ' of the grosser 
forms of. matter; or, which is the same thing, that these 
organisms are but condensations of higher elements from 
God's own exterior being. Now, is the idea that 4 an imma- 
terial substance can be transformed into a material body ' 
unscientific and irrational? If immaterial substances can 
not be ■ condensed ' into the material, it is equally true that 
the material can not be ' attenuated ' into the immaterial ; 
and hence it has been objected with some force that attenu- 
ation of matter does not destroy the properties of matter ; 
that if matter be ponderable, tangible, corruptible and 
divisible, no degree of attenuation or condensation would, 
in such particulars, change its nature. But as true scien- 
tific ideas are often embarrassed by the imperfections of 
human language, I suggest that instead of the words 4 con. 
densation ' and ' attenuation/ we use the words synthesis and 



40 MAN. 

analysis and see if the above objection will have the same 
force. 

41 While it is true that attenuated matter may still possess 
some, at least, of the same properties it had before, is it 
true that matter analyzed possesses the same properties? 
The air is attenuated as we ascend from the surface of the 
earth, and is homogeneous at all altitudes ; but if we ana- 
lyze it, are its elements homogeneous with the air? Do the 
oxygen and the nitrogen of the air, when set free, possess 
the qualities of the air when undecomposed ? If attenuation 
is always responsible for homogeneity of substance, is anal- 
ysis responsible for it also? Analyze water, and are its 
oxygen and hydrogen of the same nature as water, or but 
attenuated water ? Are they alike visible or ponderable, or 
do they taste like water? Or take light — white light — 
and decompose it, and why does no one of the seven colors 
in the least degree resemble the original white? Here, 
again, analysis is not responsible for homogeneity, of which 
chemistry will give us ten thousand proofs. Is not all mate- 
rial nature composite? and may not every substance be 
analyzed, no matter how gross, into higher and finer grades 
of matter ? 

" Then as to synthesis, the process is simply reversed, and 
the evidence is the same. How it is that oxygen and hydro- 
gen so shake hands, fill each other's interstices, and marry 
up each other's little infinitesimals, as to produce a tertium 
quid in the shape of water, so different from both, is a 
secret that lies deep in the unravelled arcana of God. But 
the great truth taught by this synthesis is the same as that 
taught by analysis — that it also is not responsible for 
homogeneity. The same is true when you throw oxygen 
and nitrogen back into air, and seven colors into white 
light, namely, no homogeneity. 



PKOGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH. 41 

"The above facts, running both up and down the scale, 
clearly show that analysis results in higher grades of matter, 
and that the elements of the coarser forms are of finer qual- 
ity than the forms they compose. How this can be, may be 
a mystery that will forever outfathom all our measuring 
lines ; and yet, the fact itself is indisputable. As in the 
case of water analysis into oxygen and hydrogen, if we had 
some powerful laboratory process by which we could anal- 
yze oxygen, analogy would evidently say that its ele- 
ments, should it be found a composite substance, would 
prove to be of still higher grade, and equal, possibly, to 
electricity. Nor is it inconceivable that a still further anal- 
ysis would discover elements equal to vital energy ; and so 
on, till in thought we reach the hypothetical * exterior nature 
of God,' from which elements may have been synthetized 
first into the finer, and then into the grosser elements of all 
the ' physical organism ' in the universe, as well as all mate- 
rial existences. This view of the case certainly shows that 
the hypothesis that God, evolved all things from Himself is 
not ' unscientific,' for it is only- following out certain well 
known scientific facts to their analogous ultimata, besides 
harmonizing with the Scripture, ' For of Him and through 
Him and [back] to Him are all things.' 

"But is it probable that God has any such * exterior ' 
nature as the hypothesis demands? Here the gates stand 
ajar but little ; and yet we have a right to whatever hint may 
be found either in nature or the Bible. And first we see in 
ourselves, made in the image of God (perhaps on the general 
plan of God's own organization), the 'inner and the outer 
man ; ' and in the next world l we ' are to have heavenly 
1 tabernacles,' and these * vile bodies ' to be transformed 
like l Christ our glorious body,' and He is the i express 
image of God; ' — from all of which it is rather probable 



42 MAN. 

that God is possessed of an l exterior nature ; ' and if so, 
the supposition that He synthetized the universe out of said 
nature is not absurd, nor as unscientific as that He made all 
things, material and immaterial, out of absolute nothingness. 

"Nor is there any more danger of His wasting away His 
exterior nature by thus educing all material things, than 
there is of His wasting His spiritual essence by becoming 
the ' Father of all spirits ' in all worlds. He that makes 
millions of suns to burn, for decillions of centuries for aught 
we know, with undiminished heat and splendor, without the 
least evidence to us of a supply of fuel for their wastes, is 
not likely to be embarrassed l>y the slight expenditure in cre- 
ating all l things present and things to come ' in any man- 
ner He may see proper. The fact that ' the things which 
are seen were not made of things that do appear' (Heb. 
xi:3) shows that all gross visible substances were composed 
or synthetized out of higher, invisible elements which were 
all substantive, but in their highest and last analysis not 
necessarily material. And if gross matter loses one property 
after another by successive analysis, why might not the last 
analysis drop the last property of material substance, and 
reach the frontiers of 4 the exterior nature of God ' required 
by the hypothesis before us, as assumed in l The Problem 
of Human Life?* " 

The hypothesis assumed by Mr. Hall is not an unreasona- 
ble one ; and it is clearly stated and ably maintained by Elder 
Munnell in the extract just quoted. The same position is 
maintained by A. J. Davis, in his " Revelations of Nature," 
and other remarkable works. Mr. Davis claims to have dem- 
onstrated the truth of this position through his extraordi- 
nary clairvoyant and spiritual powers. But after all, so far 
as man is concerned, this question will have to be relegated to 
the domain of the unknowable. We have no possible means 



PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OP THE EARTH. 43 

of knowing, and to us it is a question of little practical 
value whether matter is eternal ; or was created out of 
nothing ; or was condensed by God out of His own eternal 
being. 

As far back as our finite minds can reach we find matter 
existing ; and where we take hold of the subject, spirit and 
matter appear to be the two great original elements by which 
and out of which the universe, with its myriads of suns and 
worlds, with all the inhabitants thereof, have been developed 
or created. Spirit is life ; and all matter has been endued 
by spirit with life, but in different degrees. 

The All-wise Creator planned the Universe ; and by His 
Almighty Power acting by and through His Spirit, created 
and developed the universe in all its departments, spiritual 
and natural. The fundamental law of the universe appears 
to be the law of sex. The eternal conjugation and impregna- 
tion of matter by spirit, has produced the material universe, 
in all its glory and endless variety. The active agent and 
instrument of Spirit, in organizing matter into form and 
life, is, no doubt, electricity, with its accompanying ele- 
ments of light and heat. Our earth, as a negative, receives 
its light, and electricity, and heat from the sun. Our sun 
receives these life-giving agencies from the great central 
sun, around which it revolves ; and so on in succession back 
to the great central sun of the universe ; which is the great 
negative that is continually impregnated with these life-giv- 
ing agencies by the Absolute and Eternal positive, the Crea- 
tor Himself. 

Through these mysterious agencies original matter was 
organized into form, as we find it in the mineral kingdom of 
the earth, and as it, no doubt, exists in thousands of other 
planets and worlds ; and as soon as matter assumed form it 
was endowed with life, and that life we call motion. The 



44 MAN. 

normal state of all matter is motion, and not rest. The in- 
ertia which we seem to behold in matter or the earth is rela- 
tive and apparent, not real. Motion may be said to be the 
life, or inner principle, and form the outward expression of 
all organized matter, as we find it in the mineral kingdom 
of the earth. The same Creative energy which has produced 
from original matter the mineral kingdom has also, developed 
out of the latter the vegetable kingdom, with its manifold 
forms of life. And as the different forms of the vegetable 
kingdom, from the lowest to the highest, have been developed 
in their order — each has been endued with that inner prin- 
ciple we term the life of the vegetable kingdom. 

And so on in like manner, and in due order of succession, 
these mysterious agencies developed out of the mineral and 
vegetable kingdoms, animal life, in its myriad forms, and 
endued each form with its appropriate life, which we term 
sensation. But I can not pursue this fundamental aspect of 
the subject farther here. 

I now present the theory I have adopted as to the modus 
operandi of the development of the material universe. It 
is believed that matter, after having been endued with life 
and motion, existed first in the form of an immense body 
of fire-mist. That gradually, by attraction and by cooling, 
it gathered around the heaviest points, forming the various 
suns of the universe, with a grand central sun, around which 
they began to revolve. That in due time rotary motion also 
set up in these bodies ; the effect of which was to de- 
press them at their poles and protrude them at their equator. 
That as the matter gradually cooled, concentric rings were 
thrown off at the equators, which in process of time became 
the planets revolving around each particular sun. The rings 
around the planet Saturn were, no doubt, thrown off in this 
way, and may indicate how the matter of all the planets 



PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH. 45 

was first thrown off from the sun, as well as how the matter 
of our moon, and that of all the satellites of the other planets 
was thrown off from their respective parent bodies. 

Saturn's rings may in process of time become moons, simi- 
lar to those of Jupiter or that of our earth. It will be seen 
that this theory proceeds on the idea that our moon was, 
ages ago, thrown off from the body of the earth, as the 
earth itself was ages before thrown off from the body of the 
sun ; which in the rolling ages of the past was itself proba- 
bly thrown off from the body of its parent sun, supposed to 
be the star Alcyone, one of the Pleiades, around which it is 
claimed our sun with its systems of planets is revolving. 
This theory is sustained by the fact that science has demon- 
strated that the matter of our sun and all its planets and their 
satellites, is of the same nature ; that is composed of the 
same chemical elements ; and that the form, condition, and 
appearance of each body depends entirely on the amount of 
heat and electricity existing among its particles at the time. 
It is also found that the matter of comets, aerolites, or so- 
called shooting stars, is exactly the same as other planetary 
bodies. Hence it is believed that comets are new planets in 
process of formation, which have not yet assumed their 
proper balance in regular orbits. And that aerolites are 
simply planetary matter floating in space, in certain parts of 
the Universe through which the earth passes in its revolu- 
tion around the sun. In the milky way and other parts of 
the heavens immense bodies of nebulous matter can be per- 
ceived with the telescope, which has not yet even assumed 
the form of comets. In the far off Southern Polar regions 
of the heavens are found the celebrated Magellan clouds, 
which are immense bodies of nebulous matter, occupying an 
apparently starless void. This evidently is a great reservoir, of 
planetary matter in process of preparation, which is yet to 



46 MAN. 

pass through the cometary state, and finally form new 
planets. 

But this must suffice in the way of predicate and theory. 
I come now to the subject proper of this chapter, the earth 
and its progressive development. 

At some time in the remote past the earth was an erratic 
comet — a mass of fiery matter lately thrown out from the 
sun. Under the operation of the laws already referred to, 
in the process of the ages, it gradually assumed its present 
elliptical orbit and began its revolutions around its parent 
sun. And in due time became itself the parent of the beau- 
tiful moon, which was thrown out from the body of the earth, 
and established its revolution around its parent center. I 
have not the time, nor would it be profitable to follow in 
fancy the history of the earth through the millions of ages of 
the great struggle between fire and water, in which it was 
condensed and cooled down from a heat of which the human 
mind can have no conception to a condition fit for vegetable 
and animal life. 

I must refer the reader to such interesting works as " Our 
Planet, its Past and Future,' ' by Prof. Denton, and " The 
Story of the Earth and Man," by J. W. Dawson, in which 
this subject will be found to be ably treated. 

It must suffice for the present to say that this earth was 
no doubt at the first a fiery mass of gaseous matter, moving- 
like any other comet in its eccentric orbit. That in the pro- 
cess of the ages, under the operation of natural laws and 
causes, it became reduced to order and system ; and from a 
gaseous to a liquid form, and finally to its present partly 
solid form. 

It is now as we see it, on its surface partly solid and 
partly liquid ; and sufficiently cooled for animal and vegeta- 
ble life ; but is believed to be in its central parts a fiery mass 
of liquid matter. 



PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH. 47 

As already stated the spirit of the Creator acting through 
the laws herein referred to, has animated all the matter of 
earth with life, but in very varied forms and different 
degrees. First, it built up the solid structure of the mineral 
kingdom, and clothed it with the fertile covering of the soil, 
full of the germs of vegetable life, ready upon the proper 
application of the light, heat, and electricity of the sun, in 
connection with moisture, and other ingredients and condi- 
tions of the air, to produce vegetable life. First, the tin}*" 
blades of grass ; then the plant and vegetable ; and after- 
ward the majestic forest tree, as well as endless varieties of 
fruits for the sustenance of animals and men, in their due 
and regular order. Of course, I recognize the fact that each 
form of vegetable life, when once developed from the earth, 
produces itself by ordinary generation from the seed. But I 
am here referring to the original development of the various 
forms of vegetable life ; which evidently was from germs 
existing in the earth, and which process has been going on 
ever since the beginning of vegetable life on the earth, and 
is yet going on. 

To illustrate: Take the most dense primeval forest in the 
Mississippi Valley, remote from any settlement, where 
hardly sufficient rays of the sun have penetrated in a thou- 
sand years to produce even a few sprigs of grass, to say 
nothing of the ordinary crops of weeds that infest cultivated 
fields ; fell the timber, clear off the land, and put it in culti- 
vation ; and before you can mature a crop of grain, cockle- 
burrs and crab grass, or some other form of weeds or grass, 
will spring up ; and that where nothing of the kind ever be- 
fore grew, and with no possibility of any seed having been 
previously deposited. The only possible explanation of this 
well known fact to pioneer farmers, is that the germ is 
inherently in the soil. 



48 MAN. 

Who has not observed in all the older settled States of 
the United States, when timbered land has been cleared 
and cultivated for a half century, and then thrown out, 
that when a growth of timber reappears on the land, it is 
often of an entirely different species from the original 
growth ; that too with no possibility of the new growth com- 
ing from seed. Often a crop of young pine follows an oak 
forest with no pinery sufficiently near for any possibility 
of seed. 

The foregoing facts, and hundreds of others which might 
be noted, clearly show that the germs of vegetable life have 
been deposited in the bosom of the earth by creative power. 

That the forms of animal life have developed from the veg- 
etable, as the forms of vegetable life appear to have developed 
from the mineral kingdom, is by no means so evident ; — 
yet we know that this is in some general sense true, because 
we find in man all the elements of the animal, vegetable and 
mineral kingdoms ; and in lower animals the elements of the 
vegetable and mineral kingdoms ; as we find in vegetable life 
the elements of the mineral kingdom. And while we can 
cite no cases where the earth, or its vegetable growth has 
produced animal life, when we come to the water it is some- 
what different. Water, when examined by the aid of the 
microscope, is found to be full of animal life. And every 
observing person has noticed that in wet weather branches, 
in localities remote from streams containing fish and where 
no fish could possibly come in the natural course — that after 
rains in warm weather where holes of water are left standing 
for a few weeks, several varieties of small fish invariably 
appear and live in the water, until it disappears by evapor- 
ation, when the fish die. Fish also appear in the same way 
in artificial pools. I have observed hundreds of such cases 
where it was utterly impossible for the fish to have gotten to 



PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH. 49 

the locality, unless they rained down from the clouds, as is 
sometimes suggested. I believe they came in exactly that 
way, but not in the developed form of fishes. They came 
in the form of the original germ in the water, which under 
the proper condition of stagnant water, air, sun, heat, light, 
electricnVy, etc., germinated, or developed into fish. 

As germane to the subject, and throwing some light upon 
the origin of life in the vegetable and animal kingdoms, I 
make this extract from the writings of A. J. Davis, found 
on page 237, of his work entitled "Revelations of Na- 
ture: " — 

" Chemistry will unfold the fact that light when confined in 
a certain condition, and condensed, will produce ivater: and 
that water thus formed, subjected to the vertical influence 
of light, will produce by its internal motion and further con- 
densation, a gelatinous substance of the composition of the, 
spirif er, the motion of which indicates animal life. This again 
being decomposed and subjected to evaporation, the precipit- 
ated particles which still remain will produce putrified matter 
similar to earth, which will produce the plant known as the 
fucoides. It is on the results of this experiment (the truth 
of which, as above represented, can be universally ascer- 
tained), that rests the probability, though not the absolute 
certainty, of the truth of the description which I am about 
to give concerning the first form possessing life." 

I wish in this connection, to draw this clear distinction, 
viz : That while there seems to be a close and intimate con- 
nection between the mineral, vegetable and animal kingdoms, 
as much so as that between the foot, leg, and thigh of 
a man ; and while in many cases vegetable life seems to be 
developed or evolved from inherent germs in the mineral 
kingdom ; and in some cases animal life appears to be de- 

4 



50 MAN. 

veloped from water, in a similar manner; while, if you 
please, nature seems to teach this much of evolution — it is 
not a spontaneous generation, that I admit, but that original 
impregnation of matter by spirit, with various forms and 
degrees of life, to which we called attention in the beginning 
of this chapter. Nor is there about any of these processes 
of nature any transmutation of species, or evolution of one 
form or type of animal life out of another, as Mr. Darwin 
maintains. But simply a development of a new form of 
life, out of the elements of matter ; but which matter has 
long since been organized and vitalized by the spirit, 
through its natural agencies, electricity, light, heat, etc. 
And which new form of life, when once developed, propa- 
gates itself by ordinary generation — like producing like; 
and although the progeny often varies enough to produce 
new varieties — no case has ever been cited where any form 
of animal life developed into a new and distinct type or 
species. 

The order of nature seems to have been one of progressive 
development, proceeding always from lower to higher 
forms of life. No new form of life, however, seems to have 
been developed from any existing form ; but it is created or 
developed under mysterious natural laws and agencies, not 
yet comprehended by man, but which, nevertheless, exist 
and are not in conflict with any of God's other laws, natural 
or revealed. 

Hence in the gradual and progressive development of 
the earth through the countless ages of the past, we had first 
the mineral kingdom ; then the manifold forms of vegetable 
life appearing in their natural and successive order ; and last, 
animal life commencing with the lowest forms, and proceed- 
ing from lower to higher, until the climax was reached in 
the creation of man. 



PROGRESSIVE DEVELOPMENT OF THE EARTH. 51 

That this was the order of the creation and development 
of the earth and its inhabitants, is equally shown by the 
science of geology and the Bible. 

The order of the creation as given by Moses, proceeding 
from the mineral kingdom through the vegetable to the an- 
imal, and from the lowest to the highest types ending with 
man — is fully corrobrated by the testimony of science writ- 
ten in the rocks and strata of the earth, through the count- 
less ages of the past. 



CHAPTER III. 

THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 

t SHALL not undertake to say how many distinct types 
of Man have been created or developed on the earth. 
But I shall maintain that in accordance with the established 
laws of the universe, the earth has, probably for millions of 
years, progressed in a regular order of development from 
lower to higher forms of life. That first, the mineral kingdom 
was established. Then out of this was developed the veg- 
table kingdom with its manifold forms of life. Lastly, the 
animal kingdom was developed in progressive order, pro- 
ceeding from the lowest to the higher forms of life, until the 
topmost round in the ladder of earthly being was reached 
in Man. As we find in the vegetable and animal kingdoms, 
below Man, distinct types and species, so in the human 
family, distinct types have been developed, proceeding 
always from lower to higher forms of life. 

I shall not undertake to say what is the lowest type of 
Man, that has appeared on the earth, or where and how it 
appeared. But shall maintain that the Adamic type of 
Man is the highest; and between that and the lowest several 
distinct t}^pes have appeared ; and that many varieties of 
men have been produced by the crossing of types and other- 
wise. I will only make this general classification. The tree 
of Man may be divided into three great branches. First, 
and lowest on the trunk of the tree, we have the great 
branch of the black races, with its subdivision of branches, 
(52) 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 53 

such as the Australians, Papuans, Hottentots and various 
tribes of negroes. This branch of the human family was, no 
doubt, the first to appear on the earth, and probably origi- 
nated in some of the islands or on the shores of the Indian 
Ocean either in Australia, Southern Asia, or Eastern Africa, 
and the main body of it is yet found in the islands of the 
Indian Ocean and in Africa. This, being the lowest branch 
on the great tree of Man, has made very little progress and 
no history. 

The second great branch of the human family, I shall call 
the brown races, meaning thereby to include the red and 
yellow men as well. This might very properly be called the 
Mongolian branch, including Mongolian Tartars, Chinese, 
Japanese, Malays, American Indians and other kinds and 
varieties. This branch appears higher up on the grand 
trunk of the tree of Man, and of course, later in time. The 
original habitation of this numerous branch of the human 
family was, no doubt, the great plains of Central and 
Eastern Asia. It spread from its original center eastward, 
northward, and southward, over Asia and into the islands of 
the Pacific and Indian Ocean ; and also north-eastward via 
Behring's Strait into America, and then east and south 
driving out in the course of the ages the mound- builders, 
Astecs and Toltics ; who in advance of them occupied parts 
of the United States and Mexico. These races have not 
been stationary and torpid like the black races ; but in the 
main migratory and aggressive. They have, however, with 
the exception of the Chinese and Japanese, been idle, 
nomadic and utterly non-progressive. These races have 
subsisted principally by fishing, hunting, and conquest ; and 
outside of wars and invasions have made little or no history. 

The two great branches of the human family, to which I 
have just referred in such brief and general terms, I believe 



54 MAN. 

to be the men, whose creation is recorded by Moses in the 
first chapter of Genesis. The twenty-sixth, twenty- seventh, 
twenty- eighth, and twenty-ninth verses, read as follows: 
"And God said, Let us make man in our image, after 
our likeness ; and let them have dominion over the fish of 
the sea and over the fowls of the air, and over the cattle and 
over all the earth, and over every creeping thing that 
creepeth upon the earth. So God created man in his own 
image, in the image of God created he him ; male and female 
created he them. And God blessed them, and God said 
unto them, Be fruitful and multiply, and replenish the earth 
and subdue it ; and have dominion over the fish of the sea, 
and over the fowls of the air, and over every living thing that 
moveth upon the earth. And God said, Behold, I have 
given you every herb bearing seed, which is upon the face 
of all the earth and every tree in which is the fruit of a 
tree yielding seed ; to you it shall be for meat." 

From the twenty-sixth verse it is seen that God created 
these men hunters and fishers. That the very object of their 
creation was to have dominion over the fish of the sea, the 
fowls of the air, and the animals of the earth. In the 
twenty-eighth verse God blessed them, and commands them 
to multiply and replenish the earth and subdue it, in order 
that they might have that dominion over the animal king- 
dom for which they were evidently created. And in order 
that they might not have to consume their time in hard labor 
for a subsistence ; but might have ample time to subject the 
animals and subdue the earth, God in the twenty-ninth verse 
provides for their subsistence without labor, by giving 
them the fruits, vegetables and herbs of the earth "for 
meat. ,, God promised them to provide for their wants, 
through the productions of nature, evidently in order that 
they might have ample time to subdue and keep down the 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 55 

animal kingdom. No labor was required of these men as was 
required of Adam, afterwards. The latter, even in Eden, was 
required to " dress and keep the garden," and after his expul- 
sion, was doomed to hard labor for subsistence. No other 
labor than hunting and fishing was required for the inferior 
types of man, and hunters and fishers have they been, through 
the long lapse of ages. Neither the American Indians /Mon- 
golian, Tartar or any other race with the Mongolian type pre- 
vailing, has ever been an honest tiller of the soil. They 
will hunt, fish, rove, rob and plunder, but never work ; they 
will die first. I am aware that the Chinese and Japanese 
are exceptions and appear to contradict the proposition just 
laid down ; but the contradiction is only apparent. These 
nations are not pure Mongolians. It is true they have a 
Mongolian base in their constitution which is indicated in 
their features. But their willingness to engage in patient 
labor, their settled habits, their progress in the domestic arts, 
their semi-civilization and their history all clearly indicate 
that the Mongolian stock is crossed with some branch of the 
Adamic race. As to when, where and with what particular 
branch this cross occurred we have no reliable data. I have 
a theory about the Chinese which was presented in the first 
chapter, and to which the curious reader is referred. Said 
chapter also contains much more extended arguments in 
favor of the proposition that the two great branches of the 
human family, first referred to in this chapter, were on the 
earth thousands of years in advance of the Adamic type of 
men. 

In the progressive development of the earth and of man, 
the time finally arrived when the main trunk of the tree of 
man was to be developed and the governing type of the race 
created. This occurred, as is generally believed, somewhere 
.in Western Asia and the Mosaic account of it is found in the 
second chapter of Genesis, beginning at the fourth verse. 



5(3 MAN. 

The most casual reader will mark the wide contrast between 
the history of the two creations recorded respectively in the 
first and second chapters of Genesis. The first is a general 
creation of male and female mentioned in immediate connec- 
tion with the creation of the other animals. The second is a 
special creation of a single male. The first men are given 
dominion over the animals and nothing is required of them 
but to replenish the earth arid subdue it. The second man 
is created after the specific announcement that there was no 
man to till the soil and labor was required of him. The first 
men and women were simply " made " in a general way like 
other animals. The second man was " created " out of the 
dust of the earth and the " breath of life " " breathed into 
his nostrils," when he became a " living soul." This means 
that his body not only contained the elements of the mineral, 
vegetable and animal kingdoms below him, but also an ele- 
ment from above. "The breath of life" not only implied 
that immortal spirit which characterizes man as superior to 
the lower animals, but also indicated that in Adam the spir- 
itual powers were opened and developed and that he was 
competent to meet God face to face and converse with Him. 
Adam at first was not an animal man such as the inferior 
types of men created before him were ; nor as he and his 
progeny were after their fall and expulsion from Eden. He 
was created a spiritual man, that is with his animal body 
under control of his spirit. He was fit for spiritual life and 
constant communion with God, consequently he was placed 
in a paradise with the privilege of meeting God face to face 
and of having access to the Tree of Life, whereby his physi- 
cal life might have been continued forever had he obeyed 
God. But he violated the law, became estranged from God, 
was expelled from Eden, forfeited the right to the Tree 
of Life and became subject to physical death as other 
animals. In short, became an animal man, like his prede- 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN, 57 

cessors, but far their superior in intellectual, moral, social 
and spiritual capacity, and consequently remained the 
ruling type of the race. As such God required of him labor 
and imposed on him the responsibility of governing the 
world. The inferior types were to govern the animals below 
them ; the Adamic type to govern them. 

But the descendants of Adam were exceedingly sinful ; 
they put themselves down on a level with the lower types and 
miscegenated with them, until God, in order to preserve a 
pure stock of the ruling type of men selected Noah, a man 
perfect in his generation ; that is unmixed with the lower 
types of men. The flood destroyed all the Adamic stock 
except Noah's family, who were preserved as the progenitors 
of the highest type of the human race on earth, under new 
conditions of government, which will be explained in a suc- 
ceeding chapter. There has been a great deal of unneces- 
sary discussion about the unity and diversity of the human 
race. The truth is unity and diversity both exist through- 
out God's entire creation. Every where in the universe we 
may behold " unity in diversity, and diversity in unity." 
Our solar system for instance, is but one system, yet it con- 
tains the greatest diversity of planets and satellites. The 
earth is one, but contains its mineral, vegetable and animal 
kingdoms. So Man is one human family or genus homo, but 
possessed of many distinct types. Life on the earth is best 
represented by a tree. Its tap-root is the mineral kingdom ; 
its main lower branch root is the vegetable kingdom ; its 
main upper branch root is the animal kingdom ; its first and 
lower great branch represents the black races; its upper 
main branch, the brown races, while the upper trunk and top 
represents the white races. I have not deemed it necessary 
to go into a consideration of each distinct type of the three 
great branches of the human race, to which reference has 
been made in this chapter. I, however, give in this connec- 



58 MAN. 

tion the following table of types and races, taken from Prof. 
Winchell's Preadamites, pages 302, 303, 304, 305, and 306. 
This table no doubt approximates something like a true 
classification of the different types of Man. It is as fol- 
lows, viz. : — 

AFFILIATED CLASSIFICATION OF MANKIND. 

(Based on the Aggregate of Characters.) 

FIRST MEN: 

Preaustr alians . 
1 AUSTRALIANS : 

2a I. Bushmen (transitional). 

2b II. HOTTENTOTS: 

3a Kaffirs (transitional). 

3b 1. Bantu Negroes. 

(1) Eastern: Zanzibarites, Mozam- 

biques, Betchuans. 

(2) Interior. 

(3) Western. 
Bafans or Fans. 

Bundas. 

Congees, northwestern 
tribes. 
3o 2. Soudan Negroes. 

(1) Ibo, (2) Nuffi. 

(3) Joloffers: (a) Mande, (b) 

Odshi, (c) Ewhi. 

(4) Ghanas, Sonrhay, (5) Hausa, 

Masa, (6) Bournous, (7) 
Baghiami. 
(8) Dinka. 

Shillook (transitional). 

Fundi (including Sennaars, 
bas, Berthas). 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 59 

LlOTRICHS, 

EuthycomeSy 
Preasiatics, 

Premongoloids, 
Premalays, 
Malays, 

Malay o- Chinese, 
Chinese, 
Prejapanese, 
Altaians, 
Northern Asiatics, 
Hyperboreans, 
Americans, 

European Troglodytes. 
Euplocams, 
Australians, 
Dravidians, 
Noachites. 

After much consideration of the subject, I am convinced 
that no classification based on the hair will represent the 
genetic relations among the races and sub-races. An affili- 
ated classification must be based on the sum of the charac- 
ters, and must be checked by a careful observance of lin- 
guistic relationships. I have elaborated an arrangement on 
this basis ; and, having first presented it for convenience of 
reference, I will proceed to explain the grounds of my con- 
clusions. The notation at the left is for use in connection 
with the " Chart of the Progressive Dispersion of Man- 
kind." 

4a III..Tasmanians (transitional). 

4 Fijians (transitional). 



60 MAN. 

PAPUANS: — 
1. Australian Papuans (Melanesians). 

(1) New Guineans, (2) Pellew Islanders, (3) 
New Ireland ers, (4) Biranas, (5) Solomon 
Islanders, (6) New Hebrideans, (7) New 
Caledonians. 
4b 2. Asiatic Papuans (Negritos). 

4b 1 b 2 b 3 (1) Aeta, (2) Semangs? (3) Mincopies. 
IV. Premongoloids : 
MONGOLOIDS. 
5 a 1. Malays. 

(1) Asiatic Malays, (2) Pacific Malays (Poly- 
nesians and Micronesians). 
(3) Madagascar or Malagases. 
5b 2. Malayo-Chinese (Indo-Chinese). 

(1) Thibetans, (2) Lepcha, (3) Sifans, (4) 
Burmese. 

(a) Thai Group, (b) Anamese. 
(5) Tribes of Indo-China. 
5c 3. Chinese. 

5d 4. Prejapanese. 

5d x d 2 (1) Coreans, (2) Japanese. 

5e 5. Altaians. 

5c 1 (1) Tonguses: (a) Mandshu, (b) Orotshong. 

5e 2 (2) Mongols (Tatars or Tartars (a) East Mon- 

gols, (b) Kalmucks, (c) Buriats. 
5e 3 (3) Turks: (a) Ui'ghurs, (b) Uzbeks, (c) Os- 

manlis, (d) Yakuts, (e) Turcomans, (f) 
Nogaians, Basians, Kumuks, Karakalpaks, 
Kirghis. 
5e 4 (4) Ural-Altaics. 

(a) Ugrians (Ostiaks, Vognls, Magyars). 

(b) Bulgarians of the Volga. 

\ 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 61 

(c) Permians (Permians proper, Zirinians, 
Notiaks). 

(d) Finns (Snomi, Karelians, Vesps, Vods, 
Krevins, Livonians, Ehsts, Lapps, 
Bashkirs, Meshtsheriaks, Teptiars). 

5e 5 (5) Samoyeds. 

(a) Soiots, (b) Karagasses, (c) Kamas- 
sintzi, (d) Koibals, (e) Yuraks, (f) 
Tawgi. 
5f 6. Northern Asiatics of doubtful position. 

(1) Ostiaks of the Yenesei, (2) Yukagiri, (3) 
Amos? (a) Southern Saghaliens, (b) Kuril- 
ians, (c) Giliaks. 
6g 7. Hyperboreans. 

(1) Itelmes or Kamtskatdales, (2) Koriaks, 
(3) Chukchi, (4) Namollo, (5) Eskimo, 
(6) Aleuts, (7) Thlinkets and Vancouver 
Tribes. 
5h 8. Americans. 

5I1 1 (1) Hunting Tribes of North America. Kenai 

transitional. 

(a) Athabaskans, (b) Algonkins, (c) Iro- 
quois, (d) Dacotas, (e) Pawnees and Rica- 
rees, (f) Choctaws, Chickasaws, etc., (g) 
Cherokees, (h) Texas Tribes. 
5h 2 (2) Hunting Tribes of South America. 

(a) Tupi, (b) Lenguas or Guaycuru, (c) 
Parexis or Poragi, (d) Ges or Crans, 
(e) Crens or Gueras, (f) Gucks or 
Cocos, (g) Mandrucu, (h) Miranhas, 
(i) Tecunas, (j) Uapes, (k) Arowaks, 
(1) Caribs. 



62 MAN. 

5h 3 (3) Civilized Nations and their Kinsmen. 

Shoshones (transitional). 

(a) Toltecatlacs : Nahoas, Toltecs. 

(b) Nahuatlacs: Aztecs, Tezcuc- 
ans, Tlacopans Tepanecs, 
Tlascalans, Chontals, etc. 
Calif ornians, Moqui, Utes, 
Pah-Utes, Comanches. 

(c) Other Mexicans: Chichimecs, 
Michuacans, Hnastecas, Oto- 
mies, Mixtecs, Zapotecs, Ma- 
zatecs, etc. 

(d) Palencan Group: Quiche 
Maya. 

(e) Isthmian Group. 

(f) Peruvian Family: Chibcha or 
Miiysca, Quichua, Aymara or 

Colla, Cara. 

(g) Yuncas, Araucanians, Pampa 
Tribes, Patagomans. 

5i 9. European Troglodytes. 

511 (1) Stone Folk. 

5i2 (2) Iberians: (a) Basques, (b) Finns, 

Lapps, etc. ? 

6 V. DRAVIDIANS. 

6a 1. Munda (Jungle Tribes). 

(1) Kohl, (2) Santal, (3) Bhills. 
6b 2. Cingalese. 

6c 3. Dekkanese: (1) South Dravidians, (2) 

Brahui. 

7 4. ADAMITES (Mediterraneans). 
7 Noachites. 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 63 

7 a (1) Hamites. 

7a 1 (a) Accadians. 

Pelasgians, Etruscans. 
7a 2 (b) Himyarites. 

Arabian Himyarites, Galla, Somali, 
Fulah?Nuba? 
7a 3 (c) Mizraimites. 

Egyptians, Berbers, Atlantideans, 
Nubians, Fulbe. 
7a 4 (d) Canaanites (the primitive tribes). 

7b (2) Semites. 

7b 1 (a) Assyro-Babylonians. 

7b 2 (b) Phoenicians and Carthaginians. 

7b 3 (c) Hebrews. 

7b 4 (d) Joktanide Arabs. 

7b 5 (e) Ishmaelite Arabs. 

7c (3) Japhetites (Indo-Europeans or Aryans). 

7c 1 (a) Asiatic Aryans (Aryans proper). 

Medo-Persians or Iranians. 
Hindoos or Brahmans. 
7c 2 (b) European Aryans (Yavanas or Ion- 

ians). 
7c 2 ' Ionians proper: Achaeans, Ombro- 

Latins. 
7c 2 " Kimmerians., 

Scythians. 

Thracians, Kelts, Letto-Slavs. 
Germans. 

Modern Germans. 
Anglo-Saxons. 

Note. — In the foregoing table I have given the Native AmerL 
cans the arrangement usually assigned, and not that proposed in 
the twentieth and twenty-fourth chapters. 




64 MAN. 

Prof. Winchell seems to hold that all the races above 
enumerated were produced by ordinary generation ; which, 
of course, is an admission of Mr. Darwin's position, that 
each distinct type, or species has been evolved from some 
existing type or species. But neither Winchell nor Darwin, 
has yet explained how it is possible by ordinary generation 
to produce a Mongolian from negro parents or a white man 
from either of the other types. The ordinary laws of 
natural generation will not produce a new and distinct type 
from any existing type. Some extraordinary law to us un- 
known might produce such a result. Revelation records a 
wonderful instance of this character. When God wished to 
create a spiritual man with power to keep all law and com- 
mit no sin, he caused a natural or animal woman to be im- 
pregnated, by some mysterious spiritual impact, to the finite 
mind incomprehensible and the result was the birth of Jesus 
the Christ, conceded by the orthodox world to be both the 
son of God and the son of a woman ; in other words a man, 
but one who committed no sin and who spake and wrought 
as no man ever spake or wrought. So God might have pro- 
duced Adam, in the same mysterious way from a Mongolian 
mother ; and the Mongolian type in the same way from some 
of the black races. 

But the Bible tells us that Adam was created out the 
11 dust of the earth ; " and that " God breathed into his nos- 
trils the breath of life." We are told, however, that this is 
figurative language and not to be understood literally. I 
confess I do not know whether it is literal or figurative ; but 
will concede that it is figurative ; and see if it at all changes 
the result. If God did not literally make Adam's body out 
of the dust of the earth, what then does the language mean 
to represent? Evidently that Adam's body, whatever the 
modus operandi of its creation, was composed of all the earth. 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 65 

That is the elements of each of the earth's kingdoms — 
mineral, vegetable, and animal, were used in the creation 
or development of Adam's body. And this is exactly what 
science teaches us, is found in the body of every living man. 
So it really matters not whether we take the Mosaic account 
of the creation as literal or figurative ; it means the same 
thing. It means exactly what anatomy, physiology, and 
phrenology, and all the science pertaining to man, teaches. 
That man's body has been developed and created in some 
way from the elements of the earth. We know that our 
bodies are now produced by ordinary generation. But how 
was the first male and female of our type produced? 

I have shown that they could not have been produced 
from any existing type by ordinary generation because 
like begets and produces like. If the Adamic type was 
evolved from one of the older types, it must have been by 
some extraordinary generation, such, as produced Christ 
the God-Man. If not produced in this extraordinary man- 
ner then we are forced to the conclusion that each distinct 
type of man and every distinct species of animal was the 
subject of a specific creation. But it is said this involves 
the working of a miracle. The true idea of a miracle is 
something wonderful — something men do not understand, 
something that indicates the power of God. Christ never 
taught that miracles were wrought in violation of the laws of 
nature. God is a being of law, order and consistency He 
always works in accordance with some of his great laws and 
never violates any of them. When God exercises his power 
in accordance with some law unknown to men it is called a 
miracle ; but the fact that we do not understand it, does not 
make it inconsistent with other natural laws, which may be 
known to us. Therefore I maintain that God has cre- 
ated and developed the bodies of the original progenitors 
6 



66 MAN. 

of each distinct type of animal life, not out of pre-existing 
t} :r pes, but out of the elements of the earth and its several 
kingdoms, and in accordance with fixed laws of His own. 
It by no means follows, that because laws may be incompre- 
hensible to the human mind that they are in any way in con- 
flict with other natural laws, known to man. 

Therefore, I reach the general conclusion, that God has 
created or developed the original progenitors of each dis- 
tinct type of Man out of the elements of the mineral, vege- 
table, and animal kingdoms, in accordance with fixed laws ; 
which laws are not inconsistent with any of God's other laws ; 
but as yet have not been comprehended by Man. 

Since writing this chapter, a book entitled "A New Theory 
of the Origin of Species," by B. G. Sterris, has fallen into 
my hands. I make the following brief extracts from the 
last chapter, in which the author takes substantially the 
same position as is taken in this work upon the origin of 
species. On pages 258 and 259, he says : " Creative energy 
flows gestatively into every living organism, not only for 
original creation, but to reproduce life as we have already 
seen, is always infused, and puts on its appropriate form. 
The life of a new species puts on its corresponding structure, 
varying radically, though by easy gradations, from the 
receptacle which gives it birth. Thus the fruit of mam- 
malia above the marsupial, we may suppose as an example, 
was infused into the latter not by sexual connection, but by 
direct creative influx ; and this conception and birth was a 
new creation by extraordinary generation and ordinary 
birth." Again, on page 26, this writer says: " My theory, 
in short, is, that at each step in the creation of species, a prior 
living organism is used by the Creator, as an ovum or 
matrix to produce a new species without the aid of the 
ordinary paternity required in reproduction ; and precisely 



THE SEVERAL TYPES OF MAN. 67 

in the same way that the lowest animal was produced by 
creative influx into a matrix of crude earthly materials. 
Reproduction requires the co-operation of the animal sexes, 
while original creation does not." Again, on pages 274 and 
275, he says: "The same influx that could impregnate a 
single ape ovum with human life, could a thousand as well 
in contiguous areas, and about the same times. A single 
pair of human beings would be far less able to protect them- 
selves from wild beasts, etc., than a community. This idea 
of simultaneous creation of considerable numbers explains 
many of the various and marked sub-types, which every- 
where appear in communities of the same race. And 
especially does the creation of communities at different 
periods and widely distinct areas account for the broad dis- 
tinction between the Negro, Indian, Mongolian, and Cau- 
casian races." 

It appears from the foregoing extracts that the author of 
said work takes substantially the same position that is main- 
tained in this work, both as to the origin of new species and 
the creation of distinct types and many pairs of both men 
and animals. Also, that this creation or development of 
animal life has for incomprehensible ages gone on in pro- 
gressive order, proceeding always from lower to higher 
forms and types of life. 




CHAPTER IV. 

THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 

_OD preserved Noah and his family because " perfect in 
their generation," that is unmixed with the inferior 
types of men, in order that the pure Adamic stock might be 
preserved on the earth. But Noah was inaugurated as the 
governor of the earth under very different conditions from 
what Adam had been. Adam, in his primitive state, was pure 
and was placed in an earthly Paradise, with power to remain 
true to God and the laws of his own being. Although mortal as 
to his physical being, he had the privilege of the Tree of Life, 
whereby his physical life could have been continued possibly 
forever. And he was created with his spiritual powers fully 
developed, with full control of his animal appetites and the 
power to obey God and the laws of his own being. But 
Adam and Eve rebelled against God, violated the law and 
were expelled from Eden with the following results : — 

1st. They and their posterity were subjected to physical 
death as other animals. 

2d. They were subjected to hard labor during their 
natural lives, for subsistence ; and upon the woman was 
imposed additional burdens in child-bearing and subjection 
to her husband. 

3d. They were left without the companionship of their 
Maker, to battle with the laws of nature and their own rebel- 
lious appetites and passions. 

This led to the commission of wrongs by men upon their fel- 
low-men and finally to great wickedness, and their destruction 
(68) 



THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 69 

by the flood. The family of righteous Noah alone was pre- 
served, as seed of the ruling type of men, which was yet to 
people and control the earth. But Noah's government, as 
already stated, was subjected to some new and different con- 
ditions. God recognized the fact that man in his natural 
animal condition was subject to his own passions and a great 
sinner ; that human government was necessary to restrain him 
from wrongs upon his fellow-men. So He inaugurated Noah 
governor of the earth, subject to the following among other 
conditions: — 

1st. A pledge that day and night, winter and summer, 
seed-time and harvest should continue while the earth 
remained ; and no more destruction by flood, signified by 
the rain-bow. 

2d. The Noachians were given full control of the animal 
and vegetable kingdoms, as the inferior types, and Adam 
after the fall, had ; and were given not only the herbs and 
fruits to subsist upon as the prior creations had ; but also 
had animal food added, owing to the natural sinfulness of 
the race. 

3d. They were required to multiply and replenish the 
earth as the inferior men had been, and as the Adamic stock 
after the fall, were. 

4th. Human government was given them, which had not 
been accorded to previous dispensations ; and blood was to 
be required for blood and life for life, and they were to be 
held responsible for their treatment of animals. This I take 
to have been a necessity to the continued existence of the 
race on the earth in peace ; and grew out of its evil and fallen 
condition. 

5th. The earth was divided between the three sons of 
Noah, and their descendants decreed to be the governing 
and history-making races of earth, in accordance with the 



70 MAN. 

original birthright of Adam. In the tenth chapter of Gene- 
sis, the nations arising from the sons and grandsons of Noah 
were allotted their respective countries. And at the Tower 
of Babel, God confounded their language and forced them 
to divide and become distinct nationalities, in the respect- 
ive localities to which they had already been assigned. 

Asia was allotted to the descendants of Shem, Africa to 
Ham and northwestern Asia and Europe to Japheth. But 
the Noachians were slow to move to their respective coun- 
tries ; and the descendants of Ham were particularly rebelli- 
ous and lingered long in the valley of the Euphrates, where 
in connection with the Shemites, they undertook the erection 
of the Tower of Babel. They feared another flood, and 
wanted to provide a way of escape from earth to heaven. 
But God came down and confounded their language, forced 
them to desist from their rebellious undertaking, and to 
separate into distinct nationalities, in order that each might 
locate in the country which had already been assigned it. 

The locations of the different nations springing from the 
sons and grandsons of Noah, are recorded in the tenth chapter 
of Genesis, and fully explained in the first chapter of this 
book, and therefore need not be repeated here. 

Immediately after the dispersion from Babel, the great 
nations of antiquity, such as the Chaldeans, Assyrians, Syr- 
ians, Egyptians, Cushites, Canaanites, Phoenicians, Per- 
sians, Medes, Lydians, Grecians, Sc}^thians, Thracians, etc., 
began to develope into power and become very wicked. But 
God, in accordance with His pledge to Noah, did not destroy 
them any more as the antediluvians had been in the flood. 
He, however, permitted them by war and conquest to chas- 
tise and punish each other, thereby keeping the reign of 
their wickedness somewhat in check. He, also, for the 
third time, selected a righteous man to be the father of a 



THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 71 

peculiar people, which people were to be the custodians of 
God's revealed word to Man ; and from whose seed was to 
finally come a God-man, who is the Messiah through whom 
all men, who will, may voluntarily, on certain conditions, 
turn from rebellion and sin, and return to their allegiance 
to God. 

As Adam in his primitive condition was placed in an earthly 
paradise with power to preserve himself and posterity in per- 
petual favor and communion with God ; and as Noah was 
saved from the drowning antediluvians to re-people the 
earth with the governing type of Man — not in its original 
spiritual condition, but in its fallen, wicked, and animal con- 
dition ; so was Abraham called from Ur of the Chaldees to 
be the father of the most remarkable people of earth ; and 
far greater, to be the ' ' father of the faithful, in a system of 
religion yet to be developed, through which such of man- 
kind, as may choose, can restore themselves to the favor 
and presence of God again, in a Paradise which will far 
excel that of Eden. 

And in due time God, in accordance with his guaranty to 
Noah of human government for the protection of person and 
property, appeared on Sinai's smoking top to Moses, another 
great leader descended from Abraham, and through this 
chosen law-giver, presented this peculiar people, the sons of 
Abraham, with a model civil government for the use of the 
great commonwealth of Israel, and as an example for the 
other nations of the earth. 

The descendants of Noah, though in the main wicked, 
have ever been the ruling people of earth, and the only his- 
tory-making people, which have appeared in the world ; 
although they have constituted but a small minority of the 
immense number of men who have first and last lived and 
died on the earth. This I have shown in the first chapter ; 



72 MAN. 

and will recur to the same subject again in the next. I will 
now notice some of the leading characteristics of each of 
the great divisions of the Noachian family, briefly outlining 
some of the leading points of their history and respective 
settlements on the earth. 

THE SHEMITES. 

Josephus says : "Shem had five sons who inhabited the 
land that began at the Euphrates River and reached to the 
Indian Ocean. Elam left behind him the Elamites, ancestors 
of the Persians." It is now universally conceded that Elam, 
one of the sons of Shem, was the original progenitor of the 
Persians. They occupied the country southeast of the land 
of Shinar, or Chaldea, extending down to the Persian Gulf. 
Asshur, another son of Shem, was the founder of Nineveh, 
and the father of the Assyrians, one of the oldest nations of 
antiquity. Assyria was northwest of Chaldea, bounded on 
the north by Armenia, east by Media and Persia, south by 
Chaldea and Arabia, and was separated from Syria and Asia 
Minor on the west by the Euphrates River. Aram, another 
son of Shem, says Josephus, was the father of the Syrians. 
This people were located between the Mediterranean Sea on 
the west, and Caspian Sea, and head waters of the Euphrates 
River on the east, with Palestine, or the old land of Canaan 
on the south. Their capital was the beautiful city of Damas- 
cus, said to be the oldest town on earth, and certainly the 
oldest now existing. Lud, another son of Shem, was said 
by Josephus to have been the father of the Lydians. But 
this, if true, was only partly so, as the Lydians, occupying 
a portion of Asia Minor, were, in part at least, a Japhetic 
population. 

Arphaxad was the oldest son of Shem and had a far more 
numerous progeny than the others. From him was descended 



THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 73 

the Chaldeans, Hebrews, Arabs, Ishmaelites, Midianites; 
Israelites, Edomites, Moabites, Ammonites, Joktanites, and 
many other tribes occupying the country from the Mediter- 
ranean Sea to the Euphrates River, and the valley between 
it and the Tigris. These were descendants of Shem, the 
great nations .of antiquity which sprang up soon after the 
flood in western Asia, occupying the country from Ararat to 
the Indian Ocean, and westwardly to the Mediterranean Sea. 
Except the Jews and Israelites, who have been scattered over 
the earth under the curse of the Almighty, the main body of 
the descendants of Shem yet remain in their orginal habita- 
tion, western Asia, and preserve the manners and customs of 
their ancestors of four thousand years ago. The simple 
habits, and ranging and tenting life of the Bedouin Arabs of 
to-day gives us a very good idea of the state of the same 
country and customs of the people when Esau, father of the 
Edomites, with four hundred armed men, met Jacob in the 
hills east of the Jordan, returning .from Padan-Aram with 
his wives, children, and cattle. And the more settled Arabs 
living in tents and grazing their cattle, give us a fair picture 
of Abraham as he dwelt in his tent under the oaks on the 
plains of Mamre, in southern Palestine, while the Ganaanite 
was yet in the land. Shem was the priest of the Noachian 
family, and most likely the Melchisedec referred to in the 
Bible, as the Priest of the Most High, who was the Prince 
of Salem — present site of Jerusalem, about five hundred 
years after the flood, and who received tithes from Abraham 
as he returned from the defeat and slaughter of the kings. 
The descendants of Shem have ever been the priestly race 
and the originators of systems of religion. The only three 
great religions of earth, which recognize the one true and 
living God, sprang from the Shemites, viz. : the Mosaic, the 
Mohammedan, and the Christian. The constitutional traits 



74 MAN. 

and peculiarities of these people, physical and mental, well 
fit them to be the founders of systems of religion, and 
the preservers of the rites and ceremonies pertaining thereto. 
None of the nations descended from Shem were either migra- 
tory or progressive. They were civilized from the start, be- 
cause they had the civilization imparted directly by God 
through Noah and Shem. None of the descendants of Noah 
were ever in the savage or barbarous condition which has 
characterized the inferior types of men in every part of the 
earth. And the descendants of Shem have remained in the 
countries allotted to them by the Almighty, and preserved 
their civilization intact. They have neither lost it nor im- 
proved it. They have been utterly non-progressive, but all 
the time civilized, recognizing the existence of one true God 
and their responsibility to Him. Having no emigrations to 
engage in; never troubling their minds about science, in- 
vention or discovery, and living a primitive, simple, and 
economical mode of life, they had ample time to devote to 
their religious rites and ceremonies ; and both their consti- 
tutional peculiarities and mode of life well fit them for 
preserving great systems of religion, in their purity, from 
generation to generation for thousands of years, like their 
manners and customs, unchanged. And, as a fact, the Mo- 
saic religion has been preserved and observed almost un- 
changed for nearly four thousand years by the Israelites or 
Jews. 

THE HAMITES 

The four sons of Ham were Mizraim, Canaan, Phut and 
Cush. Although Africa was evidently allotted to the sons 
of Ham ; two of them long remained in southwestern Asia. 
Canaan settled in the land of Canaan, lying between Syria 
to the north and Arabia to the south, and extending from 
the Mediterranean Sea, on the west a short distance east of 



THE NOACHIAN FAMLLY. 75 

the Jordan river. The Canaanites were conquered and 
mainly destroyed by the Israelites under Joshua on their 
return from Egypt, to take possession of this land, given 
to them through their father Abraham some four hundred 
years before. The residue not destroyed mixed with the 
Israelites and surrounding tribes. Cash also first settled 
in Arabia, extending his dominion south to the Indian Ocean, 
and east to the Euphrates River. Nimrod was a Cushite ; 
and he invaded Chaldea and established a great despotic 
kingdom, with Babylon as its capital. The Hamites and 
Shemites long occupied southwestern Asia together, and were 
greatly mixed. But Mr. Baldwin, who investigated the mat- 
ter thoroughly, in his work entitled " Dominion," expresses 
the opinion that the great body of the Cushites were finalty ex- 
pelled from Arabia by the Arabs and other Shemites ; and that 
while a remnant probably went eastward to India, the great 
body of the Cushites were pressed into Africa, and occu- 
pied the region on the Nile above Egypt, anciently called 
Ethiopia, but in modern times known as Nubia and Abyssinia. 
That Mizraim, the oldest son of Ham, settled in Egypt, and 
founded the great Egyptian Empire, has never been dis- 
puted. Phut, the fourth son of Ham, settled in Africa west 
of Egypt, and occupied the country extending from the 
shores of the Mediterranean Sea, to the great Sahara 
Desert. These were the ancient Lybians, a portion of whom, 
together with emigrants from Phoenicia, founded the great 
Carthaginian Empire. The Phoenicians were from Tyre and 
Sidon, and were also Hamites, descended from Canaan. 
The descendants, of Phut, in modern times, have been called 
Moors, Berbers, etc. Hundreds of years ago they crossed 
the Mediterranean Sea, and invaded and occupied a large 
part of Spain. The ancient Iberians, found in southwest 
Europe, when the Celts and other Japhethites first reached 



76 MAN. 

the country, were, no doubt, Hamites; originally emi- 
grants from Northern Africa or Phoenicia, or probably both. 
The " Isle of Atlantis, " the brief, sad history of which Plato 
learned from the priests and historians of Egypt, and which 
extended from near the African coast across the Atlantic 
to the neighborhood of the West Indies and South America, 
was, no doubt, also peopled by a Hamitic population from 
northern Africa, and possibly also from Phoenicia, whose 
sailors were great explorers. The civilization and power of 
this people, as reported to Plato, by the Egyptians, clearly 
show that they were not of the inferior types of men. The 
sad fate of the island and its prosperous population which 
sank in the Atlantic Ocean in a single night, will probably 
leave forever their history shrouded in mystery. But the 
details given by Plato, together with the surroundings both 
on the Eastern and Western Continents, and on the interven- 
ing islands, clearly indicate to my mind that these people 
were of Hamitic descent. 

No thoughtful person, who has given any attention to the 
study of Ethnology, will for a moment believe that the 
ancient Peruvians, the Aztecs and Toltecs of Mexico and the 
civilized and semi-civilized people of Central America, who 
occupied the new world on the arrival of the Spaniards, 
were descended from the savage, red Indians, who then re- 
sided on the same continent. These American Indians, by 
their features and habits, clearly show their Mongolic origin, 
and as I have already stated, no doubt passed over from 
Asia via Behring Straits, in all probability before the exist- 
ence of the straits and while the two continents were yet 
connected by land. It is true that these Mongolic invaders 
seem to have overrun nearly every part of both North and 
South America and to have exterminated or driven out many 
of the civilized and semi-civilized people in southern North 



THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 77 

America. Before their victorious march and under their 
exterminating tread, the mound-builders of the United States 
and the ancient population of New Mexico and Arizona 
seem to have utterly disappeared, without even a legend or 
a fable to tell of how they fought and how they fell. And 
no doubt the people who were left in Mexico, Central Amer- 
ica, Peru and other localities, were considerably mixed with 
their savage invaders and conquerors, before the entry of 
the Spaniards into the new world. But that a civilization 
which could produce in Central America and elsewhere 
pyramids and monuments, almost rivaling those of Egpyt, 
could have sprung from the savage, red Indian, is utterly 
preposterous. The remains of ancient cities and monu- 
ments in Central America clearly indicate an intimate 
acquaintance with mathematics, astronomy and the sciences 
generally, as well as a very high degree of art. Who ever 
heard of any tribe of American Indians who understood any- 
thing about the arts and sciences, or. who could ever be made 
to work or study enough to even get a smattering of either? 
The idea is too preposterous to discuss. From whence then 
did this ancient American civilization come? Evidently 
from the East and not from the West. 

All progressive civilization is proceeding from east to 
west ; from western Asia around the earth. We are therefore 
irresistibly driven to the conclusion that the ancient Amer- 
ican civilization came from the eastern continent, by way of 
the island of Atlantis, and that these people were all of Ham- 
itic origin. Let us now briefly consider what are the leading 
characteristics, physical and mental, of the Hamitic family. 
It is generally conceded that while the Japhethites are white 
or fair and the Shemites are brown, or of sunburned appear- 
ance, the Hamites are all black or dark colored. And his- 
tory attests the fact that the Canaanites, Phoenicians, 



78 MAN. 

Egyptians, Lybians, Moors, Carthaginians and all other 
Hamitic nations were dark colored, not negroes, but regular 
featured, dark skinned, black-haired and dark-eyed people. 
Such were the ancient Iberians found in southwest Europe, 
when the first Japhetic immigrants arrived; such were the 
inhabitants of lost Atlantis and such was the physical ap- 
pearance of the Aztecs, Toltecs and other civilized and 
semi-civilized people found in America. Again the Ham- 
itic nations were early distinguished as the builders of great 
cities, mounds, monuments and pyramids, as we find them 
in Egypt, Phoenicia and the works of Nimrod in the neigh- 
borhood of Babylon. Of the same character are the mounds, 
monuments, pyramids and ancient cities of America indica- 
cating a similar civilization and the same character of 
people. The Hamites far excelled the other descendants of 
Noah in material progress. They were the first to build 
great cities and to organize and establish great nations. 

Nimrod, a Hamite, founded Babylon, the greatest city of 
ancient times, and established a great monarchy in the very 
heart of Shem's domain. Mizraim, son of Ham, founded 
Egypt, universally admitted to have been one of the very 
earliest nations of the earth, that attained power and pros- 
perity and a high degree of excellence in the arts and sci- 
ences. It was from this source that classic Greece first 
drew its inspiration and knowledge ; which it imparted to 
Rome and thence to Europe and to America. The Phoeni- 
cian Hamites were the earliest commercial and maritime 
people ; their ships visited all parts of the civilized world, 
and their emigrants founded colonies in Africa, Europe, and, 
as I believe, also in Atlantis, and possibly in America. But 
I have not the time to speak of the great cities and pyramids 
of Egypt, Thebes with its hundred gates, and of ancient 
Memphis, or coming down the stream of time, to describe 



THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 79 

the grandeur and power of Carthage. The material pro- 
gress and development of the Hamitic nations in the early 
ages after the flood, was simply wonderful. While Shem 
was-dreaming in his tents, herding his flocks and nursing his 
religion, and while Japheth was sleeping in log huts, or hunt- 
ing wild beasts in the dense forests of Europe and north- 
west Asia, Ham was marching forward to a high pinnacle 
of material civilization. But it was civilization with neither 
God nor justice in it, and Jehovah, who holds in His hands the 
the destiny of nations as well as men, has stricken it from the 
face of the earth. The despotic governments that were estab- 
lished over the people " neither regarded God nor man." 
They rejected the one true God and worshiped beasts, 
stocks and stones. And they utterly disregarded the rights 
of man, trampling the great mass of the people under the 
most abject and cruel slavery. Therefore to the nations of 
Ham, the handwriting on the wall has long since appeared. 
u Thou art weighed in the balance and found wanting.' ' 

THE JAPHETHITES. 

To Japheth was allotted northwestern Asia, Europe, and 
finally America. The seven sons of Japheth were located as 
follows : To Madai, the father of the Medes, was given a home 
in northwestern Asia, embracing part of the Caucasus moun- 
tains and the regions to the south of them. To the four sons 
of Javan were given the four peninsulas on the Mediterranean 
Sea, Asia Minor, Greece, Italy and Spain. In Asia Minor the 
Ionians and other people developed themselves, in Greece 
the Grecians, in Italy the Romans, in Spain the Spaniards. 
To Tiras, youngest son of Japheth, was given the region west 
of the Euxine, or Black Sea and north of Greece. He is 
believed to be the father of the Thracians, who being pressed 
by surrounding nations, were the first to migrate westward. 



80 MAN. 

The modern Celts are believed to be the descendants of the 
ancient Thracians. They were the first of the Japhetic 
stock to arrive in western Europe. They settled in north- 
ern Italy, France and a part of Spain ; finally crossed the 
channel and peopled the British Islands. The ancient 
Britons, Irish, Welsh, Scots and Picts were all of Celtic 
stock. The Etruscans of northern Italy were probably a 
mixture of Celtic and Javanic stock. The Basques, of 
France and Spain, of which a remnant, yet remains were 
probably a mixture of one of the Japhetic branches with the 
Hamitic population which occupied the country in advance 
of them. It will be observed that the Celtic column of the 
Japhetic population, in its westward course, lay immediately 
north of the Javanic column, which peopled the northern 
shores of the Mediterranean Sea. 

The column of population to the north of the Celtic and 
occupying all the central portions of Europe, and extending 
back into Asia, was that of Gomer, the oldest son of Japheth, 
the father of all the Gomerites, or Germanic tribes. Gomer 
had three sons, Togarmah, Riphath and Askenas. Gomer, 
through his son, Riphath, is believed to be the father of all 
the Teutons or Germans proper as found in central and 
western Europe. Their migrations to the west were much 
later than those of the Celts. There are three divisions of 
them: First, the Germans proper, Prussians, and other 
German States ; second, the Scandinavians, Swedes, Danes, 
Norwegians, and third, the Anglo-Saxon in England and 
America. Askenas, another son of Gomer, is believed to have 
been the father of the Scythians, whose home was near the 
Black Sea. They were driven west, and are believed to 
now constitute the basis of the Austrians, Servians, Roma- 
nians, etc. Togarmah, the other son of Gomer, was proba- 
bly the ancestor of the white Tartars, or Turks, in Asia, 



THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 81 

now represented in part by the Turks proper in the present 
Turkish Empire. Magog, another son of Japheth, represents 
the ancient Samartians, now the Russians and Poles, who 
settled in northwestern Asia and northeastern Europe, north 
of the Germans. 

Mesheck was the father of the Muscovites, located farther 
northeast in northwestern Siberia, constituting also p&rt of the 
Russian Empire. Tubal, remaining son of Japheth, is sup- 
posed to be the father of the Japhethic Tartars, Huns and 
Maygars, occupying central and eastern Siberia. 

The Japhethites, while they have been the longest in ma- 
turing, have proved themselves to be the most progressive 
and enlightened of the Noachian family. They have not 
progressed in material development and despotism, as did 
the Hamites, but their progress has been on the line of civil 
and religious libert}^ While the Hamite was distinguished 
for material progress, despotic power, and idolatry; the 
Shemite, for a stereotyped civilization -always preserved and 
never improved, and for founding great religious systems ; 
the Japhethite has been distinguished as the defender of 
individual liberty, the preserver of domestic purity, and 
the organizer of the only governments approaching freedom 
and equality that have been established by men on the earth. 
While the Shemite has been a priest and a shepherd, the 
Hamite, a merchant, manufacturer and architect, the Japheth- 
ite has generally been a husbandman cultivating his patch 
and looking after his cattle and horses. And in the deep 
dark forests of eastern Europe and northwestern Asia, he for 
centuries remained in gloom and obscurity, nursing and 
cultivating that sturdy individual liberty, which cropped 
out first in the republics of Greece and Rome, as Japhetic 
civilization first ripened on the shores of the Mediterranean. 

6 



82 MAN. 

The same sturdy spirit and manly independence afterwards 
manifested itself when our ancestors, the Celts, Germans, 
and other tribes of so-called barbarians began to knock at 
the door of the Roman Empire. The Roman historians 
have greatly misrepresented the character, capacity, and civ- 
ilization of their invaders and conquerors. Our ancestors 
were not the barbarians that Rome represented them. They 
had preserved through the long years of obscurity much of 
the civilization originally imparted by God through Noah and 
Japheth. They had never forgotten the art of primitive hus- 
bandry, including the use of all the domestic animals, the 
cultivation of the soil, the erection of houses for homes, 
and the manufacture of clothing including the use of the 
wheel and loom. They had always cooked their food, 
observed the marriage relation, and kept up a kind of tribal 
democratic government. It is true that they had forgotten 
the one true and living God and worshiped the sun, moon, 
and forces of nature. But once enlightened by the truth of 
revelation they have always readily accepted the gospel and 
returned to their allegiance to God. Since the Reformation 
of the sixteenth century and the printing and distribution 
of the Bible among the people, they have become the most 
progressive and enlightened people of earth ; and have estab- 
lished in the wilderness of America the United States gov- 
ernment, fully recognizing and protecting both civil and 
religious liberty. And the reflex influence from the Ameri- 
can Republic has established a republic in France, inaugur- 
ated practical freedom in Great Britain, sowed the seeds of 
revolution in Ireland, and put the leaven of liberty into the 
whole of the European people, which is rapidly working up 
the political and religious salvation of the races. While in 
material progress, invention, discovery, and labor-saving 



THE NOACHIAN FAMILY. 83 

machinery the people of the United States have made more 
progress in the last fifty years than the whole world had 
made in all time before. 

Ham had his great builders and warriors, such as Cheops, 
Nimrod, and Hannibal ; Shem his priests and prophets, such 
as Moses, Elijah, and John the Baptist. Japheth, his philos- 
ophers, reformers, statesmen, and inventors, such as Soc- 
rates, Bacon, Luther, Washington, Jefferson, Franklin, Ful- 
ton, and Morse. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE PRE-ADAMITES, OR REVELATION AND SCIENCE 
RECONCILED. 

[HE ordinary division of the human race into the Aryan, 
Semitic and Turanian families is incorrect and unphil- 
osophical. The so-called Turanian is nothing more nor 
less than the Mongolic branch, or some of the types thereof. 
The Aryan is simply the Japhetic branch of the Noachian 
family. While the so-called Semitic comprises both the 
Shemitic and Hamitic families. The two latter are said to 
be in the structure of their respective languages very similar. 
The finding of evidences of the Aryan language in Persia 
and India is accounted for in the historical fact that Madai, 
one of the sons of Japheth, and his entire posterity, have ever 
remained in Asia. P>om Madai came the ancient Iranians, 
as well as the Medes, who were associated with the Persians 
in nationality and government. All the emigrations made 
by this Japhetic family were to the southeast, and it is be- 
lieved that there was an early migration from the ancient 
Iranians to India which accounts for the evidences of an 
Aryan civilization in that country. 

The term Caucasian is also used by different writers in 
different senses, and it is always misleading. Some apply 
it to the descendants of Noah ; some to the Japhetic family 
only ; some to only a portion of the Japhethites. Winchell 
and others use the term " Mediterranean " as descriptive of 
certain nations which settled around that great sea. This 
term might very properly describe the entire Noachian 
(84) 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. 85 

family, because the great history-making nations which de- 
scended from Noah settled on the three sides of this great 
inland sea. The Shemites on the east, the Hamites on the 
south and southeast, and Japhethites on the north and north- 
east. On the waters of the Mediterranean floated the first 
ships ; on its historic bosom was found the immense com- 
merce and the mighty fleets of the great nations of an- 
tiquity ; and on and around its shores have been wrought the 
grandest events recorded on the pages of history. There is, 
therefore, no impropriety in terming the nations descended 
from Noah, the Mediterranean nations. But when we go to 
subdivide and classify these, the only true division is that 
found in the Bible, and is based on the three sons of Noah : 
the Shemitic nations from Shem ; the Hamitic nations from 
Ham, and the Japhetic nations from Japheth, as we find it 
recorded in the tenth chapter of Genesis. 

All types, families, and stocks not included under the 
three sons of Noah, are Pre-Noachians, and necessarily Pre- 
Adamites. The term Turanian seems to have been applied 
first to the Tartar stock, a type of the Mongolian branch of 
the human race ; and now is used in a sort of indefinite 
sense ; but if it means anything in particular, applies to the 
entire Mongolic type of men. 

At all events the term Turanian will not apply to any part 
of the Noachian family, and must, necessarily, apply to Pre- 
Noachians, or Pre- Adamites, as will clearly appear from the 
following lengthy extract, which I take the liberty of making 
from that elaborate work, Winchell's " Pre- Adamites. " 

Prof. Winchell says : — 

** We find traces of an antediluvian, Tatar, or Turanian pop- 
ulation throughout Asia. It is not long since historians and 
ethnologists first noted the monumental and linguistic evi- 
dences of an older Hamitic stratum underlying the recog- 



86 MAN. 

nized Semitic civilizations of Babylonia and Assyria, and 
even of Canaan and Phoenicia. Now they inform us that 
unmistakable traces remain of a wide-spread Turanian 
stratum of people, still older than the first Hamitic settle- 
ments. Pritchard says : ' The Allophyllian nations appear 
to have been spread, in the earliest times, through all the 
most remote regions of the old continent — to the northward, 
eastward, and westward of the Indo-European tribes, whom 
they seem everywhere to have preceded ; so that they ap- 
pear, in comparison with these Indo-European colonies, in 
the light of aboriginal or native inhabitants, vanquished, and 
often banished into remote and inaccessible tracts by more 
powerful invading tribes.' Canon George Rawlinson de- 
clares that everywhere Tatar tribes had preceded the spread- 
ing Noachid£e ; and he holds that the primitive language of 
all Asia was Turanian or Tatar. 'A Turanian language,' 
he says, ' extended from the Caucasus to the Indian Ocean, 
and from the shores of the Mediterranean to the mouths of 
the Ganges. We might, perhaps, largely extend these lim* 
its, and say that the whole eastern hemisphere was originally 
occupied by a race or races whose various dialects pos- 
sessed the charcteristics of the linguistic type in question ' 
[Turanian]. Again, he saj^s: ' The Aramaeans, Susianians 
or Elymaeans, the early Babylonians, the inhabitants of the 
south coast of Arabia, the original people of the Great 
Iranic Plateau, and of the Kurdish Mountains, and the 
primitive populations of India, can be shown, it is said, to 
have possessed dialects of this character ; while probability 
is strongly in favor of the same general occupation of the 
wholeregion by persons speaking the same type of language. ' 
Rawlinson, it is true, does not distinguish, in all cases, be- 
tween indications of a Hamitic and indications of a Tur- 
anian population, as we now distinguish them. He regards 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. 87 

the Turanian as the original Noachite tongue, and seems to 
hold that proper Hamitic and Semitic dialects came into ex- 
istence by improvement and absorption of the Turanian. 
In his 'Table of Races,' 1 indeed, he makes the 'Hamitic 
or Cushite ' and the ' Scythic or Tatar,' families of the 
' Turanian ' race. But this affiliation of the Scyths is not 
admitted by ethnologists ; nor do philologists permit us to 
confound Hamitic and Tatar languages. It is true that the 
Accadian, or primitive Hamite language of Assyria — called 
Turanian by Oppert — resembles the Finnish in the loose 
attachment of suffixes for numeral and pronominal purposes. 
Nevertheless, the verb ' forms its definitions chiefly by pre- 
fixes, and is thus completely alien to the style of the North 
Asiatic [Turanian] languages.' The attempt to merge to- 
gether primitive Turanian and Hamitic dialects in the inter- 
ests of a theory of a universal Flood is less sagacious than 
the recognition of a Turanian element as a fact in the prim- 
itive history of man. That the Turanian dialect was the 



1 Kawlinson, Herodotus, Vol. I, p. 531. He seems drawn into 
this arrangement by a preconceived belief that the Turanians must 
be accommodated among the Noachites. Why the three primary 
families descended from Noah should be set down as " Indo-Euro- 
pean," " Semitic " and "Turanian," instead of Indo-European, 
Semitic and Hamitic, I am unable to understand, though I perceive 
at once how such an arrangement accommodates traditional opin- 
ions. In regard to the Scythians, it ought to be said that the 
author, in his third volume, in an essay " On the Ethnography of 
the European Scyths," concludes that the Scythians were not Mon- 
golians, but members of the Indo-Germanic race. Language, as 
Mr. Grote correctly observes, is the only sure test; and language 
pronounces unmistakably in favor of the Indo-European, and against 
the Mongol theory." {Herodotus, Vol. III., p. 167). Compare the 
tifth chapter of the present work. 



88 MAN. 

language of Noah, and that the Hamitic was the same under 
the influence of culture and civilization, may be correct in a 
developmental sense ; but in view of the common conception 
of linguistic distinctions it is a pure assumption, equaled 
only by the assumption that the Aryan languages grew up 
in a similar way. The Turanian was a distinct language, 
spoken by a distinct race ; and the trilingual inscriptions of 
oriental monarchs include the Turanian, for the purpose of 
notifying Turanian neighbors, and probably a considerable 
Turanian constituency, of the exploits of victorious poten- 
tates. 

44 A Pre-Hamitic population is recognized by Mr. C. L. 
Brace, an author of acumen and erudition, who after stating 
that we recognize, in primitive times, four families of lan- 
guages, the Turanian, the Semitic, the Aryan, and the Ham- 
itic, says : ' The most ancient of these great families is the 
Turanian. * * * The Turanians were probably the first 
who figured in the ante -historical period. Their emigrations 
began long before the wanderings of the Aiyans and Semites, 
who, wherever they went, always discovered a previous popu- 
lation, apparently Turanian in origin, which they either ex- 
pelled or subdued.' The first or 4 Medean ' dynasty (so 
called), in the annals of Babylonia, is regarded by Mr. Brace 
as a Turanian empire. 4 Its Turanian character is derived 
from the inscriptions, which are in Turanian grammar, 
though with Hamitic vocabulary, indicating a great mixture 
with Hamitic population.' Simultaneously the Chinese 
empire rose into existence. 

44 Francois Lenormant, an eminent original authority, affirms 
the existence of a pronounced Turanian element in the earli- 
est population and languages of the Mesopotamian regions. 
4 To the earliest date that the monuments carry us back, we 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. 89 

can distinguish, in this very mixed population of Babylonia 
and Chaldsea, two principal elements, two great nations, the 
Shumir and the Accad, who lived to the north and to the 
south of the country.' The Shumir were Turanian, and 
had their capital at Sumere. The Accad were Cushite, and 
had their capital southward from the others, at Accad. The 
Sumerites spoke a dialect of the Uralo-Finnish family. Le- 
normant continues : 4 The Turanians were one of the first 
races to spread out into the world, before the time of the 
great Semetic and Aryan migrations ; and they covered a 
great extent of territory, both in Asia and Europe. They 
then occupied all that district between the Tigris and the 
Indus, afterward conquered by the Iranians ; and they also 
held the greater part of India [referring to the Dravidians] . 
When the Semites on the one hand, and the Aryans on the 
other, had finished their migrations and were finally estab- 
lished, there always remained between them a separating 
belt of Turanian people, penetrating, like a wedge, as far as 
the Persian Gulf, and occupying the- mountains between 
Persia and the Tigro-Euphrates basin.' Media was popu- 
lated partly by a Turanian race, which also formed ' a 
notable portion of the population of Susiana. * * * 
The primitive center whence all the Turanian people had 
spread into the world was toward the east of Lake Aral. 
There, from very remote antiquity, they had possessed a 
peculiar civilization, characterized by gross Sabeism. * * * 
This strange and incomplete civilization exercised over a 
great part of Asia an absolute preponderance, lasting, accord- 
ing to the historian Justin, fifteen hundred years. All the 
Turanians of Asia carried this civilization with them into the 
countries they colonized.' The language of the Median 
Turanians, according to Westergaard, was decidedly Turkish 



90 MAN. 

in its affinities ; the Chaldsean Turanian was Ural-Finnish ; 
the Susianian was a connecting link between the latter and 
the Dravidian. i The Turanians brought to Babylon and 
Assyria that singular system of writing called cuneiform. ' 
The nature of the symbols employed in this writing ' appar- 
ently points, as the place where that writing was invented, 
to a region very different from Chalclcea, a more northern 
region whose fauna and flora were markedly different, where, 
for example, neither the lion nor any other large feline car- 
nivora, were known, and where there were no palm-trees.' 
" One can hardly understand how Lenormant, after enun- 
ciating such conclusions, can avoid the ulterior conclusion 
that the Turanians were Pre-Noachites. He traces them, 
however, to Magog of the Japhetic family — leaving, never- 
theless, the Chinese to stand as descendants of non-Noachite 
antediluvians, and thus disrupting a race which, at least in 
Asia, is one, physically and linguistically, to satisfy the de- 
mands of a theory of diluvial universality, which, in spite of 
this expedient, he sets aside at last. Now, when we admit, 
for once, the Pre-Noachite origin of all Mongoloids, a most 
sensible relief is felt. It is no longer necessary to confound 
Turanians and Gomerians ; it is no longer necessary to resist 
the evidence of the Japhetic descent of the Scythians, a 
branch of the Gomerians, or suppose that a Japhetic twig, 
in being named Turanian, becomes the comprehensive type 
*of both Semitic and Hamitic peoples — Japhetic, Turanian, 
Hamitic and Semitic, all at once! It is no longer necessary 
to assume that the descendants of Gomer spread themselves 
all over Asia and Europe, while the Hamites and Semites, 
and the other Japhethites, were holding back, to give this 
particular tribe of Japhet time to pre-empt the world, and 
become more populous than all the other sixty or more Gen- 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. 91 

esiacal sons and grandsons of Noah. 1 It is no longer 
necessary to sunder into two widely separate stocks the 
Mongoloid nations of Asia, whom all ethnologists have 
found united, and whose profound affinity is disclosed by 
all linguistic researches. It is no longer necessary to con- 
found with Turanians and Japhetites, and finally Harnites 
and Semites, the Dravidians, whom ethnology, following 
linguistics, has so decisively separated. All the facts dis- 
closed by Assyro-Babylonian and Persepolitan researches 
are much more readily co-ordinated with the theory of Pre- 
Noachites, and even of Pre-Adamites, than with the old and 
distorted, and unbiblical, theory of the descent of all the 
races from Noah. I confidently leave the presumption with 
the reader. The argument becomes still stronger when we 
learn that even the Asiatic Mongoloids — Turanians and 
Chinese alike — were not a primordial population. 

" The Chinese, Mongoloids as they are, have succeeded to a 
primitive population considerably inferior to them in racial 
characteristics, as they manifestly were in civilization. The 
relics of the aboriginal population still lead a half savage life 
in some of the mountainous districts of China. 

" The Ainos, now confined chiefly to the island of Yeso, are 
regarded as the remnants of a primitive people to whom the 



1 It is the opinion of some that the name Scythian, a strictly 
Japhetic word, was extended from the Japhetic Scythians to simi- 
lar nomadic Turanian hordes in Asia. This idea receives a quasi- 
recognition by Lenormant in his second volume (pp. 126-130) 
This is not unlikely; but what, in this case, becomes of the theory 
that these very Asiatic Turanians are to be accounted for by 
ascribing them to a Gomerian ancestry? If they are Gomerians 
they are not Turanians; if they are Turanians, they are not Gomer- 
ians — and then, what are they, in the Noachic ethnography? 



92 MAN. 

Coreans and Japanese have succeeded. Related to them, 
however, are the inhabitants of southern Saghalien, and the 
Kurile islands, and the Giliaks on the lower Amoor. The 
Ai'nos, while in many respects resembling the Japanese, are 
distinguished by a luxuriant beard, bushy and curly hair of 
the head, and a general hirsuteness of the body. 

Throughout the region of the northern Asiatics we find 
similar remnants of primeval populations possessing distinct 
features and dialects, though in both giving evidence of their 
substantial identity with the Mongoloid or Turanian race. 
Of this class of residual populations I believe all those whose 
languages stand apart from other prevailing Mongoloid 
types may be regarded as examples. They are mere outliers 
of an ancient population, which, like the islets that mark the 
place of a wasted continent, remain as outstanding testi- 
monies of its former existence. Such detatched tribes are 
the Ostiaks of the Yenesei (not of the Obi), who, though 
speaking six peculiar dialects, are reduced to one thousand 
individuals ; and the Yukagiri, who have so recently become 
extinct from certain islands of New Siberia that vestiges of 
them still remain. 

" From many and various indications, therefore, it appears 
that the greater part of the continent of Asia has been over- 
spread fry a primitive Mongolian race, of which all the 
historical, and now dominant, races — not less the Chinese 
and Japanese than the Noachites — are the successors. In 
the peninsula of India, however, the indigenous race was not 
Mongoloid. I have recalled the facts, 1 now notorious, estab- 
lishing the presence of an indigenous non-Mongoloid people 
in Hindustan, whom the encroaching Noachites of the Aryan 
family gradually displaced or absorbed. Though this race, 



1 In chapter vi. 



THE PRE- ADAMITES. 93 

physically, has almost disappeared, except so far as it forms 
a visible constituent in the modern Hindu race, the imper- 
ishable fragments of its language have survived in great 
abundance. The Dravida were a brown race, like the Mon- 
goloids, and it is a fact of profound interest that their 
language also presented such Turanian resemblance that 
some philologists have been disposed to regard it a sister of 
the primitive Mongoloid. These facts carry our thoughts 
back to a time when the primitive Mongoloids and primitive 
Dravida were co-possessors of the Asiatic continent, speak- 
ing cognate dialects of a parent tongue, which had been 
dually transformed, with the disappearance of the Pre-Mon- 
goloid type of humanity which was superseded by the brown 
races of ancient and modern times. 

" Evidences exist of a Pre-Hamitic population in the valley 
of the Nile. The Egyptian language is neither properly 
Hamitic nor Semitic. It is regarded by some philologists as 
representing the transition from Turanian to Semitic. 

" Turning our attention to the European continent, we dis- 
cover that every Asiatic immigration of which we possess 
any knowledge encountered populations already in posses- 
sion of the soil. 

41 The ancient poets and historians have left us numerous 
accounts of a barbarous people who inhabited Europe before 
the advent of representatives of Noachites, or the Mediter- 
ranean race. They were described as dwelling in caverns, 
and having no knowledge of the metals, nor of the arts of 
weaving, plowing and navigation. They were unacquainted 
with domestic animals, save the sheep and the goat. They 
belonged to an unfamiliar race, and had no knowledge of 
the gods or the religion of their Asiatic invaders. JEschy- 
lus, in the * Prometheus Bound,' describes Prometheus 
as first introducing the plow and beasts of burden. Prome- 



94 MAN. 

theus was represented as the ancestor of the Greeks. 
iEschylus wrote 470 B. C. Homer, who wrote at an earlier 
date, tells us that in the time of Ulysses (1250 B. C), men 
were still in possession of some parts of Europe who lived in 
caverns among the mountains. They did not labor; they 
did not even cultivate the soil. They possessed goats and 
herds, but no horses. They were ignorant of navigation. 
They were known as Cyclopes — the children of Heaven and 
earth, says Hesiod, 1 while the Greeks were descended from 
Prometheus, the son of Japetus (Japheth), who was also 
the offspring of Heaven and earth. Thus the Greeks and 
Cyclopes had no human ancestor in common. Their diver- 
gence is further shown by the ignorance which Polyhemus 
avows of the Greek Zeus and the other all-powerful gods. 
They were ignorant even of the name of Zeus, though among 
the ancestors of the Greeks that name was honored from the 
Ganges to the Euxine. The Cyclopes or cave-dwellers, 
therefore, were not Greeks nor Indo-Europeans. That they 
were neither Semites, nor Hamites, is justly inferred from the 
fact that the migration-courses of these families, according to 
all admission, did not carry them, in primitive times, across 
the European boundary. 

''According to Thucydides, the Cyclopes preceded the 
Sicanes in Sicily. The Sicanes were of the Iberian stock, 
and are believed to have arrived in Sicily about 2,000 B. C. 
Who the Iberians were is still a matter of some doubt. 
They did not belong, apparently, to the Mediterranean race ; 
but this is a subject which I shall consider hereafter (chapter 
XXIII.). Aristotle also speaks of the Cyclopes, and, citing 
from Homer, tells us that each father of a family ruled over 
the women and children of his household. The same ideas 



Hesiod, Theogony, vers. 133, 139. That is, " Sons of God." 



THE PKE-ADAMITES. 95 

are set forth more at length by Plato. Pausanias, who 
wrote in the first half of the second century after Christ, 
says thatPelagos — a personification of Pelagos (as Hellen, 
of the Hellenes) — found the Cyclopes in the Peloponnesus ; 
that they neither built houses nor wore clothing ; that they 
subsisted on leaves and herbs and roots ; and that Pelagos 
taught them to construct cabins, and to clothe themselves 
with the skins of the wild boar. Diodorus Siculus, who 
wrote in the first century before our era, tells us that the 
most ancient inhabitants of Crete, also, were dwellers in 
caverns, and destitute of all the arts, until the Pelasgic 
Curetes taught them the first elements of civilization. 
According to Virgil, the population of cave-dwellers also 
spread over Italy — autochthonous fauns and nymphs — a 
race of men born from the hard trunks of the oak, living 
without laws or civilivation. Pausanias informs us that a 
similar people inhabited Sardinia. Diordous Siculus states 
that the inhabitants of the Balearic Islands still dwelt in 
caverns in the first century before our era, and wore no cloth- 
ing during the summer. Strabo, a little later, names four 
Sardinian tribes who had not yet learned to build cabins. 

" As to the ethnic affinities of these Pre-Noachite popula- 
tions of Europe, I think there are good reasons for regarding 
them as near relatives of the Asiatic Mongoloids. Several 
historical allusions seem to sustain the opinion that they be- 
longed to the Finnish family. In the time of Tacitus — 
about A. D. 100 — the Finns of Scandanavia and the north 
of modern Russia still supported themselves by the chase, 
and were ignorant of the use of metal, and pointed their 
arrows with bone. 

" They had no horses ; they built no houses ; they wove no 
cloth. They did not, indeed, dwell in caverns, but erected 
a sort of hurdles or rude shelters for protection against rain 



96 MAN. 

and snow. In our own times, the Finns are driven into still 
narrower limits by the continued encroachments of the Indo- 
Europeans ; but according to Grimm, linguistic affinities 
justify us in regarding the Finns as the modern remnants of 
the Cyclopean population which spread over Europe before 
the advent of the Pelasgians and Iberians, in the southeast 
and southwest of the continent, about two thousand years 
before the Christian era. 

" Rawlinson says the "Kelts, found the central and western 
countries of Europe either without inhabitants, or else very 
thinly peopled by a Tartar race. 1 This race, where it ex- 
isted, everywhere yielded to them, and was gradually ab- 
sorbed, or else driven toward the north, where it is found, at 
the present day, in the persons of the Finns, Esths, and 
Lapps.' He adds: 4 It is now generally believed that 
there is a large Tartar admixture in most Keltic races in, 
consequence of this absorption.' The Tartar indigenes, 
he says may also have been, in part, driven westward. 
* The mysterious Cynetians who dwelt west of the Kelts, 
may have been a remnant of the primitive Tartar occupants. 
So, too, may have been the Iberians of the Spanish pen- 
insula. ' 

" * In the Spanish peninsula,' says Niebuhr, l it is not 
quite certain whether, on their arrival, they (the Kelts) 
found Iberians or not ; but if not, these latter must have 
shortly crossed over from the African main ; and it was in 
consequence of the gradual pressure exerted by this people 
upon the Kelts in Spain, that the further migrations of the 
Keltic tribes took place.' 



1 While the Kelts in central and northern Gaul were confronted 
by an indigenous Tartar population, they were opposed in the 
south by the Pelasgic Illyrians. See chapter V. 



THE PKE-ADAMITES. 97 

" Now, it is generally held that the Basques are a remnant 
of the ancient Iberes. They number about a half a million. 
They speak a language known as- Euscara, and dwell in the 
northeast provinces of Spain, and a small district in the south- 
west of France. 'The old geographers,' says Peschel, 
4 called them Iberians ; they then peopled the whole of 
Spain and the southwest of France, but were early driven 
toward the west and south by the Kelts, and intermixing with 
them, in the district of the present Catalonian dialect, con- 
stituted the Keltiberians. * * * According to Paul 
Broca, their language stands quite alone, or has mere analo- 
gies with the American type. * * * Of all Europeans, 
we must provisionally hold the Basques to be the oldest in- 
habitants of our quarter of the world.' 

" The Euscara ' has some common traits with the Magyar, 
Osmanli and other dialects of the Altai family ; as, for in- 
stance, with the Finnic on the old continent, as well as the 
Algonkin Lenape language and some others in Amer- 
ica. * * * For this reason the Bascongadas (Basques) 
are classed by some with the remains of the Finnish stem of 
Europe, in the Ubic family of nations ; by others, in that of 
the Allophyle 1 race. * * * The settlements of Phoeni- 
cians, Greeks, and Carthaginians [Noachites] on the coasts 
of the Mediterranean sea are of much later date,' than the 
conflict of the Kelts and Iberians. 

" ' Before this epoch ' [1400 B.C.], says Le Hon, 'history 
establishes the existence on the soil of Spain of the great 
nation of Iberians, which is affiliated in no respect with the 
Indo-European race, neither by its physical type nor by its 



1 Then Allophyle type of Quatrefages embraces the Esthonians, 
the Caucasians (m the restricted sense) and the Ainos. The term 
was introduced by Pritchard. 

7 



98 MAN. 

language.' As Hamites and Semites never invaded west- 
ern Europe, in these early times, the Iberians, according to 
Le Hon, were not Noachites. Similarly, M. Maspero ad- 
vances the opinion that the Basques, the descendants of the 
Iberians, are Turanians, of the same race as the Finns. 

"It appears, therefore, to be generally agreed that the 
Basques are a remnant of the ancient Iberians, and that 
they possess no ethnic affinities with the Noachites traced 
from their Asiatic center ; but do indicate physical and 
linguistic relations with the type of Mongoloids. History, 
tradition, linguistics, and ethnology conspire to fortify the 
conclusion that in prehistoric times all Europe was over- 
spread by the Mongoloid race, of which remnants have sur- 
vived to our times, in the persons of the Basques, Finns, 
Esths, Lapps, and some smaller tl•ibes. ,, 

From the foregoing extract, it clearly appears, first, that 
the Turanians were no part of the Noachian family ; and sec- 
ondly, that said term does apply to a very extensive type or 
types of mankind, which existed prior to Noah, if not prior to 
Adam. And thirdly, that these Pre- Adamites had extended 
to nearly every part of the habitable globe, while the Noachian 
family, as well as the previous posterity of Adam, was con- 
fined to a very limited area of the earth's surface. I wish in 
this connection to submit the following, to nry mind, unan- 
swerable argument, in favor of the existence of Pre- Adamites 
viz. : According to the orthodox chronology, it has only been 
about six thousand years since the creation of Adam ; and all 
men who ever lived on the earth are descended from him. 
It has only been a little over four thousand years since the 
flood, which destroyed every human being except Noah and 
his family. Consequently all the races and types of men 
now on the earth have descended from Noah ; all that ever 
have lived on the earth are descended either from Noah or 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. 99 

Adam. This is regarded as the Bible view of the matter by 
the orthodox. I hold that I have clearly disproved this 
proposition. First, by showing what nations have descended 
from Noah, and that there are no negroes or Indians among 
them. In fact none of the inferior types. Secondly, the 
Noachian nations, are mainly still residing in the countries 
in which they were originally located and except their emi- 
gration to America, have changed their original habitation 
but little, and that they cover but a small part of the earth 
while the human race is found in every part of the habitable 
globe. Thirdly, the fossil remains of man have been found 
in nearly every part of the earth ; and science has clearly de- 
monstrated that many of these types lived thousands of years 
before the advent of Adam on the earth. It is argued by 
Ethnologists and Archaeologists generally that man was cer- 
tainly on the earth as early as the breaking up of the Glacial 
period and many hold that he was here during if not before 
the Glaciers. The following facts cited by A. De Quatre- 
fages in his work entitled the Human Species, bear directly 
on this question. I make the following extracts from pages 
141 to 153 of the said work. 

AGE OF THE HUMAN SPECIES PAST GEOLOGICAL EPOCHS. 

I. The skovmoses and the remains at Schluessenried have 
shown that man existed in Europe at the close of the Glacial 
Epoch. But did he live through this epoch? Did he pre- 
cede it? Has he, therefore, been contemporary with vegeta- 
ble and animal species, which have long been considered as 
fossils ? We know that we can with certainty reply in the 
affirmative to these questions. We know also that the 
proof of this great fact, one of the grandest scientific 
conquests of modern times, dates, so to speak, from 
yesterday. 



100 MAN. 

This demonstration rests on proofs which are now so well 
known that the enumeration of them will be sufficient. It 
is evident that human bones, buried beneath an undisturbed 
layer of soil, prove the existence of man at the time when 
the layer was formed. It is no less clear that flints worked 
by human hands and made into hatchets, knives, etc., bones 
of animals made into harpoons and arrow-heads, are so 
many irrefutable testimonies of the existence of the workers. 
Lastly, when human bones are found associated with bones 
of animals in the same undisturbed layers, it is again evident 
that man and these animal species have been contempora- 
neous. 

Many facts included in these three categories were proved 
in the earlier years, and during the course of the last century. 
Since 1700, excavations made by the order of Duke Eber- 
hard Louis de Wurtemburg at Canstadt, near Stuttgard, 
brought to light a great number of bones of animals, among 
which was found a human cranium. The nature of this pre- 
cious relic was, however, only recognized by Jaeger in 1835. 

About the same time an Englishman, Kemp, found in 
London itself, side by side with teeth of elephants, a stone 
hatchet similar to those of St. Acheul. Some time after 
Esper in Germany, and John Frere in England discovered 
more or less analogus facts. But none of them were able 
to recognize their significance, for geology was quite in its 
infancy, and palaeontology not yet in existence. 

II. It was not till 1823 that Amy Boue gave Cuvier some 
human bones which he had found in the loess of the Rhine, 
near Lahr, in the Duchy of Baden. Boue regarded these 
bones as fossils. Cuvier refused to admit this conclusion. 
He has often been reproached with this, but the reproach 
is unjust. Cuvier had too often seen pretended fossil men 
change either into mastodons or salamanders, or even into 



THE PRE- ADAMITES. 101 

simple contorted blocks of sandstone, not to be on his guard, 
and, in presence of a fact hitherto unique, he thought it 
wiser to admit a disturbance which would have carried into 
the loess bones of much later date than that of the formation 
of this layer. 

But Cuvier, whatever may have been said of him, 
never denied the possibility of the discovery of fossil men. 
He has, on the contrary, formally admitted the existence of 
our species as anterior to the latest revolutions of the globe. 
"Man," he says, "may have inhabited some country of 
small extent from which he repeopled the earth after these 
terrible events.' ' We see that the praises and reproaches 
which have been addressed to our great naturalist on account 
of an opinion which he never held, are equally undeserved. 

The reserve, perhaps exaggerated, which Cuvier imposed 
upon himself, and the confidence which was placed in him, 
weighed heavily upon science by impeding, the comprehen- 
sion of the value of observations made by Tournal ( 1828- 
1829) in L'Aude, by Christol (1829) in Le Gard ; by 
Schmerling (1833) in Belgium ; by Joly (1835) in Lozere ; 
by Marcel de Serres (1839), in L'Aude, and by Lund (1844) 
in Brazil. In 1845 almost all the savants, properly so called, 
shared the opinion so well stated by Desnoyers. Without 
regarding the existence of fossil man as impossible, they did 
not think that the discovery had as yet been made. 

It is to the persevering efforts of a distinguished archaeol- 
ogist, Boucher de Perthes, that we owe the proof of a fact 
so long denied, and now universally admitted. Under the 
influence of certain philosophical ideas, little calculated to 
procure him followers, he had admitted a priori the existence 
of human beings anterior to the present man from whom 
they must have differed considerably. He hoped to find 
either their remains themselves, or the products of their in- 



102 MAN. 

dustry, in the upper alluvial deposits. Watching either 
himself or through his agents the excavation of the gravel 
pits near Abbeville, he collected there a number of flints, 
more or less rudely worked, but bearing the unmistakable 
impress of the hand of man. Some of his publications 
(1837) brought him visitors, who in their turn carried on the 
search. Soon after, M. Regollot (1855) and M. Gaudrey 
(1856) obtained from the gravel of St. Acheul hatchets sim- 
ilar to those of Abbeville, and declared themselves convinced. 
The English savants, Falconer, Prestwich, and Lyell, after 
having visited the collection of Boucher de Perthes, did the 
same and had many imitators. 

III. In spite of the discoveries which were multiplied in 
caverns and gravel-pits, even in the neighborhood of Paris, 
the same objections were brought against the believers in 
fossil man which Cuvier had opposed to Amy Boue. 
The juxtaposition of the remains of extinct animals and 
human bones, or articles of human workmanship, 
were attributed to a reformation effected by water. 
The high authority of M. de Bramont lent new force to this 
argument. He compared the alluvium of the neighborhood 
of Abbeville to his terrains des pentes, formed, he said, by 
storms of an exceptional violence, which only happened once 
in a thousand years, and which heap up together materials 
derived from different beds. As for the objects discovered in 
caverns they inspired still less confidence than the others, 
on account of the ease with which the bed might be under- 
mined by eddies, which would tend to deposit in the heart 
of a subjacent layer objects derived from the upper layers, 
without destroying either the one or the other. 

Many men of high intellect still hesitated, until M. Lartet 
published his remarkable work upon the grotto of Aurignac 
(1861). Here doubt was impossible. This grotto, or rather 



THE PHE-ADAMITES. 103 

rock-shelter, was closed at the time of its discovery by a 
slab of stone brought from a distance ; M. Lartet discov- 
ered either in the interior or at the entrance, the bones of 
eight or nine species of animals which are essentially charac- 
teristic of quaternary deposits. In his memoir he gives 
details of all the remains. Some of these animals had evi- 
dently been eaten upon the spot, their bones, partly carbon- 
ized, still bore the trace of fire, the charcoal and ashes of 
which were discovered ; those of a young tichorhine rhi- 
noceros showed marks made by flint implements, and their 
spongy extremities had been gnawed by carnivora; the 
species of the latter was shown by his excrement, which was 
recognized as that of the hyena spelcea. 

The grotto or rock-shelter of Aurignac is excavated in a 
small mountainous group, a spur of the plateau of Lanem- 
ezan, which the Pyrenean drift has never reached. It is, 
therefore, free from the objections drawn from the inter- 
vention of aqueous currents. Thus the facts made known 
by M. Lartet were generally accepted at once in their full- 
est signification. These facts show that man lived in the 
midst of a quarternary fauna, which he used as food, includ- 
ing the rhinoceros, and was followed by the hyena of this 
epoch, who finished the remains of his meals. The co-ex- 
istence of man with these fossil species was proved. 

A few ill-judged attacks were still made by savants, who 
did not accept the testimony of these facts, among others 
that of the discovery of a human jaw made by Boucher de 
Perthes. But the discoveries became so numerous that the 
last among them was soon reduced to silence, and had to 
submit to the mention of fossil man without raising the 
slightest protest. 

IV. It would be too tedious and, indeed, useless to enu- 
merate here all these discoveries. I will only mention some 



104 MAN. 

of the most striding ones associated with the names of Lar- 
tet and Christy, his enthusiastic colleague. At Les Eyzies, 
these indefatigable investigators discovered a stalagmitic 
layer formed of a veritable breccia, which contained worked 
flints, ashes, charcoal, and bones of different quarternary 
animals. Large slabs of this breccia now figure in many 
collections. In this same grotto they found a vertebra of a 
young reindeer pierced by a flint which had broken in the 
bone, thus causing the death of the animal. Finally, in 
1864, M. Lartet had the pleasure of being present at the dis- 
covery of a plate of mammoth ivory, upon which a repre- 
sentation of the animal itself had been carved with a sharp 
flint by an artist of La Madeleine. In this drawing are 
found the characteristic traits of the mammoth, as they are 
known to us from the remains of the animal which are at 
times found preserved, with its thick fur and long hair, in 
the ice of Siberia. 

For man to be able to draw the portrait of any animal 
species, he must have been contemporaneous with it. Now 
proofs of this nature have rapidly become more numerous 
and striking. In PAriege M. Garrigou found a representa- 
tion of the cave bear traced on a pebble. M. de Vibraye 
extracted from the grotto of Laugerie Basse a sketch of a 
fight between reindeer remarkably well drawn upon a piece 
of schist. The same animal has been discovered represented 
in sculpture in the same rock-shelter, and again in the rock- 
shelter of Montastruc, where M. Peccadeau de PIsle found 
his wonderful dagger-handles. 

I need not speak here of the weapons, tools and instru- 
ments of every kind, from the simple knife to the barbed 
arrow-heads and harpoons, to laurel- leaf shaped lance-heads, 
and daggers toothed and grooved, which equal the finest 
specimens found in Denmark. I will only remark that all 



THE PRE- ADAMITES. 105 

these objects prove the existence of man, and that we now 
count by the thousand articles made by him during the geo- 
logical period preceding our own. 

Without being nearly so abundant, the remains of man 
himself have been discovered in every part of the quarter- 
nary formation. Although several European states have 
contributed towards this mass of discoveries, by far the 
greater number occurred in France and Belgium. 

I can not here enter into details, some of which will be 
more advantageously discussed in another part of the book. 
I will only mention the cave of Cro-Magnon, which was dis- 
covered by the railway engineers in 1860, not far from the 
station of Les Eyzies, and which has given us the type of 
one of the best characterized fossil races. Nor can I pass 
over in silence the successful and laborious researches made 
by M. Martin from 1867 to 1873 in the quarries near Paris, 
the result of which enabled M. Hamy to fix the succession 
of types in our immediate neighborhood. Lastly, I would 
allude to the investigations of M. Dupont in the valley of 
the Lesse. Commenced in 1864, and continued during seven 
years with an unequaled activity, they have presented to 
the Museum at Brussels about eighty thousand worked flints 
forty thousand bones of animals, now all named, the crania of 
Furf ooz, and twenty-one jaws, including the now celebrated 
jaw of Naulette. 

It is not only in Europe that the existence of fossil man 
has been proved. Even in 1844 Lund had announced that 
he had found in certain caverns in Brazil human bones as- 
sociated with the remains of extinct animals. He afterwards 
withdrew his statement, doubtless owing to the distrust with 
which every announcement of this kind was received. But 
his observations, which, unfortunately, were never published 
in detail, were probably correct. In 1867 M. W. Blake an- 



106 MAN. 

nounced to the Congress of Paris that in the auriferous de- 
posits of California, and especially near the village of 
Sonora, weapons, instruments, and even stone ornaments 
were frequently associated with the bones of the mammoth 
and the mastodon. Dr. Snell, who lives in this locality, pos- 
sesses a large and rich collection of them. Dr. Wilson pub- 
lished some facts of the same nature in 1865. 

V. It became necessary, in order to prevent our being lost 
amidst these riches of every description, to distribute them in 
a methodical manner and arrange them in order of time. The 
universal preponderance of weapons, tools, sculpture, draw- 
ings, etc., had led archaeologists to propose different classi- 
fications essentially founded upon the difference of the types 
presented by these articles, and upon the material from 
which they were made. The classification which M. de Mor- 
tillet has applied to the Museum at St. Germain is of this 
kind. But such classifications, though very convenient for 
the arrangement of a public collection, have the inconven- 
ience of being rather artificial. The naturalist and the anthro- 
pologist ought to give the preference to palaeontological or 
geological data. 

Lartet preferred the former. He connected the division 
of quaternary times with the predominance and extinction 
of the great mammalia. The cave-bear, which was the first 
to disappear, he employed to mark the most ancient period ; 
the mammoth, and the tichorhine rhinoceros, which survived 
it, characterized the second ; the reindeer and aurochs have 
served to mark the third and fourth. 

This classification has the inconvenience of being purely 
local, since the disappointment of quaternary species did not 
take place everywhere at the same time, and was not general. 
In reality the age of the reindeer still continues in Lapland, 
and that of the aurochs is prolonged, a little artificially it is 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. 107 

true, in the forests of Lithuania. But Lartet' s method con- 
nects human groups with animal types ; it characterizes the 
epochs by an event palaeontologically important ; it preserves 
the relation between the succession of periods and biological 
events ; it offers, therefore, serious advantages if taken for 
what it is. This was very clearly understood by the eminent 
author of the theory ; he has only applied it to France. 

Since M. Lartet made his splendid investigations, fresh 
facts have come to light, as it often happens, distinctions, 
which at first were apparently most pronounced, have now 
been partly effaced. Therefore M. Dupont has proposed to 
reduce to two the four ages of Lartet, which is perhaps ex- 
cessive even for Belgium. M. Hamy, again, has admitted 
three ages as corresponding to the mean and new river levels 
of M. Belgrand. This division of quaternary times has the 
advantage of being connected with geological phenomena ; 
it at least partly loses the too exclusively local character, 
and it ought for this reason to be preferred. 

Let us, nevertheless, consider the subject for a moment 
from Lartet' s point of view, which permits of an interesting 
comparison. We have seen in Denmark the succession of 
three vegetable species ; the beech, the oak, and the pine 
brin^usto the commencement of the present modern epoch. 
In France the successive disappearance of four animal 
species, the cave-bear, mammoth, reindeer, and aurochs, 
which at first were contemporaneous on our soil, character- 
izes so many epochs which embrace the whole quaternary 
period. Man has been contemporaneous with them all ; he 
made use of their flesh for food, and has left representations 
of them in sculpture and drawing. 

VI. Can we go further and find traces of man even in ter- 
tiary times? Falconer, the celebrated English palaeontolo- 
gist, prematurely lost to science, did not hesitate to reply 



108 MAN. 

in the affirmative. But he only expected to find tertiary 
man in India, and M. Desnoyers has discovered him in 
France. 

It was in 1863, in the gravel-pit of Saint-Prest, near 
Chartres, thatM. Desnoyers himself found a tibia of rhino- 
ceros bearing marks of incision and grooves similar to those 
which had been so often noticed in the bones of bears and 
reindeer eaten by quaternary man. A careful comparison 
and numerous facts of the same nature, shown in different 
collections, authorized him to announce that man might be 
traced beyond the glacial epoch, and had lived in pliocene 
times. 

But M. Desnoyers only brought forward proofs of a single 
kind, and such as are not appreciated at their full value 
until we are used to them. Thus his work was at first re- 
ceived with a certain amount of distrust. He was asked to 
produce, if not pliocene man himself, at least some objects 
of his industry, and, in particular, the weapons which would 
enable him to attack, and the knives with which he could 
cut up the elephant and rhinoceros, or the great deer, whose 
bones all bear the marks of more or less deep incision which 
he attributes to man. M. TAbbe Bourgeois soon replied to 
these demands, and in the presence of the worked flints 
which he placed before competent judges, all doubt disap- 
peared. 

Unfortunately, the gravel of Saint-Prest is considered by a 
sufficient number of geologists to belong rather to quater- 
nary deposits, which are more recent than undoubted ter- 
tiary formations. It ought probably to be placed in the 
period of transition which separates two distinct epochs. 
Perhaps it is contemporaneous with the deposit of the Vic- 
toria cave in Yorkshire, from whicli Tiddeman extracted a 
human fibula, and which this naturalist regarded as having 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. 109 

been formed a little before the great glacial cold. In short, 
the discoveries of M. M. Desnoyers and Tiddeman take 
back the existence of man to the confines of the tertiary 
period. 

The discoveries in Italy take us still further. On dif- 
ferent occasions, and since 1863, some Italian savants 
thought that they had discovered in undoubted pliocene 
deposits traces of human industry, and even human bones. 
These results were, however, for different reasons suc- 
cessively doubted and rejected by the most competent 
judges. 

But M. Capellini has just discovered, in 1876. clearer 
proofs of man's existence in pliocene times in the clay de- 
posits of Monte Aperto, near Sienne, and in two other places. 
The eminent professor of Bologna has found in these locali- 
ties, the age of which is not contested, bones of the baloeno- 
cus bearing numerous deep incisions, which it .seems to me 
could only have been produced by the action of a cutting 
instrument. In some cases the bone has been broken off 
upon one of the faces of incision, whilst the other is smooth 
and sharply defined. Judging from wood-cuts and casts, it 
is impossible to avoid admitting that the cuts have been made 
upon fresh bones. These incisions differ entirely from those 
found upon the bones of halitherium found in the miocene 
falunian strata of Pouance. I have always thought it impos- 
sible to attribute the latter to man, as decidedly as I think 
those which we are now discussing ought to be attributed to 
his agency. The existence of pliocene man in Tuscany is, 
then, in my opinion, an acquired scientific fact. Neverthe- 
less, I should admit that this conclusion is not yet unan- 
imously accepted, and that it is disputed b3^ M. Magitot, 
among others, who relies upon his own experience. 



110 MAN. 

VII. The researches of M. PAbbe Bourgeois take us still 
further back. This practiced and persevering observer has 
discovered in the department of Loir-et-Cher, in the Com- 
mune of Thenay, flints, the shape of which he thinks can only 
be attributed to man. Now geologists are unanimous in 
considering these deposits as miocene, belonging to the mean 
tertiary age. 

But the flints of Thenay, generally of small size, are 
almost all very roughly shaped, and many palaeontologists 
and archaeologists have considered the fractures to be due to 
nothing more than accidental blows. In 1872, at the Con- 
gress of Brussels, the question was submitted to a commission 
of the most competent men of Germany, England, France, 
Belgium, and Italy, and the judges disagreed. Some ac- 
cepted and some rejected all the flints exhibited by M. PAbbe 
Bourgeois. Some considered that a small number only could 
be attributed to human industry. Others, again, thought it 
right to reserve their judgment and to wait for fresh facts. 
I joined the ranks of the latter. But since then fresh 
specimens discovered by M. PAbbe Bourgeois have removed 
my last doubts. A small knife or scraper, among others, 
which shows a fine regular finish, can, in my opinion, only 
have been shaped by man. Nevertheless, I do not blame 
those of my colleagues who deny or still doubt. In such a 
matter there is no very great urgency, and doubtless the ex- 
istence of miocene man will be proved, as that of glacial and 
pliocene man has been — by facts. 

VIII. Thus, man was most certainly in existence during 
the quaternary epoch and during the transition age to which 
the gravels of Saint-Prest and the deposits of the Victoria 
cave belong. He has, in all probability, seen miocene times, 
and consequently the entire pliocene epoch. Are there any 



THE PRE-ADAMITES. Ill 

reasons for believing that his traces will be found further 
back still? Is the date of his appearance necessarily con- 
nected with any epoch? For an answer to these questions I 
only see a single order of facts to which we can apply. 

We know that, as far as his body is concerned, man is a 
Mammal, and nothing more. The conditions of existence 
which are sufficient for these animals ought to have been 
sufficient for him also ; where they lived, he could live. He 
may then have been contemporaneous with the earliest Mam- 
malia, and go back as far as the secondary period. 

Palaeontologists of high merit shrink from this proposi- 
tion. They do not admit even the possibility of the existence 
of man in miocene times. All the Mammalia fauna of this 
period have, they say, disappeared; how should man alone 
have resisted against causes which were sufficiently powerful 
to cause a complete renewal of all the beings with which he 
was most nearly connected? 

I recognize the force of the objection ; but I also take into 
account human intelligence, which they seem to forget. It 
is evidently owing to this intelligence that the man of Saint- 
Prest, of the Victoria cave, and of Monte Aperto has been 
able to survive two great geological epochs. He protected 
himself against cold by fire, and so survived till the return of 
a more genial temperature. 

Prof. Winchell, however, maintains that man was not on 
the earth until the breaking up of the glaciers, which is sup- 
posed to have been not less than ten thousand years ago, 
but may have been fifty thousand years ago. 

I wish, in this connection to refer to a very singular false 
assumption, which naturalists and scientists generally have 
made, and which most of them still seem to maintain. 
They assume that the entire human race was once in the 
savage state, and has passed up through the " Stone Age," 



112 MAN. 

the " Bronze Age " and the " Iron Age," to, or toward civil- 
ization. When in point of fact this is only true of the infe- 
rior types of man; the Adamic type, which was preserved 
in Noah's family, never having been at any time in the 
savage state. To this the highest type of man, the govern- 
ing race of earth, civilization was directly imparted by God 
through Adam and Noah, and it has been preserved at all 
times in a higher or lower state, by all nations to which we 
have referred as the descendants of Noah's sons. Among 
some of these nations the candle of civilization has sometimes 
burned low in the socket for centuries, but has never gone 
out. The arts of domestic life have never been forgotten by 
any of these people. They have never lived in caves and 
subsisted on bark, roots and herbs alone. But on the con- 
trary, they have ever lived in tents, or houses, clothed them- 
selves and cooked their food, and controlled and used 
domestic animals, such as the cow, horse, clog, hog, sheep, 
goat, etc. 

The orthodox world has made the opposite and equally 
o-reat mistake. They have assumed that all men have de- 
scended from Adam and consequently were civilized at the 
start, but through sin many nations have degenerated into 
the savage state, from which some have slowly recovered 
passing up through the " Stone," u Bronze," and " Iron" 
ages. This assumption is as false as the other. None of 
the nations descended from Noah have ever degenerated so 
low as the savage state. So here we have a seeming great 
issue between the Bible and science, which when explained 
is no issue at all. The men of whom Bible history speaks, 
are the men of whom human history speaks and have never 
been in the savage state. The indications found all over the 
earth of men who were once in the savage state, have no ap- 
plication whatever to the Noachians, but apply alone to the 



THE PKE-ADAMITES. 113 

inferior types of man. Yet the orthodox and scientists have 
for years kept up a terrible fight on this false issue, and still 
the useless controversy goes on. 

In conclusion I wish to submit the following deductions 
and conclusions, drawn from the facts set forth in the fore- 
going pages. Great truths which will be universally ad- 
mitted : — 

1st. The Creator of Man and the Universe is a being of 
law, order and consistency, and has not recorded anything 
in His revealed word to man, inconsistent with the great laws 
of Nature. 

2d. According to the Bible and orthodox chronology 
Adam was created about 6,000 years ago. According to 
the science of geology, fossil remains of man are found on 
the earth which are conceded to be not less than 10,000 years 
old, and some of which are generally believed to be not 
less than 50,000, and possibly 100,000 years old. These, 
therefore, could not possibly be of the Adamic type 
of men, but must have belonged to some older type. 
They no doubt belonged to the inferior types of men, whose 
creation is recorded by Moses in the first chapter of Gene- 
sis. 

3d. These ancient fossil remains all seem to have been 
types of men who were while living in the savage state, liv- 
ing in caves, subsisting by the chase, with no better tools or 
weapons than stone. Therefore they could not have belonged 
to the Adamic type of man, which we have shown has always 
been sufficiently civilized to live in tents or houses, practice 
the domestic arts, clothe themselves, cook their food, and 
control and use the domestic animals. And therefore they 
must have belonged to the inferior types of men — the 
brown and black races. To my mind the conclusion seems 
reasonable, to say the least, that the general creation of 
8 



I 



114 MAN. 

man, male and female, recorded in the first chapter of Gene- 
sis, of whom no labor was required, who were commanded 
to subsist on the vegetable kingdom, have dominion over the 
animals, and to multiply, replenish and subdue the earth, 
has reference to these inferior types of men. Natural his- 
tory and the investigations of geology seem to fully sus- 
tain this view. The Bible tells us that these men were 
created immediately after the animal creation was completed ; 
that they were given dominion over the animals, and in com- 
mon with the animals were given the vegetable kingdom to 
subsist upon. The remains of these primitive men have been 
found in every part of the habitable globe, and in regions 
not now habitable, showing that they filled their mission, 
" replenished the earth and subdued it.' ' Their remains 
are also everywhere found with those of the lower animals, 
showing that they were ever with them, exercising dominion 
over them, as God had commanded them ; and everything 
connected with these remains indicates that they mainly 
subsisted upon the vegetable kingdom ; that fruits, seeds, 
herbs and barks were their principal food. No labor had 
been required of them by their creator, consequently they 
neither tilled the soil, erected houses or tents, cooked their 
food, manufactured clothing, nor subjected the domestic 
animals to labor for them. Like the animals below them, 
they relied wholly on nature for subsistence and comforts. 

Long after their creation — how long we have no means of 
knowing — the All- wise Creator created the governing type 
of man. After declaring " there was not a man to till the 
soil," He created Adam, and of him labor was required. 
Adam was placed in the Garden of Eden, an earthly para- 
dise provided for him, and commanded " to dress it and 
keep it. ' ' What a contrast between the mission and duty cf 
Adam and that of the inferior types of men. 



PAET II.. 

THE NATURE AND POWERS OF MAN. 




CHAPTER I. 

MAN A THREEFOLD BEING — BODY, SOUL, AND SPIRIT. 

&//\ AN is a threefold being, composed of body, soul, and 
spirit. 

The body consists of organized matter, and possesses no life 
except what it receives from its contact with spirit. When 
the spirit withdraws from the body, at physical death, the 
latter becomes disorganized and under the laws of chemical 
action returns to its original elements. "Dust thou art, 
and unto dust shalt thou return,' ' is the inexorable law 
imposed by the Creator upon the body of man. 

The spirit is imparted by the Creator, and at the death of 
the body returns to the spirit world. The soul in our pres- 
ent state of existence is that natural or animal life which 
results from a union of spirit and matter. It is the life that 
we enjoy in the present state of existence, and continues in 
the body while the spirit remains. 

We are informed in the Bible that God formed the body 
of Adam out of the dust of earth, but this organized matter 
had no life until God breathed into his nostrils the breath of 
life, when he became a living soul. That is, when spirit came 

( I." ) 



116 MAN, 

into permanent contact with organized matter a living soul 
was born, or, in other words, human life began. 

Ordinarily, we speak of man as twofold, possessing body 
and mind, and this is sufficient for all practical purposes. 

But strictly and scientifically considered, he is threefold, 
body, soul, and spirit. Those who persist in using the 
words soul and spirit as synonymous terms, are in error, an 
error which the farther followed the graver becomes. As 
stated in a previous chapter, the universe and all that is in 
it, when resolved back to its primal elements, consist of but 
two substances, viz. : spirit and matter. Spirit is life and 
matter is dead until animated by spirit. The mind of man 
is simply spirit in matrimonial alliance with matter. 

That alliance produces the animal or human life of the 
body, which is the soul in the specific sense. It is, in fact, 
an inner unseen spiritual body. But the word soul is often 
used to designate the entire man in the present state of 
existence. In man the union of spirit with matter produces 
this wonderful organism we call the body, with its bones, 
muscles, and ligaments, its stomach and alimentary pro- 
cesses for the conversion of food into blood, its heart, arte- 
ries, and veins carrying life blood to every part of the 
system, and its lungs and breathing apparatus, by which 
oxygen is inhaled from the air, upon which life depends 
every moment of our existence. This is what we term ani- 
mal life, and consists of our powers of body, with our appe- 
tites, passions, emotions, and feelings. 

All these powers pertain to the lower animals as well as 
man, hence we term them animal life. The lower animals 
have souls in common with man. They are twofold, possess- 
ing body and soul, while man is threefold, possessing spirit 
also. In addition to these instincts, passions, and feelings 
of the animal kingdom, man has been blessed with intellect, 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING. 117 

reason, the moral sentiments and spiritual faculties. This is 
the realm of the spirit and the grand superiority of man 
over the beasts of the field. 

The whole subject becomes clear when viewed from a 
phrenological standpoint. The brain is the immediate 
organ and instrument of the mind, and as the mind is 
possessed of different powers and faculties so the brain 
contains different organs corresponding thereto. The 
brain is also divided into two general divisions called 
the cerebrum, or brain proper, and the cerebellum which 
lies at the base of the skull in close and intimate re- 
lation with the body. It has been clearly demonstrated 
by experiment that the animal organs representing the 
senses, appetites, propensities, passions, etc., are all lo- 
cated at the base of the brain, and occupy the cerebellum, 
and the lower range of the perceptive organs in front. Here, 
in addition to the five senses, are located alimenitiveness, or 
the sense of appetite by which we subsist ; amativeness, or 
the sense by which the species is propagated ; combative* 
ness by which we defend ourselves and offspring ; destruct- 
iveness, by which we destroy animals necessary to subsist 
upon, and acquisitiveness by which we secure food and 
property necessary to our subsistence and comfort. All 
these powers are possessed and more or less manifested by 
the lower animals as well as man. But the upper and by far 
the larger part of man's brain, embracing almost the entire 
cerebrum, is not possessed by the lower animals. This is 
the region of the brain occupied by the intellect, reasoning 
faculties, moral sentiments and spiritual powers. This is 
the home of the spirit, while the seat of the soul is at the 
base of the brain. When we examine the brains of the lower 
animals we find the cerebellum completely developed, and 
we also find the lower range of the perceptive organs consid- 



118 ' MAN. 

erably developed, while the balance of the cerebrum brain 
including the entire region of the reasoning, moral, and spir- 
itual powers is wanting, showing conclusively that the 
entire animal creation possess in common with man the 
senses and animal passions, but that man has a higher intel- 
lectual and spiritual nature which the animals have not, and 
showing also that the base of the brain, and especially the 
cerebellum is the seat and source of the soul ; and that the 
cerebrum is the principal abode and central source of the 
spirit while its connection with the body is continued. 

But while it is true that the base of the brain is the pri- 
mary seat of the soul, it is also true that these animal powers 
of the soul found in the base of the brain have immediate 
connection with, and direct relation to, the body, and it is 
through the body, as a medium, that these powers are mani- 
fested, and especially through the blood and the circulatory 
system as a means is animal life kept up. Hence it is that 
the heart, as the muscular center of the circulatory system, 
becomes the practical seat of animal life, and, consequently, 
the practical seat of the human soul ; and hence, the popu- 
lar idea that the heart is the seat of all the feelings, passions, 
and affections, and the abode of the soul. 

In this threefold structure of man, it was intended by the 
All wise Architect that the spirit should be the governor of 
the whole man, and that it should govern in strict accordance 
with the will of Him who gave it. The intellect was given 
to afford the light by which the truth of both revelation and 
science may be apprehended and understood ; in order that 
the mind may arrive at correct conclusions in all the varied 
duties of life, and that, through the spiritual powers aided 
by the will, and the spirit of God, may govern and guide the 
whole man, and keep the soul and body with all their powers 
and propensities restrained within their legitimate bounds. 



MAN A THKEEFOLD BEING. 119 

The appetites and passions of the soul, are the ministers of 
that wonderful government of which the Spirit is the sover- 
eign and ruler, and when properly restrained and kept within 
their legitimate bounds by their sovereign, are noble elements 
of use and goodness. But when they transcend their proper 
sphere and functions the whole government is deranged and 
soon these rebellious subjects usurp the seat of sovereignty, 
dethrone reason, and set aside the dominion of the spirit. 
Then anarchy reigns through the whole man, which ends in 
ruin, unless timely subjection is again brought about by the 
power of the spirit. 

Thus it is that the proper subjection of the soul and its 
passions to the spiritual nature of man is the great task of 
life and the test of moral character. 

And as the soul is the animal life of man, and the practical 
seat of that animal life is the heart, it follows that the proper 
regulation and control of the heart and its various passions 
and affections, is the great duty of life, the very gist of prac- 
tical religion. 

And hence it is that the Bible and religionists have had so 
much to say about the heart, its evil tendencies, and the 
necessity of cleansing and renewing the same. The heart, in 
all these references, is simply used as a representative term 
and the meaning is that the soul and its passions, appetites, 
and affections, in other words, the animal life, whose physi- 
cal center and practical seat is the heart, must be restrained 
and kept in legitimate bounds. While man's higher nature, 
the spirit, works out its own salvation under the laws of 
love, as promulgated by the great Father of Spirits. 

This view of the threefold nature of man was entertained 
by that great reformer Alex Campbell, in his essays on 
man written years ago. I make the following extract, which 
may be found on page 463 of the Christian Baptist , viz. : 



120 MAN, 

"He builds his body from the elements of the earth." 
He gives him a soul or animal life in common with all the 
animals created, but " He infuses into him from himself 
directly without any intervention a spirit, or intellectual 
principle. So that man stands erect one being possessing 
body, soul, and spirit. We may observe that the Jews 
Greeks, Romans, as well as the English, have had three terms 
which they used as distinctive of these three. These are 
the body, soul, and spirit of the English ; the corpus, anima, 
and animus, of the Latins, the soma, psuche, and nous, 
of the Greeks, and the nerep, nepesh and ruth of the He- 
brews. 

These in each language are representative of each other, and 
modern languages have the same distinct phraseology, in 
marking each of the constituents of man. The body is the 
organic mass animated by the soul or animal life, which the 
Scriptures say is in the blood, and the spirit is that pure in- 
tellectual principal, which acts immediately upon the soul 
and mediately upon the body. The body and the soul in 
common usage denotes the whole man, but when we speak 
philosophically we say body, soul, and spirit. Each of 
these has its respective attributes and powers. 

The spirit has the faculties we call the powers of under- 
standing ; the soul has its passions and affections ; the body 
its organs and their functions. In man reason and all in- 
telligence belong to the spirit together with volition in the 
primary character. All the passions and affections belong 
to the soul and are identified with animal life." 

That the spirit of man continues to live after the dissolution 
of the body, is evident from many considerations. Thou- 
sands of death-bed scenes have attested the fact that in the 
dying moments, as the clogs of matter are broken and the 
glory of the unseen world begins to dawn on the spiritual 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING. 121 

vision, that the spirits of departed friends hover around ready 
to convey the spirit of the dying one to its proper place in 
the spirit land. And hundreds of well authenticated cases 
exist in which, long prior to death, while in perfect health, per- 
sons have received impressions and communications from 
their departed friends in the spirit world, through the dreams 
and visions of sleep, and through spirit mediums and other- 
wise while awake. The Bible gives several cases of the 
return to earth of the spirits of men from the unseen world. 
A notable instance in the Old Testament, was that of the 
spirit of dead Samuel informing the wicked king Saul through 
the witch of Endor of his approaching doom. A much 
grander instance is recorded in the New Testament, when the 
spirits of Moses and Elijah were called from the spirit 
world to join with Peter, John, and James in witnessing the 
glory of the transfiguration of Christ, 

The Bible also clearly teaches by precept as well as 
example the existence of the spirit in this life, and its con- 
tinued existence after the dissolution of the body. 

Jesus speaking to his disciples used these words : " The 
spirit is indeed willing, but the flesh is weak." 

Paul writing to the Corinthians says: "Let us cleanse 
ourselves from all filthiness of the flesh and spirit." In 
Ecclesiastes 12 and 7 we have this language: " The spirit 
shall return unto the God who gave it." 

Now let me add the testimony of Christ himself used by 
Him in his argument with the Sadduces on the Resurrection ; 
and which is recorded in the twentieth chapter of Luke 
thirty-seventh and thirty-eighth verses, in the following 
words : u Now that the dead are raised, even Moses showed at 
the bush when he called the Lord, the God of Abraham, and 
the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob. For he is not 



122 MAN. 

the God of the dead, but of the living, for all live unto him." 
And the apostle Paul speaks repeatedly and at length of the 
constant struggle in his own nature, between the spirit and 
the flesh. 

I presume that all of us in our own experiences could give 
corroborating testimony upon this point. All these allusions 
to the struggle between the spirit and the flesh have reference 
to the rebellious soul of man, which constantly refuses to be 
in subjection to its legitimate sovereign, the spirit. That 
the term " flesh, " as used by the New Testament writers, 
does not refer to the literal flesh of the body, is evident from 
the condition of the body after life has left it. The flesh of 
a dead body is powerless for good or evil and at once decom- 
poses and returns to its original elements. 

The " flesh" referred to by the apostles is the appetites 
and passions of the human soul, working through the medium 
of the body and acting in rebellion to the laws of the Great 
Spirit of life, which we are informed in the word of God 
bears witness with our spirits, when we do conform to 
these laws. I have now clearly shown both from nature and 
Revelation the existence of the spirit in man here and its 
continued existence hereafter. 

Let us now see if the Bible sustains our position as to the 
soul. The literal meaning of the word soul is life. It is 
sometimes applied to the present life, sometimes to life in the 
intermediate state after physical death and sometimes to 
the saved souls of the righteous after they have attained 
to eternal life at tJie first resurrection ; and it is often used 
in the Bible to denote the entire man in his present state of 
existence. 

The following are instances of the use of soul in this gen- 
eral sense: "Then sent Joseph and called his father Jacob 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING. 123 

to him and all his kindred, threescore and fifteen souls.' ' 
Actsvii:14. " We were in all in the ship two hundred 
threescore and sixteen souls. Acts xxvii: 3.7. 

I will now make some Bible references in which the word 
soul is used in its specific and proper sense. In Ex. xii : 
19, we find this language: "Seven days shall there be 
no leaven found in your houses, for whoever eateth that 
which is leaven, even that soul shall be cut off.' ' 

This can mean no more than that whoever violated this 
law against leaven should die, or have his natural life cut 
off. The apostle Peter, in referring to the saving of Noah's 
family in the ark, uses these words : ' ' Eight souls were 
saved by water." It is perfectly clear that this means that 
the lives of these eight persons were saved in the ark, while 
the remainder of their race or species were destroyed by the 
flood. In Rev. xvi : 3 we find this sweeping language : u And 
the second angel poured out his vial upon the sea and every 
living soul died in the sea." Here we have the word 
" soul" not only applied to the life of man, but to the lower 
animals, even including the fishes of the sea. And-Dr, Clark 
says that the same Hebrew words translated "living soul" 
in the creation of Adam, are used throughout in the account 
of the creation of the lower animals, but not so translated in 
our version of the Bible. Here is his language: " ' Nephesh 
chai3^ap,' is a general term to express all creations endued 
with animal life in any of its infinitely varied gradations 
As the Hebrew word Nephesh is rendered soul in the Old 
Testament, so the Greek word psuche is rendered soul in the 
New Testament and is the only word so rendered. Miles 
Grant, in his work on man, says that this word jjsuche occurs 
one hundred and five times in the New Testament and is 
rendered in six different ways. It is translated soul fifty- 
eio-ht times and life and lives forty times. And in every 



124 MAN. 

case where it is rendered soul the word life would have been 
as good a translation, as the sense and context of the sev- 
eral texts will show. Take, for instauce, the strong text in 
Matt, xvi: 26: "What is a man profited if he gains the 
whole world and loses his own soul." If we look to the 
context, we find that Christ himself uses the word life in 
the twenty-fifth and soul in the twenty-sixth verses in 
exactly the same sense. And in Luke xii : 20 where 
this strong language is used: "Thou fool, this night shall 
thy soul be required of thee ; then whose shall those things 
be which thou hast provided? " the same idea is clearly im- 
plied. You remember it was the case of the rich man whose 
lands had produced so, abundantly that he was under the 
necessity of building new barns and storehouses. And he 
addressed his soul as follows: " Soul, thou hast much goods 
laid up for many years ; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be 
merry." 

Now here is a parable by Christ himself, in which the 
soul is represented as something that can enjoy the pro- 
ducts of earth ; can eat, drink, and be merry. Can it pos- 
sibly be anything else than this natural animal life ? The 
words of the Lord himself implies the same idea. " Then 
whose sh alt those things be which thou hast provided?" 
That is, when I have required your natural life and you can 
no longer eat and drink, how will you enjoy these good 
things? 

That inspired man of God and ablest of all logicians, 
the apostle Paul, when he refers to the subject draws a clear 
distinction between the soul and spirit. 

I only make two quotations which are sufficient. In He- 
brews iv: 12 he says: " For the word of God is quick and 
powerful, and sharper than any two edged sword piercing 
even to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit and of the 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING. 125 

joints and marrow,' ' etc. Here the idea is clearly taught 
that soul and spirit are as distinct parts of man, as the joints 
and marrow. And although the relation between them 
seems as close as that between the joints and marrow of the 
body yet the word of God is sufficient to divide them asun- 
der, as it certainly will do on the day of judgment unless 
the terms of the Gospel have beeen accepted. But before 
we get to the question of the separation of the soul and spirit 
let us give another quotation from Paul which conclusively 
settles the question of man's threefold nature. It is 
found in I. Thes. v :23, and reads as follows, viz. : "And the 
very God of peace sanctify you wholly ; and I pray God your 
whole spirit and soul and body be preserved blameless unto 
the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ.' ' Now here an in- 
spired man of God, commissioned by Jesus himself as an ' 
apostle, addresses the followers of Jesus upon the great ob- 
jective point of every Christian's life, the second coming of 
Christ. And prays God to santify them wholly, and that their 
spirits, souls and bodies be preserved blameless until that 
grand event transpires. 

Surely Paul knew by inspiration from God that man had a 
soul as separate and distinct from the spirit as the body, or, 
he would not have prayed for its preservation as he did in 
this solemn and earnest manner. This settles the question 
that man is a threefold being, possessed of body, soul and 
spirit. 

As already stated the true and literal meaning of the 
word soul is life and it is applied to the present animal 
life, to the spiritual life in the intermediate state, and to those 
who attain eternal life at the first resurrection. In the pres- 
ent state, as already shown, man is threefold, body, soul, and 
spirit. The soul results from the union of spirit and 
matter and manifests itself in our present natural or animal 



126 MAN. 

lives. But the soul is invisible to the natural eye and interior 
to the animal body, it develops internally in connection with 
and in full sympathy with the natural body, and the natural 
or animal body is but the reflex or external covering of the 
internal spiritual bod}^, which is the soul. It is the soul to 
which the apostle Paul has reference in the fifteenth chapter 
of I. Corinthians, where he says, " There is a natural body 
and there is a spiritual body." 

The spiritual body is the soul. At physical death the 
spirit leaves the body and takes with it the soul, its spiritual 
body. It is the separation of the soul or spirit body from 
its animal body which usually makes death so painful. The 
spirit itself has often left the body without pain. But soul 
and body, or spiritual and animal bodies, have grown up and 
been developed together on the earth, and are so intimately 
related and bound together that their separation, except -in 
ripe old age, is always painful. I give in this connection a 
remarkable case from a reliable source to show, first, the 
great truth set forth in this chapter, that man has a spirit 
and a spiritual body, or soul, which leaves the animal body 
at physical death. Secondly, that the separation of the 
spirit and soul from the body is always painful when it occurs 
prematurely or by some sudden shock. And thirdly, that 
the spiritual world or intermediate state is immediately 
around this natural world; and at physical death the spirit* 
with its spiritual body passes at once into this higher and 
more beautiful existence and meets and recognizes the friends 
gone before. This article was clipped from the Religio- 
Philosophical Journal, and reads as follows, viz. : — 



u 



CAN A SPIHIT LEAVE THE BODY AND RETURN DURING EARTH-LIFE. 



"In my reading I have met with a number of what seemed 
to be well-authenticated accounts of spirits being temporar- 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING, 127 

ily absent from the body ; but none of them gave as remark- 
able phenomena as the one I am about to relate. 

" Some three or four years ago, during the time Mr. George 
Whitney attended college at Irvington, Indianapolis, he 
boarded with an elderly gentleman named McLaughlin. 
The latter was an intelligent, well educated man, who fol- 
lowed the occupation of school-teaching, and was a staunch 
adherent of the Disciple's Church. While firmly believing 
in man's immortality, he was equally firm in his belief that 
modern spiritualism was the work of the devil. During Mr. 
Whitney's stay in the house they had frequent discussions 
in regard to spiritualism, but without changing Mr. McLaugh- 
lin's determined opposition to it. Finally, at the close of 
one of these heated arguments, McLaughlin remarked : — 
. " * I had good proof once of man's spirit existence, before 
this modern nonsense of spiritualism was talked of. It is 
more than thirty years ago, just after my marriage, when I 
lived in the northern part of the State. We were out rid- 
ing — that is, my wife and I — when the team took fright 
and dashed off along the rough road at such a gallop that I 
was unable to hold them, and when the off wheel struck an 
old stump I was thrown head first into a deep ditch, coated 
over the bottom with rough stones. I struck on my head 
and shoulders with terrible force, and found myself thrown 
clear out of my body with a sudden spring — making two or 
three bounds, with a swaying, buoyant motion, precisely as 
a soap bubble oscillates to and fro, denting in and out, when 
about to leave the pipe bowl. My first sensation was that of 
unbroken ease and comfort. I felt as light and free as a 
feather and seemed not to have a thought or slightest sensa- 
tion other than that of absolute contentment. In fact, I 
felt jolly — good! I did not see my wife or the team, so 



128 MAN, 

supposed they were galloped out of sight. I did not feel 
any surprise as I stood and looked at my body lying there in 
a pool of blood at the bottom of the ditch, to all appear- 
ance as if not an atom of life was left in it ; nor did I feel 
any surprise to see myself the exact counterpart of the body, 
except that there was no blood on me ; clothing, everything, 
to the minutest particular being just the same in both. I 
concluded I was dead, so far as earth was concerned, and 
started away, feeling quite unconcerned about the motion- 
less lump of dead clay in the ditch. I now for the first time 
noticed that while everything around seemed changed, the 
daylight was somehow grown to be exactly like this new 
electric light they are using. It made all appearances as- 
sume a weird, ghostly look. 

" 4 Pretty soon I began to meet the people I had known who 
were dead. I seemed to come up with every one I had ever 
been acquainted with who had passed away. To the first 
two or three, who came along altogether, I remarked that I 
supposed I was dead ; when, to my surprise, they said I was 
not, that I would have to go back to my body again. I did 
not like the idea of this at all, and persisted that I was really 
done with earth-life. But every one I met told the same 
story, that I must return to my body. And, sure enough, I 
found myself — I had no idea how much time had elapsed 
since the accident — being drawn back to tfie old tenement. 
I seemed to be perfectly conscious that it was to my poor, 
maimed body I was going, though the locality where I was 
now, and all about me, was entirely new ; and although I 
tried my utmost to prevent myself from going, I was steadily 
impelled by some hidden power I could not withstand, till I 
found myself in the room in my house where my body was 
lying perfectly unconscious, in bed. The body was clothed 
in a night-dress, a broad white bandage fastened tightly 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING. 129 

around the head ; but I still retained the clothing I had worn 
when thrown into the ditch. I now experienced the most in- 
tense disgust as I stood and gazed at the dead looking, 
earthy part of myself ; it really seeming to me as if I had 
never seen so foul and disgusting an object in all my life, 
and that I would rather plunge head foremost into the foul- 
est cess-pool in existence than to take up my abode within it 
any more. But my repugnance was of no avail, for I had 
to go, and it was as if I was drawn in with a sudden thud, 
much as into a socket to which I was exactly fitted. And 
the moment I entered I became racked with the most excru- 
ciating pains, that made me curse the necessity of my re- 
turn.' " 

In this case the intelligent observing power that witnessed 
and reported the scene, was the spirit. The spiritual body 
which accompanied it into the spiritual world and which 
seemed an exact counterpart or copy of the naturel body was 
the soul. While the animal body was left temporarily lifeless 
in the ditch and though carried home, so remained until again 
entered by the soul and spirit, in the midst of great pain ; 
which of course continued until there was again a complete 
union of the three parts of the man, when to use common 
language he was then fully recovered. 

The relation between body, soul and spirit in the present 
natural life may be illustrated by as simple a thing as a nut, 
a walnut for instance. While alive and growing on the tree 
the outer rind or hull represents this animal body ; the inner 
hard case enclosing the kernel represents the soul ; and the 
kernel itself, which is the real life of the nut, represents the 
spirit. When the walnut is fully matured it falls from the 
twig which bore it and the outer hull sloughs off or per- 
chance is hulled by human hands. This represents physical 
death, or the losing of the natural body. But another and 

9 



130 MAN. 

a much more durable body remains a habitation for the 
kernel. 

This represents man after physical death, in the spirit 
world. 

The spirit, when it leaves the animal body, takes with it 
its spiritual body as its habitation and continues to occupy it 
through the intermediate state until the judgment in case of 
the wicked. In the case of the righteous, their souls being 
saved, escape the second death, attain to eternal life at the 
first resurrection, and remain the homes of the immortal spirits 
forever. But all this will be more fully explained in the 
third part of this work and can not be dwelt on here. That 
I have not misconstrued Paul in the fifteenth chapter, I. Cor- 
inthians, in assuming that the spiritual body referred to is the 
soul, and not the physical body changed into a spiritual body 
at the resurrection, is evident from the language of the same 
Paul in the fifth chapter of II. Corinthians, where, speak- 
ing of the death of the body, he says : " For we know that 
if our earthly house of this tabernacle were dissolved we 
have a building of God, an house not made with hands 
eternal in the heavens." That the apostle has no reference 
to the resurrection is evident by his use of the present tense 
instead of the future. Even the first resurrection is not to 
occur until the second coming of Christ. While the apostle 
here refers to what takes place at the physical death of every 
human being, and to a house not made with hands eternal 
in the heavens or spirit world ; which as contradistinguished 
from this earthly house means the same thing as the spirit- 
ual body referred to in the fifteenth chapter of I. Corinthians, 
which was to succeed the natural or animal body as the hab- 
itation of the spirit. It will be observed that Paul always 
speaks of the spirit as the real man and refers to its body or 
bodies as its tabernacles, or houses, or habitations ; and of 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING. 131 

them he says there are two, one natural or animal, the other 
spiritual, which, in the case of the righteous becomes im- 
mortal at the first resurrection. Taking all the writings of 
this learned and inspired apostle together I think it clearly ap- 
pears that he taught that man is a threefold being possessing 
body, soul and spirit. That the spirit is immortal and never 
ceases to exist, that the body is natural and animal and 
returns to its origninal elements at physical death. That 
the soul is the spiritual body referred to in the fiftli- 
teenth chapter of I. Corinthians and the house not made 
with hands referred to in the fifth chapter II. Corin- 
thians which leaves the body with the spirit at the physical 
death and becomes its body or habitation through the inter- 
mediate state; and in the case of the righteous is the 
spiritual body which comes up from the spirit world at the 
first resurrection to meet the Lord in the air, at his second 
coming, and by taking part in the first resurrection this spirit- 
ual body or soul attains to eternal life, and is saved from 
the second death. 

This will be more fully explained in the third part of this 
work. 

In corroboration of the arguments already submitted, 
drawn from both nature and revelation, I give in this con- 
nection the views of A. J. Davis, the great clairvoyant, as 
found on pages 51, 52, 53, and 54 of his work entitled, 
"Answers to Questions, " as follows, viz: — 

" The relation of the body to the spirit is homogenous 
and essentially chemical, and the premature separation of 
them is accomplished only by snapping and violently sun- 
dering the countless threads of that relation. 

"First, then, what is the nature of the relation between 
the body and the spirit? We answer that the twain are 



132 MAN. 

chemically associated by an intermediate combination of ele- 
ments which we term the ' soul.' Thus — 

"l. 2. 3. 

" BODY — SOUL — SPIRIT. 

" Q. Of what is the soul composed? A. Of motion, life, 
sensation, and intelligence. Q. What constitutes the spirit? 
A, The spirit is composed of impersonal principles — the 
life-element of Father God and Mother Nature. Q. Of 
what is the physical body composed? A. Of all the ele- 
ments of matter below man. Q. How is the soul chemically 
related to the body ? A. By vital electricity. Q. To what 
element of the soul does this electricity belong? A. To the 
element of Motion. Q. How, then, is the spirit chemically 
related to the 'soul?' A. By vital magnetism. Q. From 
what does this magnetism emanate? A. From the soul. It 
is an emanation from the soul, like the aroma from the life 
of a rose, which is its atmosphere and fragrance. Q. Do 
you mean to teach that the soul is united to the body by 
vital electricity, and the spirit to the soul by vital magnet- 
ism? A, Yes, the following scale is the illustration: — 

"MATERIAL ORGANIZATION, 

" VITAL ELECTRICITY, 

"INTERMEDIATE, OR SOUL, 

"VITAL MAGNETISM, 

"INNERMOST, OR SPIRIT. 

1 'The above scale gives the organization of man as it is. 
Below the material organism are the lower kingdoms and 
the physical world ; while above and around the Innermost, 



MAN A THREEFOLD BEING. 133 

or * spirit,' is the spirit- world, and all that pertains to a 
supernal existence. If a human being lives out the full 
measure of life, then the vital electricity (which connects 
the soul with the body) imperceptibly loosens its hold, and 
dissolves the relation so gradually, that the spirit is not even 
conscious of death until after the change is all over, like the 
birth of an infant into this world. If, however, the change 
is forced and premature, the spirit is compelled to realize 
the fact, and also something of the unnatural shock which 
had occasioned the death. 

" Within the past ten years we have observed several 
deaths by concussions, strangulation, drowning, etc., and 
the result to the spirit was in each case identical. Each 
person, whether young or old, spiritually experienced the 
same singular sensation, which were caused by the unnatu- 
ral and violent separation of the spirit from the body. It is 
well known that a sudden shock, sufficient to cause death, 
produces instant insensibility. This fact is owing to the 
confusion of the elements of the * soul ' throughout the ner- 
vous system. Its chemical affinities have been broken up 
into a confused mass, making intelligent sensations of any 
kind utterly impossible. It is as though you had struck a 
small stone with a hammer so powerfully and suddenly that 
the cohesion between the atoms was instantly dissipated ; 
and what was before a solid mass, is now only smoke and 
dust flying in the wind. In like manner the surprise of the 
chemical relations between soul and body by means of a 
powerful concussion, results in the temporary suspension of 
all sensation, and the spirit is simply intuitionally apprised 
of what has just occurred in the region of its environments. 

" Several soldiers have returned from their new homes in 
the Summer Land to tell the particulars concerning their 
sensations immediately after falling dead by rifle or cannon 



134 MAN. 

ball. They relate how they intuitively or spiritually (of 
course somewhat vaguely) realized the nature of the acci- 
dent, and that they had just died in the usual sense of the 
word, but they did not feel anything like pain — being only 
disposed to sleep very profoundly, regardless of the place, 
and forgetful of what had happened to them. This indiffer- 
ence has, in many instances, resulted in a kind of slumber 
for many days in the other world. 

" Now it will be remembered that the c soul ' becomes the 
body of the spirit after death. This, however, is not the 
work of a moment. Whole hours, sometimes days, are con- 
sumed in perfecting the work of this final organization. 
While this beautiful process is going forward, the spirit does 
not feel anything physical or sensuous. It is all intuition, and 
memory, and meditation, and love. Its personality is not 
self-conscious, until the new senses in the new body are com- 
pleted and opened, and adapted to the use and everlasting 
duration of the spirit. We repeat, when the death is 
natural — and no death is natural, save that of 4 ripe old 
age ' — then the Spirit is immediately clothed with its new 
body. It does not sleep, feels no suspension of identity, 
realizes no penalty for physiological injury, which is the 
effect of an accidental death, and thus the aged one is young 
and happy, and free as is an uncaged bird among the trees 
of the mountains." 



CHAPTER II. 

THE BODY AND THE TEMPERAMENTS 

>HE body of man is an epitome of the material world 
below it. It contains all the elements of the mineral, 
vegetable, and animal kingdoms. It consists of several 
parts, divisions, or systems, which will be considered in their 
order. First we have the skeleton or frame of the body 
consisting of two hundred and eight bones, besides the teeth, 
held together, in a stable structure by the ligaments and 
cartilages, and all completely covered by the muscles, a net 
work or system of fibers possessing the power of contraction 
and motion. The muscles give shape and form to the body, 
and constitute the larger part of the flesh formed on the 
bones. They also impart the power of locomotion, and, in 
fact, every form of motion, to the bones ; but are themselves 
controlled by the brain operating through the nervous system. 
The bones and muscles constitute the frame work and body 
of the human system and are also the motive or moving 
power of the physical man. 

This body being composed of particles of organized matter ; 
which under the laws of its being are subject to constant 
change, decay, and death, must necessarily be continually 
renovated in order to preserve its physical life and health. 
This has been wisely provided for by the Creator, in the 
circulatory system, consisting of the heart with its system of 
arteries and veins, 'by which the life-giving blood is carried 
out through the arteries to every part of the system, supply- 
ing live particles of matter, in place of dead and waste par- 

(135) 



136 MAU. 

tides. This blood, freighted with the dead and waste 
matter, is taken up by the capillaries and transferred to 
the veins; and by them carried back to to the heart, 
and, hence is carried by the pulmonary artery to the lungs, 
where it comes in contact with the oxygen inhaled at every 
breath. The carbon from the impure blood combines with 
the oxygen, and together with waste matter of the system is 
thrown off, by expiration ; while the blood, purified by its 
contact with the life-giving oxygen returns to the heart, to 
start again on its grand round of supplying the body with 
renewed life and vitality. But the question arises, where 
does the blood derive its vitality from? This question ne- 
cessitates a brief explanation of the alimentary system, by 
which new blood is constantly supplied to the circulatory 
system. 

The alimentary canal, embracing the mouth, teeth, sali- 
vary glands, stomach, gastric juice, large and small intestines, 
liver, gall-bladder, pancreas, etc., may be called the mill of 
the body. Its duty is to receive food into the hopper or 
mouth, grind it with the teeth, mix it with the saliva, swallow 
it into the stomach, mix it with the gastric juice, producing 
chyme, and as this leaves the stomach and enters the upper 
bowels, it receives and mixes with the gall and pancreatic 
juice, producing chyle, which is taken up by the multitude 
of absorbents which line the bowels, and is carried off and 
poured into the blood, supplying it continually with new 
material and thereby enabling it to keep up the wasting vital- 
ity of the body. These last named systems, the circulatory, 
the respiratory, and the alimentary, constitute the internal 
machinery found inside the hulk or frame of the body, and 
they are also the life-giving power or vital department of the 
human system. 

But all these systems, bones, muscles, heart, arteries, 



THE BODY AND THE TEMPERAMENTS. 137 

veins, lungs, and alimentary canal, would be powerless for 
motion and life were they not controlled and animated by 
another great system called the brain and nerves. The loca- 
tion of the brain is in the head. It is divided into the cere- 
brum, or brain proper, occupying the upper and larger part 
of the cranium or skull, and the cerebellum, which occupies 
the base of the skull is the seat of the animal powers of the 
man. The brain is the organ of the mind, which will be ex- 
plained in another chapter. It is divided into the right and 
left hemispheres, and by its system of nerves extending to 
every part of the body, controls the entire man. The right 
hemisphere of the* brain controls the left side of the body, 
and vice versa. The nerves are but an extension of the brain 
to every part of the system. The brain through the nerves, 
controls the muscles and directs the body, producing loco- 
motion and every form of voluntary action. It also controls 
the involuntary motion of the heart and lungs, which goes 
on perpetually, whether we wake or sleep, whether we are 
conscious or unconscious, and upon which life depends for 
every moment of its existence. And yet the brain with its 
wonderful nervous system, like the muscles and bones, is 
only organized matter, but much more refined. It is the 
organ and instrument of the mind ; but as this trenches on 
another chapter I must not pursue this line of thought far- 
ther here. I have now noticed three grand divisions of the 
human system, each divided into several subdivisions. First, 
we have the bones and muscles, making up the frame and 
form of the man, endowed with the power of motion. Sec- 
ond, the circulatory, respiratory, and alimentary systems, 
constituting the internal machinery and vital powers of the 
body. And third, the brain and nervous systems, imparting 
mental life and controlling the entire machinery of the man. 
These several departments of the body may be compared to 



138 MAN. 

a steam-boat. The frame work of the body, consisting of 
the bones and muscles, represent the hulk of the vessel. The 
internal organs, consisting of the circulatory, respiratory, 
and alimentary systems, represent the steam engine and other 
machinery of the vessel; the blood, the steam power, and 
the food, the fuel that produces the steam. While the 
brain and nerves represent the pilot and the appliances by 
which he controls and directs the boat. It is in the relative 
development of these different departments of the human 
system that the beautiful doctrine of the temperaments is 
found. If the bones and muscles are unduly developed, 
producing a large, powerful, and angular frame, it is called 
the motive temperament, and by some of the old writers the 
bilious temperament. If the alimentary and circulatory 
systems are unduly developed, producing a plump, broad 
bodied, active, vigorous man, full of animal life and energy, 
it is called the vital or sanguine temperament. While if the 
brain and nerves are unduly developed, producing a frail, 
delicate body and active mind, it is called the mental or nerv- 
ous temperament. Some writers also give the lymphatic 
temperament, making four instead of three temperaments. 
I incline, however, to the opinion that the lymphatic is but 
an abnormal development of the vital, and that properly 
there are but three general temperaments, but many modifi- 
cations and subdivisions. Although differing with him in the 
general classification and nomenclature of the temperaments, 
I desire in this connection to give the system of the late Dr. 
W. C. Hurley, of Sulphur Springs, Texas, one of the best 
practical phrenologists I ever had the pleasure of knowing. 
I do so partly from a grateful memory of Dr. Hurley, who 
was cut off by death in the prime of his life, and in the 
midst of his usefulness ; but mainly to try to preserve some 
of his invaluable labors and particularly the peculiar marks 



THE BODY AND THE TEMPERAMENTS. 139 

and developments of the head, indicating the several tem- 
peraments. So far as I know, a part of this was original 
with Dr. Hurley ; at least I have seen it in no publication 
except his pamphlet on the Philosophy of Man, published at 
Gilmer, Texas, in 1868. The following is his system of the 
temperaments, copied from said work: — 

" Having introduced to you in my lecture the grand and 
the beautiful subject of Temperamental Physiology, I now 
most respectfully invite your calm and deliberate investiga- 
tion of the truths that cluster around this subject — a subject 
that alike involves the philosophy of the organic and spiritual 
man. 

u You will remember thatl have endeavored in my past 
lectures to establish in your mind the ever living truth that 
the brain is the organ of the mind ; and that every organ 
upon its exterior surface is unquestionable evidence that the 
mind is divided into as many faculties as there are organs 
upon the brain. And again that each and every organ there 
seen, is the physical representative of a single faculty of the 
immortal and ever living mind ! 

" The next, and at the same time the most important thing 
that claims our thoughtful consideration in connection with 
the nature and philosophy of man, is the quality of the 
brain ; as it has long since been observed by phrenologists 
that its quality is as potent in shaping character as its form. 
The quality of the brain invariably agrees with the quality of 
the body. The body is composed of four principal organic 
qualities, called Temperaments ; and named Bilious, Lym- 
phatic, Sanguine, and Nervous. The Bilious embraces all 
the bones and muscles ; it is the frame of man. The Lym- 
phatic comprises the digestive and the secretive organs. 
The Sanguine, the blood and the circulating organs. The 
Nervous, the brain and all the nerves in the system. So you 



140 MAN. 

plainly see and understand what I mean by the word Tem» 
perament; it means organic quality, one of the four elements 
that compose all high orders of animals; man is not an 
exception to this universal law. Each one of these temper- 
aments, when it takes the ascendancy over the others is 
characterized by its peculiar conformation of body, color of 
skin, hair, and eyes, and of course its peculiar shape of 
head — otherwise there would be want of analogy, and the 
regular laws of nature would be at fault. But before I pro- 
ceed in regular order with this subject, I wish to remark 
that the brain does not govern the manifestations of the mind 
alone ; but that it governs the body in size, shape, com- 
plexion and activity — in fact it governs the body in all of 
its natural proportions and movements. 

" I will now call your attention to the investigation of the 
temperaments in their regular order. 

"Bilious Temperament. — This embraces the bones, liga- 
ments, and muscles of the human system, and when strongly 
marked (taking the ascendancy over the other tempera- 
ments), it gives a long athletic form of body, dark 
complexion, black hair, dark blue or yellowish eye, long 
Roman nose, high cheek bones, long and stiff upper lip, 
movements slow but powerful, stepping about three feet at 
a stride, and about sixty pulsations of the heart per minute ; 
much liable to diseases of the liver and lower portion of the 
stomach, but most liable to diseases of the liver. 

44 Lymphatic Temperament. — This embraces that portion 
of the human system called the digestive and secretive, and 
generally gives great abdominal viscera with a great amount 
of flesh. The complexion is inclined to be fair, having a 
muddy ground ; the eye is a muddy blue ; nose rather short, 
and pugged at the end ; lips thick ; broad and well rounded 
face ; movements slow and sluggish ; having an aversion to 



THE BODY AND THE TEMPERAMENTS. 141 

both physical and mental labor ; — an ease-seeking disposi- 
tion. It is most subject to diseases of the secretive system, 
having about sixty pulsations of the heart per minute, but 
not so strong as in the bilious temperament. Physiologists 
say this is the slipshod, go-easy, drinking, eating and fatten- 
ing temperament ; but we look upon it in a more favorable 
light. 

"Sanguine Temperament. — This embraces the lungs, 
heart, veins, and arteries in the human system. When greatly 
predominating, it gives a large chest ; broad and square shoul- 
ders ; the whole body tapering from the shoulders downwards ; 
accompanied with great intensity and restlessness of feelings 
occasioned by the superabundance of blood, and its rapid 
circulation. Complexion florid ; hair, red sandy ; eyes blue ; 
chin broad ; nose medium length ; and well rounded face ; 
and most subject to diseases of the heart, hemorrhage, apo- 
plexy, and acute inflammation ; with eighty-two palpitations 
of the heart per minute, and possessing great force. 

" Nervous Temperament. — This embraces the brain and 
nerves in the system. It gives a small and delicately built 
person, rather above medium height ; complexion fair and 
smooth ; eye blue ; hair light ; features small and sharp ; lips 
thin ; accompanied with great activity of body and mind, 
quick and ready to understand ; precocious in development, 
hence liable to premature decay. This is purely the intel- 
lectual temperament, most liable to diseases of the lungs, 
stomach, brain, and nervous system. 

41 1 claim no originality of thought upon the nature and the 
importance of the temperaments. But hitherto phrenologists 
have attempted to judge them by the form of the body and 
the complexion. I claim that the head is the governor of the 
body, and that it therefore controls the temperaments, and, 
it being much less changeable than the body, I judge the 
temperaments by it. 



142 MAN. 



BILIODS TEMPERAMENT. 

"Shape of the Head — Perceptive organs full to large, 
and sharp, the reasoning organs average to full, which gives 
the head a receding appearance, running high in the region 
of Firmness and there forming a point ; thence running with 
a gradual slope to the occipital spine, there forming a point ; 
depressed in the region of Tune, Ideality and Sublimity ; 
giving a sugar-loaf form of head. 

"lymphatic temperament. 

" Shape of the Head. — Perceptive full to large, and smooth ; 
reasoning organs the same, giving a vertical forehead, and 
running to good height in the region of Human-nature and 
Benevolence; the basilar portion of the head large, and 
rather spread out, but smooth in surface ; rather flat in the 
region of Veneration ; and a well rounded back-head, but 
very broad ; the whole head having a smooth and even sur- 
face. 

" SANGUINE TEMPERAMENT. 

"Shape of the Head. — Per ceptives large and well rounded ; 
reasoning organs average, giving a receding forehead to 
Benevolence, with great height in that region of the head ; 
thence rather dropping from the natural conformation to 
Firmness ; with a great depression in the region of Self- 
esteem and Continuity ; giving a straight and broad back- 
head. On the whole giving a broad and rather flattened head, 
the highest in the region of benevolence. 

"nervous temperament, 

"Shape of the Head. — Perceptives seemingly rather small ; 
reasoning organs large, giving the head a hanging over ap- 



THE BODY AND THE TEMPEKAMENTS. 143 

pearance ; running to great height ; rather flattened in the 
region of Veneration and Spirituality ; a well formed back- 
head, only it is too thin ; the basilar brain small ; large in 
the region of Cautiousness, Sublimity, and Ideality, giving 
the head a bell-like shape ; the upper having the ascendancy 
over the basilar portion of the brain.' ' 

Although differing with Dr. Hurley in his general classifi- 
fication, I have of ten witnessed his wonderful demonstrations 
of the accuracy of its details in blindfold examination before 
large audiences. 

While I do not believe there is a system yet published 
more accurate in detail than that of Dr. Hurley, yet from 
my standpoint, the system of Fowler and Wells, in general 
classification and nomenclature appears to be more philo- 
sophical. They give three temperaments: the Motive, 
Vital, and Mental. The Motive is indicated by an excessive 
development of bones and muscles. The vital by an exces- 
sive development of the circulatory, respiratory, and alimen- 
tory systems ; and the Mental by an excessive development 
of the brain and nerves. 

While agreeing entirely with this classification as being 
natural and philosophical, I hope I will not be considered 
presumptuous in suggesting a slight improvement in nomen- 
clature. I would substitute the word physical for motive, 
and spiritual for mental, giving the three temperaments as 
Physical, Vital and Spiritual. I do so as the natural and 
logical sequence of the grand predicate established in the 
preceding chapter, the threefold nature of man — body, 
soul, and spirit. 

An undue development of body produces the Physical 
temperament. An excessive development of the soul, or of 
animal or human life gives us the Vital temperament. And 
an abnormal development of the brain and nerves, the Spir- 



144 MAN. 

ittial temperament. This is too plain and simple to be 
argued ; its accuracy is evident from the mere statement. 

In the Physical or motive temperament, the bones are 
large and long rather than broad, and the general shape of 
the body angular. The figure is generally tall, neck long, 
face oblong and cheek bones high, the limbs long and the 
muscles well developed. The complexion and color of hair 
and eyes generally dark. The top of the head at the organ 
of Firmness is high, and the whole figure is commanding 
rather than graceful. 

The movements are slow and strong and the whole ap- 
pearance indicates stubbornness, toughness, durability, and 
strength. This temperament produces a strongly marked 
character and one who is generally a leader in the sphere in 
which he moves. 

The Vital temperament is indicated by a lower stature and 
a broader and rounder body than that of the physical The 
face inclines to roundness ; the nostrils are wide ; the neck 
short ; shoulders broad and rounded ; chest full ; abdomen 
well developed ; arms and legs plump terminating in hands 
and feet relatively small. The complexion and hair gener- 
ally light and eyes blue. This temperament gives a quick 
circulation of the blood, great vitality, active, energetic phy- 
sical habits with great activity and versatility of mind. 
It possesses great vigor of body and activity of mind, but 
lacks the toughness of constitution and continuity of thought 
which characterizes the physical or motive temperament. 
It is the temperament for active business. This is peculiarly 
the temperament for life, appetites, and passions and when 
the appetite for food and drink is too much indulged, it 
produces that abnormal development, called by the old 
writers the Lymphatic temperament. 

The Mental or spiritual temperament is indicated by a slight 



THE BODY AND THE TEMPERAMENT8. 145 

frame, a large head, with an oval or pyriform face, a high, 
pale forehead, delicate features, bright, and expressive eyes, 
slender neck, fair complexion, with light, soft hair and skin. 
The whole figure is delicate and graceful, expressive, ani- 
mated, and mind intelligent. The front lobe of brain espec- 
ially in the upper part is largely developed, giving an 
intellectual, social, and moral character. 

Of course, when all the temperaments are equally devel- 
oped and evenly balanced, then we have that blending of 
temperament which gives the nearest a perfect man. It is 
seldom we have a complete blending of the three tempera- 
ments, but we often have a fair blending of two, producing 
a person of force in a given direction, but not well balanced 
on every part of the ground. As a general rule a predomi- 
nance of the Physical temperament gives men fitted for 
physical pursuits, such as prize fighters, war, explorations, 
and active and agressive politics ; such men as-Yankee Sulli- 
van, John Morrisey, Tecumseh and other Indian chiefs. 
When the intelligence of the Mental or Spiritual tempera- 
ment is added to and blended with the hardihood and force 
of the physical, then you have born leaders of men, both 
civil and military. Such men were Andrew Jackson, Abra- 
ham Lincoln, and Jefferson Davis. While a blending of the 
physical and vital in large development gives intense hardi- 
hood and endurance, with unbounded energy and vim, pro- 
ducing such men as Daniel Boone, Dr. Kane, the Arctic 
explorer, and H. M. Stanley, of African exploration fame. 

The Vital temperament largely developed, with a moderate 
development of the other temperaments, gives us the active, 
energetic and practical business man, full of life, vim and 
go-aheadativeness. This temperament prevails among busi- 
ness men generally, especially among the commercial classes, 

10 



146 MAN. 

but can also be found largely represented among lawyers 
and politicians. 

When to a large development of the Vital is added a large 
development of the Mental or Spiritual also, then you have 
the men of practical talents, the leaders in civil and busi- 
ness affairs, such great business leaders as Jay Gould, Tom 
Scott and M. de Lesseps, and such statesmen as Henry Clay, 
Blaine, and Garfield. 

An excessive development of the Mental or Spiritual gives 
a clear, bright, and almost prophetic mind but too little phys- 
ical force ; such men as Alex. Stevens, Theo. Tilton, and A. 
J. Davis. A good blending of the three temperaments pro- 
duces the firm, independent, energetic, and progressive 
man, the reformers, inventors, discoverers, and principal 
benefactors of the human race. Such men as Socrates, 
Martin Luther, Christopher Columbus, George Washington, 
Benjamin Franklin, Peter Cooper, Horace Greeley, Thomas 
Jefferson, Alexander Campbell, and Wendell Phillips. Such 
men are usually misunderstood and abused by their contem- 
poraries as visionary and fanatical, but in one or more gen- 
erations the world comes up to the advanced ground of their 
progress and recognizes their ability and usefulness. 

To develope the defective temperaments, and restrain that 
excessively developed in a given constitution, so as to pro- 
duce as nearly as may be a harmonious blending, is the 
fundamental work of education. This important subject 
will be to some extent considered in the next chapter* 



CHAPTER in. 

FOOD, AND THE LAWS OE HEALTH. 

fT HAS already been shown that the body is composed of 
organized matter taken from the elements of the mineral, 
vegetable, and animal kingdoms. That it is subject to 
chemical laws and constantly decomposing and returning to 
its original elements. Scientists claim that in the course of 
seven years all the particles of matter in a given human body 
at a certain time, have passed away and been supplied with 
new material, making a new body in every seven years. 
These new bodies are supplied through the medium of food ; 
and in spite of all that can be done by food, with the best 
possible care taken of the body, in less than one hundred 
years, and upon a general average in about thirty-three 
years, the body finally dies, and its particles return forever 
to its original elements in the earth and the air. How im- 
portant, therefore, that we should understand what the chem- 
ical constituents of the body are, and what the chemical 
constituents of food are, so that we may supply the body 
with proper food, and in proper amounts and condition, to 
keep it in good health and vigorous life. And how equally 
important it is that we should understand exactly the chem- 
ical constituents of each part of the body, such as the bones, 
muscles, lungs, heart, arteries, veins, nerves, brain, etc. So 
that the defective parts of the body may gradually be sup- 
plied with an abundance of the proper kind of food to re- 
store the equilibrium and produce a well balanced healthy 
physical constitution. For instance, if the muscular system 

(147) 



148 MAN. 

is defective and weak then plenty of muscle producing food 
should be eaten ; or if the nervous system is deranged then 
plenty of healthy nerve food should be eaten. 

Hence we see at a glance that there is no subject to which 
the mind of man can be directed of more practical import- 
ance than that of food ; its proper selection and preparation 
for the use of the body. As this is a subject which I have 
never had an opportunity of investigating I will supply my 
own want of information by making the following extract 
from a valuable, practical work entitled " The Philosophy of 
Eating," by Dr. A. J. Bellows. On pages 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 
19, 20, of said book, Dr. Bellows gives the chemical con- 
stituents as well as the proximate principles of the human 
body ; its wants and the reasons for them ; and a valuable 
classification of food, as follows: — viz. 

"If science in farming is important, as it is proved to be, 
may not science in eating be more important? 

" The scientific farmer analyzes his soil, and ascertains 
what elements it contains; then analyzes his grains and 
vegetables, and ascertains what elements they require ; then 
analyzes the different manures and composts, and ascertains 
which contains, in the best combination, the elements to be 
supplied. This gives him an immense advantage over the 
unscientific farmer, who, not knowing the requirements of 
his soil, wastes his compost by using many materials not 
necessary, and too large a supply of elements that may be 
necessary, while many important elements will be omitted 
altogether. 

I propose, upon the same principles, to give an analysis of 
the human system, — show the elements it contains, and the 
necessity for their constant supply, — and then to give an 
analysis of the food Nature has furnished for the supply of 
these necessities ; and I think it can be readily proved that 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 149 

as the scientific farmer has advantages in point of economy, 
the scientific eater has not only advantages in economy of 
living, but vastly greater advantages in the enjoyment of 
health and happiness. And as a matter of economy, it 
can be shown that in all our large cities more than half 
the expense of food is lost by want of adjustment of the 
proportions of requisite elements, just as all the exepense of 
guano would be lost on the land already supplied with phos : 
phorus and ammonia. 

"chemical compositon op the human body. 

" The human body is composed of the following elements, 
all of which are found also in the food provided by nature, 
or in air or water, and all must be supplied, day by day, or 
some bad results are sure to follow : — 

lb. oz. gr. 

" Oxygen, a gas, in quantity sufficient to occupy 

a space equal in 750 cubic feet ... Ill 

" Hydrogen, a gas, in quantity sufficient to occupy 

3,000 feet, which, with oxygen, constitutes 

water, the weight of the two indicating nearly 

the necessary amount of water ... 14 

" Carbon, constituting fat, and used also for fuel 

to create animal heat 21 

" Nitrogen, which constitutes the basis of the 

muscles and solid tissues, and which is sup- 
plied by that part of food which we shall 

denominate Nitrates 3 8 

"Phosphorus, the physical source of vitality, and 

the most important of the mineral elements, 

will represent the whole class which we shall 

denominate the Phosphates . . . 1 12 190 

" Calcium, the metallic base of lime, which is 

the base of bones 2 

" Fluorine, found combined in small quantities in 

bones . . 2 



150 



MAN. 



"Sulphur . . . . . . . . 

" Chlorine, constituting, with sodium, common 

salt, found in the blood . . . 
" Sodium, the base of all the salts of soda 
" Iron, which is supposed to give color to the 

blood . j 

" Potassium, the base of all the salts of potash 
"^Magnesium, the base of magnesia and magne- 

sian salts ....... 

" Silicon, the base of silex, which is found in the 

hair, teeth, and nails 

The elements of a man weighing . 



lb. 


oz. 


gr. 





2 


210 





2 


47 





2 


11(5 








100 








290 








12 








2 


154 


lbs. 





*' PROXIMATE PRINCIPLES IN THE HUMAN BODY. 



" 1. Water, composed of oxygen and hydrogen 
gases, as in the preceding table of ulti- 



lb. 



Ill 



"2 



mate elements 

Gelatine, of which the walls of the cells and 
many tissues of the body are composed . 
" 3. Fat. which constitutes the adipose tissue . 
"4. Phosphate of Lime, forming the principal 
part of the earthy matter of the bones . 
"5. Carbonate of Lime, also a part of the com- 
position of bone 

" 6. Albumen, found in the blood and in almost 
every organ . ........ 

'• 7. Fibrin, forming the muscles and the clot of 

the blood 

" 8. Fluoride of Calcium, found in the bones . 

' found in the brain, 
"9. Phosphate of Soda, an d nerves and con- 

- stituting the physical 
" 10. Phosphate of Pot- elements of vitality 

ash, L or vital energy 

"11. Phosphate of Magnesia, found with Phos- 
phate of Lime in the bones . • • 



«m» 



gr. 



15 








12 








5 


13 





1 








4 


3 





4 


4 


8 





3 











400 








100 



75 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 151 

lb. oz, gr. 

*' 12. Chloride of Sodium (common salt), in the 

blood 

il 13. Sulphate of Soda, in the blood 
" 14. Carbonate of Soda, in the blood and bones 
"15. Sulphate of Potash, in the blood . • 
** 16. Peroxide of Iron, in the blood (and sup- 
posed to furnish the coloring matter) • 
"17. Silica . ...... 









376 





1 


1T0 





1 


72 








400 





9 


150 








3 



154 



" CLASSIFICATION OF FOOD. 



•* The fourteen elements and seventeen combinations of these 
elements are all being consumed every day, and, therefore, 
must be supplied in food, or in the atmosphere, or in water. 
Food may be divided into three classes. That class which 
supplies the lungs with fuel, and thus furnishes heat to the 
system, and supplies fat or adipose substance, etc., we shall 
call Carbonates, carbon being the principal element ; that 
which supplies the waste of muscles, we shall call Nitrates, 1 
nitrogen being the principal element ; and that which sup- 
plies the bones, and the brain, and the nerves, and gives 
vital power, both muscular and mental, we shall call the 
Phosphates, phosphorus being the principal element. These 
last might be subdivided into the fixed and the soluble phos- 
phates, — the fixed being a combination principally with lime 
to form the bones, and the soluble being combinations with 
potash and soda, to work the brain and nerves ; but our 



1 The terms Nitrates, Carbonates, and Phosphates, are not 
strictly in accordance with chemioal nomenclature, these terms 
being generally applied to salts only; but no other single words 
would give an idea of the predominant element. See Appendix B. 
page 343 



152 



MAN. 



analyses as yet are to imperfect too allow a subdivision, and 
as all the mineral elements are more or less combined 
with each other, and all reside together in articles of 
food, we shall include all mineral elements under the term 
Phosphates. 

"The waste, and consequently the supply, of these three 
classes of elements, is very different, four times as much 
carbonaceous food being required as nitrogenous, and of 
the phosphates not more than two per cent of the carbonates. 
Altogether, the waste of these principles will average in a 
man of moderate size, with moderate heat, more than one 
pound in a day, varying very much according to the amount 
of exercise and the temperature in which he lives. These 
elements must all be supplied in vegetable or animal food, 
not one being allowed to become a part of the system unless 
it has been first organized with other elements of food, in 
some vegetable, or in water, or the atmosphere ; or being 
appropriated by some animal, remain organized and adapted 
to the human system ; so that animal and vegetable food 
contain the same elements in the same proportions and nearly 
the same chemical combinations, and are equally adapted 
to supply all necessary elements. 



In Animal Food, 



The Carbonates are "| 
furnished in . f Fat. 

} Albumen, 
Fibrin, and 
Casein. 



The Nitrates in 



In Vegetable Food, • 



The Carbonates are 1 Sugar, 
Furnished in . f Starch, and 
J a little Fat. 

} Gluten, 
Albumen, 
and Casein. 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 153 

"The phosphates, in both animal and vegetable food, are 
found inseparably connected with the nitrates, none being 
found in any of the carbonates, and generally in the pro- 
portion of from two to three per cent of all the principles in 
vegetable, and from three to five in animal food. 

"The carbonates of both animal and vegetable food are 
chemically alike — fat, sugar, and starch, all being com- 
posed of carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen, and in about the 
same chemical combinations and proportions. 

"The nitrates, also albumen, gluten, fibrin, and casein, 
are alike in chemical combinations and elements, being com- 
posed of nitrogen, oxygen, and hydrogen, and a little car- 
bon not digestible. 

" THE WANTS OP THE HUMAN SYSTEM, AND THE REASON FOB 

THEM. 

"In the foregoing tables are found fourteen different ele- 
ments of which the human system is composed, not one of 
which is permanently fixed in the system, but each, after 
performing the duties assigned it for a time, shorter or longer, 
according to the nature of those duties, becomes effete, and 
gives place to other particles of the same element, which must 
be supplied in food. Each organ reqiures different elements, 
and has the power of taking such as are required from the 
mass of elements circulated together in the blood, and of 
rejecting all other elements ; and while these fourteen ele- 
ments, all having been organized in some plant or vegetable, 
are supplied as they are wanted, peace and harmony prevail 
in the system, and perfect health is enjoyed; but let any 
other elements enter the circulation and an excitement is pro- 
duced, and each organ makes an effort to reject them. 
Take alcohol, for example, and the stomach is first excited 
and heated by efforts to expel it. It is then thrown into the 



154 MAN. 

circulation so as to be expelled by the kings, or skin, or 
kidneys, and the whole system becomes excited, especially 
the brain, in efforts to eject this enemy to all its functions. 

u Phosphorus, iron, and other disorganized substances, 
whether elements of the human system or not, are thus 
rejected with more or less excitement, according to their 
capacity for harming the system ; and thus can be clearly 
read the lessons of nature, teaching us to keep out of the 
stomach and lungs everything but these fourteen elements, 
and to admit them only as they are organized and prepared 
as in articles of natural food in Nature's laboratory — the 
Vegetable World. But these elements are required in very 
different amounts, according to the amount of exercise of 
the different faculties and the temperature of the atmosphere 
in which we live. 

"And here we have the foundation for a scientific adapta- 
tion of food to our different employments in life. The man 
who is chopping wood in an atmosphere at zero, and he who 
sits still, or uses only his brain, in a room at a temperature 
of seventy degrees, consume very different elements in very 
different proportions, and therefore require different elements 
of food. The one needs the muscle-producing nitrogenate 
elements and the heat producing carbonates; while the other 
needs very few nitrogenates, and only carbonates enough 
to supply the breathing operations with fuel; but he needs 
more of the phosphates to keep the brain in working order, 
and we shall find on inquiry that nature has furnished food 
just adapted to these and other conditions of life, and shall 
find also that, following these suggestions of nature, we shall 
obtain a rich reward, both in the enjoyment of health and in 
the enjoyment of eating." 

From the foregoing tables and their explanations, the fol- 
lowing, among other conclusions, may be arrived at: First, 
that every human being should understand the chemical 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OP HEALTH. 155 

composition of the body ; and also the chemical constitu- 
ents of the several kinds of food, so as to know how to select 
the proper food to keep the body in healthy condition. Sec- 
ond, every person should understand his own temperament 
and constitution, so as to supply as nearly as possible in the 
selection of his or her food the defects of the system. 

If the physical temperament is defective and the muscles 
weak, then use a plenteous supply of muscle food, such as 
lean meats, cheese, beans, peas, and other foods rich in 
nitrogen. If the vital temperament is defective, and as a 
consequence the individual is lean with a weak respiration 
and a languid circulation, then he needs a bountiful supply 
of carbonaceous or fattening and heat producing food, such 
as fat meat, butter, white bread, Irish potatoes, rice, sugar, 
and other foods rich in starch or sugar. But if the spirit- 
ual or mental temperament is defective, and the brain and 
nerves need to be developed and strengthened, then he 
should use a bountiful supply of food rich in phosphorus, 
such as the flesh of active fishes, and birds, eggs, oatmeal, 
bread made of whole wheat grain, barley cakes, berries, 
fruits, etc. Thus we may, by understanding ourselves and 
our diet, to some extent at least supply the original defects 
of our constitutions, and in a comparative sense harmonize 
the temperaments and produce healthful bodies. This, as 
already indicated, is or ought to be, the fundamental object 
of education. 

I give in this connection from pages 132-135, of the Phil- 
osophy of Eating, the following, viz : — 

" CLASSIFICATION OP POOD IN COMMON USB. 

II 1st Class. — That in which the proportion of heat-produc- 
ing elements is too large for the common wants of the sys- 
tem, and which alone would sustain life only for a time, 
shorter or longer in proportion to the amount of other ele- 



156 



MAN. 



ments which they contain. Lard, butter, sugar, or any 
animal fats being capable of sustaining life, without other 
food, only from twenty to thirty days ; and superfine flour, 
being mostly composed of starch, has been proved by exper- 
iment on animals, to be capable of sustaining life, without 
other food, only from fifty to sixty days. These are the 
carbonates, described in another chapter. 

" 2d Class. — That in which the muscle-making elements 
are too large in proportion to their carbonates. Some of 
these carbonates would be capable of sustaining life only 
for a limited period without articles of the first class to keep 
up the steam. These are the nitrates, described before. 

" 3d Class. — That in which the proportion of elements 
which support the brain and nerves, and give vital energy 
both of mind and muscle, is too large for the common 
duties of life. These are the phosphates. 

" 4th Class. — That in which there is too much waste mate- 
rial in proportion to nutritive principles, and which, there- 
fore, if eaten alone, produces diarrhoea and debility, but 
which, taken with other more nutritive food, subserves the 
important purpose of giving distention, and keeping the 
bowels in action, and the system free and cool, by prevent- 
ing a surplus of stimulating food. 

4 'The representative articles of these four classes are as 
follows : — 



1st Class. 

CARBONATES. 

Butter and lard 

Fat of all 

meats. 

Vegetable 

oils. 

Fine flour, 

etc. 



2d Class. 

NITRATES. 

Lean meats. 

Cheese. 
Peas and 

beans. 
Lean fishes, 
etc. 



3d Class. 

PHOSPHATES. 

Shell fishes. 
Lean meats. 
Peas and 

beans. 
Active fish- 
es, birds, 
etc. 



4th Class. 

WASTE. 

Green vege- 
tables. 
Fruits, ber- 
ries, etc. 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 157 

" Under ordinary circumstances, in moderate weather, with 
moderate exercise of muscle and brain, the proper proportions 
of carbonates, nitrates, and phosphates seem to be the average 
proportions found in unbolted wheat meal, viz. : Sixty-five 
of the carbonates to fifteen of the nitrates, and two of the 
phosphates to seventeen or eighteen of water and waste, — 
or something more than four times as much of the carbon- 
ates as of the nitrates, and two per cent of the phosphates, 
the amount of water not being of much consequence, as it 
is supplied as it is demanded, and taken as drink when it 
is not supplied in the food. 

" A consideration of this classification will help us to un- 
derstand and correct many important errors in diet. 

" Every observing person has noticed that after a meal in 
which the predominant articles were chiefly composed of fat 
meat, fine flour, butter or sugar, he is stupid, or sleepy, and 
indisposed to exercise either mind or muscle ; and the rea- 
son is plain ; as very little food for either brain or muscle is 
found in either of the articles named, and this torpor will be 
found to be in exact proportion to the excess of these car- 
bonates over their proper proportion. And this is the inev- 
itable consequence of separating the important principles 
which God has joined together, and furnished in every 
article of appropriate food, in the right proportions, as 
nourishment for every faculty. 

" If the fat meat had been eaten as it was made, mixed 
with an appropriate amount of lean, and instead of the 
flour, the bread had been made of meal from the whole 
wheat as it was created, and milk had been substituted for 
the butter, and the sugar taken as it was intended to be 
taken, with the vegetables and delicious fruits, mixed with 
such other elements as the system required, then the appe- 
tite might have been indulged to the fullest extent, and no 



158 MAN. 

organs or faculties would have been oppressed and over- 
burdened while others were not supplied, and every part of 
the system would have been prepared, without stupor or 
sleepiness, to perform the duties assigned it. 

44 If we take our food as it is made, with the elements mixed 
by Infinite Wisdom, we need use our judgment only in 
cooking it, so as to develop its flavor and fit it for 
digestion." 

I can not quote farther from Dr. Bellows in this connection 
but must refer the reader to his valuable work, believing that 
it, or some similar book, should be in the hands of every 
human being. We would then no longer hear those foolish 
questions, so often asked of the doctors, " How am I to get 
rid of this fat?" "Or I am so lean, how can I gain 
flesh?" The lean can easily supply themselves with more 
flesh and fat by the use of more carbonaceous food, such as 
fat meat, butter, milk, rice, potatoes, white flour bread, 
sugar, etc. , and if they have any trouble about digesting it 
take more active exercise in the open air. While those who 
are too corpulent can rid themselves of a portion of their sur- 
plus fat and flesh by abstaining from the use of the aforesaid 
carbonaceous food and by using more muscle and brain food, 
such as lean meat, fish, cheese, beans, peas, unbolted bread, 
wheat, oat or barley, with plenty of fruit. But I have yet 
to call attention to the most important characteristic of 
food ; and that is that it consists of all the chemical elements 
which compose the human body — not in their disorganized 
forms as we find them in drug stores and apothecary shops ; 
but in their organized condition, as we find them in the veg- 
etable kingdom, or as we find them so organized in the 
animal kingdom appropriated from the vegetable kingdom. 

Thus phosphorus, iron, carbon, nitrogen, etc., all impor- 
tant and vital elements in the constitution of man, if taken 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 159 

in their organized form — become poisons if taken into the 
system in a disorganized form, as we find them in drugs, 
because they can neither be digested, assimilated, nor in 
any way appropriated by the system, and have to be thrown 
off as foreign matter like any other poison. The distinction 
between, and the definition of food and poison as given by 
Dr. R. T. Trail, a good authority, is as follows, viz. : — 

" WHAT IS FOOD AND WHAT IS POISON? 

"The explanation which our author has attempted will 
not bear a moment's criticism. According to his logic, any 
thing and every thing may be or may not be food ; and any 
thing or every thing may be or may not be poison. I will 
prove that arsenic, copper, vitriol, antimony, opium, 
tobacco, henbane, the bohun upas, and the boa constrictor 
are as much food as alcohol is, and by precisely the same 
data by which our author makes alcohol ' respiratory food.' 

" Now/ooc? is any material capable of transformation into 
tissue or structure. It must of course be susceptible of un- 
dergoing digestion and assimilation. This is true of both 
animals and vegetables. 

" Poison, on the contrary, is any material chemically in- 
compatible with the tissues or structures. This is true, also, 
of both animals and vegetables. 

"These definitions imply natural, fixed, permanent, and 
invariable properties and relations. They imply that there 
are a great variety of foods and many degrees of poisons ; 
and they imply that food is never convertible into poison nor 
poison into food. Poison can never supply tissue or force ; 
food may or may not, as it is used or abused. 

"We have two ways of determining, in relation to ani- 
mals, whether a given substance be a food or a poison. 

"1. All nutrient material — all food, is prepared in the 



160 MAN. 

formative processes of vegetables ; it is produced or created 
in the processes of growth and development, and never in 
the processes of decay decomposition or putrefaction. 

"Animals can not create or form nourishment of any kind. 
They can only appropriate what is ready formed in vegeta- 
bles. It is true an animal can get nourishment by eating 
another animal, but the animal eaten can only supply the 
alimentary principles originally derived from the vegetable 
kingdom. 

14 If we submit sugar, starch, gum, gluten, fibrin, casein, 
albumin, etc. , to this test, we find they may be alimentary 
substances, because they are produced in the development 
and growth of vegetables. They constitute what are called 
the proximate principles of food, in contradistinction to 
chemical elements on the one hand, and aliments or foods 
proper on the other. Wheat, rice, potatoes, apples, etc., are 
aliments; while sugar, starch, gluten, etc., are alimentary 
principles. The aliments are compounds of the alimentary 
principles, and these are compounds of the simple or chem- 
ical elements, oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, etc. 

" If we judge alcohol by the same rule, we see that it is 
just as far from the nature, and character, and qualities of 
food as it is possible for anything to be. It is not produced 
by any process of formation, growth, or development what- 
ever. It is always a product of decay and decomposition. 
It results from fermentation. Fermentation is exactly the 
opposite of formation. This is a constructive process ; that 
is a rotting process, a process of destruction and putrefac- 
tion. One process compounds simpler into more complex 
forms of matter ; the other resolves compounds into their 
simple or ultimate elements. One process manufactures 
food ; the other destroys it. The product in one case, if 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 161 

taken into the stomach, is nutritious; the product in the 
other case when taken into the stomach is poisonous. 

"The reader will please bear in mind that I do not say 
that every thing which is produced in the processes of veg- 
etable growth is food. Many virulent poisons are so pro- 
duced as opium and tobacco. I only say that food is 
produced in this way, and in no other, and that whatever is 
not so produced can not be food ; hence alcohol, not being 
so produced, can not be food. 

"Alcohol, then is a poison, because it results from fer- 
mentation, decay, decomposition* and because all such pro- 
ducts are poisonous. No such products are convertible 
into structure, hence they are not food ; all such products 
are chemically incompatible with living structures, hence 
they are poisons. 

"2. But we have another test still more conclusive. The 
physiological or pathological effects of alcohol are in all 
respects analogous to those of all admitted poisons, and 
totally unlike those of any alimentary substance whatever. 
This brings up what are called, in medical parlance, the 
operative effects, the modus operandi of alcohol ; and here 
we may lay down another general, and, indeed, universal 
rule. 

"All poisons injure the structures and disturb the func- 
tions of the body, in all quantities, these effects being pre- 
cisely according to dose, other circumstances being equal. 
All food, on the contrary, in moderate quantities, never 
injures the structures nor disturbs the functions. Food is 
only injurious in excessive quantities, whereas alcohol is 
injurious in all quantities. 

"This point has been established by a multitude of exper- 
iments. Let us glance at a few of them. 

11 



162 MAN. 

"Pereira, author of 'Food and Diet,' * Materia Med- 
ica,' etc., than whom there is no higher authority on these 
subjects in the medical profession, in summing up the ex- 
periments of applying alcohol to different vegetables, uses 
the following language : — 

" 'Alcohol acts on plants as a rapid and caustic poison. 
Its effects are analogous to those of hydrocyanic acid.' As 
hydrocyanic (Prussic) acid is one of the most deadly poi- 
sons known, it does not appear that there need be any great 
difficulty in understanding the nature of alcohol in relation 
to the vegetable kingdom. If it supplies ' force,' the force 
is of the killing kind. If it is a 'respiratory food* to 
plants, it is as murderously ' obnoxious ' as it is to man. Is* 
there anything known in food which can be made to occa- 
sion similar effect? Most certainly not. 

"As to the effects of alcohol on animals, Pereira tells us: 
' Leeches, immersed in spirit, die in two or three minutes.' 
Fontana found that when half the body of a leech was 
plunged in spirit, the part lost its motion, while the other 
half continued in action. The same experimentalist ob- 
served that spirit killed frogs when administered by the 
stomach, injected beneath the skin or applied to the brain or 
spinal marrow. Applied to the right crural nerve of a frog, 
alcohol destroyed the power of moving the right foot. 
Monro observed that alcohol, applied to the hind legs of a 
frog, rendered the pulsation of the heart less frequent, and 
diminished sensibility and mobility. Fontana states that 
turtles were killed by spirits administered by the stomach or 
applied to the lower portion of the bowels, or injected 
through the skin. 

" Flourens tried many experiments on birds, and found al- 
cohol, applied to the cerebellum, to have more injurious 
effects on the senses, faculties and movements of the ani- 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 163 

inals than did the removal of this part of the brain by the 
knife ! 

"Alcohol has also been tried on fishes. Pereira says : * If 
a little spirit be added to water, in which are contained some 
minnows, the little animals make a few spasmodic leaps, 
and become incapable of retainii)g their proper position in the 
water, but float on their sides or back.' This is equivalent 
to accusing the fishes of being drunk. 

" Alcohol has been experimented with on domestic ani- 
mals. It has been introduced into the stomachs of cats, 
dogs, horses, sheep, rabbits, Guinea-pigs, and in all cases 
there was a powerful excitement of the brain, followed by 
an apoplectic condition ; and a post mortem examination in 
each case revealed inflammation of the stomach. Says Pe- 
reira : i Four drachms of alcohol, injected into the jugular vein 
of a dog, coagulated the blood and caused instant death.' 
"Alcohol has been tested on man quite as extensively as 
on the inferior animals. 

" ' The local effects of alcohol, or rectified spirits,' says 
Pereira, ' are those of a powerfully irritant and caustic poi- 
son. To whatever part or the body applied it causes con- 
traction and condensation of the tissue, and gives rise to 
pain, heat, redness, and other symptoms of inflammation. 
These effects depend partially or wholly on the chemical in- 
fluence of alcohol over the constituents of the tissues, for 
the affinity of this liquid for water causes it to abstract the 
latter from soft living parts with which alcohol is placed in 
contact ; and when these are of an albuminous or fibrinous 
nature, it coagulates the liquid albumin or fibrin.' 

"Again, says Pereira : ( The irritation and inflammation set 
up in parts to which alcohol has been applied, depends (in 
part) on the resistance which the living tissue makes to the 
chemical influence of the poison ; in other words, it is the 



164 MAN. 

reaction of the vital powers, brought about by the chemical 
action of the alcohol.' 

" *But,' continues Pereira, * besides the local influence of 
this liquid dependent on its affinity, we can hardly refuse to 
admit a dynamical action in virtue of which it sets up local ir- 
ritation and inflammation, independent of its chemical agency. 
Dr. Beaumont, in his experiments on St. Martin (whose 
stomach was perforated by a musket-ball, through which 
foods and liquids were directly introduced), found that all 
forms of alcoholic beverages invariably produced an inflam- 
matory state of the stomach, and retarded digestion.' 

"The constitutional or remote effects of alcohol are 
divided by Pereira into three stages or degrees of intensity : 
1. Excitement; 2. Drunkenness; 3. Coma, or true apoplexy. 

" ALL ELEMENTS OF POOD MUST HAVE BEEN ORGANIZED IN SOME 
VEGETABLE, OR THEY ARE REJECTED. 

" Not only is it impossible to purify the blood by the use of 
articles recommended by ignorant empirics, as we have en- 
deavored to show, and useless to attempt any purification 
except by the common-sense expedient of supplying defi- 
cient elements, and removing or withholding redundant 
ones, statements, the truth of which will be understood and 
appreciated by all, learned or unlearned ; but it is also true, 
as I shall endeavor to prove, that no element, however much 
it may be wanted in the system, can be made to become a 
constituent of the blood, or be appropriated by any of the 
tissues, unless that element has been organized in some plant 
and is thus fitted to be received according to the law of 
nature. 

" 1 make this proposition with diffidence, because it has not 
been considered by our scientific physicians ; and every day, 
chlorotic girls and other patients are furnished with disor- 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 165 

ganized iron, and other elements from the shops, with the 
expectation that they will supply the deficiency of the ele- 
ments which are supposed to be wanted to restore the blood 
to its normal condition ; and one learned professor, as I 
have before stated, is endeavoring to supply the phos- 
phorous, which had been taken out of the wheat, where it was 
organized and prepared to supply the system with that im- 
portant element, by adding to the flour salts made from dis- 
organized phosphoric acid. 

I have elsewhere referred to the great plan of nature, by 
which all the elements necessary to be used in making or 
repairing the system were deposited in the soil before man 
was made, to be taken up in the sap of plants, and vegeta- 
bles, and fruit trees, and deposited in the seed, and fruits, 
and juices of these trees and plants, in just the proportions 
necessary to supply every organ and function ; then to be 
eaten, and digested, and made a constituent of the blood, 
and appropriated by the organs and tissues ; then to be cast 
off by ttfe excretions, and again deposited in the soil, to be 
again taken up by vegetation, and continue their rounds per- 
petually. 

44 Now, this is undoubtedly the best arrangement for sup- 
plying the human system with all necessary elements that 
even God could make — an arrangement, to short-sighted 
man, wonderful and incomprehensible ; and is it for us, who 
have not intellect sufficient to understand one of the pro- 
cesses by which this plan is executed, to say that any part 
of it is unnecessary? — that iron and phosphorous, pre- 
pared from crude, unorganized materials, in the laboratory 
of any chemist, are just as well adapted to supply the wants 
of the human system, as these elements prepared in Nature's 
own laboratory ? Why not, then, take carbon and nitrogen, 
or the other elements, directly from the ground, and repair 



166 MAN. 

the whole system, or make a new man, by a shorter and 
cheaper process? 

"the penalty fob taking into the stomach elements op 
food not organized 

"After such infinite pains to perfect a plan for supplying 
the human system with every necessary element, it seems to 
me reasonable, and perfectly consonant with Nature's other 
laws, that an ordinance should be instituted requiring that 
no elements should be admitted into the system except in 
accordance with this arrangement, and that every attempt to 
introduce them should be visited by punishment, more or 
less severe, according to the importance of the element ; and 
this we find to be true. 

' i Not an element is allowed to be incorporated into, and 
become a part of the blood, or any organ or tissue, that is 
not fitted for digestion, in some vegetable ; and if any ele- 
ment is offered that is not thus prepared, a rebellion ensues, 
more or less energetic and severe, according to the import- 
ance of the element. This rebellion, or excitement, is in- 
jurious to the system, and all the organs and functions 
involved ; and this is what is meant by the word poison, and 
constitutes the penalty. 

" Phosphorous, for example, is a very important element, 
being the element on which the action of the brain depends, 
and the physical source of vitality, and an important con- 
stituent, as well, of bones and other solid tissues. In a 
common-sized man there are found to be nearly two pounds of 
solid phosphorus, doing its important work quietly and harm- 
lessly ; but take two grains of the two pounds which have 
been disorganized as can easily be done by calcining a bone, 
and attempt to put them back and reorganize them, by giv- 
ing them at once to a healthy man, and such an excitemenl 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 167 

is produced, especially of the brain, that delirium, iniliamma- 
tion, and death might ensue within a single hour ; but give 
them ten times that amount, organized in oat-meal or barley 
cake, or any other natural food containing it, and the system 
will quietly and gratefully appropriate what it needs, and re- 
ject the remainder without excitement or harm. 

44 And can we resist or gainsay the evidence thus furnished, 
that oat-meal and barley cakes, and unbolted wheat flour, 
are the appropriate means of introducing phosphorus into 
the system rather, than phosphatic bread, the phosphorus in 
which was taken from calcined bones ? 

"THE PENALTY OP TAKING DISORGANIZED IRON. 

" Iron is a necessary, but less important, element of the 
human system than phosphorus. It is found in the bran of 
wheat and other grains, and vegetables, and, being trans- 
ferred from them, is found also in the muscles and blood of 
animals, and in the curd of milk, and other natural food, in 
quantities as large as can be appropriated by the system ; 
and this proves to my mind that Nature intended it to be 
furnished through these articles of natural food. 

"Being less important than phosphorus, the penalties for 
attempting to introduce it in any other way are less severe 
and less manifest, but are still sufficiently apparent to cor- 
roborate my position. 

44 Dr. J. Francis Churchill, a French author, who has 
given great attention to. the effects of different mineral ele- 
ments on the human system, in an article headed 4 Danger 
of Iron in Consumption and Chlorosis,' says that M. 
Trousseau, another very celebrated French physician, whose 
authority in this country to-day is as high as that of any 
man living, has carefully investigated the effects of iron, 
and from a synopsis of a report of these investigations he 



168 ^ MAN. 

makes the following quotations : ' M. Trousseau has just 
given utterance to an authoritative and positive statement, 
which will, no doubt, surprise the profession everywhere. 
He declares that iron in any form, given in chlorotic affec- 
tions, to patients in whom the consumptive diathesis exists, 
invariably fixes the diathesis, and hastens the development of 
the tubercles. The iron may induce a factitious return to 
health ; the physician may flatter himself that he has cor- 
rected the chlorotic condition of his patient ; but to his sur- 
prise, he will find the patient soon after fall into a phthisical 
state, from which there is no return. This result, or at least 
its hastening, M. Trousseau attributes to the iron. The 
assertion is a most startling one. M. Trousseau is never- 
theless so certain of what he says, that he denounces the ad- 
ministration of iron in chlorosis as criminal in the highest 
degree.* " 

Drs. Bellows and Trail are reliable authorities on these sub- 
jects, and their opinions are but the deductions of science 
itself. I would advise all my readers to study their works 
on the subject of food, poisons, and medicines, and profit by 
them. From the foregoing quotations the following conclu- 
sions among others may be safely arrived at. First, many 
things supposed to be foods, or harmless beverages and 
stimulants, are in reality poisons, because they can neither 
be digested nor assimilated by the human constitution ; and 
nature by an extra effort has to throw them out of the sys- 
tem, at any or every avenue that presents itself. This is 
necessarily a heavy tax on the constitution and a perma- 
nent injury to the health. Under this head may be classed 
stimulants and narcotics generally ; tobacco in every form, 
all forms of alcoholic drinks, opiates of every kind and 
character, and every drug and article whose effect is to 



FOOD, AND THE LAWS OF HEALTH. 169 

deaden vitality. These are all poisons destructive to vitality ; 
their use as foods, beverages and stimulants should be wholly 
abandoned, and their general use as medicines should also be 
abandoned. 

Of course I admit that there are cases of intense physical 
suffering, and probably other exceptional cases, in which the 
use of some of these articles as medicines is justifiable. 

The second conclusion arrived at from the authorities 
cited, is that the chemical elements which constitute real 
food the very elements the human body needs, must be 
taken in their organized forms as found in the vegetable 
kingdom, or as appropriated from it by animals ; and that 
these same food elements in their unorganized form are 
poisons and not foods, because the system can not assimilate 
them by digestion and absorption ; but by an extra effort 
throws them off as other poisons. 

The third and last inference I make is that the entire sys- 
tem of drug medicines, as practiced by the several schools of 
medicine, is wrong in principle, and in the main injurious to 
the human system. Of course, I recognize the fact that all 
general rules have their exceptions ; and admit that there 
are cases in which drug medicines are justifiable if not nec- 
essary. But what I maintain is that as a general system the 
practice of drug medicine is wrong, and productive of infi- 
nitely more evil than good ; because the remedies all being 
in an unorganized condition, can not be appropriated or 
assimilated by the system and have to be thrown off as 
other poisons ; which requires an extraordinary effort of the 
system, which, in its weakened condition from disease, it is 
often unable to make, and in the effort succumbs and dies. 
The large majority of cases of sickness, if left to nature's 
remedies with good nursing, would recover without the aid 
of doctors or medicines. 



170 MAN. 

All physicians tell us that ail they can do is to aid nature. 
Let us appeal to them in the name of humanity not to place 
obstructions and burdens in nature's way. 

It is upon nature's great remedies that we must rely for 
recovery in almost every case of diseased body. 

The light, heat, and electricity of the sun, the life-giving 
oxygen of the pure air ; water, cold, tepid, warm, and hot, in 
its manifold forms and states, intelligently applied ; proper 
food properly prepared and administered, kind and intelli- 
gent nursing, all the physical exercise that can be borne ; 
proper mental and social recreation, a cheerful spirit, a 
strong will, an unbounded hope and a firm faith are the 
remedies which will relieve nearly every case of sickness, 
which is curable at all. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE MIND PHRENOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED. 

TRICTLY and philosophically speaking man is three- 
fold, body, soul, and spirit as already shown. But for 
all practical purposes he is twofold, body and mind. The 
best definition of mind is spirit, in matrimonial alliance 
with the body ; and as such it embraces not only the spirit 
proper, but also the leading power and attributes of the 
soul. The brain is the organ and instrument of the mind; 
and there are two brains, one representing the spirit, and 
the other the soul. The cerebrum or brain proper is the 
residence of the spirit. The cerebellum is the home of the 
soul. The soul, as heretofore stated, is the result of the 
union of spirit and matter; and is the medium or inter- 
mediate between the body and spirit ; and as such it extends 
into both, and occupies common ground in part, with both 
body and spirit. 

That part of the soul which imparts physical life, appe- 
tites, passions, and propensities to the body, may be re- 
garded for all practical purposes as a part of the body. 
That part of the soul which is represented by the affections, 
emotions, and higher passions, may very properly be con- 
sidered a part of the mind. So when we speak of man as 
twofold, body, and mind, we mean to imply that the mind 
embraces the leading attributes of the soul ; and the body 
the remaining functions thereof. As in logic, the syllogism 
is defined as consisting of three terms ; the major premis, 
minor premis, and conclusion, when in reality two terms : 

(171) 



172 MAN. 

the major premis and conclusion, cover the entire ground ; 
the minor premis being a mere intermediate or connecting 
link, partly embraced by the major premis, and partly by 
the conclusion. So in relation to the nature of man ; fully 
stated he possesses body, soul, and spirit ; but practically 
considered only body and mind. The soul is intermediate, 
extending into both body and spirit, and partly embraced 
by each. 

Having defined and explained what is meant by mind, I 
will proceed now to its consideration. The only reliable 
means we have of learning anything about the mind is from 
its manifestations, and the organism through which it acts. 

The brain is now universally regarded as the organ of the 
mind ; and this is the sure rock upon which the science of 
Phrenology is founded. And we have no reliable mental 
philosophy outside of Phrenology. 

The brain, and the nervous system, which is but an exten- 
sion of the brain to every part of the body — is at once the 
organ and instrument of the mind. We can have no mani- 
festation of mind in the present state of existence, except 
through this medium. Hence it is that when the brain is 
organically defective we have idiocy, not so much for want 
of mind, as for want of an instrument, through which and 
by which the mind can act. Or the brain may be and often 
is originally of good constitution, and yet from a hurt or 
disease becomes organically impaired or destroyed, and in- 
sanity is the result. The mind is there, but has no medium 
through which to manifest itself. Both idiocy and insanity 
conclusively show that the brain is the only organ and in- 
strument of the mind. 

The structure and functions of the brain are fully explained 
by the sciences of anatomy and physiology; and I have 
neither time nor ability to go into this subject in detail. 



THE MIND PHKENOLOGICALLY CONSIDEKED. 173 

The subject will be treated in a general way, and from the 
phrenological standpoint. As already stated there are two 
brains : The cerebrum, or brain proper, the temporal home 
of the spirit, occupying the upper and main part of the skull 
or cranium; and the cerebellum, or small brain, which is 
the seat of the soul, and occupies the base of the skull in 
close proximity to the body. Both brains are divided by a 
perpendicular division into the right and left hemispheres. 
These hemispheres contain exactly similar organs, and per- 
form the same functions ; the right hemisphere, through its 
nerves, controlling the left side of the body, and the left 
hemisphere the right side of the body. 

The fundamental proposition of Phrenology is that every 
faculty of the mind is represented by a distinct organ of the 
brain, through which it manifests itself. As to the number 
and location of these distinct organs of the brain, phrenolo- 
gists are not fully agreed. Dr. J, R. Buchanan in his great 
work the il Neurological System of Anthropology,' ' main- 
tains that in the widest sense of organology every fiber of 
the brain may be regarded as an organ representing some 
distinct shade of faculty or sentiment of the mind. That 
several of these adjacent fibers maybe grouped together and 
called an organ ; and that several of these organs may be 
grouped together and called regions, such as the region of 
intellect, the region of virtue, etc. Dr. Buchanan also main- 
tains that there are powers of mind for which no representa- 
tive organ has been located, that the brain has not been fully 
explored, and a complete map of the organs can not yet be 
made. 

While Messrs. Fowler & Wells, the great American phren- 
ologists, basing on the discoveries of Gall and the system and 
nomenclature of Spurzheim, — have mapped off the entire 
brain, and located distinct organs for (as they claim) each 



174 MAN. 

distinct faculty of the mind. The late Dr. W. C. Hurley, of 
Texas, made a revised classification of the organs, in which he 
modified slightly the system adopted by Fowler & Wells. 
That revised classification, as furnished by his son, John A. 
Hurley, to the March number, 1884, of the Phrenological 
Journal, I regard as possibly the nearest correct classifica- 
tion of the phrenological organs of the brain according to 
the Gallian system, yet formulated. 

Having never studied organology in its details, nor tried 
to locate the several organs of the brain precisely. I prefer 
to consider the matter mainly from the standpoint of groups, 
or regions as laid down in Buchanan's Anthropology; such 
as the Region of the Intellect, the Region of Virtue, the 
Region of Power, etc. Dr. Buchanan divides the head into 
six grand divisions. 1st. The Region of the Intellect, cov- 
ering the forehead, front and sides, 2d. The frontal part 
of the top head, extending from the forehead to the center 
of the top of the head called the Region of Goodness. 3d. 
The Region of Power and Energy, located on the back part 
of the top head, extending from the top about half way 
down the back head. 4th. The Region of Animality , located 
on the side of the back-head, immediately to the front and 
below the last named region. 5th. The Region of Violence, 
embracing the lower half of the back head and located mainly 
behind the ear. 6th. The Region of Relaxation, embracing 
the frontal basilar portion of the head, located in front of 
the ear and extending upward to the Region of Goodness or 
Virtue. In order to make the position of Dr. Buchanan 
clear, as to this division of the head, I here insert what he 
says on pages 91, 92, 93, of Buchanan's Anthropology, as 
follows, viz.: — 



THE MIND PHRENOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED. 175 



" ORGANOLOGY SIX GREAT REGIONS. 

"The most convenient division of the head for practical 
purposes will be into the regions of intellect, virtue, and 
power occupying the frontal, the superior, and the upper 
posterior regions, to which we add their antagonists, the 
region of animality, violence and relaxation, occupying the 
occipito lateral, occipito-basilar and antero-basilar regions. 

["I. Intellect; G-. Goodness 
or Virtue ; P. Power ; A. Ani- 
mality ; V. Violence and Crime ; 
R. Relaxation.] 

(" It must be borne in mind 
that precise divisions have an 
arbitrary character. There are 
many organs near the dividing 
lines, which are connected by 
natural affinities with each of 
the adjacent divisions. We 
might with great propriety 
trace a neutral zone in the temples, bordering upon each of 
the six great regions and possessing an intermediate charac- 
ter.) 

" The comparative size of these regions will determine their 
predominance in the character. But it is to be borne in 
mind, that our organs are not characterized by a democratic 
equality of influence upon the character. In the normal 
development of the brain, the superior organs have a de- 
cided ascendancy. The organ of Consciousness or Wake- 
fulness has usually from sixteen to eighteen hours of predomi- 
nance, and its antagonist, producing profound sleep, has but 
six or eight hours of full indulgence. The region of health 




176 MAN. 

predominates habitually over that of disease. Honesty and 
philanthropy predominate habitually over fraud and felony. 
Abstinence yields but occasionally through the day to the 
influence of Alimentiveness, and it would seem that the lower 
organs of the brain are more and more deprived of a con- 
trolling influence upon the character in proportion as they 
are inferior in rank. Yet in proportion to the size of their 
development, it becomes probable that they will assume and 
maintain an occasional control of the character. 

" The inferior organs are to be regarded as the physiological 
antagonists of the higher, standing related to corporeal func- 
tions as the higher do to the mental. The constitution of 
man may be compared to a tree, the higher portion of which 
expanding in the sunlight and atmosphere is dependent upon 
its subterranean portion rooted in the soil. As the roots 
are to the tree, so in their legitmate range of action are the 
inferior organs to the superior, which are able to exist 
in man only when they have a physiological support. 

"The different regions are named from their ultimate ten- 
dency. The region anterior the ears producing disease and 
feebleness — the region posterior to the ears producing vari- 
ous crimes and vices, when acting unrestrained — the frontal 
organs producing various forms of intelligence, the coronal 
organs various species of virtue — the upper occipital pro- 
ducing various efficient energies, and the occipito-lateral 
tending to diminish or destroy the intellectual action, and 
keep man in a condition of stationary barbarism. 

" The region of Animality is so named in consequence of its 
being the antagonist of intellectual action. Its predomi- 
nance would produce entire mental vacuity and incapacity 
for thought. Its most predominant action is during our noc- 
turnal sleep, although during our waking moments it fre- 
quently produces a heavy lethargic influence and mental in- 



THE MIND PHRENOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED. 177 

activity. It produces an aversion to deep investigation and 
and continuous exertion of mind. Doubtless one of its 
most important effects is to assist the power of mental self- 
control by enabling us to arrest any mental faculty, and 
thereby discharge from the mind thoughts of which we wish 
to get rid. Hence it sustains the region of power in a negative 
manner, by rendering us less impressible mentally, and more 
capable of resisting surrounding influences addressed to the 
mind. It diminishes all the intense and wonderful phenom- 
ena of mind. The enthusiasm of genius — the wakefulness 
of the student — the intensity of thought, when hope, rage, 
or remorse disturb the mind, are all quietly restrained by the 
unintelligent region when predominant. This influence is to 
some extent desirable or necessary to health, for extreme 
devotion to intellectual pursuits is debilitating if not posi- 
tively morbific. 

" We determine the intellectual development by projection 
of the front lobe — not by the apparent height or area of the 
forehead. A forehead may be receding or even narrow, and 
yet contain much intellect — it may be vertical, high and 
broad, with a great intellectual deficiency. 

" The organs of Virtue are developed upwards, so as to 
give a height, fullness, and roundness to the upper part of 
the head, which rises above the forehead and above the 
temporal arch. 

* ' The organs of Violence and Crime give fullness, roundness, 
breadth, and depth to the lower part of the occiput. The 
organs of Relaxation, Debility and Disease, which produce 
a feeble, inefficient, morbid character, give breadth and 
depth to the middle lobe, indicated by breadth in front of 
the ears. 

"The organs which produce an efficient commanding char- 
acter give elongation upward and backward. 
IS 



178 MAN. 

1 i The region of Animality produces breadth and roundness 
above and behind the ears. 

ORGANOLOGY CONTINUED. 

" Our cerebral organs should be regarded as instruments 
to be used, or as embodying capacities to be developed. Sur- 
rounding circumstances impress an organ and develop its 
functional activity. Disease, for example, can not display 
itself without some morbific influences ; intellect can not be 
displayed without impressions upon the senses, to excite and 
develope intellectual action ; nor can the moral faculties at- 
tain their full development and activity without the proper 
objects to excite our kindly emotions. This view enforces 
the importance of education. 

" Education changes the form of the head by increasing 
and diminishing the various organs. It also changes the 
form of the convolutions, by developing particular portions 
of a convolution at the expense of others. The brain is 
thus susceptible of an indefinite number of modifications, 
and will become adapted to any situation in which man is 
placed. The future has in store countless varieties of hu- 
manity. 

" Every organ exerts an influence upon the whole constitu- 
tion and character ; consequently each organ is modified in 
its action by the character of the whole brain ; and the same 
organ, acting in different heads will impart materially differ- 
ent impressions to an impressible person. 

i 'Every organ directly checks its antagonist, and also 
checks to a greater or less extent those which are nearly 
associated with the antagonist. It stimulates and sustains 
those which are connected with itself by lying in the same 
region, and modifies sensibly all the other organs, imparting 
to them a portion of its own character ; as when the organ 



THE MIND PHRENOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED. 179 

of Energy predominates, all the organs have a more ener- 
getic action ; or when ideality predominates, they are more 
refined. 

" Every element of human nature has a particular locality, 
at which it is manifested in the highest energy, around 
which location the functions partake of that character, and 
from which they gradually change to an opposite. Hence 
we may say that every faculty culminates to a particular 
point, where it is manifested in the highest energy. 

" Around every organ will be found grouped those which 
are congenial or connected with it, and around its antago- 
nist an opposing group. Hence we may divide the brain 
between any two antagonistic organs into antagonistic hem- 
ispheres. The organs around each principal organ, par- 
taking of its character ; and hence the hemispheres opposing 
each other, as the hemispheres of Light and Darkness, of 
Good and Evil, of Health and Disease," etc, etc. 

The region of Intellect is divided into three divisions by 
nearly horizontal lines. At the base of the forehead, along 
the line of the eyebrows, we have the region of sensation and 
perception, ordinarily called the perceptive organs. Imme- 
diately above this division and extending half way up the 
forehead is the region of memory, or the recollective organs ; 
while the top half of the forehead is the region of judgment, 
comparison and reflection, ordinarily called the reflective 
organs. 

The forehead may also be divided by vertical lines. 
The interior division, situated on the median line, being 
prominent, gives an active, clear, and intuitive intellect. 
If the forehead is well developed, half way from the median 
line to the sides, it gives more deliberate powers and solid 
judgment, while an exterior development producing a wide 
forehead gives a profound, contemplative talent, capable 



180 MAN. 

of comprehensive views and elaborate work. A prom 
inent development of the median line gives an active, 
intuitive, business man. A prominent development on both 
sides of said line gives a man fitted for learning and reason- 
ing — a logical man — while the exterior development gives 
a man of originality and comprehensive mind — the philoso- 
pher. 

It is the function of the perceptive organs, which em- 
brace also the so-called five senses, to perceive and take 
cognizance of whatever exists at the present moment. It is 
the function of memory to deal with the past, by retaining 
the sensations and impressions which the perceptive organs 
are continually referring to it for preservation and repro- 
duction when needed ; while the reflective group of organs, 
such as intuition, judgment, comparison, etc., deal not only 
with present and past, but have direct reference to the 
future, in that they take the material gathered by the per- 
ceptives, and retained by memory and draw therefrom de- 
ductions for future reference and guidance. We judge of 
the future only by the past. 

The region of the Good, extending from the top of the 
forehead to the top of the head, and half way down the 
sides of the head, is occupied by the moral organs, which 
are divided into, first, the Intellectual Virtues, adjoining the 
region of the Intellect ; such as ideality, imagination, imita- 
tion, faith, sincerity, expression, truthfulness, marvelous- 
ness, etc., and the organs of Virtue found in the top head, 
such as benevolence, religion, integrity, conscientiousness, 
hope, love, veneration, etc. 

The region of Power, occupying the upper back head, is 
occupied by the organs of health, energy, industry, temper- 
ance, hardihood, firmness, ambition, self-esteem, etc. 

The region of Animality, occupying a small portion of the 



THE MIND PHRENOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED. 181 

back side head, produces a stationary, coarse, animal man, 
which antagonizes all intellectual and progressive opera- 
tions. 

The region of Violence and crime, situated in the poste- 
rior base of the brain, back of the ears, in addition to the 
organs of sexual love, and love of children and friends, also 
contains combativeness, destructiveness, tyranny, turbu- 
lence, etc., and unrestrained by the organs of intellect and 
goodness, leads directly to crime. 

The region of Relaxation, situated in the frontal basilar 
brain, is occupied by alimentiveness, sensibility, fear, dis- 
ease, melancholy, relaxation, etc. 

The tendency of these organs is to personal degradation, 
disease, and death, unless restrained and over-balanced by 
the organs of temperance, health, and hardihood, located in 
the upper occipital region, or top back head ; while the con- 
stant tendency of the organs back of the ear is to crime and 
the destruction of society, unless restrained by the moral 
organs in the region of Goodness. And the tendency of the 
region of animality is to barbarism, unless restrained and 
aroused into progress by the Intellectual organs. 

So that we really have a system of antagonizing and bal- 
ancing, between the regions of Intellect, Goodness, and 
Power, on one side, and the regions of Animality, Violence, 
and Relaxation on the other. Or in other words, we have the 
intellectual, moral, and energetic organs of the spirit coun- 
ter-balancing and checking the animal passions and appetite, 
or organs of the soul. These three regions of evil tendency 
are situated mainly in the base of the brain and represent 
the animal powers of man. Although their tendency is to 
evil, and unrestrained they lead to destruction, yet they are 
necessary to man's existence, because man in his present 
state is an animal, as well as a spirit. Therefore, in them- 



182 MAN. 

selves they are not evil, but good. It is the abuse and not the 
legitimate use of these animal powers which leads to evil. 

Properly restrained and controlled by the intellectual, 
moral, energetic, and spiritual powers of the spirit, these 
animal powers of the soul are all elements for good. 

I will notice in regular order some of the more important 
of these animal organs lying at the base of the brain, which 
are really the very foundation structure of our present exist- 
ence. 

First, we have the organ of alimentativeness, or appetite 
for food, located in front of the ear, which is the first fac- 
ulty or function of life that manifests itself ; and for months 
afterbirth, the young child hardly manifests any other func- 
tion of mind except to eat and live. The next in order 
to manifest itself is the organ of acquisitiveness situated a 
little above the ear. After eating, the next function of mind 
manifested by the young child is the desire, followed by the 
effort to appropriate whatever it sees, that can be eaten or 
that strikes its fancy. Close beside alimentativeness is se- 
cretiveness, the next faculty to manifest itself, not only in 
concealing what is appropriated, but also in the child as well 
as the man, keeping the purpose of acquiring the possession 
of articles, concealed from the knowledge of others. Then 
the organ of combativeness, just behind the ear, is mani- 
fested, as the counter desires and cross purposes of children, 
as well as adults, result in contentions and struggles for the 
possession and use of the same articles. And hard by lies 
the organ of destructiveness, which next manifests itself, as 
continued combat often leads to an effort to destroy the ene- 
emy or the obstruction. Destructiveness also manifests 
itself as the servant of appetite in killing animals for food to 
appease hunger. 

Next in order the desire to propagate our kind is mani- 



THE MIND PHRENOLOGICALLY CONSIDERED. 183 

fested ; and at the base of the brain in the back of the head 
is found the organ of amativeness, to represent this pas- 
sion or sentiment. Beside it is found the organ of philopro- 
genitiveness, or love of offspring, which leads us to care for, 
protect, support, and educate our children. While acquisitive- 
ness, combativeness, destructiveness, and secretiveness all 
come to the aid of philoprogenitiveness in providing for these 
dear ones, our second selves. Then next above love of chil- 
dren in the back head is found inhabitiveness or love of home, 
which is necessary to locate us at a particular spot, in order 
that we may properly feed, clothe, care for, educate, and de- 
fend our offspring until they are able to care for themselves. 
I have now mentioned eight organs, all of which are located 
in the base of the brain ; all of which are purely selfish, and 
all of which we have in common with other animals ; but 
which are also absolutely necessary to the existence of man 
and the continuation of society on the earth. Birds and 
beasts, equally with man manifest appetite for food, aquisi- 
tiveness, secretiveness, combativeness, destructiveness, ama- 
tiveness, love of young and of home. Therefore, man in his 
physical nature is an animal, and these animal organs are 
necessary to his existence ; and in themselves good. But 
their unrestrained exercise leads to degradation, suffering, 
and death. To prevent this, man was given a spirit 
to regulate and control the animal appetites, passions, 
and propensities of the soul. Over- eating, laziness, and 
disease must be counteracted and controlled by temper- 
ance, energy, and health, found in the upper occipital 
region of the head. The excesses of amativeness, combat- 
tiveness and destructiveness must be overcome and re- 
strained by the exercise of the moral and spiritual 
organs, such as reverence, conscientiousness, hope, benevo- 
lence, sympathy, etc. And ignorance, prejudice, and bar- 



184 MAST. 

barism must be overcome by the active exercise of the 
intellectual organs. By the exercise of the perceptive 
organs, we can note what passes around us ; by the memory 
fix it in the mind; and by the reflective organs reason 
upon the lessons of life, and draw conclusions therefrom, 
by which we may improve our lives, add to our fund of 
useful knowledge, and gradually raise ourselves in the 
scale of intellectual being. It, therefore, follows that the 
great duty of this life is to control the appetites and pas- 
sions of the soul, by the exercise of the intellectual and 
moral powers of the spirit ; and in order to do this, it is 
necessary to give constant and particular attention to the 
cultivation of the intellectual, social, moral and spiritual 
faculties of the mind, which are represented by the frontal 
and coronal regions of the head. 

As it has been shown that the spirit is properly the gov- 
ernor of the soul and body, and is substantially the mind ; 
that the brain is the organ of the mind, and that each fac- 
ulty of the mind is represented by a particular organ or 
part of the brain, which is the fundamental proposition of 
Phrenology, it necessarily follows that Phrenology is the 
very key to the arch of the sciences and the gateway to the 
great storehouse of knowledge. 



CHAPTEE V. 

THE MIND'S RELATION TO, AND CONTROL OP, THE BODY. 

SEN" the preceding chapter the proposition that the brain is 
Qg> the organ of the mind was considered. In the present 
chapter the relation of the brain to the body, and the control 
of the mind over the body will be discussed. The former 
proposition, is the fundamental doctrine of Phrenology ; the 
latter is called by Dr. J. R. Buchanan, Cerebral Physiology. 
That author maintains that the same relation exists between 
the brain and the body, that exists between the mind and 
the brain. As the brain is the organ and instrument of 
the mind, it follows that the body is likewise the 
organ and instrument of the brain, and that the mind, 
through the brain and its extension the nervous system, 
controls the body in all its parts. Furthermore, as each 
faculty of the mind is represented by an organ or a distinct 
part of the brain, so every organ of the brain, through its 
distinct nerves, controls a particular part of the body. 

The brain, therefore, not only has its mental functions to 
perform, but also its physiological functions. The relation 
between the brain and body is that of mutual sympathy and 
reaction. I take the liberty in this connection to make the 
following liberal extract from pages 211, 212, 213, 214 and 
215 of Buchanan's Anthropology, as follows, viz. : — 

41 That all parts of the brain have their physiological as well 
as mental functions — that every organ acting merely in the 
brain, acts as a psychological organ, but in proportion as its 
acts are transmitted to the body, it becomes a physiological 

(185) 



186 MAN". 

organ. In the infant, from the predominance of the con- 
ductor organs, the influence of the brain is more abundantly 
thrown upon the body, and its physiological power is more 
important. 

"The basilar portions of the brain, which have a down- 
ward pathognomic line, transmit their influence to the body, 
increasing the excitement and activity of every organ. A 
certain amount of these basilar influences is necessary to the 
general activity of the corporeal functions ; but in excess, 
they over-excite, derange, and destroy the organism. Hence 
the most efficient organs in the brain are not those which 
concentrate the entire basilar force upon the body, but those 
which animate it with a proper amount of basilar energy, 
regulated by higher influences. 

44 The superior half of the brain, the aggregate tendency 
of which is upward, diverts the influence from the body, 
tranquilizes all the physical functions, and, in excess, per- 
manently arrests them. Hence, if we divide the brain into 
coronal and basilar halves, we have two opposite classes of 
sedative and exciting influences, either of which would be 
destructive by its excess. If the harmonious and healthful 
relations between the coronal and basilar organs be de- 
stroyed by the predominance of the latter, there is an ex- 
cess of excitability in the constitution, as well as an excess 
of passion in the character. In the muscular system there 
is a restless and convulsive tendency — in the circulation, 
great violence and irregularity — the secretions and evacu- 
ations are excessive and irregular — the appetites enor- 
mous — the growth frequently excessive, irregular and 
deformed — the blood abundant, but impure, and the health 
continually deranged by irregularities — while the entire ex- 
istence of the individual is full of physical and mental suf- 
fering. On the other hand, when harmony is destroyed by 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 187 

basilar deficiency and coronal excess, the functions of life 
are languidly performed, the muscular system is feeble, di- 
gestion and nutrition are imperfect, the appetites null, the 
growth and development of the body defective, the circula- 
tion feeble, and the life short. 

" The harmonious condition of development is that in 
which the basilar organs are sufficient to energize and impel 
every bodily function, while the coronal organs impart tran- 
quility, regularity, and pleasure to the course of consti- 
tutional excitement, and guide the physical development 
into forms of beauty. 

"If we divide the brain into frontal and occipital halves, 
by a vertical line from the cavity of the ear, we shall find 
all the organs of the occipital half calculated to energize 
and sustain the constitution, while those of the frontal half 
diminish its capacities for action, and are therefore appro- 
priated to functions not manifested through the muscular 
system, and not acting upon external nature. ' 

"The organs of the occipital half energize the constitu- 
tion without producing the excesses of excitement, morbid 
sensibility, and derangement, which are found in the basilar 
half. In other words, if we divide the basilar half into 
anterior and posterior portions, at the cavity of the ear, 
the anterior portion will contain the exciting, debilitating, 
and deranging elements, while the posterior portion, being 
also a part of the occipital half, contains those vehement 
energies which are not of an exhausting and destructive 
character. 

"If, then, we divide the occipital half of the head into two 
quarters, the occipito-basilar and the occipito-coronal, the 
former will contain the most intense and powerful animal 
energies which our organs can bear without destruction, 
while the latter will contain a group of energies of more 



188 MAN. 

elevated character, in which the happy and sedative influence 
of the superior regions is properly blended with the occipito- 
basilar force, producing that kind of power which is effici- 
ent but not excessive, and which is compatible with virtue 
and health. In a well formed head, therefore, it is essential 
that the occipito-coronal region should very decidedly pre- 
dominate over the antero-basilar region, while the relative 
proportion between the antero-coronal and the occipito- 
basilar regions will determine the tendency toward the mild 
and amiable, or harsh and violent characteristics. 

"In the anterior half of the brain all is antagonistic to 
efficiency and power ; yet there are certain functions essen- 
tial to the constitution — certain moral, intellectual, and 
physiological capacities belonging to the anterior half, which 
render it necessary that the anterior region should have a 
sufficient development to perform all its duties without im- 
pairing and thwarting the occipital action. The duties of 
the anterior half of the head are, morally, to guide the con- 
duct, repress the passions, and give us pleasant emotions ; 
intellectually, to give us knowledge, and guide the blind 
power of the occiput ; physiologically, to make us aware of 
the conditions of the body, so as to preserve it from disease 
or injury, and to carry on the changes which are necessary, 
by secretion, and exhalation, so as to preserve the constitu- 
tion in a state of purity and freshness, as well as to protect 
it from injury. 

" In other words, the anterior half of the brain contains 
organs governing the sensitive and visceral systems — 
organs which render us impressible to all surrounding influ- 
ences of matter and of mind, through which we receive im- 
pressions, and sustain our inten ourse with external nature, 
material and mental, while by the occipital half of the brain 
we resist external impressions, establish our independence, 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 189 

react upon external objects, and maintain the integrity of 
our own constitution. Under the frontal influence, the con- 
stitution is passive, yielding, and easily deranged or de- 
stroyed by external agencies. Under the occipital influence 
we are hardy, unimpressible, and capable of making rather 
than receiving impressions. Under the frontal influence, 
the constitution becomes delicately adapted to circumstances 
having no resisting power or independence. Under the oc- 
cipital influence, the constitution and character are incap- 
able of being molded or changed, and exist in continual 
antagonism to every surrounding influence. We, therefore, 
determine the stamina or power of constitutions by the oc- 
cipital half of the head — their delicacy, beauty, and refine- 
ment, by the frontal half. If the frontal half be signally 
defective in breadth and prominence, the internal viscera — 
to wit : the brain, lungs, and abdominal organs, are imper- 
fectly developed and inactive, the sensitive nerves are im- 
perfect, the secretions dry, the intellect contracted, and the 
whole constitution characterized by a wooden rigidity. The 
intellectual organs are thus connected, by their frontal posi- 
tion, with the secretory system, and the intellect is clearest 
when the secretions, are free and abundant ; hence the asso- 
ciation between intellectual deficiency and dryness. A 
meager harangue, in which the frontal half of the brain is 
imperfectly displayed, is pronounced dry, in opposition to 
rich and juicy character produced by the affectionate, social, 
humorous, enthusiastic, and brilliant organs of the frontal 
half. 

" The intellectual organs belong to the front lobe, while 
the visceral organs belong to the middle lobe, running up and 
down, near the vertical line, from the cavity of the ear. 
These visceral organs, and the viscera which they govern, 



190 MAN. 

are, it is true, necessary to the constitution — necessary to its 
excitement, its renovation, and its adaptation to external 
circumstances ; but in their ultimate tendency they produce 
exhaustion instead of power, and in their immediate effects 
they diminish rather than increase the independent sustain- 
ing power of the constitution. The abdominal organs, for 
example, although essential parts of the constitution, would 
of themselves speedily prostrate and destroy its powers. 
Having nO organs of external motion, they are helpless : and 
as appendages of the body, they cause by their operation a 
a waste of its substance, a deterioration of the blood, a re- 
laxation of the muscular system, and a depressing sense of 
debility and hunger. But it may be supposed that, although 
acting alone, they produce this prostration, their normal 
action, when supplied with food, is highly invigorating. It 
is true-that food, when obtained by our occipital energy, 
counteracts the debility and hunger which are produced by 
our abdominal organs ; but if the amount of food be suffi- 
cient to concentrate the energies of the constitution upon the 
process of digestion, the effect is languor and partial stupe- 
faction, followed by partial relief, when the activity of the 
abdominal organs diminishes, and then followed by still 
greater prostration, when they display their activity again in 
producing hunger and exhaustion. Thus the influence of 
the abdominal group is invariably prostrating and exhausting, 
and the full energies of the constitution are enjoyed only 
while the abdominal organs are in a state of comparative 
inactivity, and we are left unconscious of their existence. 
The renovating influence of food is derived from the func- 
tion of nutrition, which operates in all parts of the body. 
In like manner, the action of the heart, as shown in the ex- 
cess of fever, produces an excitement throughout the whole 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 191 

constitution, which is rapidly destructive; and the most 
powerful constitutions are those which have moderate excita- 
bility and a pulse of but moderate frequency. 

" That the extreme action of the pulmonary organs is also 
ultimately an exciting and exhausting influence, may be 
shown by reference to their mode of action. Respiration 
developes the general, cerebral, passional, nervous, and 
physiological activity of the constitution. This it effects by 
the introduction of oxygen and the removal of those 
materials which oxygen forms by its combinations with the 
blood and tissues. The process is, therefore, essentially 
exhausting or wasting, and at the same time generates an 
amount of heat and nervous activity which are relaxing and 
exhausting in their physical effects. 

" In other words, it appears that the visceral organs are 
calculated to expend by their activity the energies which are 
accumulated by the occipital half of the head, and to give 
the constitution that activity and internal movement which 
are necessary to its manifestations. That the activity of the 
pulmonary organs produces an immediate increase in the 
chemical changes and general activity of the whole constitu- 
tion, we realize whenever we engage in animating exercise, and 
breathe more rapidly. The increased exhalation then occur- 
ring, produces an increased demand for food and drink, and 
sometimes for stimulus. The real invigoration, however, 
arises from the muscular exertion, and consequent nutrition, 
and not from the respiration, which removes noxious mate- 
rials and renews nervous excitability — not conferring power, 
but renewing the capacity to display it. If we would deter- 
mine this point, we might make the experiment of simply 
respiring rapidly and deeply for a few minutes, without hav- 
ing taken any proportional exercise. In performing such an 
experiment we experience no real increase of strength. 



192 MAN. 

" Slight irritations, which concentrate excitement in the 
lungs, or more serious diseases, which render them the cen- 
ter of physiological excitement, greatly detract from the 
physiological force, and indeed, pulmonary diseases in the 
upper part of the lungs are peculiarly fatal." 

It has been repeatedly stated that the fundamental doc- 
trine of phrenology, is that the brain is the organ of the 
mind. But the specific proposition of phrenology is 
that " other things being equal size is the measure 
of power." This does not mean that the largest brain al- 
ways indicates the strongest mind — u others things being 
equal," covers a great deal of ground. We must not only 
consider the size, but the shape and quality of the brain, as 
well as the size, shape, health, condition, and temperament 
of the body. The relation between the body and mind 
through the brain and nervous system is so intimate, and 
they mutually act and react upon each other with such fa- 
cility, that the effectiveness of the mind depends as much 
on the condition of the body as it does upon the development 
of the brain. Hence the vast practical importance of the 
temperaments. A man may be possessed of a powerful 
mind, but its effectiveness in life depends on his manner of 
manifesting it; and that depends largely on his tempera- 
ment and physical conditions. If the physical or motive 
temperamant predominates, then the mind operating through 
its instrument, that part of the brain which controls the 
physical man, will be able to accomplish great results in 
physical fields of action, such as war, explorations, etc., 
because it has a strong body, with hardihood and endurance 
to work with. If the vital temperament predominates, giv- 
ing a man full of life and energy, then the mind, acting 
through that part of the brain which controls the vital de- 
partments of the body, will be able to perform effective 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 193 

work in all the social and business relations of life, such as 
the learned professions, commercial, mechanical, and agri- 
cultural pursuits. 

Where the spiritual or nervous temperament predomi- 
nates, the mind (if it is particular to require the body to 
conform to the laws of physical health), may with its large 
brain do profound thinking and able writing ; but the man 
can not, be a forcible and effective speaker, for the want of 
physical strength and strong passions ; and for still greater 
reasons, is unfitted for fields of physical action. 

If the body, in addition to being constitutionally feeble, is 
also diseased, the efficiency of the mind is still further im- 
paired, no matter how large the brain. Two thousand 
years ago, it was truthfully maintained by Cicero and others, 
that a sound mind can only be manifested through a sound 
body. 

While, however, it is true that a weak and diseased body 
is a terrible clog upon the effectiveness of the mind, the re- 
verse of the proposition is also true that a sound mind with 
a strong will, is or may be made a powerful factor for good, 
in restoring a defective or diseased body to reasonable 
health, strength, and effectiveness. The relation of mind 
and body is so intimate, and the control of the latter by the 
former, through the brain and nervous system, so natural 
and complete, when properly exercised, that nearly all the ills, 
that flesh is heir to, may be cured or greatly modified by the 
proper control of the body by the mind. 

It has already been shown that by the use of proper food 
and natural habits, an unbalanced condition of the tempera- 
ments may be to a great extent removed, thereby giving the 
mind an effective instrument to work with, in a compara- 
tively balanced and healthful body, 
13 



194 MAN. 

In the same way a diseased condition of the body, which 
has been brought about by unnatural habits and a violation 
of the laws of our physical being, may be restored to its 
normal condition by abstaining from the bad habits, and 
conforming to the laws of our being in all respects. 

Of course, we must learn what the laws of our being are 
before we can conform to them. This is the duty of the 
mind, through the intellectual organs. And having learned 
the laws of its physical, social, intellectual, moral, ancJ 
spiritual being — to require a strict conformity thereto, on 
the part of the body, its appetites, passions, and propensi- 
ties. For this purpose, the brain and nerves, were made 
the efficient instrument by which the Creator intended that 
the mind should at all times and in every respect, control 
the body and its defects, diseases, appetites and passions. 
The simple power of the will is wonderful and the power 
of faith is said to remove mountains. The wonderful cures 
of faith doctors, are no doubt attributable mainly to the 
power of faith, the will, and other mental faculties, over the 
body. 

The nervous system is also a wonderful medium for the 
the relief of physical suffering either in one's own body, or 
that of another, by sponging with water, and simple strokes 
of the hand, by which pain and disease may be dispersed 
and removed from the weaker to stronger parts of the sys- 
tem, thereby giving nature a chance to rally. 

In this connection I again take the liberty of making a 
lengthy extract from Buchanan's "Anthropology,' ' pages, 
60, 61,62, 63, 64, viz. : — 

" Nervauric treatment of disease. — If the whole human 
race possessed the requisite degree of impressibility the nec- 
essary sphere of drug treatment would be quite limited, 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 195 

diseases might be treated by manipulation alone, with far 
greater success, than what at present attends the use of* 
medicines. 

" The processes commonly adopted by magnetizers are well 
adapted to the cultivation of impressibility. The somnolent 
state is one of a high degree of impressibility, and by its 
frequent production, or even by the approximation to it, 
the impressibility will be greatly increased ; hence, benevo- 
lent and persevering operators have frequently taken hold 
of the most unpromising subjects, upon whom at the first 
sitting, they produced scarcely any decided effect, and con- 
tinued their efforts until they brought the constitution en- 
tirely under their control, so as to effect important cures. 
It is highly desirable that we should have a class of opera- 
tors devoted to the manual treatment of disease, which is 
often too tedious for the practice of the physician. By en- 
couraging this class as a distinct profession, a great number 
of cases will be successfully treated, in which the ordinary 
medical treatment would have failed, or at the best would 
have left the constitution greatly impaired. The physician is 
so strongly tempted to resort to the easy method of prescrib- 
ing doses of medicine, and to avoid the labor, or perhaps 
ridicule connected with a more genial method, that it is 
probable he will often overlook the impressibility which might 
have enabled him to work magical cures ; nor is it probable 
that he will persevere in cultivating impressibility where it 
is very slight and requires perseverance for its develop- 
ment. 

" As the number of impressible constitutions, at present, 
is in warm climates, sufficient to render one-half or three- 
fourths of the population subjects for partial manual treat- 
ment — as the progress of refining, humanizing influences 
in society contributes greatly to the increase of impressibil- 



196 MAN. 

ity, and as it may be cultivated greatly by somnolizing 
processes, as well as by diet and moral influences, there can 
be no doubt that the manual treatment of disease should 
take a high rank among the various methods known to the 
healing art. I have no doubt that manual treament, com- 
bined with treatment by water, neither of which requires a 
thorough medical education, would produce results superior 
to the average of our present fashionable practice. A large 
portion of the results of hydropathy are due, not to the 
water, but to incessant frictions and manipulations of the 
attendants, which are carried to an extraordinary extent at 
the water cure establishments. The principle of Priessnitz, 
' flesh to flesh,' was the result of experience. 

" The principles governing the manual treatment of 
disease are simple and obvious. Wherever there is any accu- 
mulation of nervous excitement, of irritation or of sanguine- 
ous congestion, it should be our object to disperse it, and to 
remove from the system entirely the morbific tendency. 
When there is simply congestion, accumulated excitement, 
or an inflammatory tendency, the dispersive movements 
may be sufficient ; but if there be much morbidity, it will be 
desirable to disperse and entirely eliminate from the system 
the noxious influence of morbid parts. This may be accom- 
plished by passes from the morbid part toward and beyond 
the extremities, or by the direct application and withdrawal 
of the hand. The nervaura seems to follow the movement 
of the hand, and the passage of the operator's hand from 
the person of his subject, or from its central toward its 
extreme parts, appears to withdraw the morbid or irritating 
nervous influence, and to substitute therefor the more genial 
influence of the operator's constitution. 

"The operator is in great danger of imbibing into his own 
system a portion of the malign influence which he receives 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 197 

and hence is required to be on his guard. The fact of the 
patient being entirely in a passive condition, renders his 
influence less potent, and at the same time the resolute exer- 
tions of the operator give him the power of resisting the 
influence of his patient. He is exerting his firmness, vig- 
ilance and energy — his occipital organs generally are 
active and the enfeebling temporal organs are inactive — 
hence, he has less impressibility than usual while operating. 
His own constitution, while emitting an efficient influence, 
is too vigorous in its own action to be much affected by the 
vital influences which are thus yielding before him. It is 
desirable that there should be a great disparity of impressi- 
bility between the operator and the subject, for the benefit 
of the former. He will thus work the most astonishing 
cures, in a very impressible subject without perceiving any 
effect upon himself. But if the subject be not more 
impressible than his operator, the latter will be liable to 
imbibe as much morbific influence as he removes, and will 
owe his safety to the precaution of keeping his system 
braced and active, diminishing the necessary amount of con- 
tact, making rapid, dispersive passes, and relieving himself 
by the proper passes, after operating upon his patient. The 
hands, which have been used in contact or proximity to any- 
thing morbid, are the direct recipients of the morbid influ- 
ence, which is thence diffused over the body; hence, 
dispersive movements down the head and over the hand may 
withdraw the morbific influence derived from the patient. 

44 The passes made for the relief of the patient operate by 
the nervous influence, and do not require contact. The 
higher the impressibility the less necessity for contact — the 
less impressibility the nearer the approach that is neces- 
sary — the least impressible requiring physical contact. In 
the highest possible grades of sensibility, mental contact is 



198 MAN, 

alone sufficient without physical manipulation, and the mind 
of the operator imparts vigor to his subject. In these cases 
the mind has an unlimited power over the body, and being 
controlled by another mind, which supplies an energy not 
its own, is enabled by this imparted power to renovate its 
enfeebled body. The mental influences of the operator may 
even be imparted to particular substances, which may then 
be used by the patient advantageously. A ring, a book, or 
a piece of money, may be charged with any mental or 
physiological influence, as sleep, mirth, nausea, etc., so as 
to produce these effects when touched ; but as these phenom- 
ena are produced with equal facility, by imagination alone, 
in such persons, as by simply telling them that a certain 
object will put them to sleep, there is no accurate distinction 
in such experiments between those which are merely imagin- ' 
ative and those which depend upon a real nervous influence. 

LOCAL NERVATJRIC TREATMENT. 

" Beside the simple operation for the dispersion of morbid 
influences, there are many which require a knowledge of 
organic functions. 

" The organ of disease (in the body) being located in the 
hypochondriac region, it is important in the operating for 
the benefit of the subject, to disperse the vital excitement 
from this region, and diminish the action of the morbific 
faculties. 

" Hence, the most frequent manipulations, for the benefit of 
the patient, will consist of dispersive passes from the region 
of disease toward that of health — on the head from the 
cheek bones to the crown — on the body from the hypo- 
chondria to the shoulders. A brisk upward movement of 
this kind, upon the person, will be felt by almost any one, 
as a rousing, bracing, refreshing operation. The delightful 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 199 

influence of a cool breeze is owing to the fact that it operates 
in the manner just described — the cool air passes over the 
cheeks and temples, backward, toward the energetic organs of 
the occiput, exerting a seductive and dispersive influence upon 
the debilitating organs of the middle lobe. It is for the same 
reason that we are so much refreshed by the application of 
cold water to the face upon rising in the morning, and the 
knowledge of the bracing influence of cold applied to the 
cheeks and temples, leads us to resort to it immediately, in 
every case of fainting. Upon the body the same principles 
apply. The breeze striking us in front exerts its sedative 
influence upon a group of debilitating organs, and is delight- 
fully invigorating — it is therefore pleasant to face the cool 
breeze, and for the same reason injurious to receive the 
breeze upon our back. The remark is said to be true of 
quadrupeds as well as of human beings — horses and cattle, 
it is said pull better against the wind than with it. If a 
breeze be of higher temperature than the body, its influence 
will be reversed, as it will heat the parts upon which it blows. 
Facing such a wind, will, therefore, be debilitating, as ia 
well known in warm climates. In bathing, we may observe 
that the application of hot water or steam to the front of 
the body, especially near the hypochondriac region, is debih> 
tating and sickening, when upon any other part it would be 
agreeable. The jet of cold water striking the person in 
front is entirely pleasant and tonic. The dispersive passes 
from the hypochondria may be made both upward and 
downward. In a majority of cases, invalids need both 
movements — they require the latter to rouse the animal 
forces. The manipulations should extend upon the legs in 
such cases, and not terminate upon the abdomen. The 
object being to throw the vital force from the abdomen to 
the shoulders and legs. To develop it more effectually in 



200 MAN. 

those parts, we should apply the hands, gently touching and 
withdrawing, or lightly tapping upon the organ of health, on 
the shoulder, upon the front of the thigh and upon the calf 
of the leg. The highest degree of muscular activity is 
imparted by the outer portion of the calf. In operating 
upon the head, the most beneficial vigor will be imparted by 
touching at the same time the organs of health and vitality. 
This effect I have often felt myself while making the experi- 
ment. (For vitality, place the finger upon the hollow of the 
neck just behind the mastoid process.) 

" Besides this general restoration, we may concentrate the 
sanative energies of the constitution upon the diseased 
organs. Thus, by touching simultaneously the organs of 
health and alimentiveness, we concentrate the sanative 
powers upon the stomach, or by touching any other organ 
than alimentiveness, at the same time, we throw the sana- 
tive power of health, to a corresponding part of the body. 

"In every individual case there must be a variety of 
operations, adapted to its peculiarities. Organs which are 
torpid must be excited ; those which are overexcited must 
be tranquilized ; an equilibrium of circulation and of excite- 
ment should be established. (See Circulation.) Thus, in a 
great number of cases, it will be necessary to excite the 
hepatic organ, to produce a sufficient activity of the liver — 
to excite calorification and perspiration to produce warmth 
and moisture of the surface — to excite vitality to rouse all 
the physiological energies — to remove the circulation and 
excitement from the head to the extremities, by passes 
down the side of the head and neck toward the shoulder — 
to warm the lower extremities by exciting calorification and 
the organs of the lower part of the neck at the same time — 
to relieve internal congestion of various organs by backward 
dispersive passes over the side of the head — to relieve the 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 201 

oppressed lungs by exciting the organs of respiration, or to 
diminish the disposition to cough by the organ of restraint — 
to arrest a fever by transferring the excitement from calori- 
fication to the organs of refrigeration, perspiration and the 
secretions — to quiet the excitement of the heart by the 
region of firmness — to check profuse abdominal secretions 
by the region of restraint — to relieve the brain by throw- 
ing the excitement to the lower extremities, etc., etc. In 
short, there are a great number of operations to be made upon 
the brain and body, for the restoration of disordered func- 
tions, in which we are to be guided by the simple rule of 
ascertaining which function is torpid, concentrating excite- 
ment upon its organ, and diminishing the excitement of those 
which are over active or highly irritated, regulating the bal* 
ance of functions in such a manner as to give a decided 
ascendancy to those of the region of health. 

The details of what should be done in each case must be 
derived from a thorough knowledge of the functions, as 
developed by neurology, and their exact location on the 
head, as well as the corresponding locations on the body 
developed by sarcognomy. With this knowledge of locali- 
ties and functions, we readily comprehend the nervauric 
management of various disorders, by applying the hands 
where we wish to concentrate excitement, and making dis- 
persive passes where we wish to dissipate it." 

The knowledge obtained from the foregoing extract en- 
abled the writer, eighteen years ago, to save the life of bis 
eldest child when given up by the physicians. Her stomach 
and bowels were in a very weak and torpid condition, and 
the doctors were trying to relieve this by drug medicines. 
But the stomach was so weak, sick, and irritable, that it 
would retain nothing, and the child was suffering greatly 
both in the stomach and front lobe of the brain. After the 



202 MAN. 

doctors could do nothing more, the writer, acting on ideas 
obtained from Dr. Buchanan's Anthropology, sat down by 
her bedside, and stroked and sponged her for two hours. 
Stroking continually from the forehead and temples to the 
upper back part of the head, and from the stomach towards 
the shoulders and upper part of the back. At the end of 
two hours the child was relieved, and in a day or two was up 
and well. All there was of it, was that the blood and other 
vital forces oppressing the weak parts of the S3^stem were 
dispersed to the stronger parts of the body, and the equilib- 
rium restored. The drug medicine was only adding to the 
excitement and pressure in the stomach and aiding the dis- 
ease in crushing the vitality at its weak point. 

But this must suffice on this part of the subject. There 
are many other respects in which the mind manifests itself 
through the body. The external appearance, of- the voice, 
and movements of the body, all manifest character and ca- 
pacity. 

First, we have the well known science of physiognomy. 
The face is almost universally regarded, both by the learned 
and unlearned, as an index to the character. Mr. S. R. 
Wells, in his valuable work on physiognomy, lays down three 
general forms of faces. First, the oblong face, correspond- 
ing to the motive or physical temperament; and cites as 
examples, Jackson, Cromwell, and Caesar. Second, the 
round face, corresponding to the vital temperament, and 
cites as examples Bonaparte and Jean Paul Richter. Third, 
the pyriform face, corresponding with the nervous or spir- 
itual temperaments, and cites as examples Shakespeare, 
Dante, Edgar Poe, and others. 

In the pyriform, or pear-shaped face, the forehead is 
high and , pale ; the features delicate and finely chiseled ; 
the eye bright and expressive ; the hair fine, soft, and gen- 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 203 

erally of light color, and the neck slender, with narrow 
chest and small limbs. In the round face the whole form 
is broad and plump, complexion generally florid, eyes blue, 
or light gray, and the hair soft, light, and fine. 

In the oblong face we generally have a dark complexion, 
dark eyes, dark, strong and abundant hair, with firmness, 
rather than delicacy of texture. The character indicated 
by the forms of face just given corresponds with that indi- 
cated by the mental, vital, and motive, or physical tempera- 
ments, which has already been explained. 

Of course, I can not go into the details of any science re- 
ferred to in this work, and for a description of the different 
kinds of noses, eyes, mouths, chins, etc., and their significance, 
I must refer the reader to the elaborate work on Physiognomy, 
by S. R. Wells. But I can not leave the subject without 
calling attention to one important principle of facial expres- 
sion referred to by Dr. Buchanan. The tendency of all the 
organs of the brain, is. to act on mathematical lines, in the 
direction in which their fibers point ; that is from the center 
of the brain outwardly in every direction. Hence, it is, that 
the coronal organs act in an upward direction ; the basilar 
organs in a downward direction ; the frontal in a forward 
direction, etc. And as the mind through the brain and 
nerves controls the muscles — the tendency of the coronal or 
moral and spiritual organs acting upwardly, would be to 
elevate, all the muscles of the face, producing a pleasing 
expression of countenance. If, then, we find the brows, the 
upper and lower eye-lids, the lips, corners of the mouth and 
all the movable parts of the face elevated, we may infer that 
the social, moral and spiritual faculties of the mind are pre- 
dominating. If, on the contrary, all these movable parts 
of the face are depressed, producing lowering brows, droop- 
ing eye-lids and heavy hanging lips, with nose of great 



204 MAN. 

downward length, we have the indication that the basilar 
organs predominate and consequently that the animal pas- 
sions and appetites are controlling the character. 

The mind and its conditions are reflected through other 
parts of the body as well as the face. The voice, the walk, 
and all the movements of the body, as well as its general 
shape, indicate character, but I can not go into the details of 
these indications. 

I will only refer briefly to the indications of character, 
which we have in the handwriting of individuals. Our pen- 
manship is more or less effected by the mathematical laws 
discovered by Dr. Buchanan, and to which reference has 
already been made. That is, that the tendency of the moral 
organs is upward ; the tendency of the basilar organs down- 
ward ; and the tendency of the intellectual organs forward 
on a horizontal line. These laws manifest themselves in 
the shape and construction of the letters and the upward 
and downward stems of the letters. If the stems of the 
letters below the line are long and heavy it indicates that the 
basilar organs predominate, and that the individual is more 
or less under the sway of his passions. The same thing is 
indicated by a tendency to run below the line in forming the 
body of the letters. 

But if the tendency is upward ; to get above the line with 
the body of the letters, while the upward stems are long, 
the stems below being short, it indicates the predominance 
of the moral organs ; that the higher and better traits and 
powers of the mind are controlling, and that the passions are 
kept in comparative subjection. 

While if the tendency of the writing is horizontal and 
straight forward, the body of the letters exactly on the line, 
and all the termination of letters ending with a horizontal 



THE MIND'S RELATION TO THE BODY. 205 

stroke, it indicates the intellectual man ; especially if the 
penmanship is open and has a progressive appearance. 

If the termination of the letters is forward and upward, 
io indicates that the writer is both moral and intellectual 
and that his course in life is " onward and upward." Few 
things are more indicative of character, than handwriting 
properly understood. But the subject can not be farther 
pursued. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE POWER OE THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS AND 
BODIES — ANIMAL MAGNETISM — MESMERISM — MIND 
READING — MENTAL TELEGRAPHY — LIVING APPARI- 
TIONS, ETC., ETC. 

jlrwil ANY persons have observed the charming of birds 
4=$$^ by cats and snakes. The control of wild and vicious 
horses by horse tamers ; and the management of lions, tigers 
and other ferocious beasts by their keepers, are matters of 
common observation. This wonderful influence of man over 
animals, and of some animals over others, is all due to the 
same Tindefined principle, a kind of unknown quantity, 
which for want of a better name we call animal magnetism. 
We see it constantly manifested in the influence of one 
human being over another; and especially in the great 
influence and control that some adults have over children. 
Everybody has observed that children are irresistibly 
drawn to some individuals whom they have never seen 
before, and are equally repelled by others. Children are 
sometimes completely charmed and taken away from their 
parents by the wonderful influence of some person not 
related to them; exactly on the same principle that the 
snake charms the bird. 

The same power, in even greater degree, is often seen in 
the influence of the sexes upon each other. Nothing is 
more common than for a beautiful, pure, intelligent, and cul- 
tivated girl, to be charmed, captivated, and captured by a 
moral and social desperado; a man utterly worthless in 
(206) 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 207 

morals and honesty, but possessing intellectual vigor, and 
powerful animal magnetism. The case of Aaron Burr in 
this regard was wonderful. The same power is constantly 
being exercised by wily, scheming, and bad women, over 
susceptible and unsuspecting men. 

Different phases of the same power are also being con- 
stantly exercised by men over men, and by women over 
women. The strong wills and powerful animal organiza- 
tions everywhere dominate over the weaker elements of 
society. And under our defective and unequal laws, and 
our many unjust conditions of life, this influence often 
becomes oppressive and tyrannical. For instance, the 
writer, when a young man in another State, where the prac- 
tice of viva voce voting then existed, has often seen the vote 
of the poor man who was in debt, and the vote of the man 
of weak mind or will, controlled by a mere look from some 
cross-roads politician, or party boss, who stood at the polls, 
not to protect the purity of the ballot-box, but to morally 
bull doze unfortunate voters for the benefit of the party. 
The same influence is said to be exercised by the great 
manufacturers of the Northern and Eastern States over their 
employes. The right of free suffrage should be protected 
by a secret ballot; and the heaviest penalties should be 
imposed by law for moral as well as physical bulldozing of 
voters. 

As already stated this wonderful principle, called in an in- 
definite way animal magnetism, has never been defined, 
because never fully understood. Some writers have under- 
taken to define it, but have differed so widely from each other 
as to clearly show that none of them are yet sufficiently 
acquainted with the subject to sound its depths. The 
application of this force, and its operation upon other per- 
sons, is no doubt through the medium of electricity, 



208 man. 

blended in some mysterious way with the vital forces of the 
human system, physical and mental. 

The medical virtue of magnetism, through the medium 
of the nervous system, was referred to in the last chapter and 
the views of Dr. J. R. Buchanan are cited. Both Dr. Bu- 
chanan and Dr. Brittain speak of magnetism in the highest 
terms as a medical agent. One of the principal means of 
relief is for the physician, nurse, or operator, to gently 
stroke with the hands, the surface of the body, at the local- 
ty of the pain ; stroking in the direction of the strong parts 
of the system. This action dissipates the vital electricity, 
blood and other forces, which have accumulated at the weak 
points of the system, oppressing its vitality and caus- 
ing pain. The effect is to restore the circulation and equi- 
librium of the system, and relieve the sufferer. Reference 
was made in last the chapter to the case of the writer, in which 
he saved the life of his child in this manner, after being given 
up by the allopathic physicians. 

According to the theory of A. J. Davis, one of the means 
of relief is that the operator, by his superior positive pow- 
ers, withdraws a part of the positive influence of the patient 
and thereby at the same time controls the patient, calms the 
excitement, and relieves the suffering. 

The following two cases, reported by Dr. Brittain on 
pages 241 and 242 of his book on " Man and his Relations," 
were promptly relieved, in a similar manner : — 

" In December, 1849,1 made an experiment at a public 
house in Springfield, Mass. , the result of which occasioned 
no little interest at the time. Having just completed a pro- 
tracted course of lectures on vital and mental phenomena, I 
had accepted an invitation to pass the last evening I designed 
to remain in town with a select company at the house of a 
friend. I left the old Hampden at an early hour, without in- 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 209 

forming any one where I might be found, should my pres- 
ence be demanded in the course of the evening. The inci- 
dent I am about to relate occurred at the City Hotel. At 
about the hour of seven o'clock p. m., while a number of 
young people — assembled in the parlor — were engaged in an 
animated and playful conversation, a young lady, of remark- 
able beauty and accomplishments, was seized with catalepsis 
in its most frightful form. Voluntary motion, sensation, 
respiration, and consciousness, were all instantly suspended. 
The report was rapidly circulated that the young lady was 
dying ; and as she was widely known, and had many friends 
and admirers, the excitement soon caused a crowd of two or 
three hundred people to assemble in and about the hotel. 
Three physicians were sailed in, whose united efforts to re- 
lieve the patient were unavailing. At length, in the course of 
the evening, some earnest friends of the lady — whose faith 
was not exactly restricted to the ordinary anti-spastic agents 
employed by the medical profession — having ascertained the 
writer's whereabouts, came to solicit my presence and assist- 
ance. It was half past ten o'clock when I reached the City 
Hotel, and the young woman had been in the cataleptic state 
more than three hours without exhibiting the least indica- 
tion of returning consciousness and animation. 

"I felt assured that this abrupt and complete suspension 
of the functions had resulted from a sudden loss of the 
electrical equilibrium — that some constitutional cause, or 
incidental circumstance, affecting the vital forces through 
the agency of the mind, had occasioned an instantaneous de- 
termination of the nervous circulation to some vital organ — 
probably the brain or the heart, and that an observation of 
the relative temperature of different parts of the body would 
enable me to ascertain the precise point of the electrical 
concentration. An examinatiun at once settled this ques- 

14 



210 MAN, 

tion in my own mind, and without a moment's delay I com- 
menced making appropriate manipulations in all directions 
from the supposed point of electrical convergence. It was 
very soon apparent that I had not misjudged. Visible signs 
of a speedy restoration of all the faculties immediately fol- 
lowed the application of the treatment, and in fourteen min- 
utes after the writer entered the apartment, the patient was 
fully restored, and employed in adjusting her hair before the 
mirror. 

li Some years since while on a visit to Greenfield, Mass., I 
chanced one day to be present when a young man accidently 
fell from an elevated platform or scaffold, striking on his 
head — the weight of the blow being directly over and under 
the left eye. I was instantly at his side, and found him 
completely insensible. Though the shock was so powerfnl 
as to produce temporary asphyxia, he struck the ground 
in such a manner as to occasion no abrasion of the 
skin. Knowing that the electro-nervous forces would nat- 
urally rush to the seat of the injury, and that the arterial 
circulation, being graduated by the distribution of vital 
electricity, would immediately follow in a corresponding de- 
gree, causing irregular vascular action and congestion, I 
instantly set myself to prevent any unpleasant result. Ap- 
plying cold water to the surface, chiefly with a view of ren- 
dering the cuticle a conductor, so that the accumulated 
electricity and blood might readily escape, other blood be 
removed by resolution. I commenced after the magnet- 
electric method to dissipate the forces. Consciousness and all 
the voluntary powers were rapidly restored. In half an 
hour all the consequences of the accident were completely 
removed." 

The power of a positive over a negative mind may be in- 
creased, under favorable circumstances, to such an extent, as 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 211 

to assume complete and perfect control of both the body and 
mind. When the control reaches this degree, it is called 
mesmerism, from Mesmer, the man who first called pub- 
lic attention to experiments of this kind. In a pronounced 
case of mesmerism, the powers of the positive mind enter 
the brain of the negative mind, and take complete con- 
trol of its entire mental and physical machinery. The pas- 
sive mind only thinks, feels, wills, and reasons, as the 
positive mind, by its will, dictates. 

Closely connected with mesmerism, and no doubt due to 
the same power, is the interesting subject of mind- read- 
ing, about which many wonderful things have been pub- 
lished of late years. In these cases the positive mind seems to 
enter the other and take cognizance of its thoughts, feelings, 
and knowledge. As for instance, A. in one room, entirely 
out of sight of B. in another room, by some mysterious 
process enters the mind of B. , and gets some fact or infor- 
mation, wholly unknown to A. , and reports the same to an 
audience in the room with A. ; and then upon being fairly 
tested it is found to be true, and that A., knew nothing of 
the matter until, in some mysterious way his mind entered 
the mind of B. , and extracted the fact therefrom. This 
power of a positive mind entering a passive one, and taking 
cognizance of its thoughts and volitions, is usually accompa- 
nied by the exercise of more or less mesmeric power. The fol- 
lowing cases cited by Dr. S. B. Brittain, in his book entitled 
" Man and his Relations,' ' and in which the learned author 
was the operator, are in point and very interesting. 

I here copy from pages 287-290, of said work as fol- 
lows, viz : — 

"I once attended a social party by Mrs. Kirkpatrick, at 
her residence in Albany. In the company was a lady (Mrs. 
Mills) whom I had been led to infer might be highly suscep- 



212 MAN. 

tible of electro-nervous impressions, though I had never con- 
firmed my opinion by a single experiment. Taking a seat 
by a gentleman who was known to be extremely skeptical, I 
observed that it might be possible to demonstrate the exist- 
ence of a mental power he was disposed to deny; that, 
although I had never conversed with Mrs. M. on the subject, 
nor made the slightest effort to subject her to psychological 
impressions, I had little hesitation in saying that the volun- 
tary functions of the mind and body might be controlled — 
without physical contact — by the unaided power of voli- 
tion. 

11 The gentleman having expressed a desire to witness the 
experiment, it was agreed that I should cause the lady to 
leave her place at the opposite side of the room, and occupy 
a vacant chair at his side. In less than one minute she 
obeyed the silent action of my will and seated herself in the 
unoccupied chair. In like manner she was compelled to 
change her position several times, and finally to leave the 
room temporarily, with no specific object in view, and with- 
out so much as suspecting the origin of an impulse she was 
quite unable to resist. 

" The tea-table was a scene of an interesting experiment. 
Mrs. Mills was in the act of removing from the board — 
having finished her repast — when several dishes were handed 
to her, all of which were refused. Mrs Kirkpatrick urged 
Mrs. M. to accept another dish of tea, which the latter posi- 
tively declined. Without uttering a word, I succeeded in 
changing her inclination, and, obedient to my volition, she 
immediately drew her chair again to the table, and called 
for a dish of tea. On my passing the several dishes she had 
just refused, Mrs. Mills freely partook of each, as if it were 
for the first time. 

" At an early hour she proposed to go home ; but my friend 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 213 

who had given the entertainment, apprehensive that others 
might follow the example, and thus the company be broken 
up, desired me to restrain her. Mrs. Mills instantly obeyed 
the executive action of the mind, observing that the attract- 
ions the occasion presented were so numerous, and withal 
so powerful, that she could not break away. In this man- 
ner her desire to go home was neutralized and Mrs. M. 
remained until the company separated. 

" Several years ago, while spending an afternoon with sev- 
eral ladies and gentlemen — mostly strangers to the writer — 
some illustrations of mental telegraphing were called for by 
the company. Among the persons present, two or three 
were more or less influenced. But Miss A. a lady of in- 
telligence and refinement, with whom the writer had had no 
previous acquaintance, was discovered to yield with great 
readiness and astonishing precision to the action of the will. 
Though at the time perfectly awake — and until then totally 
unconscious of possessing any such susceptibility — this 
lady bestowed several rings and other valuables on different 
members of the party, following in every instance, and in 
a most unerring manner, the writer's volition. Without 
affording the slightest opportunity for the fair subject to 
learn, by any external indications, the nature of the requests 
made, a number of difficult trials were suggested by persons 
composing the company. Several of these experiments — 
attended with the most satisfactory results — may be thus 
briefly mentioned : Miss A. promptly obeyed the silent man- 
date of my mind, and going to the center-table, selected a 
particular book, that had been singled out from among a 
number of others equally conspicuous. Some one required 
that she might be incited to take up another book, of five 
hundred pages, and turn to a short poem — somewhere about 



214 MAN. 

the middle of the Yolume — which was accordingly done with- 
out the least hesitation. Again, by a similar effort, this 
lady was influenced to make choice of a particular engraving, 
from amongst a number contained in an annual. While 
looking at my watch, she announced the time within a few 
seconds. On a subsequent occasion, similar efforts were 
made to impress the mind of this person, but from some 
defect in the requisite conditions, the results were certainly 
not satisfactory. 

" When the mental and moral gravitation has been mutual 
I have been scarcely less successful in my experiments on 
persons at a distance. On one occasion, while spending a 
few days at Waterbury, Conn. , I found it necessary to see 
a young man in the village. The immediate presence of the 
youth was of considerable importance to me, but not know- 
ing his residence, place of business, or even his name, I 
could not send for him. In this emergency, I undertook to 
telegraph him, by concentrating my mind on the young man, 
with a fixed determination to bring him to me. Some ten 
minutes had elapsed when he came to the house and inquired 
for the writer. Meeting a gentleman at the door, he asked, 
with much apparent interest, whether I wanted to see him. 
On being interrogated by this individual, he stated that a 
few moments before, and while actively engaged in his 
workshop — distant one-fourth of a mile — he suddenly felt 
that he must seek my presence without delay. He declared 
that he was conscious of the*existence and influence of some 
strange power, acting chiefly on the anterior portion of the 
brain, and drawing him with irresistible energy." 

As the last case cited is clearly one of mental telegraphy, 
I will give in this connection several other cases, cited by 
the same author as following under his own immediate ex- 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 215 

perience. From pages 291 and 292, of the aforesaid work, 
" Man and His Relations,' ' by Prof. S. B. Brittain, I copy 
as follows, to wit : — 

" While engaged in lecturing at New Canaan, Connecticut, 
several years since, I chanced one night to be thinking 
earnestly of a young man who was living in the adjoining 
town of Norwalk — at a distance of several miles — and 
who had been the subject of some experiments on a previous 
occasion. This youth happened at that precise time, as I 
subsequently learned, to be in company with several gentle- 
men who were subjecting him to some similar experiments, 
when all at once — and in a manner most unaccountable to 
all present — he escaped from their influence, declaring with 
earnestness, that Mr. Brittain wanted to see him, and that 
he must go immediately. 

" The wife of Rev. C. H. Gardner proved to be an excel- 
lent telegraphic instrument. I had personally subjected the 
lady to a single experiment, resulting in the cure of a dis- 
tressing asthma, from which she had suffered intensely and 
for a long time. I had not spoken with this person for three 
months, when one day her arrival, in company with her 
husband, was unexpectedly announced. After a brief inter- 
view, which did not occupy more than five minutes, I with- 
drew and retired to my study to complete the task I had left 
unfinished, leaving Mr. and Mrs. G. with my family and 
several other persons. Not the slightest allusion had been 
made to any further experiments, and certainly none were 
then premeditated. 

" Several hours elapsed — I know not how long — when 
the silence of my apartment was broken by sounds of mirth 
proceeding from the company below. They were engaged in 
some amusement which excited a spirited conversation and 
immoderate laughter. The voice of Mrs. Gardner was dis- 



216 MAN. 

tinctly heard. At that moment the idea of taking her 
from the company occurred to me. But the occasion seemed 
to be in all respects unfavorable. She had no intimation that 
any such effort would be made ; she was in a remote part of 
the house, and we were separated by a long flight of stairs 
and two partitions. Moreover, surrounded by others, and 
excited by outward circumstances, the soul is not in the most 
suitable state to be successfully approached and strongly 
influenced through the subtile, invisible media employed by 
the mind.* Nevertheless, I resolved to make the experiment. 
Closing my eyes to shut out all external objects, I fixed my 
mind on Mrs. G-., with a determination to bring her to the 
library. Doubtless the mental effort, in that instance, would 
have been quite sufficient — had it been applied through the 
muscles — to overcome the physical resistance of an object 
equal to the weight of the lady's person. I was, however, 
not a little astonished on witnessing the result of this exper- 
iment. In about two minutes the door opened and Mrs. 
Gardner entered with her eyes closed, when the following 
conversation ensued : — 

" 'You appeared to be very happy with the friends below,' 
I observed, inquiringly. 
" 'I was.' 

11 * Why, then, did you leave the company?' 
44 * I don't know.' * 

44 4 Why, or for what purpose, did you come here? ' 
44 * I thought you wanted me, and could not help obeying 
the summons.' " 

The foregoing cases, cited and vouched for by as reliable 
an author as Dr. S. B. Brittain, show that the mind or spirit 
by some mysterious power can reach out, interview, and 
impress kindred and sympathetic minds, at considerable dis- 
tances. If such be the fact (and we can not discredit the 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 21? 

• 

testimony), why may not the spirit in times of profound 
sleep, and in certain conditions of the soul and body, with- 
draw temporarily from its inner and outer habitations — its 
spiritual and animal bodies, and moving, as spirits do, 
almost regardless of time and space, put itself in communion 
with kindred spirits thousands of miles away, and then 
return to its home long before the soul and body are aroused 
from slumber? That such an extraordinary thing does occa- 
sionally occur is indicated by many facts. Such things are 
remembered more or less distinctly and called dreams, but 
are in reality visions, and information obtained through 
them, generally turns out to be true when the facts are 
ascertained. In no other way can the so-called apparitions 
of the living be accounted for, and such cases have occurred 
in all ages and in all countries. For example : A. , who lives 
in Texas, suddenly sees an exact image of his brother, who 
resides in New York City, and whose corporeal existence is 
not only alive, but at that very moment in- said city in pro- 
found sleep. His, spirit, however, is temporarily off from 
its home, appears for a moment or more to its brother in 
Texas, may or may not make a communication, or convey 
an impression, and as suddenly disappears. 

I will here cite, as being in point, the following cases from 
the experience of Dr. S. B. Brittain, and referred to in the 
aforesaid work, onpages 453-456, as follows, viz. : — 

"I am not without some personal experience of this 
nature, the first of which occurred in 1850. I had been 
spending several days in the valley of the Naugatuck, and at 
the time was in Ansonia, at the residence of W. G-. Creamer, 
some fifteen miles from Bridgeport, Connecticut. This 
strange phenomenon of the apparition of a living man oc- 
curred early in the morning. The sun had risen, and I was 
about leaving my sleeping apartment, when (after having 



218 MAN. 

my attention directed for a moment to the opposite side of 
the room) I suddenly turned toward the door which was 
closed, and — to my great surprise — saw the late Joseph 
T. Bailey, of Philadelphia. He was standing about three 
feet from the door, and, looking earnestly in my face, he 
addressed me, when a brief colloquy ensued. 

"In his first audible words Mr. Bailey declared that he 
would call on me the next day ; whereupon I inquired what 
was to be done on the occasion of his next visit. With an 
expression of peculiar interest, and speaking with increased 
emphasis, Mr. Bailey said, ' Remember ! I shall call on you 
to-morrow.' I asked him to explain the object of his unex- 
pected appearance, and to tell me what was to occur on the 
succeeding day. He gave me no answer, but the figure 
moved slowly as if it were about to disappear by the door. 
' Stay, friend! ' I exclaimed, ' Will you not explain the pur- 
pose of this mysterious visitation ? ' My friend made no 
direct reply, but commenced speaking in a low tone. I 
listened, and discovered that he was speaking of a mutual 
friend, Mr. F. Much that he said was inaudible, but 
I distinctly heard his last words, which were these : *A dark 
cloud has settled down over the earthly destiny of that 
man.' 

"The figure vanished as the last words were uttered, and 
I was left to muse alone on this strange experience. By a 
most singular train of circumstances, the author met Mr. 
Bailey the next day in a car on the New York and New 
Haven Railroad. He had been in Boston the preceding day 
or two, and was there at the time his apparition entered my 
chamber at Ansonia. In the course of the interview that 
succeeded our actual meeting, Mr. Bailey spoke with much 
feeling concerning the misfortunes of our mutual friend, 
Mr. F. ; and, strange as it may appear, when about to 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 219 

take leave of the writer, he uttered the precise words of the 
apparition : • A dark cloud has settled down over the earthly 
destiny of that man.' 

" My second experience occurred some years since, after 
spending an evening at the residence and in the company of 
Mr. M. and his wife, of Lafayette Place, New York. 
The latter manifested a high degree of mental susceptibil- 
ity, and in the course of our interview exhibited some inter- 
esting psychological phenomena. At a late hour I left 
Lafayette Place and went to my lodgings in a remote part of 
the city. Finding that the elder members of the family had 
not retired, but were awaiting my return, I gave them a 
description of Madam M., and the details of our interview. 
The hour was midnight. The personal appearance of the 
lady, her conversation, manners, and all the incidents of 
the evening were still vividly impressed on the mind ; and 
they were communicated without a thought that the distant 
subject of the recital could thus be consciously influenced. 

" On the following morning, when Madam M. presented 
herself at the breakfast table she referred to the writer, and 
affirmed that some time after Mr. B. left, on the previous 
night, he had returned, and that at twelve o'clock he mys- 
teriously appeared id her private apartment, entering and 
retiring without opening the door. As the evidence in this 
case was quite sufficient to establish an alibi, the gravity of 
the personal charge was materially modified, and the accused 
party gracefully excused for his unconscious intrusion. 

" In the early part of 1858, the writer was at a social party 
one evening giving at the house of Madam , in Louis- 
ville, Kentucky, when the particular class of phenomena 
embraced in this chapter became the subject of conversa- 
tion. Several persons having expressed their interest in 
psychological investigations, Madam r at length re- 



220 MAN. 

* quested — in behalf of herself and a friend — that a trial 
might be made, as she had no fear of apparitions, either of 
the living or the dead. Accordingly, the hour between 
eleven and twelve o* clock on the succeeding evening was set 
apart for the experiment. As it had been anticipated, the 
writer was traveling on Tuesday night, and at a distance of 
some five hundred miles from Louisville. Madam and her 
friend were prompt in meeting the engagement. At the 
appointed hour they were seated in the parlor, with closed 
doors, awaiting the result of the trial with a lively curiosity. 
The hour had nearly expired, and the conditions had all 
been faithfully observed ;• but still there was no visible pre- 
sence. Less than five minutes of the hour yet remained, 

when Madam , concluding that success was impossible, 

and half reproaching herself for the foolish credulity that 
prompted the trial — left the room for the purpose of secur- 
ing the doors in the back part of the house. At the same 
time her companion approached the door leading into the 
front hall with the intention of retiring for the night. As 
she opened the parlor door the image of the author's person- 
ality stood before her (so the lady affirms) in all its natural 
proportions, and with every aspect of actual life. A sud- 
den exclamation of surprise brought her friend into the 
room, who also affirms that she saw and recognized the 
figure as it moved, with a gliding locomotion, from its 
position by the door and disappeared. 

The following cases, reported by Robert Dale Owen in 
his work entitled " Foot-falls on the Boundary of another 
World", are also in point. They are found of pages 317- 
320, of said work, and read as follows : — 

" When in studying the subject of apparitions, I first met 
an alleged example of the appearance of a living person at 
a distance from where that person actually was, I gave to 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 221 

it little weight. And this the rather because the example 
itself was not sufficiently attested. It is related and believed 
by Jung Stilling as having occurred about the years 1750 to 
1760, and is to this effect. 

44 There lived at that time, near Philadelphia, in a lonely 
house and in a retired manner, a man of benevolent and 
pious character, but suspected to have some occult power of 
disclosing hidden events. It happened that a certain sea- 
captain having been long absent and no letter received from 
him, his wife, who lived near this man, and who had become 
alarmed and anxious, was advised to consult him. Having 
heard her story, he bade her wait a little and he would bring 
her an answer. Thereupon he went into another room, 
shutting the door ; and there he stayed so long that, moved 
by curiosity she looked through an aperture in the door to 
ascertain what he was about. Seeing him lying motionless 
on a sofa, she quickly returned to her place. Soon after, 
he came out, and told the woman that her' husband was at 
that time in London, in a certain coffee-house which he 
named, and that he would soon return. He also stated the 
reasons why his return had been delayed and why he had not 
written to her ; and she went home somewhat reassured. 
When her husband did return, they found, on comparing 
notes, that every thing she had been told was exactly true. 
But the strangest part of the story remains. When she 
took her husband to see the alleged seer, he started back in 
surprise, and afterward confessed to his wife that, on a cer- 
tain day (the same on which she had consulted the person 
in question), he was in a coffee-house in London (the same 
that had been named to her), and that this very man, had 
there accosted him, and had told him that his wife was in 
great anxiety about him ; that then the sea-captain had replied 
informing the stranger why his return was delayed and why 



222 MAN. 

he had not written, whereupon the man turned away, and he 
lost sight of him in the crowd. 

" This story, however, came to Stilling through several 
hands, and is very loosely authenticated. It was brought 
from America by a German who had emigrated to the United 
States, and had been many years manager of some mills on 
the Delaware. He related it, on his return to Germany, to 
a friend of Stilling' s, from whom Stilling had it. But no 
names nor exact dates are given ; and it is not even stated 
whether the German emigrant obtained the incident directly 
either from the sea-captain or his wife. 

" It is evident that such a narrative, coming to us with no 
better vouchers than these (though we may admit Stilling' s 
entire good faith), can not rationally be accepted as author- 
ity. 

" Yet it is to be remarked that, in its incidents, the above 
story is but little more remarkable than the Joseph Wilkins 
dream or the case of Mary Goffe, both already given in the 
chapter on Dreams. If true, it evidently belongs to the 
same class, with this variation : that the phenomena in the 
two cases referred to occured spontaneously, whereas, ac- 
cording to the Stilling narrative they were called up by the 
will of the subject and were reproduced at pleasure. 

4 ; The next narrative I am enabled to give as perfectly 
authentic. 

"APPARITION IN IRELAND. 

" There was living, in the summer of the year 1802, in 
the south of Ireland, a clergyman of the Established Church, 

the Rev. Mr. , afterward Archdeacon of , now 

deceased. His first wife, a woman of great beauty, sister 

of the Governor of , was then alive. She had been 

recently confined, and her recovery was very slow. Their 
residence — an old-fashioned mansion, situated in a spacious 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 223 

garden — adjoined on one side the park of the Bishop of . 

It was separated from it by a wall, in which there was a 
private door. 

" Mr. had been invited by the bishop to dinner ; and 

as his wife, though confined to bed, did not seem worse than 
usual, he had accepted the invitation. Returning from the 
bishop's palace about ten o'clock, he entered, by the private 
door already mentioned, his own premises. It was 'bright 
moonlight. On issuing from a small belt of shrubbery 
into a garden walk, he perceived, as he thought, in another 
walk, parallel to that in which he was, and not more than ten 
or twelve feet from him, the figure of his wife, in her usual 
dress. Exceedingly astonished, he crossed and confronted 
her. It was his wife. At least, he distinguished her 
features, in the clear moonlight, as plainly as he had ever 
done in his life. 'What are you doing here?' he asked. 
She did not reply, but receded from him, turning to the 
right, toward a kitchen-garden that lay on one side of the 
house. In it were several rows of peas, staked *>nd well 
grown, so as to shelter any person passing behind them. 
The figure passed round one end of these. Mr. fol- 
lowed quickly, in increased astonishment, mingled with 
alarm ; but when he reached the open space beyond the peas 
the figure was no where to be seen. As there was no spot 
where, in so short a time, it could have sought concealment, 
the husband concluded that it was an apparition and not his 
wife, that he had seen. He returned to the front door, and 
instead of availing himself of his pass-key, as usual, he rung 
the bell. While on the steps, before the bell was answered, 
looking around, he saw the same figure at the corner of the 
house. When the servant opened the door, he asked him 
how his mistress was. 'I am sorry to say, sir,' answered 
the man, * she is not so well. Dr. Osborne has been sent 



224 MAN. 

for.' Mr. hurried up stairs, found his wife in bed 

and much worse, attended by the nurse, who had not left 
her all the evening. From that time she gradually sank, and 
within twelve hours thereafter expired. 

"The above was communicated to me by Mr. , now 

of Canada, son of the Archdeacon. He had so often heard 
his father narrate the incident that every particular was 
minutely imprinted on his memory. I inquired of him if 
his father had ever stated to him whether, during his 
absence at the bishop's his wife had slept, or had been 
observed to be in a state of swoon or trance ; but he could 
afford me no information on that subject. It is to be 
regretted that this had not been observed and recorded. 
The wife knew where her husband was and by what route he 
would return. We may imagine, but can not prove, that 
that this was a case similar to that of Mary Goffe, — the 
appearance of the wife, as of the mother, showing itself 
where her thoughts and affections were. 

4 'The. following is a very remarkable case, copied from 
pages 833 to 340, of the aforesaid work as follows, viz. : — 

** THE RESCUE. 

" Mr. Robert Bruce, originally descended from some branch 
of the Scottish family of that name, was born, in humble 
circumstances, about the close of the last century, at Tor- 
bay, in the south of England, and there bred up to a seafar- 
ing life. 

" When about thirty years of age, to wit, in the year 
1828, he was first mate on a bark trading between Liverpool 
and St. Johns, New Brunswick. 

44 On one of her voyages bound westward, being then some 
five or six weeks out and having neared the eastern portion 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 225 

of the Banks of Newfoundland, the captain and mate had 
been on deck at noon, taking an observation of the sun ; 
after which they both descended to calculate their day's 
work. 

11 The cabin, a small one, was immediately at the stern of 
the vessel, and the short stairway descending to it ran ath- 
wart-ships. Immediately opposite to this stairway, just be 
yond a small square landing, was the mate's state-room; and 
from that landing there were two doors, close to each other, 
the one opening aft into the cabin, the other, fronting the 
stairway, into the state-room. The desk in the state-room 
was in the forward part of it close to the door ; so that any 
one sitting at it and looking over his shoulder could see in- 
to the cabin. 

'* The mate, absorbed in his calculation, which did not result 
as he expected, varying considerably from the dead-reckon- 
ing, had not noticed the captain's motions. When he had 
completed his calculations, he called out, without looking 
round, ' I make our latitude and longitude so and so. Can 
that be right? How is yours? ' 

" Receiving no reply, he repeated his question, glancing over 
his shoulder and perceiving, as he thought, the captain busy 
writing on his slate. Still no answer. Thereupon he rose ; 
and, as he confronted the cabin-door, the figure he had mis- 
taken for the captain raised its head and disclosed to the aston- 
ished mate the features of an entire stranger. 

" Bruce was no coward ; but as he met that fixed gaze look- 
ing directly at him in grave silence, and became assured that 
it was no one whom he had ever seen before, it was too much 
for him ; and, instead of stopping to question the seeming 
intruder, he rushed upon deck in such evident alarm that it 
instantly attracted the captain's attention. * Why, Mr. 

15 



226 MAN. 

Bruce/ said the latter, • what in the world is the matter with 
you?' 

" * The matter, sir? Who is that at your desk? • 
" ' No one that I know of.' 
" ' But there is, sir ; there's a stranger there.' 
u 'A stranger! Why, man, you must be dreaming. 
You must have seen the steward there, or the second mate. 
Who else would venture down without orders ? ' 

" ' But, sir, he was sitting in your arm-chair, fronting 
the door, writing on your slate. Then he looked up full in 
my face ; and, if ever I saw a man plainly and distinctly in 
this world, I saw him.' 
"'Him! Whom?' 

" ' God knows, sir ; I don't.* I saw a man, and a man I 
had never seen in my life before.' 

" ' You must be going crazy, Mr. Bruce. A stranger and 
we nearly six weeks out? ' 

" ' I know, sir ; but then I saw him.' 
" ' Go down and see who it is.' 

"Bruce hesitated. ' I never was a believer in ghosts.' 
he said, ' but, if the truth must be told, sir, I'd rather not 
face it alone.' 

" ' Come, come, man. Go down at once, and don't make 
a fool of yourself before the crew.' 

" ' I hope you've always found me willing to do what's 
reasonable,' Bruce replied, changing color; ' but if it's all 
the same to you, sir, I'd rather we should both go down 
together.' 

" The captian descended the stairs, and the mate followed 
him. Nobody in the cabin! They examined the state- 
rooms. Not a soul to be found ! " 

" i Well, Mr. Bruce,' said the captain, • did not I tell you 
you had been dreaming? ' 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 227 

44 4 It's all very well to say so, sir, but if I didn't see that 
man writing on your slate, may I never see my home and 
family again ! ' 

" 'Ah ! writing on the slate ! Then it should be there 
still.' And the captain took it up." 

44 4 By God,' he exclaimed, 4 here's something, sure 
enough ! Is that your writing, Mr. Bruce ? ' 

44 The mate took the slate; and there in plain, legible 
characters, stood the words, 4 Steer to the nor' west." b 

44 > Have you been trifling with me, sir? ' added the cap- 
tain in a stern manner." 

444 On my word as a man and as a sailor, sir/ replied 
Bruce, 4 1 know no more of this matter than you do. I have 
told you the exact truth. ' 

44 The captain sat down at his desk, the slate before him, 
in deep thought. At last, turning the slate over and push- 
ing it toward Bruce, he said, l Write down 44 steer nor'- 
west." ' 

44 The mate complied; and the captain, after narrowly 
comparing the two handwritings, said, 4 Mr. Bruce, go and 
tell the second mate to come down here.' 

44 He came; and, at the captain's request, he also wrote 
the same words. So did the steward. So, in succession, 
did every man of the crew who could write at all. But not 
one of the various hands resembled, in any degree, the mys- 
terious writing. 

44 When the crew retired, the captain sat in deep thought. 
'Could any one have been stowed away?' at last he said. 
4 The ship must be searched ; and if I don't find the fellow 
he must be a good hand at hide-and-seek. Order up all 
hands.' 

« 4 Every nook and corner of the vessel, from stem to stern, 



228 MAN. 

was thoroughly searched, and that with all the eagerness of 
excited curiosity, — for the report had gone out that a 
stranger had shown himself on board ; but not a living soul 
beyond the crew and the officers was found. 

" Returning to the cabin after their fruitless search, * Mr. 
Bruce,' said the captain, 'what the devil do you make of 
all this?' 

" ' Can't tell, sir. I saw the man write ; you see the writ- 
ing. There must be something in it.' 

" 'Well, it would seem so. We have the wind free, and 
I have a great mind to keep her away and see what will come 
of it.' 

" ' I surely would, sir, if I were in your place. It's only a 
few hours lost, at the worst.' 

" ' Well, we'll see. Go on deck and give the course nor'- 
west. And Mr. Bruce,' he added, as the mate rose to go, 
' have a lookout aloft, and let it be a hand you can depend 
on.' 

" His orders were obeyed. About three o'clock the look- 
out reported an iceberg nearly ahead, and, shortly after, 
what he thought was a vessel of some kind close to it. 

"As they approached, the captain's glass disclosed the 
fact that it was a dismantled ship, apparently frozen to the 
ice, and with a good many human beings on it. Shortly 
after, they hove to, and sent out the boats to the relief of the 
sufferers. * 

" It proved to be a vessel from Quebec, bound to Liverpool 
with passengers on board. She had got entangled in the ice, 
and finally frozen fast, and had passed several weeks in a 
most critical situation. She was stove, her decks swept, — 
in fact, a mere wreck ; all her provisions and almost all her 
water gone. Her crew and passengers had lost all hopes of 



THE POWER OE THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 229 

being saved, and their gratitude for their unexpected rescue 
was proportionately great. 

"As one of the men who had been brought away in the 
third boat that had reached the wreck was ascending the ship's 
side, the mate, catching a glimpse of his face, started back 
in consternation. It was the very face he had seen, three 
or four hours before, looking up at him from the captain's 
desk. 

"At first he tried to persuade himself it might be fancy ; 
but the more he examined the man the more sure he became 
that he was right. Not only the face, but the person and 
the dress, exactly corresponded. 

"As soon as the exhausted crew and famished passengers 
were cared for, and the bark on her course again, the mate 
called the captain aside. ' It seems that was not a ghost I 
saw to-day, sir; the man's alive.' 

" * What do you mean? Who's alive? ' 

" c Why, sir, one of the passengers we have just saved is 
the same man I saw writing on your slate at noon. I would 
swear to it in a court of justice.' 

" * Upon my word, Mr. Bruce,' replied the captain, * this 
gets more and more singular. Let us go and see this 
man.' 

" They found him in conversation with the captain of the 
rescued ship. They both came forward, and expressed in 
the warmest terms, their gratitude for deliverance from a 
horrible fate, — slow-coming death by exposure and starva- 
tion. 

"The captain replied that he had but done what he was 
certain they would have done for him under the same cir- 
cumstances, and asked them both to step down into the cabin. 
Then turning to the passenger, he said, • I hope, sir, you 






230 MAN. 

will not think I am trifling with you ; but I would be much 
obliged to you if you would write a few words on this slate.' 
And he handed him the slate, with that side up on which the 
mysterious writing was not. ' I will do any thing you ask,' 
replied the passenger ; ' but what shall I write ? ' 

" 'A few words are all I want. Suppose you write, 
" Steer to the nor' west.' " 

" The passenger, evidently puzzled to make out the mo- 
tive for such a request, complied, however, with a smile. 
The captain took up the slate and examined it closely ; then, 
stepping aside so as to conceal the slate from the passenger, 
he turned it over, and gave it to him again with the other 
side up. 

" 'You say that is your handwriting?' said he. 

" * I need not say so,' rejoined the other, looking at it, 
* for you saw me write it. ' 

" 'And this?' said the captain, turning the slate over. 

"The man looked first at one writing, then at the other, 
quite confounded. At last, ' What is the meaning of this,' 
said he. ' I only wrote one of these. Who wrote the 
other?' 

" 'That's more than I can tell you, sir. My mate here 
says you wrote it, sitting at this desk, at noon to-day.' 

"The captain of the wreck and the passenger looked at 
each other, exchanging glances of intelligence and surprise ; 
and the former asked the latter, ' Did you dream that you 
wrote on this slate ? ' 

" ' No, sir, not that I remember.' 

" ' You speak of dreaming,' said the captain of the bark. 
'What was this gentleman about at noon to-day? ' 

" 'Captain,' rejoined the other, ' the whole thing is most 
mysterious and extraordinary ; and I had intended to speak 



THE POWER OF THE MIND OVER OTHER MINDS. 231 

to you about it as soon as we got a little quiet. This gen- 
tleman ' (pointing to the passenger), 'being much ex- 
hausted, fell into a heavy sleep, or what seemed such, some 
time before noon. After an hour or more, he awoke, and 
said to me, "Captain, we shall be relieved this very* day." 
When I asked him what reason he had for saying so, he 
replied that he had dreamed that he was on board a bark, 
and that she was coming to our rescue. He described her 
appearance and rig ; and, to our utter astonishment, when 
your vessel hove in sight she corresponded exactly to his 
description of her. We had not put much faith in what he 
said ; yet still we hoped there might be something in it, for 
drowning men, you know, will catch at straws. As it has 
turned out, I can not doubt that it was all arranged, in- 
some incomprehensible way, by an overruling Providence, so 
that we might be saved. To Him be all thanks for His good- 
ness to us. J 

'• 4 There is not a doubt,' rejoined the other captain, * that 
the writing on the slate, let it come there as it. may, saved all 
your lives. I was steering at the time considerably south of 
west, and I altered my course to nor'west, and had a look- 
out a-loft, to see what would come of it. But you say,' he 
added, turning to the passenger, * that you did not dream 
of writing on the slate ? ' 

u No, sir. I have no recollection whatever of doing so. 
I got the impression that the bark I saw in my dream was 
coming to rescue us ; but how that impression came I can 
not tell. There is another very strange thing about it,' he 
added. 4 Everything here on board seems to me quite famil- 
iar ; yet I am very sure I never was in your vessel before. 
It is all a puzzle to me. What did your mate see ? ' 

"Thereupon Mr. Bruce related to them aE the circum- 



232 MAN. 

stances above detailed. The conclusion they finally arrived 
at was, that it was a special interposition of Providence to 
save them from what seemed a hopeless fate. 

44 The above narrative was communicated to me by Capt. J. 
S. Clarke, of the schooner Julia Hallock, who had it di- 
rectly from Mr. Bruce himself." 

Many such cases might be cited. Even the Apostle Paul, 
in the twelfth chapter of his Second Letter to the Corinth- 
ians, speaks of being " caught up to Paradise, and of 
hearing unspeakable words which it is not lawful for a man 
to utter.'* 



CHAPTER VII. 

SPIRITISM — OR THE POWER AND INFLUENCE OF THE 
SPIRITS OVER THE MINDS AND BODIES OF MEN. 

tS a predicate, I assume that spirit, whether in the 
flesh or out of the flesh, is of the same essential 
nature and character. The only difference there can be 
between man's spirit in the body, and after the body is 
thrown off, is that in the latter condition, it is free of the 
shackles and restraints of matter, and no doubt possesses 
powers and privileges, of which we in the present state can 
have little conception. 

If, then, a spirit in the body can take complete control of 
the spirit and body of another person, as in mesmerism, 
why may not a disembodied spirit under certain conditions 
do the same things. And if a spirit in the body, while the 
body is sleeping, may withdraw temporarily and appear to 
another spirit in the body, at a great distance from its own 
body (of which I gave well authenticated cases in the last 
chapter), why may not a disembodied spirit in the spirit 
world, who is free from the restraints of matter, do the same 
things. It seems entirely reasonable that such should be 
the case, and among all civilized people in all ages facts can 
be found to sustain such a proposition. 

History, both sacred and profane, as well as tradition, is 
full of such cases. I will now proceed to enumerate the 
different kinds of spirits, who have visited men on the earth, 
giving one or more cases of each. 

(233) 



234 MAN. 

First. God, who is a spirit, visited and conversed with 
Adam in Eden before his violation of the law and ejection 
from Paradise. God also appeared to Moses in the burning 
bush. 

Second. The spirit of God came down to Jerusalem at the 
inauguration of the Christian religion on the earth, and took 
possession of the minds and bodies of the ignorant fishermen 
whom Christ had selected as his apostles, and gave them 
power to speak in every language then spoken on the earth, 
and to perform many other wonders and miracles, sufficient 
to convince the people, that the man Jesus whom they 
had murdered was the real Christ — the Savior of mankind. 

Tliird. Christ himself, many years after his ascension, ap- 
peared to John on the Isle of Patmos, and delivered to him 
wonderful revelations for the benefit of men which can only 
be referred to here. 

Fourth. The devil, who is a spirit, appeared as a serpent 
to Mother Eve, deceived her by specious reasoning, and 
caused the fall of the race. The same spirit appeared to 
Jesus and presented some very plausible and potent tempta- 
tions, which fortunately for man were successfully resisted 
by the Savior. 

Fifth. Angels, who are spirits, have often appeared and 
communicated with men. Angels notified Abraham and 
Lot of the approaching doom of Sodom and Gomorrah. 
An angel, the captain of the hosts of the Lord, appeared and 
spoke to Joshua just before the fall of Jericho. Angel 
armies often fought the battles of Israel, and in one night 
slew the entire Assyrian army of one hundred and eighty- 
five thousand men. Angels appeared to the prophet Daniel 
and made to him revelations of vast moment to all the men 
and nations of earth. An angel appeared to John, the rev- 
elator, on the Isle of Patmos, and revealed to him and 



SPIRITISM. 235 

through him, the most astounding future events of earth 
and heaven. 

Sixth. Demons and evil spirits were on the earth and in 
possession of the bodies and minds of many people, while 
Christ was on the earth, and no doubt these evil spirits have 
kept up, and are yet practicing the same invasions of the' 
rights of men. The devil is called the * ' Prince of the Power 
of the Air," and I doubt not that this adversary of man, ac- 
companied by legions of evil spirits, is constantly upon the 
earth, and in the surrounding air, deceiving, misleading, im- 
posing upon and ruining men and women. The earth is full 
of his agents and agencies, and we are continually ap- 
proached, deceived, and misled by the devil and his emissa- 
ries, without ever suspecting or knowing the moving cause of 
our action. 

Seventh. The Bible informs us of the spirits of good and 
great men, who once lived on the earth, afterward returning 
and communicating with men in the flesh. The Prophet 
Samuel appeared to the Witch of Endor and informed King 
Saul of his approaching doom, and of Israel's great disaster 
in the battle yet to be fought with the Philistines. And the 
spirits of Moses and Elijah, hundreds of years after their 
physical deaths, appeared to the apostles Peter, James, and 
John, and were present at the transfiguration of Christ. 

Eighth. The spirits of the dead have in all ages and in all 
countries occasionally appeared to those living in the flesh; 
more especially to those possessed of clairvoyant powers 
and capable of seeing spirit forms ; while the few persons 
who possess the power of spirit hearing, have heard words 
and received communications from their spirit friends. 

All these things have occurred thousands of times, in 
different parts of the earth, long prior to the advent of mod- 



236 MAN. 

ern spiritualism, which dates from Rochester, New York, and 
is little over a quarter of a century old. Among hundreds of 
reported cases, I select first, one, which occurred in Scotland 
about one hundred years ago, and which is vouched for by a 
no less distinguished witness than the great lawyer Lord 
Thos. Erskine ; and is reported by Robert Dale Owen, found 
on pages 337-338, of his work, entitled " The Debatable 
Land," and reads as follows, viz : — 

" * I also,' said Lord Erskine, * believe in the second sight, 
because I have been its subject. When I was a very young 
man I had been, for some time, absent from Scotland. On 
the morning of my arrival in Edinburg, as I was descending 
the steps of a close on coming out from a bookseller's shop, 
I met our old family butler. He looked greatly changed, 
pale, wan, and shadowy as a ghost. " Eh? old boy," said I, 
* 4 what brings you here?" He replied: "To meet your honor 
and solicit your interference with my Lord, to recover a sum 
due to me, which the steward, at the last settlement, did not 
pay." 

u i Struck by his looks and manner, I bade him follow me 
to the bookseller's, into whose shop I stepped back ; but 
when I turned round to speak to him, he had vanished. 

" 'I remembered that his wife carried on some little trade 
in the Old Town. I remembered even the house and flat she 
occupied, which I had often visited in my boyhood. Hav- 
ing made it out, I found the old woman in widow's mourning. 
Her husband had been dead for some months, and had told 
her, on his death-bed, that my father's steward had wronged 
him of some money, and that when Master Tom returned, he 
would see her righted. 

" ' This I promised to do, and shortly after I fulfilled my 
promise. The impression was indelible ; and I am extremely 



SPIEITISM. 237 

cautious how I deny the possibility of such supernatural vis- 
itings as your Grace has just instanced in your own 
family.' 

"The manner in which the talented lady who relates to us 
this story sees fit to receive and interpret it, should be, to 
candid inquirers, a warning lesson. 

"Lady Morgan, following the dictates of that persistent 
skepticism which men and women having a reputation in 
society are wont to adopt, or to assume ; and having settled 
it probably, in her own mind, that it behooves all who would 
be deemed enlightened to think, or at least to speak, of a 
belief in apparitions as a superstition — is content to set 
down Lord Erskine's narrative as due — these are the exact 
words she uses — as due only to the 4 dog-ears and folds of 
early impressions, which the strongest minds retain.' To 
the narrator, however, she ascribes sincerity. She says, 
* Either Lord Erskine did, or did not, believe this strange 
story : if he did, what a strange aberration of intellect ! — 
if he did not, what a stranger aberration from truth ! My 
opinion is that he did believe it.' 

4 ' What sort of mode to deal with alleged facts is this ? 
A gentleman distinguished in a profession of which the emi- 
nent members are the best judges of evidence in the world — 
a gentleman whom the hearer believes to be truthful — re- 
lates what, on a certain day, and in a certain place, both speci- 
fied, he saw and heard. What he saw was the appearance 
of one, in life well known to him, who had been some months 
dead. What he heard from the same source was a statement 
in regard to matters of which previously he had known 
nothing whatever, which statement, on after inquiry, he 
learn to be strictly true ; a statement, too, which had occu- 
pied and interested the mind of the deceased just before his 
decease. The natural inference from these facts, if they are 



238 MAN. 

admitted, is that, under certain circumstances which as yet 
we may be unable to define, those over whom the death- 
change has passed, still interested in the concerns of earth, 
may, for a time at least, retain the power of occasional in- 
terference in these concerns ; for example in an effort to right 
an injustice done." 

The following case, taken from the early history of 
Texas, is equally reliable and more remarkable, than the one 
cited from Lord Erskine. It is a part of the narrative of 
the supposed killing of Major Willbarger by the Indians near 
the site of the present city of Austin ; of his terrible suffer- 
ings, and the wonderful clairvoyant and spiritual demonstra- 
tions in his behalf. A party of surveyors were surprised 
and attacked by the Indians. Mr. W. was shot and scalped 
and left for dead on the field by both friends and enemies. 

The following extract details the manner of his fall and 
what afterwards occurred : — 

" Noticing that one of the Indians was mounted on Chris- 
tian's horse, and knowing it to be gentle, determined, as a 
last resort that he would shoot the Indian off that horse, 
take the two other loaded guns and make his escape. This 
Indian would charge up, let drive an arrow, and then retreat. 
This he did repeatedly. Finally Mr. Willbarger raised his 
gun and took deliberate aim at his head, and just as the 
Indian was in the act of retreating, and just as Mr. "Willbar- 
ger was about to pull the trigger on him, he received a sec- 
ond shot from the Indians who were flanking him from both 
sides. The ball passed below the under jaw in front of the 
spinal column, cutting, as he thinks, both jugular veins. 
This, of course, brought him to the ground. 

" Here now, occurs something most mysterious. He 
avers that while in this condition he was perfectly sensible 
of what was going on. The Indians came up and sur- 



SPIRITISM, 239 

rounded him, screaming and hallooing over their success, 
and commenced running a knife round his head to take his 
scalp. This operation, he said, roared louder than a hurri- 
cane in the timber ; but he said after they had run the knife 
around and commenced tearing off the scalp, if all the 
artillery in the world had been discharged at once, or nature 
rent from pole to pole, it would not have made a greater 
noise than the tearing of scalp from his head, but that it 
gave him no pain whatever. 

4 'After they had scalped him, they stripped him of his 
clothes and left him, screaming and hallooing at a terrible rate. 
He says he could hear and understand, but was not able to 
speak or move. After the Indians had left he reasoned with 
himself thus : * Is this death? Those Indians saw how I was, 
and left me for dead ; but surely futurity is not developed 
yet, as taught in the Holy Writ.' 

"The Indians passed entirely out of hearing. From the 
copious bleeding from the shot in the neck, as well as from 
the scalping, he recovered from his trance, rose up and sat on 
the ground. He saw the blood gushing out of the wound in 
his neck at every pulsation. He viewed himself all over — 
the shot in his neck, his scalp taken, the wound in his hip, 
the arrow shots in his legs, and his clothes all gone. He 
said to himself: 'Well, I am not dead, only stunned, but 
I will soon be dead. I can't stand this bleeding long.' 

u At this point he remembered a pool of water in the 
creek a short distance off. The thought came over him that 
if he were to go and get in that pool of water it might stop 
the flow of blood. Arriving at the pool he sunk himself 
under the water up to his chin, and remained, as he sup- 
posed, for the space of one hour, when he became exceed- 
ingly chilly and cold. He did not wish to die in the water, 
as he was satisfied search would be made for him, and if his 



240 MAN. 

body sank into the water, the probability was that it would 
not be found; so with a powerful effort he succeeded in 
reaching the dry ground. Here he fell down, completely 
exhausted from the loss of blood, fell into a sound, comfort- 
able sleep, and slept for sometime. 

14 When he awoke, he examined the wound in his neck, and 
found that the flow of blood had almost ceased, and the 
little that was running had assumed a pale straw color. He 
was extremely hungry and thirsty, and crawled to the water 
and satiated his thirst. The thought occurred to him, ' What 
shall I do ? I am yet alive, and no one here to render any 
assistance. I believe if I had food and help I might live.' 
He then began searching for food, finding a few snails, 
which he ate with a great deal of relish. 

u By this time the green flies had blown in every wound, 
and the worms filled and worked in them without resistance. 
It appeared to him as though they would eat him alive. In 
this condition he remained from noon until night, alternately 
drinking water and eating snails. Night having come on, no 
relief having arrived, he concluded to make his way to Mr. 
Hornby's, about five miles distant. He started out, and 
had gone about a quarter of a mile when his strength failed 
him, and he was compelled to take shelter for the night 
under a large oak. This was in the month of August ; but 
notwithstanding this, he said he had never before suffered 
as much from cold as he did then. Morning came, and 
still no relief. He was now so stiff from cold, and sore 
from his wounds, that he could not move until the sun rose 
and thawed him. The darkest forebodings attended him ; 
here he was, wounded in many places, scalped, naked, hun- 
gry, and weak, with no living soul near to render aid. It 
seemed as if immediately death must certainly be his doom. 
Not one single hope to cheer him ! But in the midst of all 



SPIRITISM. 241 

his suffering and distress, the eye of Omniscience was watch- 
ing over him and preparing for delivery. ' He who ruleth 
in the councils of men, as well as in heaven,' and who 
watches with tender compassion the sufferings of all his 
creatures, brought him in a mysterious manner out of all 
his troubles. Wonderful are thy ways, O, Jehovah ! 

" The day before Mr. Wilbarger was wounded, his sister 
died in St. Louis County, Mo. He says the spirit of his sis- 
ter appeared to him, and told him not to attempt to go into 
the settlement^ or he was not able ; that he must remain where 
he was, and help would be sent before the sun went down. 
After saying this, she moved in a straight direction toward 
the settlement. He was much surprised that she did not 
remain with him until the company came. As she moved 
off, he called out in piteous accents : * Margaret, O, Marga- 
ret, come back and stay with me until they come! ' To 
this she paid no heed, but continued on her way towards the 
settlement. Her leaving distressed him very much. He 
wondered how she ever found him without any person show- 
ing her the way. He was very much grieved that she was 
gone; and seeing the course she had taken towards the 
settlements, he determined not to obey her, but as soon as 
the sun should rise a little higher and thaw him more, he 
would follow on in the course she had gone. 

"At this time he says ten thousand times ten thousand 
objects, of human beings and images never thought of by 
man, appeared to him, all in the most friendly mood. They 
confirmed every word his sister had said to him, and told 
him he must obey her. All this was .communicated to him 
without a word being spoken, and after this they disap- 
peared. They gave him contentment. By this time the 
sun had warmed him sufficiently so that he could rise up 
16 



242 MAN. 

and walk about a little. He confidently expected relief 
soon, or, at least, before the sun should set. 

"Mrs. Hornsby, the wife of the Hornsby whose house he 
desired to reach, had a strange dream about him. The 
men who had fled had gone to Mr. Hornsby's, and told them 
that Mr. Wilbarger was dead. The night that he lay under 
the tree, where his sister appeared to him, Mrs. Hornsby 
dreamed that he was alive and in a bad condition. She 
insisted on the company going out that night after him, but 
they laughed at her. One of the men who had run off that 
morning and left Mr. Wilbarger, told her that he saw fifty 
Indians all around him and that it was impossible for him 
to be alive. She said, 4 1 do not care what you saw. I saw 
him, too, perfectly plain, and he is alive.' 

'* She retired, went to sleep again, and at the hour of three 
she arose, having dreamed the same thing over again. This 
time she was not easily quieted, and declared she had seen 
him again as plain as she had the first time ; and that it was 
a perfect shame for them to remain there and let a man suf- 
fer as he was doing, and urged them to start right then after 
him. But none of them would start before day. 

" The good lady sat up the balance of the night. When 
day came, and the company got ready to start to bury the 
dead, Mrs. Hornsby got a sheet and gave it to one of the 
men, saying : ' Here, take this sheet to bring Mr. Wilbarger 
home in. You can't pack him on a horse, for he is not able 
to ride. Carry him yourselves.' One of them broke out in 
a hearty laugh, saying: i Mrs. Hornsby, there is no use in 
bringing him here to bury him.' 'Ah,' said the old lady, 
1 he is not dead ; you will find him alive.' To gratify the 
old lady, they took the sheet. 

" When the company arrived on the battle ground, it was 



SPIRITISM. 243 

a little trouble to find Mr. Wilbarger, as he had moved. 
After a short search they discovered an object reposing 
against an old stump, which they at first supposed was an 
Indian. They approached him very cautiously. Mr. Wil- 
barger perceived this and held up his hands, and called to 
them to bring him some water. One of the men recognized 
his voice, and cried out: 'Lord, it is Wilbarger.' He, 
hearing his own name called, said to them: 'Yes, yes, it is 
me ; don't be afraid.' 

1 ' They took him and carried him to Mr. Hornsby's. When 
the old lady saw them coming slowly along she ran to meet 
them, shouting and clapping her hands. She embraced Mr. 
Wilbarger, and exclaimed : ' Oh, Wilbarger, I knew you 
were in this fix ; I saw you twice last night, and do you think 
I could get a single man to go after you until morning? Oh, 
if I had been a man you would not have staid there all night 
by yourself, suffering the way you did. They are all 
cowards.' 

" He was well cared for. The worms had eaten out all the 
bruised flesh from the wounds and the scalp, so that he soon 
recovered. When the scalp was torn off, the membrane of 
the skull was also torn off, leaving the skull perfectly bare. 
The skull having been thus exposed to the hot sun for thirty- 
six hours, it became as dry as an old bone. The flesh grew 
over the skull, but never grew to it. 

"Mr. Wilbarger lived eleven years after this occurrence, 
enjoying perfect health. Before he died his skull bone de- 
cayed away, leaving the brain exposed to view at every pul- 
sation. The brain could be seen on the fore part, where the 
decay was most rapid. There was a new skull forming. 
From this fact many, especially Dr. Anderson, of George- 
town, his attending physician, thought he would have a new 
skull, and recover from all the effects of his wound ; but the 



244 MAN. 

decay running too far back over the spinal marrow finally 
killed him. His death occurred in the year 1846. 

" The deceased was a brother of the author, and we have 
often heard him relate the story we have told. 

44 His wife and several children still reside in Bastrop, Bas- 
trop County, thirty-five miles from the city of Austin." 

The following extract clipped from the December, 1884, 
number of that reliable publication the Phrenological Jour- 
nal, is also directly in point : — 

u Of late, reports of such appearances have been on the 
increase, and testimony of the highest character is furnished 
in their support. One that seems most worthy of credit is 
related of a little boy who was visiting some friends at a 
considerable distance from the city where his parents re- 
sided. He awoke suddenly in the night and saw his mother, 
whom he dearly loved, by his bedside. He sprang up and 
embraced her eagerly, and she carried him out of the room 
into the hall, where she set him down upon the floor, and 
there, while caressing him with her \ warm soft hands,' told 
him to be a good boy, as she was going away and he would 
never see her again. Then kissing him with deep affection, 
she broke away from his clasp and disappeared. He aroused 
the house with his cries for his mamma, and was with much 
difficulty quieted so that he would return to his bed. The 
next day a messenger came with the announcement that the 
child's mother had died in the night, and on comparing the 
time it was discovered that her death occurred at the very 
hour when the little boy had seen and talked with his mother. 
This is a strong case, as it can scarcely be made out that a 
mere child six years old is the victim of illusions or hallucina- 
tions, or of revived impressions. His whole demeanor was 
that of simple belief in the truth of what he saw." 

"Dr. Johnson, John Wesley, President D wight, Oberlin, 



SPIRITISM. 245 

and others of great mental research, had faith in such 
apparitions. The celebrated Lord Chancellor Brougham 
gives in the narrative of his life a remarkable instance. 
With a skeptical friend in Edinburgh, he entered into a 
covenant that he who died first, should, if possible, make 
known unto the survivor his experience in the invisible state. 
Years after, when on the continent in Europe, to his amaze- 
ment, his former acquaintance suddenly appeared sitting by 
his side. Before a word was said Brougham fainted away. 
Soon recovering, he noted the day and hour when the spectre 
appeared. Many months after, the news arrived in the 
Scottish capital of his friend's death in India, at the very 
time entered in his record. 

There have been thousands of death-bed scenes where, 
the spirit of the dying person, as it was breaking away from 
the clogs and fetters of matter, and the glories of the un- 
seen world began to open upon it, has recognized the spirits 
of its departed friends long gone before, but now returned 
to the death scene to escort the spirit of the dying friend to 
its spirit home. Nothing is more common than evidences of 
this kind, and all observing persons have noted them. In 
fact it is a common belief of the Christian world, and of 
most well informed persons, that the spirits of all human 
beings are met at physical death by angels and spirit friends 
and escorted to their spirit homes. 

The following cases, cited from an article in the Fhren- 
ological Journal by John Waugh, are in point : — 

44 The distinguished Hannah More stretched forth her 
hands and called by name a beloved sister, long deceased. 

"A family lost two daughters in few months. The younger, 
named Anna, when spending her last moments in talking 
about her teachers and friends, suddenly looked up with joy 
and surprise, and cried out, * Clara ! Clara ! Clara ! ' and 



246 MAN. 

in a few moments in silence, in which she seemed to behold 
her sister, breathed her last. A pious gentleman, who lost a 
younger brother, in his expiring hour raised his ej^es to the 
ceiling as if seeing some remarkable object, and then said 
* How beautiful you are.' Then stretching out his arms, 
said, * Come, and take me ! ' We give another case still 

more remarkable. Russell C , an active business man 

and a Christian, was killed in a railway disaster. His aged 
mother, living in another State, was in such a dying state 
that it was deemed best not to inform her of the sad fate of 
her son. As the time of her departure drew near, while in 
the perfect use of her faculties on all subjects, she exclaimed, 
to the surprise of all, ' Russell is here ! ' ' Why, no, he is 
not,' said the daughter. • But he is,' she persisted, and 
expressed her unbounded joy in beholding him. 

It is also believed by most persons well informed on this 
subject that every human being is protected by guardian 
angels, who are generally spirits from the earth. That these 
spirit friends watch over us continually and relieve us from 
many traps and stratagems set for us by the devil and his 
emissaries, they also influence us in the direction of truth and 
right and good actions ; and are constantly aiding us in all 
reforms, intended for the good of men. 

Socrates, who reasoned and taught as no man ever did 
without the aid of God's revealed will, always claimed that 
he was controlled and directed by a demon or spirit. A. J. 
Davis, who, for an uneducated man, has written the most 
wonderful books that have appeared in the world, and has 
thrown more light upon benighted humanity, than any other 
writer outside of the inspired men of God, claims to 
have often spoken and written under spirit control. All 
thinking persons, and especially reformers, working for the 
good of society, no doubt receive more or less of impree- 



SPIRITISM, 247 

sions from good spirits, including of course, the Spirit oi 
God. And that human beings are often protected from cal- 
amities, troubles and even death, by impressions received 
from the spirit world, and made by spirit friends, or guard- 
ian angels, I believe to be true, and the opinion is sustained 
by many facts. I will give in this connection one circum- 
stance, which is' historical, and can not be questioned. I 
refer to the saving of the life of Senator Linn, of Missouri, 
which occurred in Washington City, in the year 1840, and 
the facts are given by Mr. Owen on pages 453, 454, 455, 
and 456, of his book entitled "Footfalls on the Boundary 
of Another World," as follows viz. : — 

•* HOW SENATOR LINN'S LIFE WAS SAVED. 

" Those who were familiar with the political. history of our 
country twenty years ago remember well Dr. Linn, of Mis- 
souri. Distinguished for talents and professional ability, 
but yet more for the excellence of his heart, he received by 
a distinction as rare as it was honorable, the unanimous vote 
of the Legislature for the office of Senator of the United 
States. 

"In discharge of his Congressional duties, he was residing 
with his family in Washington, during the spring and sum- 
mer of 1840, the last year of Mr. Van Buren's administra- 
tion. 

"One day during the month of May of that year, Dr. 
and Mrs. Linn received an invitation to a large and formal 
dinner party, given by a public functionary, and to which 
the most prominent members of the Administration party , 
including the President himself and our present Chief Magis- 
trate, Mr. Buchanan, were invited guests. Dr. Linn was 
very anxious to be present ; but, when the day came, find- 
ing himself suffering from an attack of indigestion, he 



248 MAN. 

begged his wife to bear his apology in person, and make 
one of the dinner party, leaving him at home. To this she 
somewhat reluctantly consented. She was accompanied to 
the door of their host by a friend, GeneralJones, who prom- 
ised to return and remain with Dr. Linn during the evening. 

" At table Mrs. Linn sat next to General Macomb, who 
had conducted her to dinner ; and immediately opposite to 
her sat Silas Wright, Senator from New York, the most in- 
timate friend of her husband, and a man by whose death, 
shortly after, the country sustained an irreparable loss. 

" Even during the early part of the dinner, Mrs. Linn felt 
very uneasy about her husband. She tried to reason herself 
out of this, as she knew that his indisposition was not at 
all serious ; but in vain. She mentioned her uneasiness to 
General Macomb ; but he reminded her of what she herself 
had previously told him, — that General Jones had promised 
to remain with Dr. Linn, and that, in the very unlikely con- 
tingency of any sudden illness, he would be sure to apprise 
her of it. Notwithstanding these representations, as dinner 
drew toward a close this unaccountable uneasiness increased 
to such an uncontrollable impulse to return home, that, as 
she expressed it to me, she felt that she could not sit there 
a moment longer. Her sudden pallor was noticed by Sen- 
ator Wright, and excited his alarm. ' I am sure you are 
ill, Mrs. Linn,' he said: 'what is the matter?' She replied 
that she was quite well, but that she must return to her hus- 
band. Mr. Wright sought, as General Macomb had done, 
to calm her fears/ but she replied to him, l If you wish to 
do me a favor for which I shall be grateful while I live, 
make some excuse to our host, so that we can leave the 
table.' Seeing her so greatly excited, he complied with her 
request, though they were then but serving the dessert ; and 
he and Mrs. Wright accompanied Mrs. Linn home. 



SPIRITISM. 249 

" As they were taking leave of her at the door of her lodg- 
ings, Senator Wright said, ' I shall call to-morrow morning, 
and have a good laugh with the doctor and yourself over 
your panic apprehensions.' 

" As Mrs. Linn passed hastily upstairs, she met the land- 
lady. 'How is Dr. Linn?' she anxiously asked. 'Very 
well, I believe," was the reply ; he took a bath more than 
an hour ago, and I dare say is sound asleep by this time. 
General Jones said he was doing extremely well.' 

" 'The General is with him, is he not?' 

" 'I believe not. I think I saw him pass out about half an 
hour ago.' 

"In a measure reassured, Mrs. Linn hastened to her hus- 
band's bed-chamber, the door of which was closed. As 
she opened it, a dense smoke burst upon her, in such stiflng 
quantity that she staggered and fell on the threshold. Re- 
covering herself after a few seconds, she rushed into the 
room. The bolster was on fire, and the feathers burned with 
a bright glow and a suffocating odor. She threw herself 
upon the bed ; but the fire, half smothered till that moment, 
was fanned by the draught from the open door, and kindling 
into sudden flame, caught her light dress, which was in a 
blaze on the instant. At the same moment her eye fell on 
the large bath-tub that had been used by her husband. She 
sprang into it, extinguishing her burning dress ; then, re- 
turning to the bed, she caught up the pillow and a sheet, that 
was on fire, scorching her arms in so doing, and plunged 
both into the water. Finally, exerting her utmost strength, 
she drew from the bed her insensible husband. It was then 
only that she called to the people of the house for aid. 

" Dr. Sewell was instantly summoned. But it was full 
half an hour before the sufferer gave any signs whatever of 
returning animation. He did not leave his bed for nearly a 



250 MAN. 

week ; and it was three months before he entirely recovered 
from the effects of this accident. 

" * How fortunate it was,' said Dr. Sewell to Mrs. Linn, 
1 that you arrived at the very moment you did ! Five min- 
utes more — nay, three minutes, — and in all human proba- 
bility, you would have never seen your husband alive 
again.' 

" Mr. Wright called, as he promised, the next morning. 
' Well, Mrs. Linn,' said he smiling, ' you have found out by 
this time how foolish that strange presentiment of yours 
was.' 

" i Come up stairs,' she replied. And she led him to his 
friend, scarcely yet able to speak ; and then she showed him 
the remains of the half-consumed bolster and partially 
burned bed linen. 

" Whether the sight changed his opinion on the subject of 
presentiments I can not tell ; but he turned pale as a corpse 
(Mrs. Linn said), and did not utter a^vord. 

"I had all the above particulars from Mrs. Linn herself, 
together with the permission to publish them in illustration 
of the subject I am treating, attested by dates and names. 

" There is one point in connection with the above narra- 
tive which is worthy of special examination. In case we ad- 
mit that Mrs. Linn's irresistible impulse to leave the dinner- 
table was a spiritual impression, the question remains, was 
it a warning of evil then existing, or was it a presentiment of 
evil that was still to arise? In other words, was it in its 
character only clairvoyant, or was it in its nature clearly 
prophetic? 

" The impression was distinctly produced on Mrs. Linn's 
mind, as that lady told me, at least half an hour before it 
became so urgent as to compel her to leave the entertain- 
ment. When she did leave, as the carriages were not or- 



SPIRITISM. 251 

dered till eleven o'clock, and no hackney-coach was at 
hand, she and Mr. and Mrs. Wright, as she further stated to 
me, returned on foot. The distance being a mile and a half, 
they were fully half an hour in walking it. It follows that 
Mrs. Linn was impressed to return home more than an hour 
before she opened the door of the bed-room. 

1 'Now, it is highly improbable that the fire should have 
caught, or that any thing should have happened likely to 
lead to it, in the bed-room as much as an hour, or even half 
an hour, before Mrs. Linn's arrival. 

But some one is ready to ask why is it you have nothing 
to say about spirit-rappings, table- tippings, and the other 
physical phenomena of modern spiritualism? To the mind 
of the writer, these physical phenomena are the least inter- 
esting of all the facts connected with this great subject. 
They are the merest outermost ripplings of the silently surg- 
ing waves of the great ocean of the spirit world lying all 
around and about us. 

But to the doubting thousands of earth, the material super- 
ficial thinkers of this world, which embraces a majority of 
mankind, these physical phenomena are the most interesting 
features of the subject, because all that arrests their attention. 
And in the providence of God these phenomena were, no 
doubt, sent or allowed for this very purpose. Between an 
ignorant and bigoted theology, and an arrogant and crush- 
ing scientific materialism, almost every thing spiritual has 
been driven from the creeds of the churches, and the domain 
of thought for hundreds of years past. Like a terrapin 
which draws its head within its shell, on the approach of 
observers, the human mind under the whip of intolerant 
orthodoxy has been kept within its earthly shell, and not 
allowed to enjoy the health-giving light of nature and of 
revelation. It has been blindly taught to trust in some 



252 



MAN. 



mysterious redemption, and to fear eternal punishment fol- 
lowing immediately after physical death. Under this tre- 
mendous cross-pressure of intolerant orthodoxy on the one 
hand, and arrogant scientific materialism on the other, the 
grand fact that man is a spirit, has been almost crushed out 
of the human mind. The real man is a spirit, shackeled only 
by matter, and soon to be loosed by physical death, into the 
beautiful spirit world, just as the butterfly leaves its chrysa- 
lis and enters upon a higher and happier state of existence. 
Hence the necessity of the spirit manifestations of the last 
quarter of a century. They were necessary to arrest the 
material minds of men, and call them back to the fact that 
they are spirits, with only a thin veil between them and the 
glorious spirit world, where the innumerable host of those 
who have gone before are ever waiting to welcome their 
coming friends from earth as they rapidly pass up Nature's 
grand pathway of progress from a lower to a higher state. 
As we pass on to the gateway of the grave, in the name of 
God and of reason we demand all the light we can get, both 
from nature and revelation ; and that the human mind be 
not forever fettered by priest-craft and materialism. 

In the course of human events, and in the providence of 
God, the time has arrived when the mental and religious des- 
potism, which brooded over the human mind through the 
dark ages, and of which in spiritual matters Protestantism 
failed to relieve it, should be stricken down and the human 
mind restored to full liberty in spiritual as well as temporal 
matters. In the accomplishment of this grand emancipation 
of the human spirit, I believe the spiritual phenomena of the 
last quarter of a century, to have been one of the great 
agencies. 

In the great battle now being fought upon the intel- 
lectual and religious theater of earth, between materialistic 



SPIRITISM. 253 

infidelity, and the immortality of the human spirit, no data 
will prove more useful, more satisfactory, and more effective 
to the masses of men than these same spiritual phenomena. 
Among sensible people who are honest, the existence of the 
phenomena as facts is no longer denied. Those who de- 
nounce all these manifestations as frauds, are either ignorant, 
prejudiced, or insincere. Frauds there have been and many 
of them. But what system or subject-matter was ever 
before men, in the name of which, frauds were not perpe- 
trated. Even God's holy religion has not escaped ; and the 
grandest and the most destructive frauds of earth are exist- 
ing to-day in the name of religion. 

The allegation of fraud is a most pitiful begging of the 
question. The circulation of counterfeit money is only evi- 
dence that the genuine exists. I, therefore, take it for 
granted that all honest and intelligent people admit the ex- 
istence of these spiritual phenomena, and that the only 
question for honest inquirers, is the source and cause of these 
most wonderful effects. That they emanate from intelli- 
gent sources it seems to me can not be questioned. 

The idea of the scientist that it is some unknown force of 
nature, after the order of electricity or magnetism, is the 
merest bosh. This idea is akin to that other supreme folly 
of the materialist that the animal life is all there is 
of man, and that when the body dies the mind goes out like 
a candle. No doubt electricity and magnetism are the me- 
diums through which are conveyed these wonderful commu- 
nications and responses ; but the responses themselves come 
from intelligent sources, and nobody has yet heard of a case 
in which electricity made an intellectual effort. These com- 
munications unquestionably come from spirit sources. They 
emanate either from spirits in the flesh, or from spirits beyond 
the vail. It has been held by many that the revelations of 



254 MAN. 

seances can be accounted for by mind-reading. That the mind 
of the medium enters the mind of the inquirer and gets the 
information there. No doubt this has often been done. But 
when the medium gives information unknown to the inquirer, 
which afterwards proves to be true, how then? Every honest 
investigator knows that there are many things conveyed 
through mediums which mind-reading will not account for ; 
and we are forced to the conclusion that many of these com- 
munications actually come from the spirit world. Intelli- 
gent ministers of the Gospel have long since arrived at this 
conclusion, but nearly all of them charge that the communi- 
cations are the works of demons deceiving and mislead- 
ing the people. This I am willing to admit is to a large ex- 
tent true. I believe that the devil and his demon angels are 
on and around the earth continually, that they are constantly 
deceiving, misleading, entrapping, dominating, and enslav- 
ing the minds, hearts, and bodies of men and women. 

That as in the days of Christ, so in this age and every 
age, demons have taken possession of the bodies and 
minds of men and women. Hundreds of murders and 
other crimes are committed by men, in which no human 
motive can ever be discerned. Many of these crimes are 
the works of demons. With this alarming control of the 
world by evil spirits, both in and out of the flesh, what would 
be more to be apprehended, than that evil spirits being in- 
visible to men should present themselves to mediums, under 
the guise of departed friends of the enquirer, and make false 
and deceptious communications. For this reason I hold that 
every possible precaution should be taken at seances, and 
every test that the intellect can devise should be used, as to 
the character of the communications and the source whence 
they emanate. Such tests have often been made by men of 
the first order of intellect and of unquestioned honesty, and 



SPIRITISM. 255 

with the most satisfactory results. Many communications 
have been received by their friends on the earth, from good 
and honest spirits in the spirit world. Among thousands 
of cases reported equally satisfactory, I will give a few sam- 
ple cases reported by an author of world-wide reputation. 
I refer to that able and honest investigator Robert Dale 
Owen, who reports no case in which the facts are not well 
authenticated. On pages 409-414 of " Foot-falls on the 
Boundary of Another World," will be found the following 
detailed account of the death of an English captain of dra- 
goons in India and his appearance to his wife in England 
the same evening : — 

" THE FOURTEENTH OP NOVEMBER, 

44 In the month of September, 1857, Captain Q 



W , of the 6th (Inniskilling) Dragoons, went out to 

India to join his regiment. 

11 His wife remained in England, residing at Cambridge. 
On the night between the 14th and 15th of November, 1857, 
toward morning, she dreamed that she saw her husband, 
looking anxious and ill, — upon which she immediately 
awoke, much agitated. It was bright moonlight; and, 
looking up, she perceived the same figure standing by her 
bedside. He appeared in his uniform, the hands pressed 
across the breast, the hair disheveled, the face very pale. 
His large dark eyes were fixed full upon her ; their expres- 
sion was that of great excitement, and there was a peculiar 
contraction of the mouth, habitual to him when agitated. 
She saw him, even to each minute particular of his dress, as 
distinctly as she had ever done in her life ; and she remem- 
bers to have noticed between his hands the white of the shirt 
bosom, unstained, however, with blood. The figure seemed 
to bend forward, as if in pain, and to make an effort to 



256 MAN. 

speak ; but there was no sound. It remained visible, the 
wife thinks, as long as a minute, and then disappeared. 

* ' Her first idea was to ascertain if she was actually awake. 
She rubbed her eyes with the sheet, and felt that the touch 
was real. Her little nephew was in bed with her ; she bent 
over the sleeping child and listened to its breathing ; the 
sound was distinct ; and she became convinced that what 
she had seen was no dream. It need hardly be added that 
she did not again go to sleep that night. 

" Next morning she related all this to her mother, express- 
ing her conviction, though she had noticed no marks of 

blood on his dress, that Captain W was either killed or 

grievously wounded. So fully impressed was she with the 
reality of that apparition that she thenceforth refused all in- 
vitations. A young friend urged her, soon afterward, to go 
with her to a fashionable concert, reminding her that she 
had received from Malta, sent by her husband, a handsome 
dress-cloak which she had never yet worn. But she posi- 
tively declined, declaring that, uncertain as she was whether 
she was not already a widow, she would never enter a place 
of amusement until she had letters from her husband (if, 
indeed, he still lived) of later date than the 14th of Novem- 
ber. 

44 It was on a Tuesday in the month of December, 1857, 
that the telegram regarding the actual fate of Captain 

W was published in London. It was to the effect that 

he was killed before Lucknow on the fifteenth of November. 

44 This news, given in the morning paper, attracted the at- 
tention of Mr. Wilkinson, a London solicitor, who had in 

charge Captain W *s affairs. When at a later period 

this gentleman met the widow, she informed him that she had 
been quite prepared for the melancholy news, but that she 
felt sure her husband could not have been killed on the 15th 



SPIRITISM. 257 

of November, inasmuch as it was during the night between 
the 14th and 15th that he appeared to herself. 

"The certificate from the War Office, however, which it 
became Mr. Wilkinson's duty to obtain, confirmed the date 
given in the telegram, its tenor being as follows : — 

War Office, 
30th January, 1858. 

44 * These are to certify that it appears, by the records in 

this office, that Captain G W , of the 6th Dragoon 

Guards, was killed in action on the 15th November, 1857. 
(Signed) B. Hawkes.' 

"While Mr. Wilkinson's mind remained in uncertainty as 
to the exact date, a remarkable incident occurred, which 
seemed to cast further suspicion on the accuracy of the tele- 
gram and of the certificate. That gentleman was visiting a 
friend, whose lady has all her life had perception of appari- 
tions, while her husband is what is usually called an impres- 
sible medium ; facts which are known, however, only to 
their intimate friends. Though personally acquainted with 
them, I am not at liberty to give their names. Let us call 
them Mr. and Mrs. N . 

"Mr. Wilkinson related to them, as a wonderful circum- 
stance, the vision of the captain's widow in connection with 
his death, and described the figure as it had appeared to her. 

Mrs. N , turning to her husband, instantly said, ' That 

must be the very person I saw, the evening we were talking 
of India, and you drew an elephant, with a howdah on his 
back. Mr. Wilkinson has described his exact position and 
appearance; the uniform of a British officer, his hands 
pressed across his breast, his form bent forward as if in pain. 
The figure,' she added to Mr. W., * appeared just behind 
my husband, and seemed looking over his left shoulder.' 
17 



258 MAN. 

" l Did you attempt to obtain any communication from 
him! ' Mr. Wilkinson asked. 

44 4 Yes ; we procured one through the medium of my hus- 
band.' 

44 * Do you remember its purport? ' 

44 4 It was to the effect that he had been killed in India 
that afternoon, by a wound in the breast ; and adding, as I 
distinctly remember, "That thing I used to go about in is 
not buried yet." I particularly marked the expression.' 

44 i When did this happen? ' 

44 4 About nine o'clock in the evening, several weeks ago; 
but I do not recollect the exact date.' 

44 * Can you not call to mind something that might enable 
you to fix the precise day ? ' 

44 Mrs. N reflected. 4 1 remember nothing,' she said, 

at last, 4 except that while my husband was drawing, and I 
was talking to a lady friend who had called to see us, we 
were interrupted by a servant bringing in a bill for some 
German vinegar, and that, as I recommended it as being 
superior to English, we had a bottle brought in for inspec- 
tion.' 

44 4 Did you pay the bill at the time? ' 

44 4 Yes ; I sent out the money by the servant.' 

44 4 Was the bill receipted? ' 

44 4 1 think so ; but I have it upstairs, and can soon ascer- 
tain.' 

44 Mrs. N produced the bill. Its receipt bore date the 

fourteenth of November ! 

4 'This confirmation of the widow's conviction as to the 
day of her husband's death produced so much impression on 
Mr. Wilkinson, that he called at the office of Messrs. Cox 
& Greenwood, the army agents, to ascertain if there was no 
mistake in the certificate. But nothing there appeared to 



SPIRITISM. 259 

confirm any surmise of inaccuracy. Captain W 's death 

was mentioned in two separate dispatches of Sir Colin Camp- 
bell ; and in both the date corresponded with that given in 
the telegram. 

" So matters rested, until, in the month of March, 1858, 

the family of Captain W received from Captain G- 

C , then of the Military Train, a letter dated near Luck- 
now, on the 19th December, 1857. This letter jnformed 

them that Captain W had been killed before Lucknow, 

while gallantly leading on the squadron, not on the 15th of 
November, as reported in Sir Colin Campbell's dispatches, 

but on \hz fourteenth, in the afternoon. Captain C was 

riding close by his side at the time he saw him fall. He was 
struck by a fragment of shell in the breast, and never spoke 
after he was hit. He was buried at the Dilkoosha ; and on 

a wooden cross erected by his friend, Lieutenant R , of 

the 9th Lancers, at the head of his grave, are cut the 
initials G-. W. and the date of his death, the 14th of Novem- 
ber, 1857. 

" The war office finally made the correction as to the date 
of death, but not until more than a year after the event 
occurred. Mr. Wilkinson, having occasion to apply for an 
additional copy of the certificate in April, 1859, found it 
in exactly the same words as that which I have given, only 
that the 14th of November had been substituted for the 
15th. 

" This extraordinary narrative was obtained by me directly 

from the -parties themselves. The widow of Captain W 

kindly consented to examine and correct the manuscript, 

and allowed me to inspect a copy of Captain C 's letter, 

giving the particulars of her husband's death. To Mr. 
Wilkinson, also, the manuscript was submitted, and lie as- 



260 MAN. 

sented to its accuracy so far as he is concerned. That por- 
tion which relates to Mrs. N 1 had from that lady her- 
self. I have neglected no precaution, therefore, to obtain 
for it the warrant of authenticity. 

" It is, perhaps, the only example on record where the ap- 
pearance of what is usually termed a ghost proved the means 
of correcting an erroneous date in the dispatches of a com- 
mander-in-chief, and of detecting an inaccuracy in the cer- 
tificate of a war office. 

" It is especially valuable, too, as furnishing an example of 
a double apparition. Nor can it be alleged (even if the 
allegation had weight) that the recital of one lady caused 

the apparition of the same figure to the other. Mrs. W 

was at that time in Cambridge, and Mrs. N in London ; 

and it was not till weeks after the occurrence that either 
knew what the other had seen. 

" Those who would explain the whole on the principle of 
chance coincidence have a treble event to take into account : 

the apparition to Mrs. N , that to Mrs. W , and the 

actual time of Captain W 's death; each tallying ex- 
actly with the other. 

" Examples of apparitions at the moment of death might be 
multiplied without number. Many persons — especially in 
Germany — who believe in no other species of apparition, 
admit this. Anzeigen is the German term employed to des- 
ignate such an intimation from the newly dead." 

I will, also, in this connection copy the following interest- 
ing satisfactory and well authenticated facts from pages 
287-294 of Mr. Owens' book entitled, "The Debatable 
Land:" — 

44 In the year 1853 there lived, in the town of R , 

Massachusetts, a family of the utmost respectability and in 



SPIRITISM. 261 

easy circumstances, whose name, though known to me, I am 
not at liberty here to give. Let us call them Mr. and Mrs. 
L . 

44 Mrs. L appears to have been one of a class of which 

I have already spoken as resembling Reichenbach's * sensi- 
tives,' if not identical with them: a class which has fur- 
nished what are called l mediums,' and what might appropri- 
ately be called 'spiritual sensitives.' She shared many of 
the peculiarities of that class ; peculiarities which, in her case, 
as in many others, seem to have been hereditary. 

44 Her grandmother, one morning, preparing to go out walk- 
ing and turning round to leave her bed-chamber, suddenly 
perceived, standing before her, the exact counterpart of her- 
self. At first she imaged it to be an impression from some 
mirror ; but, having ascertained that it was not so and see- 
ing the appearance gradually vanish, she became very much 
alarmed; the popular idea occurring to her that to see one's 
double, or wraith as the Scotch term it, portended death. 
She immediately sent for the preacher whose church she fre- 
quented, the Rev. Mr. Eaton, and consulted him on the 
subject. He inquired whether it was before or after mid- 
day that she had seen the apparition ; and, learning that it 
was early in the forenoon, he assured her (whether from sin- 
cere conviction or merely to allay the extreme excitement in 
which he found her), that the augury was of long life, not of 
approaching dissolution. As it chanced, she lived after that 
to a good, old age. 

u Mrs. L 's mother, Mrs. F , was accompanied by 

knocking and other sounds in a house in Pearl Street, Bos- 
ton, at intervals as long as she resided there; namely, 
through a period of twelve years. Sometimes these sounds 
were audible to herself only; sometimes also to the other 



262 MAN. 

inmates of the house. Finally, they annoyed her husband so 
much, that he changed their residence. 

" Mrs. L herself, when about ten years of age (in the 

year 1830), had been witness to one of those phenomena that 
are never forgotten and produce a great influence on the 
opinions and feelings of a lifetime. 

" There was, at that time, residing in her mother's house, 
in the last stage of hopeless decline, a lady, named Mrs. 

Marshall, to whom Mrs. F , from benevolent motives, 

had offered a temporary home. 

" Cecilia — that is Mrs. L 's name — had been sitting 

up one evening a little later than usual, and, childlike, had 
lain down on the parlor sofa and dropped to sleep. 

1 'Awaking, after a time, she supposed it must be late ; for 
the fire had burned low and the room was vacant. As she 
attempted to rise,, she suddenly became aware that the figure 
of Mrs. Marshall, robed in white, was bending over her. 
1 Oh, Mrs. Marshall/ she exclaimed, c why did you come 
down for me? You will be sure to take cold.' The figure 
smiled, made no reply, but, moving toward the door, signed 
to Cecilia to follow. She did so in considerable trepidation, 
which was increased when she perceived what she still be- 
lieved to be the lady herself pass up the stairs backward, 
with a slow, gliding motion, to the door of her bed-room, 
the child followed ; and, as she reached the landing of the 
stairs, she saw the figure, without turning the lock or open- 
ing the door, pass, as it were, through the material substance 
into the room and thus disappear from her sight. 

"Her screams brought her mother who, coming out of 
Mrs. Marshall's room, asked her what was the matter. 
4 Oh, mamma, mamma,' exclaimed the terrified child, ' was 
that a ghost? ' 



SPIRITISM. 263 

" The mother chid her at first, for nursing silly fancies ; 
but when Cecilia related to her circumstantially what she 

had witnessed, Mrs. F shuddered. Well she might! 

Not half an hour before she had assisted at the death-bed of 
Mrs. Marshall! 

4 'It was remembered, too, that a few minutes before she 
expired, that lady, with whom Cecilia was a great favorite, 
had spoken in affectionate terms of the child and had ex- 
pressed an earnest desire to see her. But Mrs. F , fear- 
ing the effect of such a scene on one so young, had refrained 
from calling her daughter. 

"Did the earnest longing mature into action when the 
earthclog was cast off? Was the dying wish gratified, not- 
withstanding the mother's precautions? 

"Later in her youth Cecilia, to her mother's great alarm, 
had from time to time walked in her sleep. This somnam- 
bulism was strictly spontaneous, no mesmeric experiments 
of any kind having ever been allowed in the family. It did 
not result in any accident ; but, on several occasions, while 
unconscious and with her eyes closed, she aided her mother, 
as expertly as if awake, in the household duties. 

" She had another peculiarity. In the early part of the 
night her sleep was usually profound ; but occasionally, 
toward morning, in a state between sleeping and waking, 
she had visions of the night which, though they were un- 
doubtedly but a phase of dreaming, she discovered, by 
repeated experience, to be often of a clairvoyant or prophetic 
character; sometimes informing her of death or illness. 
These intimations of the distant or the future so frequently 
corresponded to the truth that, when they prognosticated 
misfortune, Mrs. L hesitated, on awaking, to communi- 
cate them. 

" Such a dream, or vision, she had one night in the early 



264 MAN. 

part of the month November, 1853. A sister, Esther, re- 
cently married, had gone out, with her husband, to Cali- 
fornia, some weeks before; and they had been expecting, 
ere long, news of her arrival. This sister seemed to 
approach the bedside, and said to her : ' Cecilia, come with 

me to California.' Mrs. L , in her dream objected that 

she could not leave her husband and children, to undertake 
a journey so long and tedious. 

" ' We shall soon be there,' said Esther, c and you shall 
return before morning. 5 

" In her dream the proposed excursion did not seem to 
her an impossibility : so she rose from bed and giving her 
hand to her sister, she thought they ascended together and 
floated over a vast space ; then descended near a dwelling of 
humble and rude appearance, very different from any which 
she could have imagined her sister to occupy in the new 
country to which, in search of fortune, she and her husband 
emigrated. The sisters entered, and Cecilia recognized her 
brother-in-law, sad and in mourning garb. Esther then led 
her into a room in the center of which stood an open coffin, 
and pointed to the body it contained. It was Esther's own 

body, pale with the hue of death. Mrs. L gazed in 

mute astonishment, first at the corpse before her, then at the 
form, apparently bright with life and intelligence, which had 
conducted her thither. To her look of inquiry and wonder 
the living appearance replied, l Yes, sister, that body was 
mine ; but disease assailed it. I was taken with cholera 
and I passed to another world. I desired to show you this, 
that you might be prepared for the news that will soon reach 
you.' 

" After a time Mrs. L seemed to herself to rise again 

into the air, again to traverse a great space, and finally to 
re-enter her bed-chamber. By and by she awoke, with this 



SPIRITISM. 265 

dream so vividly stamped on her mind, that it required some 
time to satisfy her that she had not made an actual journey. 

" ' I have had such a dream ! ' she exclaimed to her hus- 
band. But his discouraging ' What, Cecilia, at your foolish 
dreams again?' closed her lips, and she passed the matter 
off without further explanation, either to him or to any 
other member of the family. 

1 ' It so happened that, the evening of the same day, Mrs. 
L sat down to a quiet family game of whist. Her hus- 
band and a younger sister, Anne, were of the party. In 

the course of the game Mrs. L handed the cards to her 

sister, whose turn it was to deal. Suddenly she saw Anne's 
arm assume a rapid rotary motion, and the cards flew in all 
directions. Turning to chide her for what she thought a 
foolish jest, she observed a peculiar expression spread over 
her face ; the look was grave, earnest, thoughtful ; and the 
eyes were fixed, as with affectionate anxiety, on Cecilia's 
face. 

44 Very much alarmed, the latter cried out, 'Oh, Anne, 
what is the matter? why do you look so?' 

" ' Call me not Anne,' was the reply ; ' I am Esther.' 

"' Anne!' 

" ' I tell you it is Esther who speaks to you, not Anne.' 

" Mrs. L , excessively terrified, turned to her husband, 

crying out, ' Her mind is gone ! she is mad ! Oh that such 
a misfortune should ever have fallen on our family ! * 

" ' Your dream, Cecilia! Your dream of last night! Have 
you forgotten whither I took you and what you saw? ' said 
Anne, solemnly. 

" The shock was too much for Mrs L . She fainted. 

"When, by the use of the usual restoratives, she had 
recovered, she found her sister still in the same trance-like 
state, and still impersonating Esther. This continued for 



266 MAN. 

nearly four hours. At the end of that time Anne suddenly 
rubbed her eyes, stretched her limbs, as if awakening, and 
asked in her natural voice, c Have I been asleep? What is 
the matter? What has happened? ' 

11 Some four weeks afterward the California mail brought 
a letter from Esther's husband, informing the family of his 
wife's sudden death, by cholera, on the very day preceding 
the night of Mrs. L 's dream. 

' i When, about six months later, the brother-in-law, hav- 
ing returned to Massachusetts, heard from Mrs. L the 

description of the rude dwelling to which, in her dream, she 
had seemed to be conveyed, he admitted that it corre- 
sponded, accurately and minutely, to that of the house in 
which his wife actually died. 

" The above incidents were related to me by Mrs. L 

herself, with permission to publish them, suppressing only 
the family name. 

" That lady also stated to me that, at the time referred to, 
the modern spiritual manifestations were unknown in the 

town of R , except by some vague rumors of knockings 

said to have been heard in Rochester, and which Mrs. 

L 's family had always treated as a matter too absurd to 

be seriously noticed. It need hardly be added that they had 
never sought or witnessed rapping or table-moving or trance- 
speaking or automatic writing, or any similar phenomena, 
now so common in this and other countries. 

"It was, therefore, with mingled feelings of grief and 
astonishment that they observed, in Anne, a repetition on 
several subsequent occasions of the same manifestation which 
had startled them during the rubber at whist. 

" The next time that her sister's fixed gaze and changed 
manner indicated the recurrence of this abnormal condition, 
Mrs. L — — asked, 4 Is this Esther again?' 



SPIRITISM. 267 

" * Not so, my daughter/ was the reply. * It is not your 
sister but another friend who desires to address you.' 

"< What friend?' 

" ' John Murray.' 

* c This was the name of an aged preacher under whom 

Mrs. L 's mother had sat in the early part of her life, 

and who had died many years before, never personally known 
to Mrs. L 

"After this, the impersonation, by Anne, of the Rev. 
Mr. Murray was of frequent occurrence. On such occasions 
she usually addressed those present in the grave and measured 
tones that are wont to characterize a pulpit discourse. The 
subjects were always religious, and the spirit in which they 
were treated was elevated and often eloquent far beyond the 
natural powers of the speaker. 

"Nor was this all. Mrs. L herself, at first very 

much to her dissatisfaction, became influenced to write 
by impressional dictation. Long she resisted, additionally 
urged to opposition by the great repugnance of her husband 
and of her friends, who regarded, almost with horror, this 
sudden invasion of the household circle. i It must be some 
of these terrible spiritual extravagances that are going about,' 
they used to say, in a tone very similar to that which nervous 
people deplore the approach of a deadly epidemic. 

" After a time, however, when it was observed that these 
communications were pure and reverent in character, incul- 
cating the highest principles of religion and morality, and 

that no fnrther abnormalities succeeded, Mr. L and 

many of their friends became reconciled to the intrusion ; 
and finally listened, with interest and pleasure, to the les- 
sons, oral and written, which were thus mysteriously con- 
veyed to them. 



268 MAN. 

" In the above remarkable narrative I invite attention to 
the evidence, therein incidentally presenting itself, of iden- 
tity. We may believe confidently in the spiritual origin of a 
message or of a lesson, and yet may be justified — we are 
sometimes fully justified — in doubting the identity of the 
spirit purporting to communicate. 

" But what are we to make of Anne's exclamation : ' Your 
dream, Cecilia! Your dream of last night! Have you for- 
gotten whither I took you and what you saw ? ' 

" Not a single particular of that dream had been related 

by Mrs. L to Anne or to any one else. No wonder she 

fainted! No wonder she felt certain — as she told me she 
did — that it was Esther herself, and no other, who inspired 
the words. To what other credible source can we refer 
them? The hypothesis of chance coincidence is utterly 
untenable. As little can we suppose reflection by thought- 
reading : to say nothing of the incredibilty of a simulated 
four-hour trance. 

" Of apparitions to relatives and dear friends at or near 
the time of death I have elsewhere furnished authentic exam- 
ples. This is more common than any other class of appari- 
tion. Numerous examples occur in German works, and the 
Germans have a special term (anzeigen) to designate such 
an appearance.' 

The case last cited I regard as one of the most remark- 
able and important ever reported, because it establishes 
three wonderful proportions as follows, viz. : — 

1st. It shows that disembodied spirits can return and com- 
municate with their friends in the flesh. There were no 
devices or deception about this case. All the facts clearly 
show that immediately after death, the spirit reported the 
fact to her relations, and even caused her sister, in the spirit 
to view her dead body. 



SPIRITISM. 269 

2d. It shows that there are persons so constituted that in 
profound sleep of the body and soul, the spirit may tempo- 
rally leave the body and go a great distance to confer with 
other spirits or view other scenes. In this case, that the lady 
left her sleeping body in Massachusetts, crossed the continent 
with the spirit of her dead sister, and actually looked upon 
her dead body, was afterward proven by the testimony of 
the husband of deceased, that her description of the locality 
and the house in which the corpse lay, was exactly correct. 

That the spirit may temporarily absent itself from the 
body is sanctioned by Revelation, at least so far as the 
Apostle Paul is concerned, who speaks in his writings of some- 
times being absent from the body. 

The third proposition established is that the disembodied 
spirit can not only return, but in some cases may take pos- 
session of the body of a living person, crowd out its spirit 
temporarily, and completely control the body even to its 
vocal machinery, by talking to friends in the flesh. In this 
case the returned spirit took possession of the body of her 
sister Anne and in audible language reminded the other sis- 
ter of her dream or rather of her vison and trip to California. 

In this connection, and as bearing directly on the last 
proposition, I give the following remarkable case from the 
pen of Mrs. Helen Wilmans, editress of the Woman's World. 
The facts seem to be well authenticated and are very won- 
derful : — 

"a strange case. 

"At Kansas City I was met by a friend who took me to 
spend the day with some friends of hers, and I must say I 
never passed the hours more pleasantly than while in the hos- 
pitable house of Mr. and Mrs. A. B. Roff. They are people 
of great intelligence and evident integrity. It was from 
them I learned the particulars of the event I am about to 
relate. The event is not new to the public, accounts of it 



270 MAN. 

having found their way to the press through various sources, 
and finally the whole matter was examined into and its truth 
corroborated by some of the most distinguished men in the 
Union, who published a pamphlet giving the complete nar- 
rative. 

" Mr. and Mrs. Roff had a daughter born in 1847 who died 
of catalepsy in 1865. They lived in various places, and 
finally located at Watseka, Illinois. 

4 'In the same town, but not at all related to them, lived 
Thomas J. Vennum and wife, and daughter Lurancy. This 
daughter was born in 1864. She was a bright, healthy and 
active girl, until the 11th of July, in 1877, when she com- 
plained to her mother of feeling queer, and placing her hand 
to her left breast, she immediately went into what seemed like 
a fit, falling heavily on the floor, lying apparently dead, 
every muscle becoming suddenly rigid. Thus she lay five 
hours. On returning to consciousness she said she felt 
" strange." The remainder of the night she rested well. 
The next day the rigid state returned, and passing beyond 
the rigidity, her mind took cognizance of two states of being 
at the same time. Lying as if dead, she spoke freely, tell- 
ing the family what persons and spirits she could see, de- 
scribing them and calling some of them by name. Among 
those mentioned were her sister and brother, for she ex- 
claimed ' Oh, mother! can't you see little Laura and Bertie? 
They are so beautiful ! ' etc. Bertie died when Lurancy was 
but three years old. 

"She had many of these trances, describing heaven and 
the spirits, or the angels as she called them. Sometime in 
September she became free from them and seemed to the 
family to be quite well again. 

" On the 27th day of November, 1877, she was attacked 
with a most violent pnin in her stomach, some five or six 
times a day ; for two weeks she had the most excruciating 



SPIRITISM. 271 

pains. In these painful paroxysms she would double herself 
back until her head and feet actually touched. At the end 
of two weeks, or about the 1 1th of December, in these dis- 
tressed attacks, she became unconscious and passed into a 
quiet trance, and, as at former times, would describe heaven 
and spirits, often calling them angels. 

" From this time on until the 1st of Feburary, 1878, she 
would have these trances and sometimes a seemingly real 
obsession, from three to eight, and sometimes as many as 
twelve times, a day, lasting from one to eight hours, occa- 
sionally passing in to that state of ecstacy, when, as Lurancy, 
she claimed to be in heaven. 

"In her states of seeming obsession she represented vari- 
ous spirits, or rather various spirits would control her, one 
at a time, giving their names and personal histories. 

" These spirits seemed to belong to a crude and undeveloped 
class, and rendered the girl very troublesome and unmanage- 
able ; until one day Mr. Roff visited her, when she calmed 
down and talked rationally. 

( ' She said : ' There are a great many spirits here who 
would be glad to come,' and she again proceeded to give 
names and descriptions of persons long since deceased; 
some that she had never known, but were known by older 
persons present. But, she said, there is one of the angels 
desires to come, and she wants to come. On being asked if 
if she knew who it was, she said : ' Her name is Mary Roff. 
Mr. Roff being present, said : ' That is my daughter ; Mary 
Roff is my girl. Why, she has been in heaven twelve years. 
Yes, let her come, we'll be glad to have her come.' Mr. 
Roff assured Lurancy that Mary was good and intelligent 
and would help her all she could ; stating further that Mary 
used to be subject to conditions like herself. Lurancy, after 
due deliberation and counsel with spirits, said that Mary 
would take the place of the former wild and unreasonable 



272 MAN. 

influence. Mr. Roff said to her : * Have your mother bring 
you to my house and Mary will be likely to come along, and 
a mutual benefit may be derived from our former experience 
with Mary. ' 

" It now seemed that the spirit of Mary Roff entered the 
body of Lurancy Yennum and she immediately repudiated all 
connection with Mr. and Mrs. Vennum and claimed Mr. and 
Mrs. Roff for her parents and went home with them, where 
she took her share of household duties and acted in all ways 
as their daughter had done. She recognized and claimed 
Mary Roff 's old friends whom, as Lurancy Vennum, she had 
never seen. She submitted to a thousand tests, all of which 
were satisfactory. 

'* After several months of this she told her friends that she 
was going back to heaven and give Lurancy a chance to 
come back. 

" As the time drew near for the restoration of Lurancy to 
her parents and home, Mary would sometimes seem to 
recede into the memory and manner of Lurancy for a little 
time, yet not enough to lose her identity or permit the 
manifestation of Lurancy' s mind, but enough to show she 
was impressing her presence upon her own body. 

" On being asked, ' Where is Lurancy ? ' she would say, 
* Gone out somewhere,' or ' She is in heaven taking lessons, 
and I am here taking lessons too.' 

" On Sunday, May 19th, about half past four o'clock, 
p. m. , Mr. Roff and Mary were sitting in the parlor, Henry 
Vennum, Lurancy' s brother, being in the sitting room, 
another room and hall between. Mary left control, and 
Lurancy took full possession of her own body. Henry was 
called in and she caught him around his neck, kissed and 
wept over him, causing all present to weep. At this 
juncture, Mr. Roff was called and asked Lurancy if she 
could stay till Henry could go and bring her mother (she had 



SPIRITISM. 273 

expressed a desire to go and see her father and mother). 
She said 'No,' but if Henry would go and bring her, she 
would come again and talk with her. She immediately left 
and Mary came again. 

" Mrs. Vennum was brought within an hour, and on her 
arrival, Lurancy came into full control, when one of the 
most affecting scenes every witnessed took place. Mother 
and daughter embraced and kissed each other, and wept 
until all present shed tears of sympathy. 

u After this for sometime the spirit of Mary and the spirit of 
Lurancy would occupy the body alternately until the time 
approached for Mary to leave for good. She seemed dis- 
tressed at the parting, but said s I will come in spirit as close 
to you as I can, and comfort you in sorrow, and you will 
feel me near you sometimes.' 

" When eleven o'clock came she seemed loth to go or let 
Lurancy come back. Mrs. Alter started to go home and 
Mary started with her. When in the yard, Mrs. A. said, 
' Mary, you have always done as you said you would, but as 
I don't understand these things, will you please let Lurancy 
come back just now, and then you can come again if you 
want too.' Mary said: ' Yes, I will,' and she kissed mother 
and sister good-by. 

" A voice said, ' Why, Mrs. Alter, where are we going? ' 
Then in a breath, * Oh, yes, I know, Mary told me! ' 

" On the way they met Mrs. Marsh and Mrs. Hooper, who 
were the nearest neighbors and Mary's favorite friends; 
Lurancy did not seem to know them, but remarked, 'Mary 
thinks so much of these neighbors.' Then turning to Mrs. 
Alter with whom Lurancy had been but slightly acquainted 
two years ago, she said, ' Mrs. Alter, Mary can come and 
talk to you nearly all the way home, if you want her to, and 
then I will come back.' She spoke and appeared like one 
18 



274 MAN. 

slightly acquainted. Mrs. Alter said, ' I have trusted you 
in the past, and of course I would love to talk with my 
sister.' 

" The change was again made, and Mary said, ' I do love 
to be with you so much.' 

" She talked lovingly, and gave good advice about many 
things and family matters. The final change now took place 
at the time predicted, and Lurancy stated she felt something 
as though she had been asleep, yet she knew she had not. 
On reaching Mr. Roff' s office, she addressed him as Mr. 
Roff (she had called him pa while Mary had inhabited her 
body), and asked if he would take her home, which he did. 
" This was the last manifestation of a remarkable char- 
acter that occurred. Lurancy was fully restored to health 
and has never been troubled with anything resembling cata- 
lepsy since. She is now married and the mother of a healthy 
child, and lives at Lincoln, Nebraska." 

The foregoing is even more remarkable than the case of 
the spirit which came from California to Massachusetts 
and took possession of her sister's body in order to report 
her own death. In this case it seems that by mutual con- 
sent of the parties concerned, Mary Roff, a disembodied 
spirit, for months occupied and used the body of Lurancy 
Vennum and finally returned the body in good health, to its 
legitimate owner. This is certainly one of the most remark- 
able cases that ever occurred ; and demonstrates two extraor- 
dinary propositions: first that a spirit may occasionally 
leave its body, remain in the spirit land for a considerable 
time and yet return and occupy its animal casement again ; 
and second, that a disembodied spirit may not only return to 
earth, but may in certain exceptional cases take possession 
of the body, of a spirit in the body — the latter retiring for 
the time being. 



CHAPTER Tin. 

MAN'S RELATION TO THE SPIRIT WORLD— CLAIRVOY- 
ANCE — CLAIRAUDIENCE — DREAMS — VISIONS, ETC. 



m 



AN contains within him the elements of five kingdoms, 
viz., the mineral, vegetable, animal, human and 
spiritual. His bod}' is constituted of matter from the three 
kingdoms first named ; while the soul and spirit, in the pres- 
ent state, are properly in the human kingdom, but the spirit 
is really both in the human and spirit worlds. It, however, 
has a veil over it, in the form of the body which prevents it 
from seeing the glories of the spirit world. You may send 
a man out closely veiled into the most brilliant sunlight, and 
he will not see the sun nor any of the beauties of earth. 
So is man in regard to his spirit-nature ; he is a spirit, and 
in the midst of the spirit world ; but he is heavily shackled 
and closely veiled with matter, and can see none of the 
transcendant beauties. Occasionally, through a thin part of 
the veil, he sees dimly, as one " seeing through a glass 
darkly ; " and now and then through some abnormal 
rent in the veil, an individual gets a glimpse of some 
object in the spirit world ; and this is what is called clair- 
voyance which means nothing more or less than spirit sight. 
And occasionally some sensitive spirit in the flesh, in an 
abstracted or abnormal condition, hears the " music of the 
spheres,' ' or the familiar voice of some friend gone before, 
and this is called clairaudience, or spirit-hearing. Very 
sensitive persons are also some times able to feel the touch 

(275) 



276 MAN. 

of their spirit friends as they hover around them, in the 
most affectionate way. 

The following beautiful description of the Spirit Land, and 
its relation to the earth and other planets, is from the pen of 
that remarkable clairvoyant and author Andrew Jackson 
Davis, and is copied from pages 409-418, of the fifth vol- 
ume of the great " Harmonia." 

* 'After proceeding thus far with my suggestions and de- 
lineations, there remain for the thinker's understanding, as 
I am impressed, a few observations on the literal or incar- 
nated truth of a spirit-home. For it is supposable that, by 
this time, the philosophic reasoner admits the affirmation 
that every truth is practically nothing to man (that is, spirit) 
until it is set forth by means of incarnation. We will take the 
analogical method. As the natural body is the parent of 
the spiritual body, and as the two in conjunction labor to 
individualize the spirit, so does the natural system of worlds 
bring into existence a corresponding spiritual system or 
sphere. By this is not meant that the material globes create 
the essences and volatile elements out of which the spiritual 
world is composed ; but that the system of planets in space 
imparts its forces, determines its positions, defines its 
geographical forms, substantializes it, stratifies it, so to 
speak, and in the end makes it an organic, objective reality. 

" When speculating on the ' hereafter,' how quick do 
men's thoughts liquefy and run off into an incomprehensi- 
bility! Such make a merit of pretending or imagining 
which is intangible, which the common intelligence can not 
realize, overflowing with magnificent nonentities, beautiful 
imaginations, and divine vapors ; while, if you can discern 
the true relation subsisting between a natural and spiritual 
world, you will feel unmistakably certain of the substantiality 
of your future. You may endeavor to imagine the spiritual 



man's relation to the spirit world. 277 

world to be a nebulous empyrean, a sort of cloudy zone, or a 
golden belt of aerial currents. But the spirit land is none 
of these. I tell you truly that man's spirit is clothed with a 
substantial form, having nothing to do with the l Ideas ' of 
which the life of the spirit is composed ; in like manner, the 
spiritual world is as substantial to the spirit-body as is the 
earth we walk upon to our mortal body. The natural world 
exists first ; then out of this the spiritual world arises. As a 
foundation is necessary to the construction of a dwelling, so 
is it necessary that a formative body should exist before 
an individualized spirit, and that a natural world should 
precede and elaborate a spiritual world. 'That was not 
first which is spiritual, but that which is natural ; and after- 
ward that which is spiritual. ' Than this no profound er 
philosophic or more tersely-expressed truth ever blossomed 
upon this branch of the spiritual tree — the fertile mind of 
fervent Paul. And he is yet high authority with many. He 
taught the antecedency or pre-existence of what is substan- 
tial or ordinary ; that the inferior is necessary to the devel- 
opment of the superior ; that only thus did the finer-natural 
come into existence and embodiment. You know how nec- 
essary it is first to plough and prepare your gardens prior 
to the planting of seeds ; and do you not also know that the 
seeds must externally decompose before you obtain the 
legitimate vegetation? No roses will beautify gardens not 
made for flowers. Even so the l seen ' which * is temporal,' 
must afford pabulum to the unseen which l is eternal.' 

' 'Around us float the burning orbs of our beautiful solar 
system. First appears the maternal and paternal sun ; next 
the infant Mercury ; then the graceful Venus ; next the 
dutiful Earth ; Mars rolls gloriously beyond ; the family of 
Asteroids skirts his mighty pathway ; but larger and grander 
than all their brothers are rainbow- tin ted Jupiter and 



278 MAN, 

golden-browed Saturn. Nor is this all. Herschel, in the 
far distance, compasses his vast empire of space ; Neptune 
trembles on the threshold of infinity; while farther still 
other worlds sweep through immensity in their trackless, 
tireless swerveless path. This stupendous system of plane- 
tary bodies is perpetually elaborating and giving harmonial 
proportions to another and higher system, which is spiritual. 
The human head is also a maternal and paternal sun : then 
the lungs, the liver, the stomach, the various organs with 
their functions, like the several dependent planets, are con- 
nected each with the other, and all moving in a harmonious 
system to accomplish harmonious ultimates. Why does 
man have a sunlike brain? Why are these various organs so 
admirably formed, and so accurately disposed along the 
human spine? In order that ttie natural body may fashion 
and perfect the spiritual body, even as the sun and its 
dependent planets (which do, in fact, beautifully correspond 
to the brain and the visceral organs) are designed to accom- 
plish a sublime end in the stellar immensity. 

" Upon careful examination, I affirm that all natural worlds, 
some of which are described in our popular books on astron- 
omy, arebut the anatomy and physiology of the boundless 
univercoelum ; a system of systems, by which supermaterial 
globes and systems called the '■' Spirit Land," are geometri- 
cally unfolded and prepared for our future habitations. 
Every physical planet, therefore, is to bring into existence 
the different animals not only (so that man may exist), but 
it is also designed and commissioned to contribute a portion 
of the universal spirit land, so that after death the spirit of 
man may have a natural and holy home. The subtle inti- 
macy and familiarity which now daily exist between your 
body and its living soul, are not more perfect or real than 
that between the natural world and the spirit world every 



man's relation to the spirit world. 279 

instant of time. The analogy is as reliable and accurate as 
science. This physical body, chronologically speaking, is 
the spermatic foundation of the spiritual body ; even so is 
the natural world the germ-repository and foundation of the 
spiritual world. Lessons acquired of the one will teach the 
beauty and truthfulness of the other. But if this formative 
process be not true with man, then indeed may we doubt its 
more extended application. The spiritual world is in one 
sense a material world, I repeat ; but it is higher, both in its 
constituents and in the order of its formation. Elementally, 
it does not essentially differ from those primates which com- 
pose the rock, the tree, the animal, or a human body. The 
difference is similar to that between a rose and its liquidated 
fragrance. The best imponderable emanations of this world 
gravitate to what we call the spiritual sphere, and help to 
form its substance. 

"Let us examine this progressive series of emanations. 
First, we have undeveloped earth, in the form of solid stone ; 
second, the embedded gases are liberated, and condensed in 
the form of water ; third, out of water thus derived comes 
the ocean of atmosphere ; fourth, out of atmosphere is elim- 
inated what is termed electricity; fifth, from the abundant 
opulence of electricity there issues a finer element, magnet- 
ism; and, lastly, out of all these ponderable bodies and im- 
ponderable elements, there flows forth a mighty sea of 
imperceptible emanations into universal space. The question 
might possibly be by science put: "Whither goeth those 
emanations? " 

" Nature is everywhere harmonious. When you have seen 
one department, you have a key to unlock the great truths 
which stand temple-like, throughout the countless systems 
of infinitude. As the finest particles of all organizations 
below man ascend, or are attracted, into his constitution, so 



280 man. 

these finest particles or emanations from the natural worlds 
in space ascend, or are attracted, into the constitution of the 
spiritual world. Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, 
Saturn, and all the other planets, both visible and invisible, 
eliminate their finest aura and atoms, which ascend in the 
shape of atmospheres and imponderable elements, and halt 
suspended at a point in space, where the inward principle of 
affinity becomes supreme. The consequence is, that these 
accumulated emanations very soon associate, and become 
compact, firm, strong, and inter-coherent ; and this progres- 
sive development goes forward until there is formed a vast 
semi-solid aurelian zone, around a great starry system in the 
universe. Yea, learn well the lesson that the spiritual spheres 
are unfolded by, and out of, the natural worlds, as flowers 
unfold from, and by means of, the earth ; that the spirit land 
rolls out of the essential emanations of the earth-land, the 
same as the spiritual body comes out of the refinements and 
rarefactions of the natural body. 

" It would be like treading enchanted ground to trace the 
growth of the elementary universe into planetary systems, 
commencing with a great sun-filling immensity ; the inmost 
center of which is the Divine Source of love, life, wisdom, 
justice and power. But my impression is not to explain 
here the interior order of the universe, but merely to 
exhibit the naturalness of the spirit world. For a full 
report of the former wonderful investigations, the reader 
is referred to a future volume. 

"As we stand, of a cloudless night, reverently contemplat- 
ing the holy stars, we discern an immense special tract or 
belt termed the Galaxy or Milky Way. Astronomers at one 
time pronounced parts of this belt to be nebula, as yet un- 
wrought into suns or planets. Telescopes of greater power, 
however, enabled investigators to discover that what they 



man's relation to the spirit world. 281 

supposed were mere star-clouds are, in fact, mighty clusters 
of blazing suns, and perhaps populated planets. To that 
immense circle of suns our solar system belongs. We are 
residing near the inside edge of the stellar sphere, and be- 
hold, therefore, its under side and margins in every direc- 
tion. The human eye is compelled to run along under its 
curving periphery. Astronomers are unable to contemplate 
but one circle of suns and their planets, even with the best 
telescopic appliances. The spirit land, together with all the 
natural worlds which night or science reveals to our knowl- 
edge, belong to this one immeasurable system. Within the 
vast cloud of material globes is the " silver lining " — the 
aurelian circle — which is the soul's immortal home. It is 
revolving within this visible circle of resplendent suns and 
planets ; just as the spiritual body is a silver lining within a 
cloud-environment — the outer visible form. The spirit- 
world can be discerned by the super-telescopic power of 
clairvoyance or other faculties of spiritual penetration. But 
as it is not discovered by telescopes, it will remain all un- 
known to the natural sciences for a long period. This in- 
terior circle or spiritual world is what we term u the Second 
Sphere." Within that is the third; next, the fourth; then, 
the fifth ; lastly, the sixth ; the seventh is the deific vortex, 
a great positive power, perfect and divine. But between 
each two of these spiritual spheres, there is a system of suns 
and planets corresponding to the Milky Way so visible in 
the sublimities of our heavens. The higher and more har- 
monious the mind, the nearer does it approach to the Divine 
center — the inexhaustible fountain of love, power, and wis- 
dom. Matter is repelled by the central sun, but spirit is 
attracted incessantly toward it. But, as I have shown, in- 
dividualized spirit is never absorbed — can never lose its 
identity. 



282 MAN. 

' ' In the human body there is a vitalic circulation ; so is 
there a circulation of vital forces between the spiritual 
world and the several planets. The south pole of the earth 
sends forth a magnetic stream, and the currental tide passes 
through the orbits of Venus and Mercury, very near the 
throbbing surface of the sun, and surges silently but swiftly 
on till it reaches the spirit land. Then from another 
section of the spirit land there starts out a lighter 
fluid, a currental river, toward the north pole of the earth, 
which is unchangeably electrical. One is positive, and the 
other is negative. The former flows from the earth to the 
spiritual world, and the latter from the spiritual world to the 
earth. Many times I have observed that the spirits of our 
own human friends, when at death they pass out of the cor- 
poral body, ascend as by attraction to the height of some 
seven miles, when they meet and harmonize with the curren- 
tal river which perpetually glides swiftly on like a gulf- 
stream, yet consumes nearly seven and a half hours in 
transporting its precious burdens to the spirit home. I do 
not say that all classes and grades of spirits and angels are 
confined to this involuntaay method of traveling. And in 
this connection I must parenthetically further remark that, 
within the nature of the most truly exalted and harmonious 
minds in the universe, there is, properly speaking, no uncon- 
ciousness ; that is, no compulsatory or involuntary powers 
and operations. This unrealized conception is prophetic of 
man's future ability, when by the strength of his wish (above 
volition) he can direct the involuntary life currents, and 
throw them upon, or extract them from, any organ of his 
visceral constitution, and thus increase or diminish its 
allotted functions. May he not also greatly overcome 
the centripetal tendency of his body one of these days? 
But to return : The flow of this celestial river is like that of 



man's relation to the spirit world. 283 

a column of blood which is thrown from the heart to the 
head, down the spine to the feet, and then is called back to 
the point of departure. The spiritual world, like a great, 
positive, throbbing heart, repels one current, which goes to 
the earth, and attracts another current, which returns with 
its freight. The heavenly rivers roll on like the life of God. 
Upon their ample, mighty bosoms may safely repose the 
spirits of the Father. As there are rivers of communication 
between our earth and the spirit-home, so are there u living 
streams'* between that far-off, glorious land, and Mars, 
Jupiter, Saturn, and every other globe belonging to our 
densely-populated planetary system. Thus our earth is not 
only blest, but also all the other planets of the sidereal uni- 
verse. In the human body, the generous heart does not 
distribute its life-blood to one organ exclusively, but freely 
it gives to the whole temple. So the impartial heart — the 
father and mother spirit — which inhabiteth " the evergreen 
mountains of life," distributes vital currents to planets 
which roll in the remote distance, no less generously than 
to the beautiful blooming earth which is this day our abid- 
ing-place. And the most pleasurable method which em- 
bodied spirits adopt in order to accomplish their speedy 
journeys through space, is to harmonize perpetually with 
the Sowings of these celestial currents. In this manner 
these journeys can be made by attraction, without a volun- , 
tary effort. Traveling thus in the open etherial sea of 
space is like moving with the great tide of God's life, musi- 
cally and happily upon its loving bosom ; and yet it is full 
of harmony only to him who is prepared to enjoy the truth. 
When there are evil and discord within the traveler, no 
matter how much of heaven flows over or beneath him, the 
evil and discord are his companions. On the other hand, 
be but in harmony with the philosophical principles of truth, 



284 MAN. 

then like the enchantment and divinity of musical anthems 
are the tidal Sowings of these celestial rivers among the 
holy stars. 

i i Our spirit-friends — embodied — intelligently harmonize 
with these heavenly currents, and thus sail through the star- 
paved distance till they get within a few miles of the earth ; 
then they send breathingly down their shining shafts of lov- 
ing power, wherewith to move the table, to vibrate the 
brain, or, which is far better, to purify the human heart ! 
Sometimes, indeed, they personally enter into human society, 
and visit us in our rooms ; but this they do under peculiar 
circumstances, and for very particular purposes. They 
more frequently send down their beautiful shadows or 
mirror- like reflections upon susceptible eyes, the evidence of 
their artistic powers, their sweet influences, their magnetic 
love, their exalted and exalting thoughts. Seldom do they, 
in propria persona, mix with earthly groups, or visit the 
habitations of the unascended. Yet millions of spirits are 
daily helping humanity. The terrible storms which meteor- 
ological investigators tell us occur within a few miles of the 
earth, are uniformly beneath the aerial stratum to which our 
embodied spirit-friends descend. Thus, Nature is every- 
where harmonious with herself ; and, when understood, she 
brings our inductive minds into frienship with a tangible, 
substantial, spiritual world. 

Just as one flower succeeds another in the order of seasons, 
just as one crop succeeds another in the order of years, just 
as summer and winter, seed-time and harvest, come by pro- 
gressive rotations, so do these eternal systems of natural 
and spiritual worlds succeed each other and harmonize in the 
depths of the stellar infinitude. How joyous and tranquil 
must be that mind which possesses philosophical confidence 
in the indestructible order universe ! Religious conservatives 



man's relation to the spirit world. 285 

may put forth their incongruous objections to the whole har- 
monial system, yet the slightest breath of disapprobation or 
discouragement may not enter the thinker's mind. Once 
get systematically before your intellectual perception the 
philosophical possibilities of this boundless universe, and 
mankind may combine their skill and talent, their Baconian 
logic and argumentation, in opposition to your truth, and 
your unperturbed and wiser spirit will be as happy and pow- 
erful as the archangels of God. * The Truth shall make you 
free ! ' 

' ' Wisdom is greater than knowledge. The former discerns 
interior truths ; the latter gathers external facts. Seek the 
fountain of wisdom, O thinker! and you shall soon attain the 
kingdom of heaven on earth. Let the soil of your own soul 
become fruitful, then you can easily help to unfold a better 
social organization, and aid every truthful movement for the 
rectification of government. Absorb the breath of wisdom 
with your intellectual faculties, become a Calm, intuitive, 
normal reasoner ; then will the tide return sweetly upon your 
moral nature, and everywhere flow among your affections ; 
until every inward cup is full, and each faculty shall know 
the truth from the least to the greatest. 

This beautiful world, though it is both a fulfillment and a 
prophecy, is, after all, but a work-shop ; the cellar-kitchen 
of " the house not made with hands." When obtaining our 
best prospects and impressions of creation, we do but look 
through the basement windows of the great eternal temple. 
Admirable and desirable as is this earth of ours, it is but the 
factory wherein the soul is rendered capable of taking its 
flight to a better home and a healthier latitude. This is a 
rudimental world, where the physical body must be fed, and 
clothed, and housed; where appropriate quantities of air must 
be inhaled ; where all ordinary and incipient works must go 



286 MAN. 

forward and be accomplished. Spirit rides in the chariot of 
matter. Side by side they journey to the human organiza- 
tion. Then spirit, being detatched and individualized, 
transcends the material vehicle, and becomes the master- 
flower in the garden of God. Nothing is more philosophical 
and beautiful than that this world is the incipient school, the 
rudimental plane, where the spirit is educated and prepared 
to enter naturally upon a higher existence. Let every one 
be unceasingly mindful of the fact that he is eating, sleep- 
ing, thinking, acting, and being, not because he originally 
knew of and wished for such an experience, but because this 
world and discipline are designed to elaborate the ultimate 
of principles. Hereafter, will you not eat, drink, and sleep 
intelligently? Henceforth, will you not be conscious that 
you are doing these ordinary deeds for an extraordinary 
purpose ? What I ask of you is this : simply to let Mother 
Nature work out and perform her own legitimate functions. 
The thinker will be consistent and at peace with nature. He 
will honor, and respect, and keep in healthful tone, all, even 
to the most inferior, organs and functions of his being! 
Now and here, in this initial world, is the time to commence 
a career of noble development ; not by strivings and smug- 
glings, but by means of naturalness and truthfulness." 

Of course, I do not give the foregoing description of the 
spirit land by Mr. Davis as literally true in all respects ; 
that it is substantially so, I believe that every well informed 
person will feel his own consciousness admitting. The most 
careful and accurate geographers, always signally fail in 
wholly describing a continent, when first discovered. So 
Mr. Davis, who is no doubt the greatest clairvoyant the earth 
has yet produced, and who made the foregoing and many 
more wonderful discoveries by means of his clairvoyant 
powers, is nevertheless a man, and it is human to err. I 



man's relation to the spirtt world. 287 

have no idea that Mr. Davis has described this wonderful 
spirit-land correctly, and have no doubt but that he has made 
many mistakes in the description given. Notwithstanding the 
erroneous ideas that Columbus entertained of America when 
first discovered, the great fact remained and yet remains, 
that the continent is here. And so of Mr. Davis' discov- 
ery ; his description may be full of errors, but the great fact 
remains that the spirit land exists ; and the refined particles 
that go to constitute it, are, no doubt, as Mr. Davis maintains, 
contributed by all the planets. This view, of course, pro- 
ceeds on the idea that spirit is refined substance, and fully 
accords with the theory of A. Wilford Hall, entitled by him 
" Substantialism." 

But I wish to call particular attention to the fundamental 
idea contained in Mr. Davis' description of the spirit land. 
It is that the spirit world bears the same relation to the 
natural world that the spirit body in man does to the natural 
body. I have already shown that the matrimonial alliance 
existing in man between spirit and matter, that is between 
the immortal spirit imparted by God, and the organized 
body, produces the soul, or a spiritual body, within the nat- 
ural body, " God breathed into his nostrils the breath of life, 
and man became a living soul." 

That is through the immortal spirit, there is produced, 
within the natural body a spiritual body. This is fully 
explained by Paul, who says in fifteenth chapter of I. Cor- 
inthians that " there is a natural body and a spiritual body." 
At physical death the natural body is thrown off, as the but- 
terfly throws off the chrysalis, that produced it ; and as the 
butterfly enters upon a higher and happier state of existence, 
so the spiritual body, leaves the natural body to crumble 
into dust, and enters the spirit world, as the home and habita- 
tion of the immortal spirit. 



2$8 MAW. 

Now Mr. Davis maintains, that the relations existing be- 
tween the natural and spiritual boclies of man, are exactly 
the same as those existing between the natural and spir- 
itual worlds. And this must strike every thinking per- 
son entirely reasonable, because, as the spiritual body at 
physical death passes into the spirit world, it must, of 
course, be adapted to it ; and the same relation ought, and 
no doubt does exist, between the spirit body and the spirit 
world, to which it goes, that now exists between the material 
body and the natural world in which it is located. That spirit 
land described by Mr. Davis, I hold to be the intermediate 
state occupied by the spirit, and its spiritual body from 
physical death until the respective resurrections. Of course, 
people groping in darkness, who will not study the Bible and 
nature, can not understand these things. They have been 
led by the blind leaders of the so-called orthodox world, and 
made to believe that soul and spirit are the same thing (Paul 
to the contrary notwithstanding). And that at physical 
death this soul or spirit passes at once into heaven or hell. 
The Bible teaches no such doctrine. No man receives the 
final punishment until he has appeared before the u great 
white throne," and been "judged according to his works." 
This is far in the future, at least a thousand years yet, as 
the millenium is to intervene before the judgment, and we 
have had no evidence yet of its inauguration. Where then 
do the spirits of the dead remain between death, and the 
first resurrection in the case of the righteous, and between 
death and the general judgment in case of the wicked? 
Necessarily in the intermediate state, or the spirit world de- 
scribed by Davis, the clairvoyant. 

Those who deny the existence of the spirit world, may be 
aptly illustrated by the osrtich which hides its head in the 
sand, and then vainly imagines, because it sees no one, 



man's relation to the spirit world. 289 

there is no one about to disturb it. The ignorance of the 
bird does not prevent the presence of its pursuer, nor its 
capture. So the fact that we are prevented by the vail of 
the body from seeing the spirit world does not prevent its 
existence. And as all general rules have their exceptions, 
it is said that the exceptions, establish the rule; it so 
happens that all men are not entirely blinded by the clogs of 
matter ; and that many glimpses of the spirit world and of 
things spiritual have been had by clairvoyants, and others. 

Next to A. J. Davis, Emanuel Swedenborg, the great 
religious seer, is probably the greatest clairvoyant who has 
lived on the earth. As an example of his power in this re- 
spect, I give in this connection an extract taken from pages 
389 and 390 of Brittain's "Man and His Relations : " — 

"Among the re'corded instances of his clairvoyance are 
many striking illustrations of my subject, but in this con- 
nection I can only make a brief resume of some of the more 
remarkable examples. 

"It is alleged by M. Dieudonne Thiebault, Professor of 
Belles Letters in the Royal Academy of Berlin, that the 
Count de Montville, Ambassador from Holland to Stock- 
holm, having died suddenly, a shopkeeper demanded of his 
widow the payment of a bill, which she remembered had 
been paid in her husband's lifetime. Not being able to find 
the shopkeeper's receipt, she was induced to consult the 
distinguished Seer, though she did so less from credulity 
than curiosity. Swedenborg informed her that her deceased 
husband had taken the shopkeeper's receipt on a certain day 
(also naming the hour), while he was reading such an article 
in Bayle's Dictionary, in his cabinet ; and that his attention 
being called immediately to some other concern, he put the 
receipt into the book to mark the place at which he left off ; 
where in fact, it was found at the page described ! 
19 



290 MAN. 

" The Queen Dowager of Sweden, Louisa Ulrica, desiring 
to test the powers of Swedenborg, demanded a repetition of 
the words spoken by her deceased brother, the Prince Royal 
of Prussia, at the moment of her taking leave of him for 
the Court of Stockholm. The Seer requested a private 
audience, whereupon they retired to another apartment, 
when Swedenborg replied to her interrogatory by saying, in 
substance, that she took leave of her august brother at 
Charlottenburg — naming the day and the hour — that, while 
passing through the long gallery of the Castle, they met 
again, when the Prince, taking her hand, led her to a retired 
situation by a particular window which he described, where 
the last words were spoken. The Queen did not disclose the 
words, but protested with great solemnity, that they were 
the precise words pronounced by her brother at the termin- 
ation of their parting interview? 

* ' When Swedenborg was in Gottenburg, three hundred 
miles from Stockholm, he announced the occurrence of a 
great fire in his native city, giving the facts respecting the 
time, place, and circumstances of its origin, and accurately 
describing its progress and termination. It was on Satur- 
day night that this conflagration was described as occurring 
at that time. The Seer repeated the substance of his state- 
ment to the Governor on Sunday morning. This was 
substantially confirmed by a dispatch, received from Got- 
tenburg on Monday evening, and on Tuesday morning the 
arrival of the royal courier furnished an unqualified attesta- 
tion of the truth of all the particulars of the clairvoyant 
revelation. These facts rest on no doubtful authority. 
Their authenticity is sanctioned by Kant, the great German 
metaphysician, in whose judgment — to use his own 
words — they " set the assertion of the extraordinary gift 
of Swedenborg out of all possibility of doubt." 



man's relation to the spirit world. 291 

I will also here give the experience of A. J. Davis, on the 
first occasion when he fully developed as a clairvoyant. It 
is found on pages 219-222 of the "Magic Staff" as fol- 
lows : — 

4 'The spirit of nature and my spirit had formed what 
seemed to me to be a kind of physicological or sympathetic 
acquaintance — the foundation of a high and eternal com- 
munion. Her spacious cabinet was thrown open to me, and 
it seemed that I was the sole visitor at Nature's fair — a 
royal banquet. 

"The properties and essences of plants were distinctly 
visible. Every fiber of the wild flower, or atom of the 
mountain violet, was radiant with its own peculiar life. The 
capillary ramifications of the streamlet mosses — the fine 
nerves of the cicuta plant, of the lady's slipper, and of 
flowering vines — all were laid open to my vision. I saw 
the living elements and essences flow and play through these 
simple form of matter; and in the same manner I saw the 
many and various trees of the forest, fields, and hills, all 
filled with life and vitality of different hues and degrees of 
refinement. It seemed that I could see the locality, properties, 
qualities, uses, and essences, of every form and species of 
wild vegetation, that had an existence any where in the earth's 
constitution. The living, vivid beauty and overawing sub- 
limity of this vision I can not even now describe ; although, 
as the reader will see, I have since frequently contemplated 
scenes far more beautiful and ineffable. 

"But my perceptions still flowed on. The broad sur- 
face of the earth, for many hundred miles before the sweep 
of my vision — describing nearly a semicircle — became 
transparent as the purest water. The deep alluvial and dilu- 
vial depositions were distinguishable from the deeper strati- 
fications of stone and earth, by the comparative and superior 



292 MAN. 

brilliancy of the ingredients of the former. Earth gave off 
one particular color, stones another, and minerals still an- 
other. When first I discerned a bed of minerals — it was a 
vein of iron ore — I remember how I started and shivered 
with a sensation of fright. It seemed that the earth was on 
fire 1 The instantaneous elimination of electricity, from the 
entire mass, gave the appearance of a deep seated furnace 
under the earth. And my agitation was not lessened by 
perceiving that these rivers of mineral fire ran under the 
ocean for hundreds of miles, and yet were not diminished in 
a single flame — yea, could not be extinguished. 

u Innumerable beds of zinc, copper, silver, limestone, and 
gold, next arrested my attention ; and each, like the differ- 
ent organs in the human body, gave off diverse kinds of 
luminous atmospheres. All these breathing emanations 
were more or less bright, variegated, and beautiful. Every- 
thing had a glory of its own. Crystalline bodies emitted 
soft, brilliant, azure and crimson emanations. The various 
salts in the sea sparkled like living gems ; sea plants ex- 
tended their broad arms, filled with hydrogenous life, and 
embraced the joy of existence ; the deep valleys and dim 
lit ravines, through which old ocean unceasingly flows, were 
peopled with countless minute animals — all permeated and 
pulsating with the spirit of Nature ; while the sides of ocean- 
mountains — far, far beneath the high pathway of travel and 
human commerce — seemed literally studded with emeralds, 
diamonds, gold, silver, pearls, and sparkling gems, beyond 
computation. Oh, the ocean is a magnificent cabinet of 
beauty and wealth immense ; and, by virtue of more recent 
investigations, I am impressed to say that man shall yet 
possess it. 

11 Be patient, friendly reader, fori have yet other scenes 
to relate. I now looked abroad upon the fields of dry land, 



man's relation to the spirit world. 293 

and saw the various species of animals that tread the earth. 
The external anatomy and the internal physiology of the 
animal kingdom were alike open to my inspection. An in- 
stinctive perception of comparative or relative anatomy filled 
my mind in an instant. The why and the wherefore of the 
vertebrated and avertebrated, of the crustaceous and mol- 
luscan divisions of the animal world, flowed very pleasantly 
into my understanding ; and I saw the brains, the viscera, 
and the complete anatomy, of animals that were (at that 
moment) sleeping or prowling about in the forests of the East- 
ern hemisphere, hundreds and even thousands of miles from 
the room in ivhich Iivas making these observations I 

4 'It must not be expected that I shall detail a three- 
hundredth part of the particulars of my -first introduction to 
an intuitional perception of Nature. At best, I can but 
give you a rude outline, for words do not answer the purpose 
they seem to me like stone prisons in which too often we 
coercively incarnate our highest thoughts. 

In this mystic vision, gentle reader, I saw everything 
just as you will — with the penetrating senses of the spirit — 
after you pass away from the visible body at physical death. 
It was very, very beautiful to see everything clothed with an 
atmosphere! Every little grain of salt or sand; every 
minute plant, flower, and herb ; every tendril of the loftiest 
trees — their largest and minutest leaves ; the weighty min- 
eral and ponderous animal forms, existing in the broad 
fields before me — each and all were clothed with a dark, or 
brown, or gray, or red, blue, green, yellow, or white atmos- 
phere — divided and subdivided into an almost infinite variety 
of degrees of intensity, brilliancy, and refinement. And, 
mark the fact ! — in each mineral, vegetable, and animal, I 
saw something of man! In truth the whole system of 
creation seemed to me like the fragments of future human 



294 MAN. 

beings! In the beaver I saw, in embryo, one faculty of the 
human mind ; in the fox, another ; in the wolf, another ; in 
the horse, another; in the lion, another; yea, verily, 
throughout the vast concentric circles of mineral, vegetable, 
and animal life, I could discern certain relationships to, and 
embryological indications of Man ! Had I then possessed 
my present instinct of language, I would have exclaimed, in 
the language of the poet-psalmist : — 

11 Herbs gladly cure our flesh, because they 

Find their acquaintance there 
******* 

All things unto our flesh are kind." 

Understood in this sense, candid reader, how instructive 
and appropriate was Peter's vision — related in the tenth 
chapter of Acts — in which he saw a great white sheet let 
down from heaven, containing all manner of four-footed 
beasts, creeping things, etc., and was told to slay and eat! 
All this was saying simply thus : l Peter, thou needest not 
feel too exclusive, too partial, too aristocratic, too high- 
minded, and lifted above the meanest of thy fellow-men, 
nor yet above the little worm that crawls beneath thy 
feet; for, behold, thou art related to every four-footed 
beast and creeping thing that the Lord hath made : acknowl- 
edge, therefore, thy universal relationships and concenter- 
ing sympathies, and be kind and lenient henceforth to 
everything that lives.' Now, since that memorable night, I 
have met with too many who need Peter's lesson. They, 
like him, shrink from this new method of tracing out their 
genesis or ancestral derivation ; and such say, ' We are not 
used to eating unclean things.' But the time is fast ap- 
proaching, I believe, when mankind will feel their oneness 
with Nature and its God — to the total annihilation of all 
narrow-mindedness and empty superficiality. 



man's relation to the spirit world. 295 

' ' In my glorious vision, I well remember how I gazed at the 
little plants in the fields — and saw, lovingly encircling each 
one, an atmosphere of life peculiar to itself. This golden 
and hazy emanation — encircling some species of vegeta- 
tion — was apparently from four inches to eight feet in 
diameter. Some animals gave off a somber sphere three or 
four feet thick, and beyond this a very dark, thin air — as 
many feet more — which shaded off into the surrounding 
space. In all this, the Law of Sympathy was very distinctly 
visible. (See third volume of " The Great Harmonia "). I 
saw that everything in Nature was arranged and situated in 
accordance with this universal law ; and, by it, that all true 
sympathetic relationships are established and reciprocally 
maintained. The relative positions of mineral bodies in the 
bosom of the earth; the situation of trees, vegetation, 
animals, and human beings ; yea, the relative positions of 
the sun and stars, even — were manifestly conducted by 
this infinite sympathy. I saw the different crystalline 
bodies of the earth act upon each other, and, intermediately, 
upon the solid substances to which they were attached, by 
means of a generous cunning line of their magnetic inven- 
tions." 

After this Mr. Davis made many wonderful discoveries. 
He claims to have visited in the spirit the several planets, 
and found them inhabited by intelligences, many of them 
far superior to the denizens of earth. This, he says, is espe- 
cially true of the highly gifted inhabitants of Jupiter and 
Saturn. 

He also claims to have visited the " summer-land," or 
spirit world, many of the great spheres of the universe, 
and gives a diagram of the six great circles of systems of 
suns and planets, surrounding in successive order the great 
central sun of the universe ; with an intervening summer- 



296 MAN. 

land, or spirit world between each circle of suns and planets. 
Of course, these things I refer to, not as specific facts, but 
as the astronomical theory of the great clairvoyant ; and no 
doubt something very similar to his theory is the real plan of 
the universe. Mr. Davis, from his early youth, claims to 
have heard voices from the spirit world ; and later in life 
often had conversation with disembodied spirits. The in- 
terviews and conversations between his spirit-guide and him- 
self occurred very often for a number of years. By this 
guide, his attention was called to his future wife, and he 
beheld her from his home in the State of New York, walk- 
ing in a garden in southern Ohio ; and at once proceeded by 
his clairvoyant power to analyze her entire constitution, 
physical, intellectual, moral, social, and spiritual. He de- 
termined in his mind that the woman was his mate, and 
afterward married her, and lived with her in great peace and 
happiness. I here give as a sample of Mr. Davis, both as a 
clairvoyant and clairaudient, the conversation between him 
and his spirit-guide, and his discovery of his future wife at 
that great distance, as recorded in the " Magic Staff " pages 
501 and 502, viz.: — 

" 'And here am I,' methought 'without my mate. If there 
be a woman in the domain of human society with whom I 
could become eternally united, I would seek her — a soul in 
which I could at once behold the child of love and the 
woman of intelligence — a friend, a playmate, a sister, a 
power unto progression, a noble-minded associate, an eter- 
nal companion. And to that soul I would be an equal, a 
source of strength, lifting her above the valley storm, a 
Harbinger, her spirit's resting-place, and its safe conductor 
to higher and fairer spheres of existence.' 

" Thus I was meditating, dear reader, when a shower of 
genial influences descended upon my head. Opening the 



man's relation to the spirit world. 297 

door, there came into my study four friends from the spirit 
land ; and one, who was my familiar guide, said: — 

" ' Wouldst thou behold one who might become thy true 
companion ? ' 

" 'Kind guide/ said I, 'there is in me a power of love 
which needs a corresponding ministration. ' 

" ' Hast thou long felt a need so powerful? ' he inquired. 

" ' No,' I replied. 'Ere this I never realized the exist- 
ence of any such capability to love. ' 

'"True love,' he answered, 'is of God. It fills, com- 
forts, calms, elevates. Dost thou feel these sublime emo- 
tions ? ' 

" ' The love that fills my heart,' said I, ' is the same that 
I see between Father-God and Mother-Nature.' 

"'Jackson, my son,' said the blessed guide, 'if thou 
hast a true perception of this, thy tongue can describe to me 
its laws and its mission.' 

"After thinking a few moments, I replied: ' True conju- 
gal love is that which transcends all outward circumstances, 
and dominates over the changeful impulses consequent upon 
the trials of days and hours. It is an essential spring to 
personal development — a necessity in schooling the soul — 
the best agent in harmonizing character. It brings out the 
beauties, perfections, enjoyments, of the inmost heart. It 
reveals each to the other and both to mankind. It is the ' 
holiest benediction of heaven — the divinest ordination of the 
universe — the crown of life upon the one destiny of two 
immortal beings ! ' 

" 'Thou dost well to appreciate the true conjugal life,' 
said he. ' Therefore, as thou knowest the law of tempera- 
ments, use thine own clairvoyance to find and thine own 
intuitions to estimate thy counterpart. But a few moments 



298 man. 

since we looked on one with whom thy spirit might form that 
eternal relation.' 

" ' Thanks, kind friends,' I replied. 4 Your words fall 
upon my heart like blessings. I do not much question your 
decision. But I, too, would read the hidden record. I 
desire to know as the basis of my confidence and future 
conduct.' 

" * 'Tis well,' smilingly responded my celestial visitor' 
* such has ever been the import of my mountain lessons.' 

" They now began to retire toward the door, when I said: 
1 If either of you know which way I should look to see the 
person of your choice, please point in that direction.' 

1 ' My graceful and quiet guide raised his hand and pointed 
toward the setting sun. Being in clairvoyance I looked, and 
soon my vision rested on four or five persons walking in an 
ornamented garden in southern Ohio. There were three 
ladies ; one of whom I instantly recognized as her whose 
fraternal letter I had recently answered. 

" * Seest thou, my son? ' said the beautiful guide. ' She 
is the being of our choice. Now proceed with thine analy- 
sis.' Thus saying the four departed, and I was alone with 
my interior meditations. 

" My investigations into the laws of marriage had given 
me the knowledge that there was no inexorable destiny to 
contend with ; that God had not predetermined and foreor- 
dained that a certain man must be married to a certain 
woman in order to secure the eternal marriage ; but, on the 
contrary, I saw that the Divine Code is within the scope of 
human discovery, and teaches that it is for the twain to 
decide whether they will be transiently or permanently 
related." 

As another example of both clairvoyance and clair- 
audience I will give a historical fact kindly furnished me by 



man's relation to the spirit world. 299 

Mrs. Ellen Richardson, one of the most intelligent and 
successful teachers in Texas. It is vouched for by her 
grandfather, Gen. Wm. Lenoir, a distinguished and reliable 
citizen of North Carolina ; and occurred during the Revolu- 
tionary War, on the day of the battle of King's Mountain, 
where Major Ferguson of the British army was defeated, and 
a brilliant victory achieved by the colonists. Gen. Lenoir, 
then a captain, with Col. Cleaveland, and a considerable 
force, was hurrying to the scene of the conflict; and as 
they were going up the mountain their attention was sud- 
denly arrested by a man, who came beckoning and calling 
"back back; " and who pointed out another way which they 
took, and that proved to have been the only way by which 
Ferguson could have escaped. As the man suddenly ap- 
peared and as suddenly disappeared ; had never before been 
seen by any of the command, and was never seen after- 
wards nor heard of, the impression was very naturally made 
that it was not a natural man, but a spirit who gave the in- 
formation ; and that it was a Providential interference, to 
secure a victory for the Americans. 

This chapter would hardly be complete without making 
some reference to dreams and visions which occur during 
sleep. But as it is a subject I have studied but little, it will 
be briefly noticed. My idea about ordinary dreams, which 
embrace probably nine out of every ten, is that they are of 
very little importance. It is simply a state of imperfect 
sleep, in which some of the faculties of the mind, or organs 
of the brain are awake and acting ; but the majority of the 
organs being asleep, there is no consecutive order or sys- 
tematic connection, in the intellectual action, and the result is 
foolish and fantastic dreams. When the sleep is sound, and 
all the organs of the mind resting, there is no dreaming at 
all. So much for ordinary dreams. But there are some 



300 MAN. 

extraordinary dreams ; in which the dreamer after awaking 
has a distinct impression of having met and conversed with 
departed friends and often the conversation is remembered. 
Sleeping visions of this kind, are very common and many 
cases might be cited, both from books and the experi- 
ence of individuals. I will, however, only give a few. The 
dream or vision of Mrs. Hornsby, related in the last chapter, 
is clearly in point. While sleeping at night, she twice in 
vision plainly saw Major Wilbarger, some five miles away 
in great suffering, where he had been scalped, and left for 
dead by the Indians. She so informed the men who had fled 
and left him in the hands of the savages ; and insisted on 
their going to his relief at once. But they stoutly main- 
tained that he was dead and would not go. She persistently 
alleged that she had seen him alive and in great suffering 
and in need of aid. The next morning Wilbarger was found 
alive and in exactly the condition in which he was reported 
by Mrs. Hornsby in her vision. 

Rev. C. B. Sanders, a C. P. minister of North Alabama, 
is a remarkable example of clairvoyant and spiritual powers. 
He has for years been in the habit of occasionally passing 
into some kind of magnetic sleep, and is on this account 
widely known as the "sleeping preacher." While in this 
condition he is clairvoyant, and clairaudient at great dis- 
tances. On one occasion he correctly reported a sermon as 
it was being delivered by Rev. F. A. Ross, twelve miles 
away. On another occasion he informed a friend that a 
gentleman twenty-five miles or thirty miles away had written 
him a letter, which had miscarried, passed the proper office, 
and gone to a post-office, some miles beyond ; he also in- 
formed him of the contents of the letter; all of which 
proved to be true. He also witnessed, and correctly re- 
ported the death of Lieut. McClure, from Athens, Ala., to 



man's relation to the spirit world. 301 

Clarksville, Tenn., a distance of one hundred and twenty- 
five miles on the night of November 2, 1866, giving the very 
hour, and all the circumstances of his death accurately. 

These are only a few of the many wonderful experiences 
of Mr. Sanders while in his magnetic slumbers. Although 
an uneducated man, while in this abnormal condition he 
readily writes in Latin, Greek, French, and other languages, 
showing that he is either under spiritual control, or that the 
spirit, when freed from the shackels of matter, possesses 
wonderful powers of which we can have little conception in 
our present state. 

The good character, integrity, and piety of Mr. Sanders 
are certified to by all who knew him ; and the wonderful facts 
touching his powers, while in the magnetic sleep, are proven 
by the affidavits of some of the most reliable and intelligent 
people of North Alabama, all of which is reported in a little 
book by Rev. G. W. Mitchell, entitled " X + Y = Z, or the 
Sleeping Preacher." X-f-Y = Z being the signature over 
which Mr. Sanders writes, while in his abnormal condition. 

It must be regarded as a blessing to humanity that clair- 
voyants are becoming common ; clairvoyant physicians may 
now be found in all our large cities, and in many of the 
smaller towns. A clairvoyant who understands anatomy, 
and physiology can look right into the body, and discover at 
once the defect or disturbance which causes the disease or 
pain, while an ordinary physician, often guesses very wide 
of the mark. And I must, in this connection, be permitted 
to give a very remarkable circumstance which occurred in 
my own experience, in September, 1882, in the city of 
Chicago, with a clairvoyant lady physician. I had gone to 
her office for an examination as to my own health, never 
having met the lady before. She went into the clairvoyant 
condition, and read my constitution, and its defects like a 



302 MAN. 

book, and told many wonderful things I had not expected, 
which were true. But the remarkable part of the examin- 
ation was that she passed from myself to my family, and 
described accurately a physical ailment of my wife, who 
was at that moment at home in Paris, Texas, more than one 
thousand miles away. I might have regarded this as a case 
of mind reading, and supposed that the clairvoyant took it 
from my mind — had it not been that I had not thought of 
the matter in months, until mentioned by this clairvoyant 
physician. My wife had been in fair health, and had made 
no complaint as to this particular ailment in a long time ; 
and it had naturally passed out of my thoughts. 

From the wonderful cures he is reported as affecting, Dr. 
R. C. Flower, of Boston, is evidently a clairvoyant of great 
power. The following case, clipped from the Toledo Blade, 
as a sample from many reported, also indicates that he has 
spiritual aid from the unseen world, in the wonders he is 
performing, in the relief of suffering : — 

" A TOUCHING SCENE. 

* ' One of the most touching incidents I ever witnessed was 
that of a patient from or near Memphis, Tennessee, Mrs. F. 
C. Bailey ; she was a lovely little woman, thirty-seven years 
of age, a perfect type of Southern beauty. She was small 
and frail; her difficulties were cancerous, one large and 
three lesser cancers in the left breast and one on the lip. 
She had been treated by four of the leading physicians 
of the South and West, each of whom had given her case 
up as hopeless, two of them stating that under the most 
favorable circumstances she could not live more than sixty 
days. In addition to this she had a heart trouble, peculiar 
in the family, two sisters and her mother having died with 
it. After making a thorough examination, Dr. F. said: 



man's relation to the spirit world. 303 

' Well, madam, you will pardon me for being plain, but this 
is a time for extreme candor, nearly all the chances are 
against your getting well ; there is, however, in my judg- 
ment, a few chances in your favor. I would very much 
rather not take your case, but if you still desire me to, 
I will, though I can only promise to do for you the best I 
can.' 'This is all we expect you to do,' said the hus- 
band, ' and with it whatever the result is, we will be satis- 
fied.' You are my only hope,' continued the woman; 
'I have come a long way to see you; if you can't help 
me I must go home to be eaten up by these horrid 
cancers ; ' then bursting into tears, she sobbed, ' Oh, sir, 
for my sake, for the sake of my husband, for the sake 
of my six little children, oh, won't you save me?' This 
was more than the doctor could stand ; he fairly broke down, 
notwithstanding he sees such a variety of touching scenes 
every day ; he paced the room in a thoughtful, nervous man- 
ner, streaking his fingers through his well-combed and even 
locks. Then taking a seat by the sufferer, her hand gently 
in his, he said: 'Don't cry, dear woman; put your trust, 
implicitly and lovingly in a higher, wiser and stronger power 
than that of earth. I will stand between you and death at 
any cost, and by the aid of the unseen, summoning to the 
rescue all the powers I have and can draw, I will break death's 
sceptre so that his spear shall not hurt thee. And I swear 
that for the sake of thy home, thy tears, and for the sake of 
thy helpless babes, thou shalt get well.* These were terrible 
words, and upon the ears of all they fell like words from the 
sky. If these were idle words they were mockery, if true 
they seemeth more than the voice of man. Immediately he 
commenced the treatment and faithfully was it attended to, 
and in ten weeks and two days every cancer was removed 
clear and clean from the breast and the one from the lip, and 



304 MAN. 

the heart trouble well under control and to-day she is in ex- 
cellent health. 5 ' 

" Dr. Abercrombie gives the case of an eminent lawyer, 
who, being consulted respecting a very difficult lawsuit, after 
several days of intense thought, got up in his sleep and 
wrote a long paper. The following morning he told his wife 
that he had a wonderful dream, and that he would give any- 
thing to recover his train of thought. She had observed his 
strange movements, and directed him to his writing-desk, 
where he found his opinions clearly and luminously written. 
If testimony can prove anything, there is abundant proof 
that there can be sight through other eyes than the physical ; 
that there are soul-eyes and soul-sensations above the mun- 
dane, which never terminate in their uses through failure and 
decay. We get glimpses of them sometimes, enough to con- 
vince us that muscles, nerves, and brain do not make up our 
twofold being." 

While disposed to rejoice that clairvoyants are becoming 
common all over the United States, because in it I see much 
relief for the sick and suffering, I am also inclined to 
think that it may augur something more, and much grander, 
for society than mere medical relief. It is said that " com- 
ing events cast their shadows before them." Who knows 
but that the prevalence of clairvoyance and of spiritual phe- 
nomena generally, may indicate the approach of the millen- 
ium, when all the inhabitants of earth will be spiritual and will 
see with spiritual eyes, hear with spiritual ears, and have 
constant spiritual intercourse, not only with each other, but 
with the unseen saints, who will pass from heaven to earth 
at will. During this thousand years clairvoyance and clair- 
audience will be the rule and not the exception; for the 
devil will be chained, and there will be perfect peace on the 
earth ; and those then living will meet the Lord and his saints 
face to face. 



paet m. 

THE DUTY, AND DESTINY OF MAN. 




CHAPTEE I. 

MAN'S DUTY TO HIS CEEATOR, 

.OD is the creator and man is the creature. Man was 
created in accordance with laws, and subject to law. 
It is, therefore, the duty of every man to obey the laws of 
his being. These laws are both physical and mental, or the 
laws which govern the body, and also those ' which govern 
the soul and spirit. The laws of man's body were consid- 
ered in the second part of this work and need not be further 
considered here, except to say that a violation of them leads 
to pain, suffering, and physical death. But as death is the 
end of the physical body, it is also the end of punishment for 
the violation of the physical laws of man's being. Man is 
also under natural obligations to his Creator to study and 
obey the laws which govern the soul and spirit. Funda- 
mental among these laws is the imperative requirement that 
the spirit, acting in accord with God's Spirit, should keep 
the soul with its appetites, passions, and emotions in strict 
subjection to that spirit, so as in the language of the apostle 
to be temperate in all things. It is lawful to eat food for 
the continuance of animal life, but if we become gluttons 
we violate the laws of health and must suffer. It is law- 
20 ( 305 ) 



306 MAN. 

fill to acquire property in order to support our families 
and educate our children, but if we resort to dishonest prac- 
tices to secure it, we have trampled on the rights of our 
neighbor, and violated a fundamental law of our being; 
for which we must be punished. And so of all the appe- 
tites, and passions of the soul and all the faculties of the mind 
or spirit ; and the punishment for the violation of these laws 
of the soul and spirit is both temporal and spiritual. The 
violator subjects himself to the penalties of both the first 
and second death. Spiritual laws have spiritual penalties 
attached to them, and the violation of the soul subjects the 
violator to penalties both temporal and spiritual. 

We are informed in Revelations, that when the " great 
white throne appears," and the "dead both small and 
great" are assembled, that every person whose name is not 
found in "the Book of Life," will be judged and punished 
" according to the works done in the body." Hence we ar- 
rive at the conclusion, that all who violate the laws imposed 
on man, for the government of his soul, and spirit, will be 
punished therefor at the general judgment ; unless in some 
way pardoned, and the penalties remitted. And as it is an 
admitted fact, that all have, and do, and will continue to 
violate the laws both of their physical and spiritual being, 
it follows, that all men will be punished at the judgment, 
unless they can in some way receive pardon for their of- 
fenses, and the remission of the penalties attached. God in 
His mercy has provided a plan by which all who make an 
honest effort to obey the laws of their being, and His com- 
mandments, may be relieved of those penalties, for violated 
law, and restored again to the favor of God ; escape the 
second death, attain to citizenship in the new heaven, and 
the new earth, and have access again, and forever, to the 
Tree of Life. We are informed in the Bible, that God so 



man's duty to his creator. 307 

loved the world, that He sent His only begotten Son into 
the world to assume the form of sinful man, to be tempted 
in all things as other men, but to resist every temptation, 
obey every law, and commit no sin. Nevertheless to die on 
the cross as a sacrifice for the sins of the world, and to be bur- 
ied as other men ; but by virtue of His power as the Son of 
God, to triumph over death, and the grave, and on the third 
day to arise from the dead, thereby demonstrating to the 
world, that our bodies will also be raised from the dead ; not 
these corrupt, animal bodies, but our spiritual bodies ; and 
we also have the promise of God in His holy word, that if 
we believe that Jesus is the Son of God ; that he died, was 
buried, and resurrected ; and further, if we obey His com- 
mandments to the extent of our abilities, that all these penal- 
ties charged against us for violated law will be remitted, 
that our sinful souls will be saved from the terrors of the 
second death, purified, and immortalized, an$ that we shall 
enjoy eternal life with God the Father, and His Son in the 
heavenly city. That we shall be restored to a paradise far 
exceeding that from which Adam was ejected when he first 
violated the law. To a paradise eternal in the heavenly city, 
upon the new earth, where we shall forever have access both 
to the River and the Tree of Life, and be eternally happy in 
the love and service of the true and living God, and His 
Son Jesus our elder brother. Jesus Himself has laid down 
to man the conditions of salvation in the terms of the great 
commission, " go forth into all the world, and preach the 
gospel to every creature." " He that believeth and is bap- 
tized shall be saved, he that believeth not shall be con- 
demned." Believe what? Evidently that Jesus is the Christ, 
the Son of the living God, and that He was also the Son of 
Mary (a man as well as a God) ; that He committed no sin ; 
that He died on the cross, was buried, arose from the dead 



308 MAN. 

on the third day, and hath ascended up into heaven, where 
He sits on the right hand of God, continually making inter- 
cession for us. And why should we be baptized, or im- 
mersed in water? For many reasons I can not now explain ; 
but will state a few. It is the first step in the line of obedi- 
ence. It represents a washing, and cleansing from past sin. 
But the grand central idea in baptism is, that it represents 
the death, burial, and resurrection of Jesus Christ, and con- 
tains a solemn pledge on our part, that as Christ arose from 
the grave to ascend to the Father in heaven, so we are to rise 
from the watery grave " to walk in newness of life." That 
as Christ left the natural body behind him, and ascended 
into heaven in a spiritual body, so we are to leave the 
" old man " in the watery grave of baptism, and follow the 
meek and lowly example, and practice the precepts of 
Jesus. That is, we are to keep the appetites, passions, and 
propensities of the soul in reasonable subjection, and live 
in accordance with "the law of the spirit of life." Our 
faith must not be a dead faith, and our obedience end with 
baptism. But we must show our faith by our works, even 
as the tree is known by its fruits. We must show an actual 
repentance, or reformation of life, by ceasing to do evil, 
and learning to do well, and by making reparation 
to the extent of our ability to all whom we have wronged or 
defrauded. But I am answered that this is impossible ; that 
conversion or accepting the terms of the gospel, does not 
change the nature of man, and that he still remains subject 
to the temptations of his passions, appetites, and propensities, 
and that no man outside of Jesus has ever fully governed 
his passions and appetites and committed no sins. All this 
I freely admit. No man has ever reformed himself, none 
ever will. No man can wholly comply with the law of his 
being ; the best of men commit sins. Consequently, we have 



man's duty to his creator. 309 

the promise of Divine aid. Christ, before his ascension, prom- 
ised to send the Comforter, and that the Spirit of God should 
remain with the church, until Christ comes the second time 
in person and great glory to reign on the earth as in heaven. 
This promise of the Holy Spirit was not only to the church 
in general, but to each individual believer ; and we have the 
authority of Paul that our bodies are to be the temples of the 
Holy Spirit, provided we keep them clean ; and if we make an 
honest prayerful effort to do so, the Holy Spirit will aid us 
in this cleansing. Here again, we have another grand idea 
of the significance of baptism. It is the public and formal 
act by which we (until now) aliens and sinners are inducted 
into the kingdom of God. By confessing that Jesus is the 
Christ, we make our declaration of desire to become citi- 
zens ; by baptism we are naturalized and become adopted 
citizens. Citizenship alwa}^s implies a civil contract. It 
means a pledge on the part of the citizen to obey the laws 
and support the government, and a pledge on the part of the 
sovereign that the citizen shall be protected in all his rights 
under the government. Therefore, baptism, which is the 
evidence of our adoption into the kingdom of God, not only 
implies a pledge on our part to walk in newness of life, and to 
obey the law of the Spirit of life, but also a pledge on God's 
part that he will send his Holy Spirit to remain with us, and 
occupy our bodies as temples to aid and assist us in the 
great work of reformation and regeneration, which is to end 
only when we attain eternal life for our souls at the second 
coming of Christ. When we come up from the unseen or 
spirit world, with the righteous dead, and by having a part 
in the First Resurrection, are exempted from the terrors of 
the second death, and forever released from the penalties of 
all sin. Of course, I must admit that perfect obedience on 
the part of man is impossible, and that the best of men, not- 



310 MAN. 

withstanding the aid of the Holy Spirit, sin more or less. 
Every person's experience and observation teaches us this ; 
and we have the testimony of the Apostle Paul, one of the 
most true-hearted, strong-willed and consecrated men who 
ever lived, that such was the case with him. Now you are 
ready to ask is anybody to be saved, as all men are to be 
judged " according to their works." 1 I reply that it is only 
the persons whose names are not found written in the " Book 
of Life " that are to be judged " according to their works," 
at the general judgment. This implies that there are per- 
sons whose names are written in the " Book of Life;" and, 
who I ask, are they if not the citizens of God's kingdom, 
who from aliens and sinners have been naturalized and 
adopted into the kingdom and whose past sins were par- 
doned and blotted out upon their accepting the terms of the 
gospel, by faith, repentance, and baptism. But says one, 
you have already admitted that the best of men continue to 
commit sin even after they become adopted citizens. 

True, but they are pardoned, and their penalties for these 
violations of law are remitted under another law of pardon 
laid down in the Scriptures for the benefit of the believer. 
There is one law of pardon *for the aliens, or sinners, and 
another for the citizens, or believers. In the First General 
Epistle of John to the Churches, first chapter, eighth and 
ninth verses, we have the following rule laid down for the 
f orgfveness of the sins of believers, viz. : "If we say we 
have no sins we deceive ourselves, and the truth is not in 
us." "If we confess our sins He is faithful and just to 
forgive them, and to cleanse us from all unrighteousness." 

1 Judged in order to determine the degree of guilt, and fix the 
amount of punishment. The righteous will have already been 
judged as to the amount of their good works, with a view to fixing 
their reward. 



man's duty to his creator. 311 

Thus we are taught that the sins of the believers are re- 
mitted upon confession. But some one is ready to say, sup- 
pose one does not make confession of all his sins. Then 
his name will not appear in the " Book of Life ; " he must 
take his chances with the dead, both small and great, at the 
general judgment, and receive punishment according to his 
works. 

No citizen of any government is entitled to protection 
who openly and persistently rebels against the government 
and its laws. And there never was a greater delusion im- 
posed on the orthodox world than the idea of " once in 
grace always in grace." That is once a member of God's 
kingdom ever to so remain. There are thousands who are 
formal members of the kingdom on the earth, who will not 
attain to eternal life at the first resurrection, and who will 
not be permitted to enter the kingdom on high, but who will 
appear at the general judgment, and receive condemnation 
according to their works. To all such, the Lord will say, 
'* Depart from me, I never knew you." But all such citizens 
of the kingdom as keep "the law of the Spirit of life," to 
the best of their ability; " who walk not after the flesh, 
but after the Spirit," and who continually confess their sins, 
and shortcomings, asking forgiveness in the name of Christ, 
we have the last words of the blessed Redeemer Himself as 
recorded in the thirteenth and fourteenth verses of the last 
chapter in the Bible, viz.: "I am Alpha and Omega, the 
beginning and the end, the first and the last." " Blessed 
are they that do his commandments, that they may have 
right to the Tree of Life, and may enter in through the gates 
into the city." " For without are dogs, and sorcerers, and 
whore-mongers, and murderers, and idolaters, and who ever 
loveth, and maketh a lie." Simply being a member of the 
church, or a citizen of the kingdom on the earth will avail 



312 MAN. 

us little at the day of final accounts, if we have not made 
an earnest and honest effort to live according to " the law 
of the spirit life." This we can only do, by and with the 
aid of the Holy Spirit abiding with us and occupying our 
bodies as temples. But the Holy Spirit will not occupy un- 
clean temples. If our bodies are filled with whisky, or 
beer, or saturated with tobacco, or poisoned with opium, or 
in any other way polluted, and our souls corrupted by ex- 
cess of passion and appetite — will not Spirit take its flight, 
and remain away until we are cleansed? In the meantime, 
we stand rebels of greater or less degree to the govern- 
ment whose protection we claim. When we live accord- 
ing to the Spirit, and not according to flesh, and man- 
ifest our love for God, by obeying His commandments, 
and leading a pure life — we have not obeyed the whole 
law which requires us to love our neighbor as our- 
self. "Pure religion, and undefiled before God, and 
the Father (says James), is to visit the fatherless and wid- 
ows, in their afflictions, and to keep ourselves unspotted 
from the world." "We must then not only lead pure lives to 
the best of our ability, but also manifest our love for our 
neighbor by ministering to his wants, and necessities to the 
extent of our ability. But some are ready to ask, who is 
my neighbor. No better answer can be given than Christ 
gave to the same question. "When He illustrates it by the 
case of the Jew who went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, 
and fell among thieves who beat and robbed and maltreated 
him and left him for dead. His own countrymen the 
priest, and the Levite, whose duty under the Mosaic law, 
was to have cared for the unfortunate man, passed him, and 
gave him no relief, or aid. The churches of to-day are full 
of such priests and Levites, and Christ will pass them by 
without relief at the first resurrection when He comes again. 



man's duty to his creator. 313 

But a poor, despised Samaritan, the enemy of the Jews, and 
regarded by them as no better than a dog, passed that way, 
and he had compassion on the unfortunate Jew, and took 
him up, dressed his wounds, and ministered to his wants, 
carried him to a hotel, and ordered him cared for at his own 
expense. Here you have an example of who the neighbor 
is ; the word embraces the whole human race, from pole to 
pole, the rich and poor, the bond and free, the black and 
white, friend and foe, even your most despised enemy. It 
means the same thing, that Christ elsewhere repeats. 
" Love your enemies.' * " Return good for evil.' ' "Pray 
for them that despitefully use you," etc. 

To be a faithful citizen of the kingdom of heaven, 
therefore is to be a very lowly, humble, peaceful, individual 
leading a pure and active life, constantly manifesting love 
for our neighbors by doing all the good we can and reliev- 
ing the all suffering and distress in our power. It does not 
consist in mere doctrine. It does not consist in making a 
written rule of faith for the world, and dogmatically trying 
to force it on men. It does not consist in taking the word 
of priests and preachers as the gospel ; nor in paying heavy 
salaries to keep them in idleness, and making pastoral visits. 
It does not consist of spiritual pride and pomp ; in fine 
churches and organs and fiddles and horns ; nor in church 
fairs and festivals and other contrivances to get money for the 
preachers and the fine church ; all of which are compromises 
with the world and the flesh. But true religion does consist 
in an humble, pure, and holy life, manifesting love to 
God, by keeping His commandments and our love to our 
neighbor by doing all the good we can while on the earth to 
friend and foe. We should constantly live for the glory of 
God and the good of our fellow-men. 

Not only the duties but the rights, powers, and privileges 



314 MAN. 

of the citizen of God's kingdom far exceed those of the 
alien and sinner. In the last part of the last chapter of 
Mark we have the following account of the last appearance 
of Christ on the earth to His apostles ; of the giving of the 
great commission ; of the wonderful spiritual powers to be 
conferred on them who believed ; and of the ascension of 
the Lord into heaven, and to a seat on the right hand of 
God, viz. : — 

" 14 Afterward he appeared unto the eleven as they sat at 
meat, and upbraided them with their unbelief and hardness 
of heart, because they believed not them which had seen 
him after he was risen. 

" 15 And he said unto them. Go ye into all the world 
and preach the gospel to every creature. 

" 16 He that believeth and is baptized shall be saved ; 
but he that believeth not shall be damned. 

" 17 And these signs shall follow them that believe; In 
my name shall they cast out devils ; they shall speak with 
new tongues. 

" 18 They shall take up serpents ; and if they drink 
any deadly thing, it shall not hurt them ; they shall lay 
hands on the sick ; and they shall recover. 

"19 So then, after the Lord had spoken unto them, he 
was received up into heaven, and sat on the right hand of 
God. 

" 20 And they went forth, and preached every where, the 
Lord working with them, and confirming the word with signs 
following. Amen." 

Although the so-called orthodox world has tried to con- 
strue the statement of Christ as to the spiritual powers of 
believers entirely away, nevertheless the inspired writer 
records the fact that these "signs" did follow with them 
who believed. 



man's duty to his creator. 315 

And if these spiritual powers were conferred upon those 
who believed during the first century of the Christian relig- 
ion ; why may they not be also conferred on those who 
believe in the eighteenth century thereof? 

Is it possible that the constitution and laws of God's 
kingdom on the earth changes in the course of time and 
means one thing in the days of the apostles and another 
now? Is not the Lord a God of order and consistency? 
Are not all his laws fixed and invariable? Is not the con- 
stitution of the kingdom of heaven exactly the same to-day, 
as it was when set up on the day of Pentecost? Have the 
terms of the gospel been changed in the least? Are not the 
conditions of obtaining citizenship in God's kingdom exactly 
the same now, that they were when that kingdom was organ- 
ized on the earth? Are not the duties of the citizen exactly 
the same? And if so, how can the corresponding rights 
powers, and privileges be different? The position of the 
orthodox world on this subject is utterly untenable, what- 
ever spiritual powers were conferred on believers, at the set- 
ting up of the kingdom, may be conferred on them now; 
and will be when they fully discharge their duties, and have 
the natural capacity for the exercise of any of said spiritual 
powers. The reason these signs and powers do not now 
generally follow believers, is because the church has 
compromised with the world, left the spiritual plane and 
descended to a sensual level ; abandoned a union with Christ 
and organized ecclesiastical parties which are warring on 
each other and laboring to sustain their own creeds and 
priests. If the professed followers of Christ would abandon 
their sectarian parties and platforms, and their selfish, sensual 
lives ; become spiritually minded, instead of carnal minded, 
as the great mass now are, and return to a true union with 
Christ, these spiritual powers would be restored as they 



316 MAN. 

existed in the beginning. Not that any one believer would 
possess all these extraordinary powers, or any one of them 
in exactly the same degree as others. Such was not the 
case in the beginning as is fully explained by Paul in the 
twelfth and thirteenth chapters of I. Corinthians where 
he refers to these spiritual powers as a part of the constitu- 
tion of the church and illustrates it by the human body 
showing that as the latter consists of different parts, head, 
limbs, etc. ; so it is in the church or body of Christ, apostles, 
prophets, healers of diseases, etc. I give in this connection 
as a full explanation of the whole subject the twelfth and 
thirteenth chapter of I. Corinthians, as follows, viz : — 

" 1 Now concerning spiritual gifts, brethren, I would not 
have you ignorant. 

"2 Ye know that ye were Gentiles, carried away unto 
these dumb idols, even as ye were led. 

" 3 Wherefore I give you to understand, that no man 
speaking by the Spirit of God calleth Jesus accursed : and 
that no man can say that Jesus is the Lord, but by the Holy 
Ghost. 

" 4 Now there are diversities of gifts, but the same 
Spirit. 

" 5 And there are differences of administrations, but the 
same Lord. 

" 6 And there are diversities of operations but it is the 
same God which worketh all in all. 

" 7 But the manifestation of the Spirit is given to every 
man to profit withal. 

" 8 For to one is given by the Spirit, the word of wis- 
dom ; to another the same word of knowledge by the same 
Spirit ; 

"9 To another faith by the same" Spirit; to another the 
gifts of healing by the same Spirit ; 



man's duty to his creator. 317 

" 10 To another the working of miracles; to another 
prophecy; to another discerning of spirits; to another 
divers kinds of tongues; to another the interpretation of 
tongues : — 

"11 But all these worketh that one and the self-same 
Spirit, dividing to every man severally as he will. 

" 12 For as the body is one, and hath many members, 
and all the members of that one body, being many, are one 
body ; so also is Christ. 

" 13 For by one Spirit are we all baptized into one body, 
whether we be Jews or Gentiles, whether we be bond or free ; 
and have been all made to drink into one Spirit. 

" 14 For the body is not one member, but many. 

" 15 If the foot shall say, Because I am not the hand, I 
am not of the body ; is it therefore not of the body ? 

" 16 And if the ear shall say, Because I am not the eye 
I am not of the body ; is it therefore not of the body? 

"17 If the whole body were an eye, where were the hear- 
ing? If the whole were hearing, where were the smelling? 

" 18 But now hath God set the members every one of 
them in the body as it hath pleased him. 

"19 And if they were all one member, where were the 
body? 

" 20 But now are they many members, yet but one body. 

"21 And the eye can not say unto the hand, I have no 
need of thee ; nor again the head to the feet, I have no need 
of you. 

"22 Nay, much more those members of the body, which 
seem to be more feeble, are necessary : 

"23 And those members of the body which we think to 
be less honorable, upon these we bestow more abundant 
honor ; and our uncomely parts have more abundant come- 
liness. 



318 MAN. 

"24 For our comely parts have no need: but God hath 
tempered the body together, having given more abundant 
honor to that part which lacked : 

"25 That there should be no schism in the body; but 
that the members should have the same care one for an- 
other. 

"26 And whether one member suffer, all the members 
suffer with it; or one member be honored, all the members 
rejoice with it. 

"27 Now ye are the body of Christ, and members in 
particular. 

" 28 And God hath set some in the church, first apos- 
tles, secondly prophets, thirdly teachers, after that mira- 
cles, then gifts of healings, helps, governments, diversities 
of tongues. 

"29 Are all apostles? are all prophets? are all teachers? 
are all workers of miracles? 

" 30 Have all the gifts of healing? do all speak with 
tongues? do all interpret? 

"31 But covet earnestly the best gifts ; and yet show I 
unto you a more excellent way." 

CHAPTER XIII. 

" 1 Though I speak with the tongues of men and of an- 
gels, and have not love, I am become as sounding brass, or 
a tinkling cymbal. 

" 2 And though I have the gift of prophecy, and under- 
stand all mysteries, and all knowledge ; and though I have 
all faith, so that I could remove mountains, and have not 
love, I am nothing. 

" 3 And though I bestow all my goods to feed the poor, 
and though I give my body to be burned, and have not love, 
it profiteth me nothing. 



man's duty to his creator. 319 

44 4 Love suffereth long, and is kind; love envieth not; 
love vaunteth not itself, is not puffed up. 

" 5 Doth not behave itself unseemly, seeketh not her 
own, is not easily provoked, thinketh no evil ; 

44 6 Rejoiceth not in iniquity, but rejoiceth in the truth; 

" 7 Beareth all things, believeth all things, hopeth all 
things, endureth all things. 

44 8. Love never faileth: but whether there be prophecies, 
they shall fail ; whether there be tongues, they shall cease ; 
whether there be knowledge, it shall vanish away. 

44 9 For we know in part, and we prophesy in part. 

44 10 But when that which is perfect is come, then that 
which is in part shall be done away. 

44 11 When I was a child I spake as a child, I understood 
as a child, I thought as a child : but when I became a man, I 
put away childish things. 

44 12 For now we see through a glass, darkly; but then 
face to face : now I know in part ; but then shall I know 
even as also I am known. 

44 13 And now abideth faith, hope, love, these three; but 
the greatest of these is love." 

Now Paul states explicitly that as the human body has 
different parts, so the body of Christ, or the church has 
apostles, prophets, teachers, miracles, gifts of healing, di- 
versity of tongues, etc. ; and that no one member has all 
these, but some one power and some another. If such were 
the constitution of the church in the days of Paul, who will 
dare to say that is different now? Christ in His closing rev- 
elation imposes dire penalty on whoever attempts to add to 
or take from His word. What is to become of the preachers 
and priests who have taken away from the church its spiritual 
powers? An excuse for this inconsistency is sought in the 
eight verse of the thirteenth chapter, where the time is re- 



9 



20 MAN. 



ferred to when prophecies shall fail and tongues shall cease. 
The eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth verses of the 
thirteenth chapter of I. Corinthians all refer to the same 
time, which can be none other than the second coming of 
Christ. Then indeed shall prophecies, tongues, miracles, 
faith and hope all cease, when we meet the Lord face to 
face, and attain to eternal life. In the ninth verse the 
apostle says, ' ' For we know in part and we prophesy in 
part." 

What was true in Paul's time, is true now, and will remain 
so until Christ shall come again. The tenth verse refers to 
the time when that which is perfect shall come ; and the 
twelfth reads " for now we see through a glass darkly; but 
then face to face ; now I know in part ; but then shall I 
know even as I am known." This can not refer to anything, 
but the second coming of the Lord, when we shall meet him 
face to face and when we shall know him as He even now 
knows us. Until that perfect time we will " see through a 
a glass darkly," knowing only a part and hoping and believ- 
ing the remainder. 



m 



CHAPTER n. 

MAN'S DUTY TO HIMSELF AND FAMILY. 

AN'S duty to himself, is to obey the laws of his 
being, physical, intellectual, social, moral, and 
spiritual. These have already been sufficiently suggested and 
hinted at, in the last chapter and in the chapters on mind, 
body, temperaments, and food in the second part of this 
work. A detailed consideration of these laws would em- 
brace the sciences of anatomy, physiology, cerebral physi- 
ology, phrenology, and other sciences, and is impossible in 
this connection. This work is pre-eminently a suggestive 
one, and covers too much ground to be elaborate. I must, 
therefore, refer the reader to works on the aforesaid and 
other sciences, for the study of the laws of man's being, as 
they pertain to body, soul, and spirit; and which every 
human being ought to understand and obey to the extent of 
his ability. 

The general proposition considered in the last chapter, 
that man should love his neighbor as himself and which is 
held to include the entire race, of course includes his own 
family as a constituent part thereof. In fact the Bible 
teaches us that charity, meaning love, should begin at home. 
This, of course, implies that every man should have a home 
and wife and children ; and leads to a consideration of the 
marriage relation. 

After God had created Adam and placed him in Eden to 
dress and keep it, we are informed in the Bible, that He 
said it was not good for man to be alone, and created a 
21 ( 321 ) 



322 MAN. 

woman, as " an helpmeet for him." Woman is the comple- 
ment of man, and it takes the two together to constitute a 
complete humanity, and lay the predicate for social happiness. 
Man is so constituted that he can not live isolated. He must 
have society; and if he is a true man, he craves especially 
female society. So of woman for man ; and the culmina- 
tion and consummation of this mutual attraction of the 
sexes for each other, is found in the marriage relation, or 
the perfect mating and complete blending of one man and 
one woman, as long as both live. Of course, the grand 
ultimate object of marriage is the propagation of the race 
on the earth. 

As the support and education of the children procreated, 
naturally devolves on the parents, we see at once the 
wisdom, and we may add the necessity, both moral and polit- 
ical, of the marriage relation ; so as to fix the legal respon- 
sibility on the real parents. 

As most women will bear as many children as one man 
can support and educate, there is no reason for any man 
having more than one wife at once ; so we see that the rela- 
tion of one husband and one wife is fully sustained, not 
only by the Bible but by reason and political necessity. 

As already stated, the man and woman who enter into the 
sacred relation of matrimony, should be complements of 
each other. That is physically and mentally they should be 
a complete blending of temperaments, so that the two to- 
gether should constitute a complete humanity ; and be in 
fact as well as in law, one, at least, in all the plans, pur- 
poses, and sentiments of life. 

So that a harmonious offspring may be generated, devel- 
oped, raised, and educated. For instance if the man is of 
the physical or motive, and nervous or spiritual tempera- 
ments, with the motive or physical predominating, the woman 



man's duty to himself and family. 323 

should be of the vital, and nervous, with the vital predomi- 
nating. 

To illustrate if the man ranked number five in the physical 
temperament, four in the nervous or spiritual and only two in 
the vital temperament ; then the woman should rank number 
five in the vital, three in nervous or spiritual and two in the 
physical, so that the aggregate of each temperament in the 
family would be equal; that is physical, male 5, female, 
2=7; vital, male, 2, female 5=7; spiritual, male 4, female 
3=7. This would give a complete balance of the tempera- 
ments in the family, and ought to produce a harmonious 
blending of the temperaments, and well-balanced constitu- 
tions in the offspring. 

And so of every other blending of temperaments ; there 
ought always to be a balance of temperaments in the 
aggregate of the man and woman. And no man and woman 
should think of marrying without an examination and chart 
by a scientific phrenologist. 

A complete blending of temperaments being secured, the 
next thing is to know that both parties have sound bodies, 
strong minds, amiable dispositions, good morals, firm wills, 
in other words, well developed physiologically and phreno- 
logically : and the woman should not be under twenty years 
of age, and the man not under twenty-five. They should 
also be as nearly as possible from the same social plane, 
have in the main similar tastes, plans, and purposes of life ; 
and should in no way be related to each other by blood ; 
but ought to belong to the same nationality or type at least, 
and speak the same language. Then if the parties are well 
acquainted and are certain they love each other, they may 
marry, and it will be a real marriage ; and no occasion in 
life will likely ever arise for a divorce. In fact no grounds 
ever could arise for divorce, except the one stated by Christ, 



324 MAN. 

viz., adultery; and that could only be where one or the 
other consort had an excessive development of amativeness, 
which under a harmonious system of marriage and procrea- 
tion, would seldom ever occur. 

If the orthodox world, public opinion, and the law-mak- 
ing power, would direct their attention to marriage instead 
of divorce ; and demand the most rigid legislation against 
the indiscriminate consummation of the former, instead of 
opposing the latter — they would do society and humanity 
an infinite service. 

Instead of making separations hard to obtain by law, mar- 
riage ought to be so hedged in by the law, as to be cau- 
tiously and intelligently effected. Every marriage where 
either of the parties is under twenty-one years of age should 
be voidable, and so declared upon application of either party 
to the proper court, unless there is written consent of the 
parents of the minor, duly acknowledged and of record. 
No person should be allowed to marry without a certificate 
of a competent physician as to the real state of his, or her, 
health, so that the other contracting party may have no fraud 
practiced. No person should be allowed to marry without 
a chart from a competent phrenologist, as to the constitu- 
tional development, physical, intellectual, social, moral, and 
spiritual giving, especially the temperamental development ; 
and said chart to be exhibited to the other contracting 
party. The suppression of any material fact by either of 
the contracting parties should be regarded as fraud, upon 
which the other could have the so-called marriage annulled 
at any time. For instance, if either party is a regular drinker 
of intoxicants, or opium eater, or a gambler, or criminal of 
any kind ; or is maimed, or malformed so that he or she 
can not consummate the marriage ; or either party is insane, 
or subject to epilepsy, or ungovernable temper, so as to be 



man's duty, to himself and family. 325 

abusive in word or act ; in all these and many other cases, 
the marriage ought to be regarded voidable, and so declared 
by the proper court, upon application of either party. 

There ought to be at least five separations where there is 
now one, and they ought to occur as soon as the mistake, or 
the fraud, as the case may be, is discovered, and before chil- 
dren are begotten or born. 

In a large percent of so-called marriages, there never was 
any real marriage ; no blending of temperaments, no union 
of hearts and souls. No similar views or common purposes 
in life. No love, and not even sympathy for each other. 
The man takes to intoxicating drink, and the woman to 
opium, or some other vice to drown their troubles — while an 
ignorant,, an intolerant public opinion, keeps these people 
living a life of legalized prostitution; an actual hell on 
earth. How much more just, and how much better for 
their peace and happiness, and for posterity, to permit 
these people to separate in peace, and not continue to pro- 
create bad children, under such evil influences. The great 
object of marriage, as already 3tated, is to propogate a healthy 
and harmonious offspring, and at the same time for the pa- 
rents to be happy together. 

And when all the considerations and conditions upon 
which legitimate marriage rests are wanting, the sooner a 
pretended marriage is declared null and void the better for 
the parties, society, and especially posterity. Of course, 
the distinction I have drawn between divorces, and the mere 
annulling of the legal ceremony of marriage will be ob- 
served. I do not advocate divorce, where there is real legal 
marriage, except for grounds stated in the Bible. Where 
such grounds as I have enumerated, and many others, exist, 
there is no real marriage, because the conditions and con- 
siderations upon which the contract rested did not exist, and 



326 MAN. 

the sooner the legal solemnization is set aside, and the legal 
prostitution is terminated, the better for the parties and for 
society. 

The great hue and cry now being directed against divorces 
and separations, should be directed to hedging against in- 
discriminate, false, and mismated marriages. 

When once a true marriage is consummated between 
proper and competent parties, they are ready for the great 
duty of " multiplying and replenishing the earth." 

It ought to be the leading object of every true man and 
wife to procreate a healthy, intelligent, moral, spiritual, and 
progressive offspring. To constantly improve the human 
race ought to be the leading object of every human being ; 
and I fully agree with O. S. Fowler, the great phrenologist 
and sexual philosopher, that the grandest margin for the 
improvement of man is in properly begetting and bearing 
children. Nothing that can ever be done for the child after 
its birth will benefit it as much as to have been properly 
begotten and properly born. 

We take all manner of pains and go to every expense to 
improve our horses and cattle in breeding and rearing, and 
never think of the immensely greater importance of applying 
the same rules and the same care to the propagation of our 
own species. I have already spoken of the vast importance 
of man and woman both being sound in body and mind, 
and the complements of each other in constitution and tem- 
peraments. It is more important to have the constitution 
of both parents physical, intellectual, social, moral, and 
spiritual, toned up to the very highest tension of excellence, 
when a future being is expected to be generated, because 
the child takes its leading qualities, and especially the degree 
of its intensity, from the actual condition of the parents at 
the time of conception. 



man's duty to himself and family. 327 

There have been many cases of children begotten by 
drunken fathers, who went reeling through life with all the 
motions of a drunkard. And any other condition of body or 
mind transmits itself in the same way. Who would want to 
have children born of an opium-eating mother? And what 
sensible woman would want children by a whisky-drinking 
husband? Not only should the body be clean and healthy, 
but the mind should be clear and thoughtful, the social feel- 
ings lively, the spirits cheerful, and the whole mind active 
and exalted at the time of conception. Equally important 
is it for the mother to keep herself as nearly as possible in 
the very best mental and physical trim, from conception 
until the birth of the child. She should neither eat nor 
drink anything intoxicating, gross, or stimulating, and 
should be as temperate in all things as possible. She 
should also read good books, have constant access to fine 
pictures, paintings, statuary, etc., so as to keep up an ex- 
alted state of mind, noble thoughts, and pure emotions. 
All the great men of earth were born of healthy, sensible 
mothers, whose minds were wrought up to an exalted con- 
dition during the time between conception and birth, by 
some exciting cause or other. 

There are many other suggestions, that might be made, 
but I can not pursue this subject further ; will have to refer 
the reader to "Fowler's Sexual Philosophy, ,, and similar 
works. 

After children are born they are to be supported and edu- 
cated. Their support is a legal duty devolving especially 
on the father, and so universally recognized, that it need 
not be discussed at all. 

The proper education of children is one of the most im- 
portant duties of life. The word educate, comes from two 
Latin words, **e" which means from, and " duco " to lead, 



328 MAN. 

and the true meaning of the word is to lead out, or devel- 
op the powers and faculties of the whole man. Education 
should be physical, intellectual, social, moral, and spiritual ; 
beginning with the physical man first, so as to lay a firm 
foundation for the structure to be erected thereon. We 
never can have a strong and durable building without a 
good foundation ; so we can never have a strong, active, 
and cultivated mind, without a strong and healthy body. 
This has already been explained ; the mind can only act 
through its instruments, the brain and body. If the body is 
weak and diseased, the mind can no more do good work than 
a woodman can chop wood with a meat ax, or fro. 

Nearly everybody send their children to school too young 
and cultivate their minds at the expense of their bodies. 
This is like building a house without foundations. The winds 
and rains of time beat on it, and like the house in the 
Scripture it falls. The effect of such a course is to stop the 
physical development, destroy the health, and in thousands 
of cases the life of the child. Children should first be 
taught to work; it builds up their physical constitutions 
and lays the foundation for a permanent mental structure. 
It also teaches them the value of time, and the necessity of 
labor ; that labor is not only honorable, but a duty imposed on 
every human being. It also teaches them industry and econr 
omy, and makes men and women of them fitted for the 
active duties of life. No child should be sent to school 
under eight years of age, and then only kept at books a few 
hours each day. They should be taught much by object 
lessons and lectures ; instructed in manners and morals and 
gradually taught to reason, while their memories are being 
crammed with information. In short, every teacher should 
be a scientific phrenologist, and phrenology, practical physi- 
ology, hygiene, and every thing pertaining to man and the 



man's duty to himself and family. 329 

laws that govern him, should be taught in every school, pub- 
lic and private ; and no teacher should be employed, who 
will not teach and develop the mind of the child in equilib- 
rium, keeping the physical, intellectual, social, moral, and 
spiritual powers equally developed and balanced. 

The curriculum obtaining in our colleges, high schools, and 
universities, which has been perpetuated from the dark ages 
to the present time, should be radically reformed ; Greek 
and Latin should be stricken out of the regular list of 
branches and the natural sciences substituted. 

Anatomy, practical physiology, phrenology, cerebral phys- 
iology, zoology, botany, mineralogy, geology, natural phil- 
osophy, chemistry, and every other branch of natural 
science, should be taught in every school and college, instead 
of the dead languages. Let mathematics in all its branches 
remain ; also the English language, rhetoric, logic, political 
economy, and the other branches now taught, except that the 
so-called sciences of mental and moral philosophy, should 
be substituted by phrenology. Of course those wishing to 
study the dead languages could do so, as an exceptional or 
irregular course. No person can expect to learn every thing 
in a life time, even if it equaled that of Methuselah ; and in 
the little time that most people have in this busy life to get 
an education, really very little can be learned well. There- 
fore the true idea of an education should be to learn that 
which will be of the greatest practical use in life. 

In the first place after learning to read and getting a gen- 
eral knowledge of geography and history, acquire all the 
knowledge which is absolutely necessary to a healthy, intel- 
ligent life, such as a thorough knowledge of ourselves and 
the laws which govern us, physical, intellectual, moral, 
social, and spiritual. 



330 MAN. 

Early in our course of education we should begin to com- 
pose, and to speak extemporaneously, so as to excite and 
arouse thought. The very gist of education is to learn to 
think correctly — reason logically and be able to arrive at 
just and correct conclusions upon all the practical purposes 
and real duties of life. By studying Nature and Revelation 
together, and by reasoning correctly from authentic data 
and established premises, we will be able to arrive at correct 
conclusions, as to most of the fundamental truths, imbedded 
in nature, and underlying man's constitution ; as well as upon 
the great practical issues of society and government ; and 
the necessary individual duties of life, which we owe first to 
our Creator, then to ourselves and families, and lastly to the 
State and society in general. 

Such an education and such training as is here indicated 
is due to every human being. Give them this and with good 
health, good morals and well-trained minds. They will 
work their way through the world without inherited prop- 
erty. 

In fact, the less property left to children- the better, it is 
almost invariably squandered, and leads to idleness, dissi- 
pation, vice, and crime. One generation amasses property, 
and the next squanders it, — is the rule in American society. 
It had better be neither amassed nor squandered in large 
quantities, as both processes develop some of the worst 
traits of human nature. 



CHAPTER III. 

MAN'S DUTY TO THE STATE. 

/fiwT AN in his present state of existence is subject to two 
<=J=^*^ systems of government. First : Divine government, 
embracing the laws of Nature and Revelation. Second: 
Human government, as it applies to a man as a member of 
society, fixing his relations therein, and regulating and 
restraining his conduct. Had Adam maintained his primeval 
condition, the laws of God, natural and revealed, would 
have been sufficient, and no human government necessary, 
as no man would have had any disposition to invade the 
rights of his neighbor. After the fall, the disposition to 
disregard the rights of his fellow-man, was at once developed, 
in the tragic fact of the murder of his brother by the first- 
born of men. This aggressive and devilish spirit went on 
from bad to worse until God himself declared that " every 
imagination of the heart of man was evil." He therefore 
destroyed this wicked and degenerate stock of men, and 
from righteous Noah, produced a new and better type of 
humanity. But the effects of the fall descended with the 
race, and the sad fate of the antediluvians demonstrated the 
necessity of human government. A temporal power, with 
authority from society in the aggregate, was needed to 
punish evil doers and restrain them from trampling upon the 
rights of their fellow-men. The peace, order, and very ex- 
istence of society absolutely demanded it. Hence God, in 
addition to the power conferred on Adam, to multiply and 
replenish the earth, and have dominion over the lower 

(331) 



332 MAN. 

animals, delegated to society through Noah the fundamental 
principles of human government, by directing that blood 
should be required for blood, and life for life. The 
day of judgment is too long a delay of punishment for 
beings so much disposed to evil as most men. Hence, the 
necessity of a temporal power to restrain men from tres- 
passing on their fellow-men, and to inflict speedy punish- 
ment when wrongs are committed. 

It will be seen at once that the leading object of human 
government is to protect the person and property of citizens 
and to preserve peace and order in society. In return for 
the protection, which the State agrees to afford every citi- 
zen for all his rights, the citizen on his part agrees to obey 
the laws, pay his part of the expenses of the government, 
and, when called on, assist in defending the State and its 
citizens. It will, therefore, be seen that the rights and duties 
of the citizen are reciprocal, and the duties grow out of the 
rights. Hence, I shall in this chapter consider the right 
and duties of the citizen under the State government in 
connection. 

In the first place, it must be borne in mind that as every 
human being is a creature of God, all have equal rights 
under the laws of nature. In forming the State or human 
government every person comes in and becomes a citizen 
upon an exactly equal footing, and every citizen is entitled 
to an equal voice in the formation of the State and the 
enactment of the laws, which are to govern him or her, and 
regulate his or her rights. Every human being, who is 
responsible by being sane and having arrived at years of 
accountability, is entitled to an equal voice in determining, 
first, what shall be the character and form of government ; 
whether it shall be a monarchy, aristocracy, republic, or 
democracy ; what the constitution of the State shall be and 



man's duty to the state. 333 

what powers shall be delegated therein, to the State, and 
what retained in the people. Every responsible citizen is 
also entitled to an equal voice in the selection of the officers 
and rulers, who are to administer the government when 
formed. And in return every citizen owes allegiance to the 
State, must pay taxes to support it, and assist in its defense 
when necessary. It is argued by some that the right of 
suffrage, or the right to a voice in the government which 
regulates our lives, liberties, and property, is a conventional 
and not a natural right. I reply that it is both a natural and 
a conventional right. It is a natural right for the conclusive 
reason already given, that under the laws of nature and of 
God, every human being has equal rights; and for the 
further reason laid down by Blackstone and law writers gen- 
erally, that all human laws are based on natural laws and 
the revealed law of God and must conform to them. This 
right to a voice in the government is also ,a conventional 
right for the reason stated in a previous chapter, viz., that 
man is a dependent being. He is born utterly helpless and 
has to be cared for by his parents until years of legal 
accountability, which by common consent has been fixed in 
our government at twenty-one years. Also, some are born 
idiots and never have sufficient capacity to take care of them- 
selves; others become insane and have to be restrained, 
governed, and cared for by the State. These persons having 
no capacity either for their own government, or that of the 
State, are excepted by the State, and are not allowed a voice 
in the government. The right of suffrage is, therefore, to 
this extent at least, conventional. But among thoroughly 
competent and responsible human beings the State has 
neither right nor power to make any distinction on account 
of sex, race, color, or previous condition, as to who shall 
vote or have a voice in the government. 



334 MAN. 

Under our government woman is a citizen, and as such her 
equality of civil rights are recognized by the constitution 
and laws of the United States and of the several States, and so 
universally held by the courts in repeated adjudications. It, 
therefore, logically follows, both from the laws of nature and 
the fundamental municipal laws of the country, that woman is 
entitled to a voice in the laws which regulate her rights of 
person and property, and bear with equal weight on her as 
on man ; and statutes in derogation of this right are unjust 
and oppressive. 

Our independence was achieved in the Revolutionary War 
upon the issue made by the colonists that, that Great Britain 
was taxing them without allowing them representatives in 
Parliament. We ought at least to be consistent, if we have 
no respect for natural rights. In every State in the American 
Union the property rights of women are now recognized to a 
greater or less extent. She pays taxes on her property 
and yet is allowed no voice in making the laws which govern 
her and tax her property. But it is alleged by some that 
although woman obeys the laws and pays taxes she does 
not go to war. In the first place no war is justifiable, 
except in defense of the State and the people, and 
only on the side of those who are defending their homes, 
families, and country. And all history records the fact that 
in wars of defense woman has done her part not only in 
the fighting, but in all the preparatory part for the fighting ; 
and in nursing the sick and wounded, and in producing sup- 
plies for the army as well as supporting the family at home. 
Besides, this proposition, if it proved anything would prove 
too much ; more than half the men never go to the field of 
battle, some are regarded as too old and exempted by law, 
others are physically unable and exempted; some preach 
and some teach ; and some follow other avocations regarded 



man's duty to the state. 335 

as necessary to society, and are therefore, exempted ; and 
nobody has ever heard of these men being deprived of their 
vote because they do not bear arms and go to the battlefield 
to slay their fellow-men. The reciprocal rule of right and 
duty is just as I have laid it down and can not be otherwise. 
Every competent and responsible citizen is entitled to an 
equal voice in the government and to a vote in the election 
of all its officers. And in return must obey the laws ; pay 
the taxes on the property he or she owns, and assist in the 
way he is best qualified ; that is performing the labor he or 
she is best fitted to discharge in the defense of the State, 
and the support of society, in times of war, insurrection, 
epidemic, famine, flood, cyclones, or any other calamity. 
After a government is established, has its form fixed and its 
powers defined by the voice of its citizens ; it becomes nec- 
essary to elect officers and rulers to conduct and adminis- 
ter the law. Ambitious, selfish, unprincipled men generally 
seek these positions, for power and plunder ; and it is the 
history of all governments that they rapidly become corrupt 
and despotic, unless the mass of the people are intelligent and 
vigilant. Eternal vigilance is said to be the price of liberty. 
The ballot box is the very citadel of liberty. The right of 
every citizen to vote, at a free and fair election, and to have 
the vote fairly counted, and the real result announced is the 
right preservative of all other civil rights. Any government 
which disfranchises a part of its citizens, or allows the bal- 
lot box to be corrupted or permits a fraudulent count of the 
vote and a false result announced is on the verge of revolu- 
tion. Whenever the people can not right their wrongs and 
relieve themselves of corrupt officers through the ballot 
box they will sooner or later resort to the bayonet. 

Next, after securing free and fair elections and an honest 
count of the vote we should look well to the characters of the 



336 MAN. 

officers elected. It has been a maxim for more than a quar- 
ter of a century with the writer, that unless the American 
people looked more to the moral character of the candidates 
for office and less to their party relations, republican gov- 
ernment would prove a failure. Much that has oc- 
curred in the United States during the last twenty-five 
(25) years has justified that opinion. Thomas Jeffer- 
son, who did more to guard the rights of the people 
against corruption and monopoly than any other American 
citizen, laid down the test of official qualification nearly a 
hundred years ago, as follows : Is he honest? Is he compe- 
tent? Is, he faithful? In these degenerate times, we will 
have to add another qualification, and ask, Is he sober ? In- 
toxicating liquors and money are the two great mediums, 
through which the United States' government and all the 
State governments have become corrupted ; and the liquor 
traffic is the great power which is controlling elections and 
ruling and ruining the country. Great corporations and 
monopolies, through the medium of money and intoxicating 
liquors, control corrupt officials after they are elected ; but 
these officials secure their election generally through the 
power of the liquor traffic, which manipulates the party 
machinery, and controls the vote in primaries and party con- 
ventions. 

This corrupt state of affairs will continue until good citi- 
zens put themselves above party, and exercise their sovereign 
right regardless of cliques and conventions ; and vote for no 
man for any office who is not honest, competent, and 
sober. 

Now, let us go back to the principle of taxation and briefly 
consider the authority for it, and the enormous abuses that 
have grown out of the exercise of this power in the United 
States. The general government and all the State govern- 



man's duty to the state. 337 

ments, having become corrupt, have necessarily become 
extravagant, the people are unjustly oppressed with taxes, 
direct and indirect in all the States. Now, what is the war- 
rant or basis of taxation? Simply this: if we receive the 
protection of the government, to person and property, we 
must pay the expenses of the government ; whatever the 
legitimate expenses of the government are — is a just tax 
on the people, provided it is uniform and bears equally on 
rich and poor according to their means. No government has 
a right to rob men of the result of their honest labor to pro- 
tect the interest of some privileged class or for the exclusive 
privilege of some corporation ; or for corrupt and drunken 
legislators to squander on fraudulent claims. 

The fundamental law of man's life on this earth is that of 
labor. The edict of the Almighty to Adam that * l in the 
sweat of his face, he should eat bread, until he should re- 
turn from the ground from whence he was taken,' ' is equally 
imperative on every human being. Every person who is not 
engaged in some useful employment, physical or mental, is 
violating the fundamental law of life and on the highway to 
ruin. Idleness leads to vice, and vice to crime. The con- 
verse of this law is equally true. While labor is the inexora- 
ble law of life, every human being is entitled to the fruits of 
his or her own labor ; subject only to such taxation as is 
necessary to support the legitimate expenses of the govern- 
ment. All taxation outside of this is unjust to the produc- 
ing classes, the only creators of wealth. 

The second great law which pertains to labor, is that which 
requires a division of labor among men, and necessarily leads 
to trade and the laws of commerce. One man is a farmer, 
another a stock-grower, a third a merchant, a fourth a manu- 
facturer, and a fifth a mechanic. As of individuals, so of 
countries. One is agricultural, another manufacturing, and 
22 



338 MAN. 

another stock-raising. The people of each locality require 
the products of all the others for subsistence. Hence the 
necessity of exchange, and here is the field for the merchant 
and carrier. Railroad companies are the great modern car- 
riers. The construction of railroads requires such immense 
sums of money that individuals can not build, equip, and run 
them. It, therefore, devolves on the State to perform these 
great works which society requires ; and which individuals can 
not perform ; or else confer the power on corporations to do so. 
In the United States these extraordinary powers have generally 
been conferred on corporations ; in fact in too many instances 
has this been done, for experience has demonstrated, that 
government as the gwasi-corporation and agent of the people is 
less selfish, and oppressive than soulless private corpora- 
tions. For instance, in the matter of the telegraph the peo- 
ple have been greatly oppressed by exorbitant charges of 
the corporations controlling it. While there is no reason 
why the United States government should control the postal 
department, that does not equally apply to the telegraph 
the people should demand and require the latter to be con- 
solidated with and become a part of the postal department. 
Were this done the cost of telegrams would not be one-fifth 
what it now is. So far as railroads and other public car- 
riers are concerned, it is probably best to leave them to in- 
dividual enterprise and corporative effort. But in granting 
charters and exclusive privileges to these corporations, 
whether by United States government, or the States, the leg- 
islature should always reserve and express in the charter or 
act of incorporation, full and exclusive control of every 
thing, including regulation of all charges for service ; and 
the power to repeal the charter when the public good requires 
it. The neglect of the United States Congress, and the leg- 
islatures of the several States, to do this has put the people 



man's duty to the state. 339 

almost entirely in the power of the corporations ; and the ex- 
cessive charges of the railroad companies and other carriers 
is depriving the producer all profit on his labor. The exces- 
sive tax on produce in the way of freights on the one end and 
the high tariff on the goods the producer receives in return 
for his produce, on the other end — are to-day effectually 
robbing American labor of its just reward. The tariff should 
be reduced to a very low rate on the necessaries of life and 
imposed principally on luxuries and poisons ; while the 
charges of railroad companies and other carriers should be 
regulated by law and reduced to a reasonable basis. 

There is a third law closely connected with that of labor 
and commerce, to which, I also call attention, and this is 
the law of money. In the early ages of civilization it was 
found that a mere system of barter or exchange was too in- 
convenient for the purposes of legitimate commerce; and 
society was compelled to invent a medium of exchange, 
which we call money; it is a representative and measure of 
value and a tool of trade. It is necessarily a creature of the 
law and controlled by the government, as no individual or 
corporation could have the right to make a measure of value 
and a tool of trade, for the entire people. Hence it is every 
where conceded that the making of money is one of the sov- 
ereign prerogatives of the government. It necessarily fol- 
lows that the government can make this measure of value, or 
tool of trade, out any material it sees fit ; and, as a matter of 
fact, the United States government has already at various 
times used a number of different commodities in making 
money, such as gold, silver, copper, paper, nickel, etc. All 
money should not only be issued by the government, but 
should be a legal tender for all debts, public and private, 
so that all kinds of money would always be at par with all 



340 MAN. 

other kinds, no matter what the material used in its creation. 
The legal tender quality is the essential principle of money ; 
no money which is a legal tender for all debts, public and 
private, can any more depreciate than a pound weight can 
grow lighter or a yard measure grow shorter. It is true 
that the more money in circulation, the higher will be the 
price of labor and of property ; but this is fair for all with 
the great advantage that it furnishes ready employment for 
labor, facilitates exchange, and stimulates trade. There has 
never been at any time in the history of the United States 
a sufficiency of money in circulation. 

During and immediately after the late civil war, money 
was more plentifnl than ever before or since, being about 
fifty dollars per capita; and this was the most prosperous 
era with the producing classes known in the history of the 
nation. If the United States government, which now keeps 
in circulation only about twenty dollars per capita, would 
put into circulation not less than fifty (50) dollars per cap- 
ita of the entire population of legal tender money, an era 
of prosperity unparalleled, would immediately follow, and 
would continue as long as the volume of money kept in circu- 
lation remained at that ratio ; and such a thing as a financial 
panic would never be known. In order that the volume 
of money in circulation, may always be sufficient, and 
never too large for healthy business operations, the making 
and issuing of money should be exclusively controlled by 
the government. This sovereign prerogative should never 
be farmed out to individuals or corporations ; for self-inter- 
est is too often an obstruction in the way of the public 
good. Hence, it follows that banks empowered to issue 
and circulate money should never be permitted in any just 
government. The national banking system existing in the 



man's duty to the state. 341 \ 

United States, is nothing more nor less than legalized rob- 
bing on the labor of the country. Under the existing laws 
they can expand or contract the volume of money in circu- 
lation at pleasure, producing panics at will, for their own 
speculative purposes, to the great injury of the producing 
classes. 

I can not close this chapter without alluding to one other 
duty which every citizen owes the State, or the people who 
constitute the State, and that is, providing public education. 
The education of the individual as a benefit to himself has 
been shown already. It is equally important to the State, 
for every citizen being entitled to a voice in the government, 
ought to be sufficiently informed to understand the constitu- 
tion and laws under which he lives and which he has a voice 
in making. It has already been shown that the duty of 
education devolves on the parents; but many children are 
left orphans, and many have parents too poor, too ignorant, 
or too vicious to educate them. The result is, from these 
and other causes a large per cent of the population go uned- 
ucated unless the State attends to the matter. These unfor- 
tunate children grow up in ignorance, and having neither 
instructors nor protectors, naturally gravitate into intem- 
perance, which is the great pathway to crime and pauperism. 
Statistics clearly show that three-fourths of the crime and 
pauperism which curses society is occasioned, either directly 
or indirectly, by the liquor traffic ; and falls mainly on the 
uneducated classes. 

The immense amount of crime existing, mainly among the 
uneducated, and caused by the liquor traffic, necessitates 
expensive criminal courts and prisons, and consequently 
high taxation. So that, taking a practical business view of 
the matter, it is cheaper and better for the State to educate 



842 MAN. 

than punish. The State and the people are directly inter- 
ested in removing ignorance, the liquor traffic and all other 
similar evils from the land. The maxim that " an ounce of 
prevention is worth a pound of cure," applies with equal 
force to the body politic as to the human body. Every 
State wishing to reduce taxation and prevent crime, pauper- 
ism, and suffering should at once abolish the liquor traffic, 
and establish an efficient system of public free schools. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE DESTINY OF MAN. 

Jfft-J AVING shown that man, in his present state, is three- 
Q*^ fold, possessed of body, soul, and spirit, if I am able 
to show what becomes of each of these three parts of man, I 
shall have, to some extent at least, given his destiny. That 
the body is animal, constituted entirely of refined particles of 
organized matter is conceded by all. That it becomes dis- 
organized at physical death, and returns to its original ele- 
ments in the earth and air, is the observation and judgment of 
all men, and all history. This view is also conclusively sus- 
tained by Revelation. The Creator addressing Adam, says : 
" For dust thou art and unto dust shalt thou return.' ' That 
this has reference to the body alone is shown by Solomon in 
Ecclesiastes twelfth chapter and seventh verse, where he 
says: u Then shall the dust return to the earth as it was, and 
the spirit shall return unto God who gave it." I take it, 
therefore, as true, that these animal bodies are never resur- 
rected. That at physical death they return to their original 
elements, and become part of matter in general. In fact, 
they are continually dying, and renewing, and at the end of 
each seven years, the entire body is said to be wholly 
renewed. So that a person dying at seven years of age, 
would not possess the same body, as to actual particles of 
matter, that he had at birth. There is, therefore, no reason 
in Nature or Revelation, why these animal tenements, occu- 
pied during this natural life, and taken down at physical 
death, should be restored at the resurrection. In fact, Paul 

(343) 



344 MAN. 

teaches in the fifteenth chapter of I. Corinthians, that such 
is not the case ; and among many other things says: " Now 
this I say, brethren, that flesh and blood can not inherit the 
kingdom of God ; neither doth corruption inherit incorrup- 
tion." 

But there is a resurrection of a body, not this animal 
body, but the spiritual body, as fully explained by Paul in 
the aforesaid chapter. The forty-second, forty- third, and 
forty-fourth verses of the fifteenth chapter of I. Corin- 
thians reads as follows: "And this is the resurrection of 
the dead. It is sown in corruption, it is raised in incorrup- 
tion ; it is sown in dishonor, it is raised in glory ; it is sown 
in weakness, it is raised in power; it is sown an animal 
body, it is raised a spiritual body. If there is an animal 
body, there is also a spiritual body." 

This spiritual body was clearly recognized as the counter- 
part of the natural or animal body, in the case cited in the 
first chapter of the second part of this work ; when the man 
thrown from the wagon received such a shock that his 
spirit and spirit-body, left the animal body lifeless in the 
ditch and temporarily entered the spirit world. A similar 
experience is reported by Bishop Bowman, in a recent sermon 
in Philadelphia, as follows, viz. : — 

* ' THE GATES OP DEATH BISHOP BOWMAN TELLS OP HIS EX- 
PERIENCE IN THE BORDER LAND OF THE OTHER WORLD. 

" On my return home from Japan, I preached in California 
and probably overworked myself, and, on the last Sunday in 
February, after holding divine service in my St. Louis 
church, I returned home, when I was immediately taken sick 
with a lingering fever, which the physician predicted would 
end fatally. At this point I seemed to fall into a kind of 
ecstasy, when I actually did not know whether I was alive or 



THE DESTINY OP MAN. 845 

dead. I imagined that I was on board a most magnificent 
ship, and heard the Captain say " Stop her! " and which I 
thought to be the voice of my Divine Master, when my young 
eighteen-months-old child, who had died twenty years ago, 
came to me and said that she had heard that I was coming and 
had come to meet me. After some little conversation, which 
I do not recollect, she said: 'Do you think that I have 
grown, papa ! • She then rose in a form of glory which I 
have never before witnessed, and never more expect 
to see until I die, and then returned to her usual state, say- 
ing that she had come in that shape to see if I should know 
her. She then said that many friends had asked after 
me and were awaiting my coming, and that an old lady and 
gentleman had taken her up and kissed her, saying that her 
papa was their boy. I then asked her where her mamma 
was. ' O, she is off doing something for the Lord, but will- 
be at the wharf to meet us on our arrival.' All this left an 
impression upon me by the magnificence of the surroundings, 
and it was a season of great preciousness to me. It se'ems 
to me that I have come back from the other world ; and 
although it is peculiar for me to say that I was dead, it 
seems as if I was not in the body." — From a recent sermon 
in Philadelphia. 

The following case reported by Dr. Brittain, illustrates 
the same proposition, viz. : "An eminent Presbyterian 
divine in New York, was borne by disease to the portals of 
the invisible world. He had a distinct consciousness of his 
condition. Veiled in light his spirit rose and hovered over 
the body. He could distinctly see the wasted form stretched 
on the couch beneath him, pale, pulseless and cold, but his 
immortal spirit was thrilled with inexpressible peace and joy. 
Just # then his wife, to whom he was tenderly, but strongly 
attached, called to him, with deep earnestness of undying 



346 MAN. 

love. The potent magnetism of that loving heart, counter- 
poised the attractions of the spheres ; and even recalled the 
unshackled spirit from the heavens, just opening to receive 
it ; and he returned to the body." I also cite in this connec- 
tion the following case, reported by Dr. Brittain on pages 
479 and 480 of his work on Man and His Relations, viz. : — 

"The case of Rev. William Tennent, of New Jersey, a 
clergyman of the Presbyterian branch of the church, is one 
of the most remarkable on record. While conversing with 
his brother in Latin, respecting the state of his soul, and 
his prospects in the life to come, he expressed doubts con- 
cerning his future happiness. Just at that moment he sud- 
denly lost the power of speech and voluntary motion ; he 
was apparently insensible, and his friends believed that the 
spirit had vacated its earthly tabernacle. Arrangements 
were accordingly made for the appropriate solemnities ; but 
his physician, who was also a warm, personal friend, was 
not satisfied, and at his request the funeral rites were de- 
layed. Three days had passed; the eyes were rayless, the 
lips discolored, and the body cold and stiff. The brother 
insisted that the remains should be entombed. The critical 
hour at length arrived ; the people had assembled, and the 
occasion was about to be solemnized by appropriate cere- 
monies, when the whole company was startled by a fearful 
groan! The eyes were opened for a moment, but closed 
again, and the form remained silent and motionless for an 
hour. Again a heavy groan proceeded from the body, and 
the eyes were opened ; but in an instant all signs of return- 
ing animation had vanished. 

" After another interval of an hour, life and conscious- 
ness, with the power of voluntary motion, were measurably 
restored. After his restoration it was found that Mr. Ten- 
nent had lost all recollection of his former life, and the 



THE DESTINY OP MAN. 347 

results of his education and experience were wholly obliter- 
ated from his mind. He was obliged to learn the alphabet 
of his vernacular. His memory at lengthed returned, and 
with it his former mental possessions; but his doubts 
respecting the future life were all dissipated forever. Dur- 
ing his absence from the body he was intromitted to the 
heavens, and like Paul, heard and saw things unutterable. 
The trances and visions of the ancient prophets and apostles 
were intrinsically no more remarkable than this experience 
of Mr. Tennent." 

The foregoing cases clearly prove the main proposition 
here set forth, viz. : that at physical death, the spirit with 
its spirit body, leaves the natnral or animal body, and 
passes into the spirit world. Also that there are exceptional 
cases, such as these just reported, in which the great love 
and influence of family and friends, have retained the soul . 
in the body, and have called back the freed spirit, to again 
occupy for a time its earthly tenement. 

Such was evidently the case with Jairus' daughter, whose 
spirit was restored by Christ as recorded in Luke viii: 49-56. 
The spirit had left the body, but the soul yet remained in it. 
Hence the language of the Lord, "Weep not, she is not 
dead." And although they laughed him to scorn, "He 
took her hand and said, Maid, arise ; and her spirit came 
again, and she arose straightway." 

We have in the resurrection of Christ from the dead, a 
certain pledge that if we accept the terms of the gospel, our 
spiritual bodies, will be resurrected, and will come up from 
the unseen world to meet Him at His second coming. But 
some one is ready to suggest that it was the natural body 
of Christ that was raised. I reply that either Christ was 
raised in His spiritual body, or threw off the natural body 
in some mysterious way before His ascension, as Paul says, 



348 MAN. 

4 * flesh and blood can not inherit the kingdom of heaven." 
I wish here to draw a clear distinction between these spiritual 
bodies, and the spirit itself ; which also comes forth from 
the spirit world at the time of the resurrection, occupying 
its spiritual body. 

We must not forget that the spirit is the immortal part of 
man — that it is directly imparted by the Spirit of God at 
the creation of each human being ; that its union with mat- 
ter, produces the present animal life, or soul of man ; and 
when it leaves the body, it takes with it the soul as a spiritual 
body, to occupy in the spirit land ; while the body is left to 
die; and in the language of Solomon, " the dust returns to 
the dust as it was; and the spirit to God who gave it." 
That is when the spirit leaves the animal body, it goes to the 
spirit world, which I believe is immediately around this 
natural world; but to what extent it extends, and where 
its central and principal location is, we have no means of 
knowing. Speaking from the natural standpoint, it is the 
great unseen world, called in Greek Hades, and erroneously 
translated "Hell," in the King James Version of the Scrip- 
tures. It is the intermediate state occupied by both spirit 
and soul, from physical death until the respective resurrec- 
tions. That is, from death to the first resurrection in the 
case of the righteous ; and from death to the second resur- 
rection and general judgment, in case of the wicked. The 
resurrection of the wicked is after the millenium, and 1,000 
years later than the resurrection of the righteous, 

In the very nature of things there is a separation of the 
righteous from the wicked in the spirit world ; and that part 
occupied by the righteous is called in the Bible, Paradise. 
Here, the righteous are arranged in schools and groups, and 
classified according to their respective spiritual progress. 

But whence come these spiritual bodies, in which all the 



THE DESTINY OF MAN. 349 

dead, both righteous and wicked, are to be raised? They can 
not be our present natural, or animal bodies, because they 
return to dust at physical death, and become part of matter in 
general. I hold that the spiritual body, which is occupied by 
the immortal spirit, and which comes up from the spirit 
world at the resurrection of both the just and the unjust is 
nothing more nor less than the soul. It is the reflex and 
exact image of the spirit itself. It is found in the natural 
body during our present existence and is the exact counter- 
part or copy of the body, the only difference being that the 
body is animal and the soul is spiritual. As already shown 
in previous parts of this work, the soul is the result of the 
union of spirit with the organized matter of the body. The 
soul grows and develops as the body grows and develops, and 
the one is the exact image and counterpart of the other. In 
a previous part of this work I illustrated the relation of 
spirit, soul, and body, in our present state of existence, by 
a walnut. The outer hull, or skin, represents the body ; the 
inner hull, the soul, and the kernel, the spirit. The hull, 
ing of the walnut when ripe, or the taking off the outer rind 
or skin, represents physical death. A much more durable 
hull or case continues to enclose the kernel ; this represents 
the soul, which continues to be the habitation of the spirit, 
though the intermediate state. The natural or animal body 
is thrown off at physical death. But the spiritual body 
remains the house and habitation of the immortal spirit in 
the spirit world, throughout the intermediate state. 

This is evidently what the Apostle Paul refers to in his 
second letter to the Corinthians, when speaking of physical 
death, in the first verse of the fifth chapter, he says: "For 
we know that if our earthly house of this tabernacle were 
dissolved, we have a building of God, a house not made with 
hands eternal in the heavens. ,, Now the "we" here 



350 MAN. 

spoken of by Paul, is necessarily the immortal spirit, and he 
is discussing the question of necessary habitations for the 
spirit and means to teach Christians not to fear death, 
because when this earthly tabernacle is dissolved, we have a 
house of God, not made with hands, which we will occupy. 
In other words, when the natural or animal body dissolves, 
the spirit will occupy its spiritual body. And he uses the 
present and not the future tense. He does not refer to the 
resurrection, a time far in the future, but speaking even 
before physical death, the apostle says: "We have a build- 
ing of God, a house not made with hands, " etc. This 
clearly shows that the spiritual body already exists before 
the natural one is dissolved ; that the new house not made 
with hands is already erected before the old physical or 
animal tabernacle is taken down. There can be no doubt 
that we are, even in the present life, already in possession of 
our spiritual bodies or souls, and that our natural, or animal 
bodies are but the reflex or image of our spiritual bodies. 
If all men were clairvoyants and could see with spiritual 
eyes, we would behold in every human being a spiritual 
body, of which the natural, or animal body, is but the reflex 
and external habitation ; we could also behold the spiritual 
bodies of our departed friends, looking exactly as they ap- 
peared to us in the natural body. Hence it is that Paul, in 
discussing this question in the fifteenth chapter of I. Cor- 
inthians, uses the present tense, and says " there is a natural 
body and there is a spiritual body." Both are existing 
together in every human being. 

At physical death the animal body is thrown off, just as 
the butterfly leaves its chrysalis state. Henceforth the 
spirit appears, in a new and more glorious body, and occu- 
pies a higher and happier state of existence. The righteous 
and the wicked alike enter the spirit world, or intermediate 



THE DESTINY OF MAN. 351 

state, in their spiritual bodies, or with spirit and soul still 
united ; and though the spirits of all are immortal, the souls, 
or spirit bodies, are not immortal. The spiritual bodies of 
the righteous will attain to eternal life, and consequent 
immortality at the first resurrection, when Christ comes the 
second time, with power and great glory, to establish a per- 
fect kingdom on the earth as He already has in heaven. 
' ' Blessed and holy is he that has part in the first resurrec- 
rection : on such the second death hath no power, but they 
shall be priests of God and of Christ, and will reign with 
him a thousand years." Rev. xx:6. But the souls or 
spirit bodies of the wicked, who have no part in the first 
resurrection, are subject to the second death; and never 
attain to eternal life and immortality. They remain in the 
spirit world during the thousand years of the millenium, and 
come up at the second resurrection, when the great white 
throne appears, and the general judgment begins. All whose 
names are not found in the Book of Life, are brought before 
the Judge of the quick and dead — " Judged according to 
their works," and then cast into the lake of fire, which is 
called the second death. As the best explanation of the 
order of these momentous events, I here copy entire the 
twentieth chapter of Eevelation, with five verses of the 
twenty-first chapter, as follows : — 

1 u And I saw an angel come down from heaven, having 
the key of the bottomless pit and a great chain in his hand. 

2 " And he laid hold on the dragon, that old serpent, which 
is the devil, and Satan, and bound him a thousand years, 

3 " And cast him in to the bottomless pit, and shut him up, 
and set a seal upon him, that he should deceive the nations 
no more, till the thousand years should be fulfilled: and 
after that he must be loosed a little season. 

4 "And I saw thrones, and they sat upon them, andjudg- 



352 MAN. 

ment was given unto them : and I saw the souls of them 
that were beheaded for the witness of Jesus, and for the 
word of God, and which had not worshiped the beast, 
neither his image, neither had received his mark upon their 
foreheads, or in their hands; and they lived and reigned 
with Christ a thousand years. 

5 " But the rest of the dead lived not again until the thou- 
sand years were finished. This is the first resurrection. 

6 " Blessed and holy is he that hath part in the first resur- 
rection: on such the second death hath no power, but they 
shall be priests of God and of Christ, and shall reign with 
him a thousand years. 

7 " And when the thousand years are expired, Satan shall 
be loosed out of his prison, 

8 ' * And shall go out to deceive the nations which are in the 
four quarters of the earth, Gog and Magog, to gather them 
together to battle : the number of whom is as the sand of 
the sea. 

9 " And they went upon the breadth of the earth, and com- 
passed the camp of the saints about, and the beloved city: 
and fire came down from God out of heaven, and devoured 
them. 

10 ' l And the devil that deceived them was cast into the lake 
of fire and brimstone, where the beast and the false prophet 
are, and shall be tormented day and night for ever and ever. 

11 " And I saw a great white throne, and him that sat on 
it, from whose face the earth and heaven fled away ; and 
there was found no place for them. 

12 "And I saw the dead, small and great, stand before 
God ; and the books were opened : and another book was 
opened, which is the book of life ; and the dead were judged 
out of those things which were written in the books, accord- 
ing to their works. 



THE DESTINY OF MAN. 353 

13 u And the sea gave up the dead which were in it ; and 
death and hell delivered up the dead which were in them : 
and they were judged every man according to their works. 

14 " And death and hell were cast into the lake of fire. 
This is the second death. 

15 * ' And whosoever was not found written in the book 
of life was cast into the lake of fire. 

1 " And I saw a new heaven and a new earth: for the 
first heaven and the first earth were passed away ; and there 
was no more sea. 

2 " And I John saw the holy city, new Jerusalem, coming 
down from God out of heaven, prepared as a bride adorned 
for her husband. 

3 "And I heard a great voice out of heaven saying, 
Behold, the tabernacle of God is with men, and he will 
dwell with them, and they shall be his people, and God him- 
self shall be with them, and be their God. 

4 u And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes ; 
and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor cry- 
ing, neither shall there be any more pain : for the former 
things are passed away. 

5 " And he that sat upon the throne said, Behold, I make 
all things new. And he said unto me, Write: for these 
words are true and faithful." 

From the foregoing account of the judgment it clearly 
appears that the righteous have no part in it. How could 
they and any be" saved? All who pass before the judgment 
bar, are to be punished " according to their works ;" and 
as all have sinned, and come short of the glory of God, none 
could possibly be saved. All whose names are not found in 
the Book of Life are cast into the lake of fire, which is the 
second death, and are punished " according to their works," 
some more and some less, as they have been more or less 
23 



354 MAN. 

wicked. But those whose names are found in the Book of 
Life, are neither judged nor punished. And who are they? 
They are the righteous whose sins have been remitted and 
blotted out, through faith in Christ and obedierice to his 
commands ; who have had part in the first resurrection, and 
who have thereby already attained to eternal life ; whose souls 
are saved, by being made the immortal bodies or habitations 
of their immortal spirits. The only judgment to which the 
righteous are subjected is one which determines the amount 
of reward to which they are entitled for good works. But 
the soul or spirit bodies of the wicked having no part in the 
first resurrection, are subject to the second death, and are 
destroyed forever in that lake of fire. ' ' Whosoever was not 
found written in the book of life, was cast in the lake of 
fire." Eev. xx:15. 

This of course refers to the souls, or spiritual bodies of the 
wicked, and not to their immortal spirits ; for in the very 
nature of things spirit is not subject to death or destruction 
in any form. But the Bible informs us that the soul is sub- 
ject to the second death unless it attains to eternal life, 
by accepting Christ, through the terms of the Gospel. 
" The soul that sinneth, it shall die." Ezek. xviii:20. It 
is this destruction of the souls of the wicked, which 
is referred to by Christ in the twenty-eighth verse of 
the tenth chapter of Matthew in the following lan- 
guage. "Fear not them which kill the body, but are not 
able to kill the soul ; but fear him which is able to destroy 
both the soul and body in hell." The following deductions 
may be drawn from the foregoing words of the Savior : 
First, the spirit is not subject to the second death; 
Christ only speaks of the destruction of the soul and body in 
hell. Second, the destruction of the soul or spiritual body 
is to be complete, and not an endless never dying torment, 



THE DESTINY OF MAN. 355 

as maintained by the orthodox world. What interest or pur- 
pose could a God of love have, in having the souls or spirit 
bodies forever burning? They have failed to answer the 
purpose of their creation and are of no further use. They 
are simply burned up like chaff or any other refuse matter, 
that is of no further account. The word, " body," as used 
by Christ, has reference, no doubt, to the spiritual body, the 
word soul refers to the life existing in said body, by virtue of 
its union with the immortal spirit, and which life of course 
ends, when the spiritual body is destroyed, leaving the 
spirit without a habitation, to wander in space, ever seeking 
bodies to occupy as did the evil spirits in the days when the 
Lord was on the earth, and as they are probably yet doing. 
These wicked spirits, who are to lose their souls or spirit 
bodies, by the second death, are referred to by the Lord in 
the last chapter of the Bible, and among the last words of 
his revelation to man. After the great white throne has 
appeared, and the wicked have been judged according to 
their works, and their souls cast in the lake of fire, which 
is the second death ; after the old heaven and earth have passed 
away, and the new heaven and earth appeared ; and after the 
heavenly city has come down from God out of heaven, as the 
final abode of the righteous throughout eternity, where sin, 
disease, pain, and death can never come, where the saints are to 
forever have access to the tree of life : among the last words 
of Christ to John, as recorded in Rev. xxii: thirteenth, 
fourteenth, and fifteenth verses, we have this language: "I 
am Alpha and Omega, the beginning, the end, the first and 
the last. Blessed are they that do his commandments, that 
they may have right to the tree of life, and may enter through 
the gates into the city. For without are dogs and sorcerers 
and whoremongers and murderers, and idolators, and whoso- 



358 MAN. 

everloveth and maketha lie." Who are these outside the 
heavenly city, after the righteous are eternally secure within? 
Evidently the immortal spirits of the wicked, who have lost 
their souls or spirit bodies by the second death. In com- 
mon with all men they lost their natural or animal bodies by 
physical death ; and having rejected the terms of salvation, 
they have also lost their spiritual bodies, by the second 
death, and are now left without bodies or habitations, to wan- 
der forever in outer darkness, as other evil spirits, for end- 
less ages, no doubt have done. 

In the economy of God, it seems necessary to the individ- 
ual existence and happiness of every human spirit, that it 
should have a body or habitation in which to dwell. Had 
Adam and all his posterity obeyed God, access to the Tree 
of Life, in the original Paradise, would have secured the 
continued existence of these natural or animal bodies, but 
sin brought physical death and the loss of the natural body. 
The spiritual body may be saved and attain to eternal life 
at the first resurrection, if we accept the terms of salva- 
tion presented by Christ. But if we reject the terms of the 
gospel, we fail to secure eternal life for our souls or spirit 
bodies, they become subject to the second death, and are 
destroyed in the lake of fire. This leaves the spirit without 
a body or habitation, to wander in outer darkness, and lead 
an unhappy existence. What may be the final fate of these 
wicked spirits I leave to the mercy of God. That their 
spiritual bodies are destroyed as effectually as are the ani- 
mal bodies of all men, is as certain as that the second 
death follows the first or physical death. Having failed in 
the purpose for which they were created, being of no further 
account in the economy of God, they are burned np like chaff. 
This.is " the day that shall burn as an oven " referred to in 



THE DESTINY OP MAN. 357 

Malachi, iv : 1 ; and their destruction is explicitly, stated by 
the Lord himself, in the passage already quoted in Matthew, 
x:28. 

The souls or spirit bodies of the righteous are to re- 
ceive the gift of eternal life at the second coming of Christ. 
This grandest event of the universe is referred to by Paul 
in the sixteenth and seventeenth verses of the fourth chap- 
ter of Thessalonians as follows, viz. : " For the Lord himself 
shall descend from heaven with a shout, with the voice of the 
archangel, and with the trump of God; and the dead in 
Christ shall rise first. Then we which are alive and remain 
shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet 
the Lord in the air ; and so shall we ever be with the Lord." 
Then follows the thousand years of the millenium during which 
the wicked shall remain in the spirit world. The devil is 
chained and perfect peace prevails on the earth. The kingdom 
of heaven which now exists on the earth in a very feeble and 
imperfect condition, is then established in its full spiritual 
power ; and Christ, with his redeemed saints, will appear in 
person, and reign on the earth, as well as in heaven. There 
being perfect peace, the inhabitants of the earth will be 
more spiritual than now ; a large percentage of the population 
will be clairvoyant and clairaudient ; and will meet and 
converse with the saints at pleasure. 

But at the end of the thousand years, the devil will be 
loosed a little season, and will stir up the nations of the 
earth to war against the saints ; when fire from heaven will 
destroy the rebellious hosts, and burn up the old earth, and 
everything that pertains to it. 

Referring to this grand catastrophe, Peter in his second 
letter in the third chapter and tenth verse, says: "The 
heavens shall pass away with a great noise, and the elements 



358 MAN. 

melt with fervent heat ; the earth also and the works that 
are therein, shall be burned up. 

Then shall appear the new heavens and the new earth ; 
and the new Jerusalem, or heavenly city, will descend to the 
new earth as man's eternal home, where the saints will for- 
ever have access both to the river and the Tree of Life. 
"God will make his tabernacle with men," and " we shall 
meet Him face to face," as Adam and Eve did in the orig- 
inal Paradise. But with this grand and happy difference : 
Adam was mortal and in a probationary state. He might 
obey and live, or rebel and die ; and he chose the latter. 
But when we reach that glorious and ultimate Paradise, we 
will have attained to eternal life, and immortality of body as 
well as spirit; and will be no longer subject to temptation, 
sin, pain, disease, death, or evil in any form. And we will 
pass the endless ages of eternity in the love and service of 
the great Father, ever growing, developing, and progressing 
in knowledge, wisdom, love, and happiness. 






GHAPTES V. 

CONCLUSION. 

fN the foregoing chapters I have in the main discussed 
distinct propositions, and proceeded directly to the legiti- 
mate conclusions, without stopping to express incidental 
opinions. 

The line of discussion has naturally lead me over much 
controverted ground ; and no doubt the reader would prefer 
to have at least a fuller statement of the writer's position 
upon some of the subjects incidentally touched or alluded 
to. Directly connected with the great subjects of soul and 
spirit, and dependent on a proper definition of each, is the 
question of 

SOUL SLEEPING. 

The fatal blunder of the leaders and teachers of the so- 
called orthodox world, in assuming that "soul and spirit are 
synonomous terms, has not only led to much error and con- 
fusion in the religious world, but has given the advocates of 
u soul sleeping " a great advantage in the controversy on 
this question. 

The soul sleeper, in common with the orthodox teacher, 
assumes that soul and spirit are synonomous terms ; and 
then proceeds at once to array all those texts of Scripture, 
which refer directly to our present natural or animal lives, 
as proof conclusive that man has no conscious existence 
from physical death until the resurrection. That the soul, 
or spirit, which is the same thing, sleeps through the inter- 
mediate state. 

(359) 



360 man. 

All that is necessary to meet this, is to take the position 
that I have taken and attempted to establish, that soul 
and spirit respectively represent distinct parts of man. 
That man has an immortal principle in him that never dies 
and never sleeps ; and that deathless principle is called the 
spirit. Hence, it was that Christ, arguing with the Sad- 
duces on the resurrection, cited the language of God to 
Moses at the burning bush, when He said He was the 
God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, when those worthy 
patriarchs had then been physically dead for from four 
hundred to six hundred years. And the Lord significantly 
added that God was the God of the living and not of the dead. 
The same great truth was also demonstrated, when the spirits 
of Moses and Elijah, hundreds of years after physical death, 
appeared to Peter, James, and John at the transfiguration 
of Christ. Whatever the soul may do, the spirit never sleeps 
and never dies. As I have already explained, the word soul 
has several significations. It is often applied to the present 
natural or animal life ; sometimes to the spiritual bodies of 
the dead in the intermediate state ; and sometimes to the 
same spirit bodies of the righteous after they have attained 
to eternal life in the first resurrection, at Christ's second 
coming. I venture the assertion that every text of Scripture 
cited by the soul sleepers, either refers to the cessation of 
the present natural life, by the perfect sleep of physical 
death, or to the destruction of the spiritual body, by the 
second death; and that most of them refer to physical 
death, which is unquestionably a perfect sleep, so far 
as these animal, or natural, lives are concerned. In pro- 
found and natural sleep, the voluntary powers of body 
and soul are resting and unconscious; but the involun- 
tary processes of the heart and lungs, upon which human 
life depends, go on continually. They never rest, until 



CONCLUSION. 361 

physical death strikes the man, when the whole human life is 
extinguished and perfect sleep follows. The resemblance 
between profound sleep, and physical death is so great that 
sleep has often been called the twin sister of death. 

Now, I propose to refer to some of the principal Scriptures 
cited by soul sleepers, and to show that they refer to physical 
death, to the perfect sleep of the soul, in the sense of these 
animal lives. 

David in the fourth verse of the one hundred and 
forty-sixth Psalm, speaking of man, says: "His breath 
goeth forth, he returneth to his earth ; in that very day 
his thoughts perish.' ' This evidently refers to this natural 
or animal life. The thoughts, purposes, and plans of 
this life are certainly terminated by physical death, and 
may well be said to perish. David has in too many cases 
indicated in unmistakable terms, his faith in the continued 
existence of the spirit after physical death, for any other con- 
struction to be put on the foregoing passages than that it 
refers to the termination of the present human life, with all 
its thoughts, plans, and purposes. 

Soul sleepers also cite Psalm 104, verse 29, as follows : 
"Thou hidest thy face, they are troubled; thou takest 
away their breath, they die, and return to their dust." 
This plainly refers to physical death, and the perfect sleep 
of the body after it returns " to the dust that it was." 

The following from Job xiv:12, is probably the strong- 
est text cited by soul sleepers, viz.: "So man lieth down 
and riseth not : till the heavens be no more, they shall not 
wake, nor be raised out of their sleep." This clearly refers 
both to physical death and the resurrection, and Job, by a 
figure of speech, refers to the intervening time as a sleep ; 
because the dead are in the unseen world, and from the 
standpoint of our animal existence in a profound and con- 



362 MAN. 

tinued sleep. And such it certainly is, so far as this natural 
or animal life is concerned. But that there is a real life in 
the intermediate state, both of the immortal spirit and its 
spirit body, I believe I have already fully established. This 
brings me to what I regard as another very grave error, 
generally taught and believed by the orthodox world, viz. : 
that at physical death the spirit or soul (the terms being 
synonymous) passes at once and directly to 

HEAVEN OR HELL. 

I don't understand the Word of God to teach any such 
thing. The wicked are certainly not to be cast into hell for 
punishment, or rather for destruction, until after they have 
been judged and sentenced. The judgment has not yet 
taken place and will not until after the thousand years of the 
millenium have transpired. The millenium will not set in 
until the second coming of Christ, and that has certainly 
not yet occurred. 

We are informed in the twentieth chapter of Eevelation, 
that when the great white throne appears, the dead, small 
and great, will stand before it, and " be judged according to 
their works ; ' ■ and whosoever is not found written in the 
Book of Life is cast into the lake of fire, which is the sec- 
ond death." And Christ himself in Matthew, x: 28, evi- 
dently refers to this lake of fire as the hell in which the 
souls of the wicked are to be destroyed. Hell, then, is a 
long way off yet, and none of the spirits or spirit bodies 
of the wicked are yet in it. 

Heaven is about a thousand years nearer to the righteous 
than hell is to the wicked ; because the souls of the righteous 
are to attain to eternal life at the first resurrection, which is 
at the second coming of Christ and the beginning of the 
millenium. But as these grand events have not transpired, 



CONCLUSION. 363 

none of the righteous are yet in heaven. The Apostle Peter, 
in his great Pentecostal sermon, uses this explicit language: 
u For David has not ascended into the heavens.' ' — Acts, 
ii: 34. 

If David, who had then been dead for hundreds of years, 
was not yet ascended to heaven, what right have we to sup- 
pose that he or any other human spirit has yet so ascended. 
And what right had any theologian to ever so assume, when 
the word of God clearly teaches that the souls of the right- 
eous are not to attain to eternal life until the first resurrec- 
tion, which is the second coming of Christ. In the sixteenth 
and seventeenth verses of the fourth chapter of Thessalo- 
nians, we have this language, viz.: "For the Lord himself 
shall descend from heaven with a shout with the voice of the 
archangel, and with the trump of God; and the dead in 
Christ shall rise first ; then we which are alive and remain, 
shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet 
the Lord in the air; and so shall we ever be with the Lord." 

Then, and not till then, will the righteous enter heaven. 

But I am asked where do the souls and spirits of the dead 
go at death, and where do they remain, until the first resur- 
rection, in case of the righteous and until the general judg- 
ment in case of the wicked. I answer, as already stated in 
the chapter on the Destiny of man, that at physical death, 
the spirits of all men, with their souls or spirit bodies pass 
into the spirit world, Hades, or the unseen world, which we 
term the 

INTERMEDIATE STATE. 

The inquiry naturally arises, do the righteous and the 
wicked mingle together in the intermediate state as they did 
on the earth. I think not. Even here they have a tendency 
to separate, so far as circumstances will permit. As the old 
maxim has it, ' * birds of a feather will flock together. ' ' When 



364 MAN. 

man is freed from the shackles and restraints of matter the 
will and the ability to separate will certainly be infinitely 
greater than now ; and I have no doubt that both the righte- 
ous and the wicked, entirely separate from each other, in the 
spirit world, and then each divide themselves up into groups, 
according to their respective progress in righteousness, and in 
wickedness. 

That they occupy states, or places, entirely removed 
from each other is clearly taught by Christ himself, in the 
case of Dives and Lazarus. In Luke xvi:26, we have this 
language attributed to Abraham, who was with Lazarus, 
viz.: — 

* ' And besides all this, between us and you there is a 
great gulf fixed ; so that they who would pass from hence to 
you can not ; neither can they pass to us that would come 
from thence." 

This clearly shows that there is no communication between 
the good and evil, in Hades or the spirit world ; and they 
evidently occupy distinct apartments of this intermediate 
state. 

It may be held by some that because the common version 
of the Scriptures represents Dives, the rich man, as being in 
"Hell," that this case does not sustain the views herein 
presented. I suppose that any Greek scholar will admit that 
a proper translation would give the unseen world instead of 
Hell ; and I find by reference to Wilson's Emphatic Diaglott, 
that it is there rendered Hades, not Hell; which entirely 
accords with my view of the intermediate state. That part 
of the spirit world occupied by the righteous we term Para- 
dise, because it was so designated by Christ himself. His 
reply to the thief on the cross, as recorded in Luke xxiii :43, 
reads as follows, viz.: And he said to him, " Indeed, I say 
to thee this day shalt thou be with me in Paradise." 



CONCLUSION. 365 

The righteous are evidently in a very happy and progressive 
state in Paradise, and their course is no doubt ever onward 
and upward in the spirit life. Progress and improvement is, 
or should be, the very order of man's nature ; and it no 
doubt is infinitely greater in the spirit life, than it is on 
earth. The inhabitants of the spirit world are no doubt 
arranged in schools and groups according to their spiritual 
advancement ; and under the constant care and teaching of 
angel teachers. Such is the testimony Swedenborg, A. J. 
Davis, and of all who claim to have visited the spirit world, 
in the spirit, and returned again to earth. 

"When the Apostle Paul visited in the spirit, what he 
termed the third heavens, or Paradise he saw and heard 
things which he said it was not lawful for him to report. 
This indicates a very exalted condition of spirit life, and no 
doubt a very glorious state of existence. 

That part of the spirit world occupied by the wicked was 
called by the Greeks, Tartarus, and is described in the New 
Testament as a place of torment. The evil desires of the 
soul, nursed and fed while on the earth, when in the spirit 
world, are without the means of gratification, and this alone 
would produce a state of torment. The parching thirst of 
Dives in the flames was, no doubt, a figure of speech used by 
the Lord. But so far as suffering is concerned the reality 
usually exceeds the figure in intensity. 

The wicked remain in this state or condition, for a thou- 
sand years after the righteous have attained to eternal life, 
and ascended to heaven. Then at the close of the millenium 
the general judgment intervenes, and the wicked, whose 
names are not found in the " Book of Life " are cast into 
the lake of fire, which is the second death. Whether this 
is a literal lake of fire and brimstone, or only the figure of 
some other form of destruction, we have no means of know- 



366 MAN. 

ing. Nor is it important what the process of destruction is, 
when the fact is clearly taught. 

It has already been shown that this destruction refers to 
the souls, and not the spirits, of the wicked. This brings 
up the subject of 

ETERNAL PUNISHMENT 

so strenuously insisted on by the orthodox world. 

That the second death pertains to the soul, and not to the 
spirit ; and that it is a complete destruction and not an un- 
ending torment, as taught by the orthodox, is evident from 
the following Scriptures: "The soul that sinneth it shall 
die. ,, Ezekiel, xviii: 20. " That the wicked is reserved to 
the day of destruction." Job, xxi.: 30. " For behold the 
day cometh which shall burn as an oven ; and all the proud, 
yea all that do wicked, shall be stubble ; and the day that 
cometh shall burn them up, saith the lord of hosts, that it 
shall leave them neither root nor branch.' ' Mai. iv: 1. 
' ' Whose fan is in his hand, and he will thoroughly purge his 
floor, and gather his wheat into his garner ; but he will burn 
up the chaff with unquenchable fire." Matt, iii: 12. " As 
therefore the tares are gathered and burned in the fire, so 
shall it be in the end of this world." Matt, xiii : 40. " If a 
man abide not in me he is cast forth as a branch, and is 
withered, and men gather them and cast them into the fire, 
and they are burned." Johnxv:6. In conclusion I cite 
the positive language of Christ as found in Matt, x: 28, as 
follows, viz. : " Fear not them which kill the body, but are 
not able to kill the soul ; but rather fear Him which is able 
to destroy both body and soul in Hell." This language of 
the Lord shows conclusively that the souls, or spiritual 
bodies, of the wicked are to be absolutely destroyed in hell. 

As we are informed in the twentieth chapter of Revelation 
that these souls of the wicked are to be cast into the 



CONCLUSION. 367 

" lake of fire and brimstone, which is the second death," it 
follows that this lake is the real Hell ; and that these souls 
are to be burned up in it, as chaff or tares, or any other 
refuse matter. The spirits of the wicked, of course, with- 
draw from these souls, or spiritual bodies, at the time of 
their destruction, and are left without habitations, to wander 
in outer darkness, as already explained. 

It will be seen from what has already been repeatedly said 
that there are 

TWO RESURRECTIONS. 

The resurrection of the wicked occurs at the time of the 
general judgment, when the dead, small and great, appear 
before the great white throne, and are judged according to 
their works, and their souls cast into the lake of fire as 
already explained. 

* The resurrection of the righteous occurs a thousand years 
earlier and inaugurates the millennium. It is then that the 
souls or spiritual bodies of the righteous become immortal, 
when they come up from the spirit world and meet the Lord 
in the air, and receive from him the gift of eternal life at the 

SECOND COMING- OP CHRIST. 

This is a subject upon which the ideas of the religious world 
are very indistinct and various. But that Jesus Christ is 
coming to the earth in visible personal appearance, is evi- 
dent from the following description, viz.: "And when he 
had spoken these things, while they beheld, he was taken 
up ; and a cloud received him out of their sight. And while 
they looked steadfastly toward heaven, He went up, behold 
two men stood by them in white apparel, which also said, ye 
men of Galilee why stand ye gazing up into heaven. This 
same Jesus which is taken up from you into heaven, shall 
so come in like manner as ye have seen Him go into heaven." 



368 MAN. 

Acts 1:9-11. "For the Lord himself shall descend from 
heaven, with a shout with the voice of the archangel, and 
with the trump of God. The dead in Christ shall rise first ; 
then we which are alive and remain, shall be caught up 
together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the 
air, and so shall ever be with the Lord." I Thes. vi:16, 17. 
These two Scriptures, the first from angels delegated by- 
God, and the last from the Apostle Paul inspired, by God, 
clearly and conclusively show that the return of the Lord 
will be as personal and visible as was His ascension, when he 
left his beloved disciples in the neighborhood of Bethany, 
and ascended up to the right hand of God. 

Having shown the error of the orthodox in affirming that 
the soul goes directly to heaven or hell at physical death ; 
having shown that even the souls of the righteous do not 
attain to eternal life, until the first resurrection, which is the 
second coming of Christ ; and that the souls of the wicked 
remain in the spirit world one thousand years longer, before 
they come up before the judgment and are consigned to the 
lake of fire, which is the second death or hell, the question 
naturally arises, what are the duties, powers, and privileges, 
of both the righteous and the wicked during their long 
sojourn in the spirit world, or in other words 

IS THE INTERMEDIATE STATE PROBATIONARY? 

Do disembodied spirits, who failed to accept Christ within 
the flesh, have a right to accept him at any time before judg- 
ment? This is a question upon which the Scriptures are 
almost silent. It is, however, believed by many that such 
Scriptures as first Peter, third chapter, and eighteenth, 
nineteenth and twentieth verses; Isaiah, forty-second 
chapter and seventh verse ; forty-ninth chapter and ninth 
verse, and sixty-first chapter and first verse, and some 



CONCLUSION, 869 

other texts imply, that Christ after His death, went 
into the spirit world, and preached the gospel to those who 
died before the perfection of the gospel plan in the death, 
burial, and resurrection of Jesus. There is nothing unrea- 
sonable in this opinion. On the contrary it appears both 
reasonable and just that those who had no opportunity to 
accept Christ, while they lived in the flesh should have that 
opportunity, in the spirit world. And if those who died 
before Christ, for the same reason, those who have died since 
His death, to whom the gospel has never been presented. 
This would certainly embrace infants, idiots, lunatics, 
heathen, and all other persons, to whom the gospel was 
not preached while in the flesh, or being presented was 
not understood for want of capacity, or the want of infor- 
mation or cultivation. We see at once that there may be 
thousands of cases, where from defective education, or want 
of parental instruction, or erroneous teaching of preachers; 
and priests, and bad examples of church members — the 
person, although hearing the gospel, never fully apprehended 
it, and therefore was prevented from accepting it. And shall 
not a loving Father permit these unfortunate spirits to 
accept Christ, at any time before His second coming and 
thereby save their souls and attain to eternal life, by having 
the privilege of taking a part in the first resurrection ? I 
shall certainly not answer this question in the negative. 
And while I confess that we have not sufficient data in God's 
revealed Word to reach a definite conclusion, I will leave 
the matter with a merciful God, confidently believing 
that at that day a good life will avail more than an orthodox 
faith, and that thousands from outside God's visible kingdom, 
will attain eternal life, and sit down among the saints. At 
the same time judging both from observation and ex- 
24 



370 MAN. 

periencej as to the effects of sin and the power of habit I 
shall expect few in the spirit life who have heard the gospel 
in this life and failed to accept it, to accept it there even 
though the privilege be accorded. The aged righteous and the 
aged wicked are widely separated even in this life. In the 
spirit world they will much more rapidly diverge from each 
other in their respective courses. The course of the righteous 
will be for ever onward and upward in a happy and progressive 
spiritual life. The course of the wicked we fear will almost 
universally be onward and downward. Therefore it becomes 
the imperative duty of every human being to accept Christ 
at once and become an adopted citizen of God's kingdom, 
by attaching herself or himself, to the visible church of 
Christ on the earth. "Now is the accepted time." The 
great duty of man is to " fear God and keep His command- 
ments." To love God supremely and our neighbor as 
ourself. 



-t 



